Manual de Usuario Nms5lx

NMS5LX
6.4.8
Network Management System 5 LinuX
User manual
MN.00272.E - 001
Volume 1/1
The information contained in this handbook is subject to change without notice.
Property of SIAE MICROELETTRONICA. All rights reserved according to the law and according to the inter-
national regulations. No part of this document may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any
means, electronic or mechanical, without written permission from SIAE MICROELETTRONICA.
Unless otherwise specified, reference to a Company, name, data and address produced on the screen dis-
played is purely indicative aiming at illustrating the use of the product.
MS-DOS®, MS Windows® are trademarks of Microsoft Corporation
HP®, HP OpenView NNM and HP-UX are Hewlett Packard Company registered trademarks.
UNIX is a UNIX System Laboratories registered trademark.
Oracle® is a Oracle Corporation registered trademark.
Linux term is a trademark registered by Linus Torvalds, the original author of the Linux operating system.
Linux is freely distributed according the GNU General Public License (GPL).
Other products cited here in are constructor registered trademarks.
NMS5LX
Contents
GENERAL DESCRIPTION 17
NMS5LX SYSTEM .................................................................................................................... 17

MAIN FUNCTIONALITIES OF THE NMS5LX SYSTEM.................................................................. 18
MODULARITY OF THE NMS5LX SYSTEM ................................................................................. 19
MAPS................................................................................................................................ 21
EQUIPMENT MANAGED BY NMS5LX ....................................................................................... 22
RELEASE OF NMS5LX SYSTEM .............................................................................................. 23
HARDWARE/SOFTWARE REQUIREMENTS ............................................................................... 24
MAXIMUM NUMBER OF EQUIPMENT MANAGED BY NMS5LX ...................................................... 25
MAXIMUM NUMBER OF NMS5UX USERS................................................................................. 26
LX MAP MANAGER WINDOW .................................................................................................. 27

MENU BAR......................................................................................................................... 28
TITLE BAR ......................................................................................................................... 29
TOOL BAR ......................................................................................................................... 30
MAP AREA ......................................................................................................................... 32
Passing from one level to the other one in the Map area .................................................... 33
Objects of the Map area ................................................................................................ 33
To display/hide the Map area ......................................................................................... 33
VIEW AREA........................................................................................................................ 34
Passing from one level to the other in the View area.......................................................... 34
Objects of the View area................................................................................................ 34
Background of the View area.......................................................................................... 34
NEW OBJECT AREA ............................................................................................................. 35
OBJECTS ........................................................................................................................... 36
Graphic representation of the object: symbol ................................................................... 36
Symbol items: icon ....................................................................................................... 37
Symbol items: name ..................................................................................................... 38
Symbol items: check sign .............................................................................................. 38
Symbol items: notes ..................................................................................................... 39
Symbol characteristics: behavior .................................................................................... 39
Symbol characteristics: colour ........................................................................................ 40
Symbol characteristics: right button function.................................................................... 42
STATUS BAR ...................................................................................................................... 44
To request Read-Write access to a map ........................................................................... 44
PLATFORM STATUS BAR ...................................................................................................... 45
NMS5LX 6.4.8 - MN.00272.E - 001 1

To display/hide the platform status bar............................................................................ 46
EQUIPMENT WINDOW............................................................................................................ 47
ALPLUS NODAL WINDOW....................................................................................................... 48
ALCPLUS2 NODAL WINDOW................................................................................................... 49
RING MANAGER WINDOW...................................................................................................... 50
VLAN MANAGER MAP WINDOW.............................................................................................. 51
NMS5UX USERS...................................................................................................................... 52
RELATION BETWEEN LINUX USER AND NMS5UX USER ............................................................ 53
PREDEFINED NMS5UX USER ................................................................................................ 54
CHARACTERISTICS OF A NMS5UX USER ................................................................................ 55
Username.................................................................................................................... 55
Password..................................................................................................................... 55
Map ............................................................................................................................ 56
Profile ......................................................................................................................... 57
Superuser.............................................................................................................. 57
Privileged .............................................................................................................. 57
Advanced .............................................................................................................. 58
Normal .................................................................................................................. 58
Entry .................................................................................................................... 58
Internet ...................................................................................................................... 58
Ring/VLAN ................................................................................................................... 59
EXPIRY OF A NMS5UX USER (ACCOUNT) ............................................................................... 60
FUNCTION OF MANUAL LOGIN TO THE LX MAP MANAGER WINDOW .......................................... 61
FUNCTION OF INACTIVITY CHECK - USER.............................................................................. 62
ACCESS TO THE MAP (READ-WRITE/READ ONLY) .................................................................. 63

UPDATING OF THE LX MAP MANAGER WINDOW IN READ ONLY MODALITY ................................. 64
PASSING FROM READ ONLY MODALITY TO READ-WRITE MODALITY .......................................... 65
FUNCTION OF INACTIVITY CHECK - RW MAP.......................................................................... 66
MODALITY OF ACCESS TO THE EQUIPMENT WINDOW ............................................................. 67
MODALITY OF ACCESS TO THE NODAL WINDOW .................................................................... 68
MODALITY OF ACCESS TO THE RING MANAGER WINDOW........................................................ 69
MODALITY OF ACCESS TO THE VLAN MANAGER MAP WINDOW ................................................. 70
PROCEDURES 71
START-UP/CLOSING OF NMS5LX GRAPHICAL INTERFACE (LOGIN/LOGOUT)......................... 71

START-UP OF THE NMS5LX INTERFACE ................................................................................. 72
FIRST START-UP OF THE NMS5LX INTERFACE ........................................................................ 74
CLOSING OF THE NMS5LX GRAPHICAL INTERFACE ................................................................. 75
AUTOMATIC CLOSING OF THE NMS5LX GRAPHICAL INTERFACE................................................ 76
NMS5LX 6.4.8 - MN.00272.E - 001 2

GRAPHIC NETWORK REPRESENTATION ................................................................................. 77
OBJECTS PRE-DEFINED FOR THE NETWORK REPRESENTATION ................................................ 78
Container objects ......................................................................................................... 78
Network Element objects ............................................................................................... 78
Real NE ................................................................................................................. 78
Virtual NE .............................................................................................................. 78
NE of ALplus Node type ........................................................................................... 79
NE of ALCplus2 Node type........................................................................................ 79
NE of WEB Generic type........................................................................................... 79
Generic Symbol objects ................................................................................................. 79
Link objects ................................................................................................................. 80
Label objects ............................................................................................................... 80
Ring objects................................................................................................................. 80
VLAN Map objects......................................................................................................... 80
RULES FOR THE CREATION OF THE OBJECTS ......................................................................... 81
OBJECTS CREATION - EDIT MENU ........................................................................................ 84
Examples of network graphical representation .................................................................. 84
Graphical representation of the network into a map..................................................... 85
Graphic representation of the network in more map .................................................... 87
OBJECTS CREATION - ADD NETWORK FROM FILE FUNCTIONALITY............................................ 90
To create the file in csv format ....................................................................................... 90
Structure of the csv file ........................................................................................... 90
Rules of the compilation of the csv file ....................................................................... 92
To compile the csv file starting from a model .............................................................. 93
Example of use of Add Network From File functionality ...................................................... 94
OBJECT CREATION - AUTO DISCOVERY FUNCTIONALITY ......................................................... 97
Network Scan modality.................................................................................................. 97
NE Wake Up modality.................................................................................................... 99
EQUIPMENT CONNECTION ................................................................................................... 101

CONNECTION PROCEDURE .................................................................................................102
COMMANDS FOR THE MANAGEMENT OF THE CONNECTION .....................................................103
Line Test command......................................................................................................103
Connect command .......................................................................................................103
Disconnect command ...................................................................................................103
Alarm Re-alignment command ......................................................................................104
Configuration Upload command .....................................................................................104
CONNECTION STATUSES OF THE EQUIPMENT .......................................................................105
Disconnected status .....................................................................................................105
Connected status.........................................................................................................106
Unreachable status ......................................................................................................106
Maintenance status ......................................................................................................107
LOM/LCT ..........................................................................................................................108
Types of LOM/LCT-equipment connection: Monitoring, Configuration ..................................108
Indication of the presence of the LCT user to the NMS5UX user .........................................109
To enable/disable of the LCT-equipment connection in Configuration modality .....................109
ALARM MANAGEMENT .......................................................................................................... 110

ACQUISITION OF THE ALARMS............................................................................................111
DYNAMIC DISPLAYING OF THE ALARMS................................................................................112
DISPLAYING OF THE CURRENT ALARMS AND OF THE ALARM HISTORY .....................................113
ALARM CORRELATION ........................................................................................................114
SAVING OF THE ALARMS ....................................................................................................115
NMS5LX 6.4.8 - MN.00272.E - 001 3

ALARM SEVERITY ..............................................................................................................116
ENABLING/DISABLING OF THE ALARMS ...............................................................................118
FLEETING ALARMS ............................................................................................................119
MARKING OF THE ALARMS (ACKNOWLEDGE) ........................................................................120
MANAGEMENT OF NE LOG ..................................................................................................121
PERFORMANCE MONITORING MANAGEMENT ....................................................................... 122

ACTIVATION/DEACTIVATION OF THE PM MEASURES ..............................................................123
ACQUISITION OF THE RESULTS OF THE PM MEASURES ..........................................................124
DISPLAYING OF THE RESULTS OF THE PM MEASURES ............................................................125
SAVING OF THE RESULTS OF THE PM MEASURES TO DISK .....................................................126
MENU AND COMMANDS 127
MAP ..................................................................................................................................... 128

REFRESH..........................................................................................................................129
To update the LX Map Manager window ..........................................................................129
MAP PROPERTIES ..............................................................................................................130
To modify the size of the symbols ..................................................................................130
SUBMAP PROPERTIES ........................................................................................................131
To associate/remove the background to a container .........................................................131
IMPORT/EXPORT ...............................................................................................................132
To copy the objects of a map/container to a different map/container ..................................132
To copy the objects, previously saved to file, into a map/container.....................................134
To save the objects of a map/container to a file ...............................................................134
To compare the objects of a map/container with the objects of a different map/container......135
To compare the objects, previously saved to file, with the objects of a map/container...........136
CHANGE MAP ....................................................................................................................137
To close the open map and opening another one..............................................................137
To delete a map ..........................................................................................................138
EXIT ................................................................................................................................139
To close the LX Map Manager window.............................................................................139
EDIT .................................................................................................................................... 140

ADD ................................................................................................................................141
To create Container objects ..........................................................................................141
To create Network Element object..................................................................................142
To create virtual Network Element object ........................................................................142
To create Generic Symbols (graphic symbols)..................................................................143
To create Link objects (connection) ................................................................................143
To create Label objects (wordings).................................................................................144
To create Container, NE, Link and Label objects described in a file .....................................144
DELETE ............................................................................................................................145
To delete an object from the map ..................................................................................145
MODIFY/VIEW...................................................................................................................146
To verify/modify the parameters of a Container object......................................................146
To verify/modify the parameters of a Network Element object ...........................................146
To verify/modify the parameters of a Generic Symbol object .............................................147
NMS5LX 6.4.8 - MN.00272.E - 001 4

To verify/modify the parameters of a Link object .............................................................147
To verify/modify the parameters of a Label object............................................................148
INFORMATION ..................................................................................................................149
To verify the information (marking status of the alarms, of the signalling of LCT presence,
Incorrect Upload and the notes) of a symbol ...................................................................149
To add/modify/delete the informative notes of a NE symbol ..............................................150
GRAPHICAL SYMBOL PROPERTIES .......................................................................................151
To verify the graphic parameters assigned by the system to the symbol..............................151
FIND................................................................................................................................152
To search a symbol in the map ......................................................................................152
ARRANGE SYMBOLS...........................................................................................................153
To align the symbols ....................................................................................................153
GENERATE INFO FOR WEB..................................................................................................154
To check the database information necessary to the RAN ..................................................154
SET CURRENT WINDOW GEOMETRY FOR ALL CONTAINERS.....................................................155
To set the size of the containers windows .......................................................................155
VIEW ................................................................................................................................... 156

SHOW/HIDE MAP TREE ......................................................................................................157
To display/hide the Map area ........................................................................................157
SHOW/HIDE PLATFORM STATUS..........................................................................................158
To display/hide the platform status bar...........................................................................158
SHOW/HIDE LINK LABEL ....................................................................................................159
To show/hide the names of the Link objects ....................................................................159
PAN AND ZOOM ................................................................................................................160
PERFORMANCE..................................................................................................................... 161
PERFORMANCE MONITORING READ .....................................................................................162
To update the results of the PM measures of an equipment ...............................................162
PERFORMANCE MONITORING ..............................................................................................163
To verify the results of the PM measures of an equipment, subdivided in daily records
(24 hours) and, for each record, verifying the values of the control parameters ...................163
To verify the results of the PM measures of an equipment, subdivided in primary records
(15 minutes) and, for each record, verifying the values of the control parameters ................166
OLD PERFORMANCE MONITORING .......................................................................................167
To verify the results of the PM measures of an equipment, subdivided in daily records
(24 hours) present in the Old Performance Monitoring table ..............................................167
To verify the results of the PM measures of an equipment, subdivided in primary records
(15 minutes) present in the Old Performance Monitoring table ...........................................168
VIEW/MODIFY P.M. STATUS................................................................................................169
To verify the operating status of the PM measure points of one or more NEs of the same
type...........................................................................................................................169
To activate at the same time one or more PM measures for one or more equipment of the
same type ..................................................................................................................171
To deactivate at the same time one or more PM measures for one or more equipment of the
same type ..................................................................................................................171
To activate/deactivate a PM measure point for a specific equipment ...................................172
To verify/modify the activation thresholds of the alarms relevant to PM for a specific
equipment ..................................................................................................................173
CONFIGURATION ................................................................................................................. 174

EQUIPMENT INFO ..............................................................................................................175
To verify the characteristics and the functional status of an equipment ...............................175
SOFTWARE INVENTORY......................................................................................................177
NMS5LX 6.4.8 - MN.00272.E - 001 5

To verify the software version of the equipment present into the open map .........................177
To verify the units list (where a controller or a FPGA is present) of the equipment present into
the open map .............................................................................................................179
To save/print the list of the equipment/units ...................................................................179
To open the equipment window .....................................................................................179
To verify the configuration/functional status of an equipment ............................................180
To update the equipment software .................................................................................180
To switch the operation of the memory benches of an equipment controller.........................180
To require the updating of the data to the controller of an equipment .................................181
To filter/order the list of the equipment/units ..................................................................181
OAM STATUS ....................................................................................................................183
To verify the characteristics of OAM-FM Domain of one or more equipment....................183
To define an OAM-FM Domain for one or more equipment ...........................................185
To remove the OAM-FM Domain for one or more equipment ........................................185
OAM-FM Ethernet functionality implemented in equipment managed by NMS5LX ..................186
OAM-FM Domain....................................................................................................186
MA.......................................................................................................................187
MEP .....................................................................................................................187
MIP......................................................................................................................188
Remote MEPs ........................................................................................................189
CCM.....................................................................................................................190
LBM .....................................................................................................................191
LTM .....................................................................................................................192
Example of configuration of a OAM-FM maintenance Domain for a set of ALCplus2
equipment ............................................................................................................192
E1 BROWSER ....................................................................................................................195
To verify the status of 2Mbit/s tributaries........................................................................195
To verify/modify the label of a tributary..........................................................................197
To activate/deactivate the use of 2Mbit/s tributaries.........................................................197
To activate/deactivate the loops of 2Mbit/s tributaries ......................................................198
EQUIPMENT PORT CONFIGURATION.....................................................................................199
To verify the settings of the communication ports of the equipment present into the open
map...........................................................................................................................199
To display the settings of the PPP communication ports of the selected equipment ...............201
To display the Routing Table and the Default Gateway of an equipment ..............................201
To verify/modify the IP access control list (ACL) ..............................................................201
To add a rule to the IP access control list ..................................................................202
To remove a rule from the IP access control list .........................................................203
To enable/disable the use of the IP access control list .................................................203
IP access control list (more information) ...................................................................203
To enable/disable the management LAN ports .................................................................204
To executes the Ping of an equipment ............................................................................205
To open a Telnet session towards equipment...................................................................205
To display the equipment with Logical Address and Station Id different ...............................205
To modify the Logical Address of an equipment to its Station Id or vice versa ......................206
To filter/order the list of the equipment ..........................................................................206
NE PPP INTERFACES ..........................................................................................................208
To display the settings of the PPP communication ports of an equipment .............................208
NE ROUTING TABLE ...........................................................................................................210
To display the Routing Table and the Default Gateway of an equipment ..............................210
To add an element to the Routing Table..........................................................................211
To delete an element from the Routing Table ..................................................................212
To set or modify the IP address used as Default Gateway..................................................212
To delete the IP address used as Default Gateway ...........................................................212
Routing Table and Default Gateway (more info) ...............................................................212
HW INVENTORY ................................................................................................................214
NMS5LX 6.4.8 - MN.00272.E - 001 6

To display the hardware of the equipment present in the open map....................................214
To save the data to file.................................................................................................216
To save periodically the data to file ................................................................................217
To deactivate the periodic saving of the data to file ..........................................................217
NE BACKUP/RESTORE ........................................................................................................218
To display the backup files of the equipment present in the open map ................................218
To transfer the configuration present into a backup file to an equipment (configuration
restore)......................................................................................................................221
To save the equipment configuration to a file (configuration backup) ..................................221
To lock/unlock a backup file ..........................................................................................221
NE Backup/Restore functionality (more info) ...................................................................222
LOCATE ................................................................................................................................ 224

EQUIPMENT LIST LOCATE ...................................................................................................225
To display the list of the equipment................................................................................225
To save/print the list of equipment.................................................................................228
To filter/sort the list of the equipment ............................................................................228
To open the equipment window .....................................................................................229
To verify the configuration/operating status of an equipment.............................................230
To verify the marking status of the alarms, of the signalling of LCT presence and Incorrect
Upload of an equipment ...............................................................................................230
To verify in which map the symbol of an equipment is present...........................................230
To add/remove a prefix to the logical address of an equipment ..........................................231
To delete and rewrite the equipment table ......................................................................231
To verify the results of the PM measures of an equipment .................................................231
To activate/deactivate one or more PM measures at the same time ....................................232
To update the equipment software (FAMxc).....................................................................234
To verify/modify the status/severity of the alarms and the status of the trap sending of an
equipment ..................................................................................................................235
To verify/modify the LCT users list of an equipment .........................................................236
To verify the LCT/NMS5UX users connected to an equipment.............................................236
To verify the reach ability of the equipment (Line Test).....................................................236
To connect one or more equipment ................................................................................237
To disconnect one or more equipment ............................................................................237
To re-align the alarms of one or more equipment.............................................................238
To acquire the configuration of one or more equipment.....................................................238
To transfer the configuration of an equipment to another equipment of the same type ..........239
To start the Command Executor application ....................................................................239
PROXY EQUIPMENT LIST ....................................................................................................240
To display the list of the equipment managed by the Proxy Agent ......................................240
To verify/modify the Proxy configuration parameters of an equipment ................................241
COMMAND............................................................................................................................ 242
LINE TEST ........................................................................................................................243
To execute the Line Test for one or more equipment ........................................................243
To execute the Line Test for the equipment of one or more containers ................................243
CONNECT .........................................................................................................................245
To connect one or more equipment ................................................................................245
To connect the equipment of one or more containers........................................................245
DISCONNECT....................................................................................................................247
To disconnect one or more equipment ............................................................................247
To disconnect the equipment of one or more containers....................................................247
FORCE NE DISCONNECT.....................................................................................................249
To force the software disconnection of one or more equipment ..........................................249
NMS5LX 6.4.8 - MN.00272.E - 001 7

PING ...............................................................................................................................250
To executes the Ping of an equipment ............................................................................250
ALARM RE-ALIGNMENT.......................................................................................................251
To re-align the alarms of one or more equipment.............................................................251
To re-align the alarms of the equipment of one or more containers ....................................251
CONFIGURATION UPLOAD ..................................................................................................253
To acquire the configuration of one or more equipment.....................................................253
To acquire the configuration of the equipment of one or more containers ............................253
CONFIGURATION DOWNLOAD .............................................................................................255
To transfer the configuration of an equipment (virtual or real) to one or more real equipment255
To transfer the configuration of an equipment (virtual or real) to one or more virtual
equipment ..................................................................................................................256
RESET EQUIPMENT CONTROLLER ........................................................................................258
To execute the software reset of an equipment................................................................258
PMP CLEAR ALARM TABLE...................................................................................................259
To transfer to the PMP the default table of the alarms.......................................................259
FAULT .................................................................................................................................. 260

NETWORK ALARM HISTORY ................................................................................................261
To display the alarm history of the equipment present in the map ......................................261
To save/print the alarms list..........................................................................................263
To copy the alarms list to a text editor ...........................................................................264
To delete the alarms ....................................................................................................264
To mark the alarms .....................................................................................................264
To display the acknowledge information of an alarm.........................................................265
To activate/deactivate the automatic updating of the data.................................................266
To filter the alarms list .................................................................................................266
To highlight in the map the symbol of an equipment.........................................................267
To verify the time interval between two different alarms ...................................................268
To sort the alarms list ..................................................................................................268
Modality of updating of the data ....................................................................................269
Modality of recording of the alarms ................................................................................269
NETWORK CURRENT ALARMS..............................................................................................270
To display alarms active in the equipment of the map.......................................................270
To mark the alarms .....................................................................................................272
To activate/deactivate the automatic updating of the data.................................................272
Modality of updating of the data ....................................................................................275
OLD ALARM HISTORY.........................................................................................................276
To display the alarm history present in the Old History table .............................................276
To copy the alarms list into a text editor .........................................................................278
To sort the alarms list ..................................................................................................281
To display the acknowledge information of an alarm.........................................................281
NE ALARM HISTORY...........................................................................................................282
NE CURRENT ALARMS ........................................................................................................283
NMS5LX 6.4.8 - MN.00272.E - 001 8

NE HISTORY LOG ..............................................................................................................284
To display the list of the NE Log of an equipment .............................................................284
To create a NE Log ......................................................................................................285
To create more NE Logs at the same time .......................................................................285
To display the content of a NE Log .................................................................................286
To delete a NE Log.......................................................................................................286
To delete all the NE Logs of an equipment.......................................................................286
To delete the alarms stored in the controller of an equipment ............................................287
NE COMMAND LOG ............................................................................................................288
To display the list of the Command Log of an equipment...................................................288
To create a Command Log ............................................................................................289
To create more Command Logs at the same time.............................................................290
To display the content of a Command Log.......................................................................290
To delete a Command Log ............................................................................................291
To delete all the Command Logs of an equipment ............................................................291
To delete the list of the operations stored in the controller of an equipment.........................291
NE Command Log (more info) .......................................................................................291
ALARM SUMMARY ..............................................................................................................292
To display the summary of the alarm history subdivided for the severity relevant to the
equipment present in the map.......................................................................................292
To display the alarms stored in the alarm history .............................................................295
To reset the indication of status change..........................................................................296
To set the automatic updating of the data .......................................................................296
EVENT STATISTICS............................................................................................................297
To display the statistics of the alarms subdivided by time interval ......................................297
To display the statistics of the alarms subdivided by equipment .........................................298
To display the statistics of the alarms subdivided by alarm ................................................299
To delete the alarms ....................................................................................................299
To filter the alarms ......................................................................................................300
TRANSACTION LOG ...........................................................................................................302
To display the list of the operations executed by the NMS5UX users ...................................302
To save/print the list of operations.................................................................................303
To delete the operations ...............................................................................................304
To filter the list of operations ........................................................................................304
Recording modality of the operations .............................................................................305
TOOLS.................................................................................................................................. 308
ALARM NOTIFICATION VIA E-MAIL.......................................................................................309
Alarm Notification via e-mail - Superuser ........................................................................309
To display the list of all the operators enabled to the reception of the alarm notification
via e-mail .............................................................................................................309
To add an operator ................................................................................................310
To modify the characteristics of the operators............................................................311
To delete an operator .............................................................................................312
To activate/deactivate an operator ...........................................................................312
To acknowledge an operator and re-enable him to receive e-mail .................................312
To create a filter relevant to the type of alarms whose detection must be notified to the
operator via e-mail ................................................................................................312
Alarm Notification via e-mail - Entry, Normal, Advanced, Privileged ....................................313
To acknowledge an operator and re-enable him to receive e-mail .................................314
Alarm Notification via e-mail functionality .......................................................................314
COMMAND EXECUTOR........................................................................................................315
To execute series of SNMP commands stored on file .........................................................315
To display the content of a file of SNMP commands ..........................................................316
To display the files of scheduled SNMP commands............................................................317
NMS5LX 6.4.8 - MN.00272.E - 001 9

NE MONITORING ...............................................................................................................318
To display the list of the measures .................................................................................318
To assign the parameters to monitor to an equipment (create a measure)...........................319
To display the characteristics of a measure .....................................................................320
To delete a measure ....................................................................................................320
To activate a measure ..................................................................................................320
To deactivate a measure ..............................................................................................320
To display the results of a measure ................................................................................321
To save the results of a measure ...................................................................................321
To display the results of a measure stored into a file ........................................................322
To save the results of a measure stored into a file............................................................322
To delete a file ............................................................................................................323
NE Monitoring functionality ...........................................................................................324
AUTO DISCOVERY .............................................................................................................326
To verify the status and the configuration of Auto Discovery (Network Scan and/or NE Wake
Up modality)..............................................................................................................326
To set the execution parameters and activate the Network Scan modality ...........................328
To deactivate the Network Scan modality........................................................................330
To set the execution parameters and activate the NE Wake Up modality .............................330
To deactivate the NE Wake Up modality..........................................................................331
To save a given Auto Discovery configuration to file .........................................................331
To retrieve a given Auto Discovery configuration from file .................................................331
To display the list of the equipment detected by Auto Discovery (Auto Discovery table).........331
To search an equipment in the Auto Discovery table.........................................................333
To delete one or more equipment from the Auto Discovery table ........................................333
To create manually the object of an equipment present in the Auto Discovery table ..............334
RMON ..............................................................................................................................335
To verify the statistics of an Ethernet port of an equipment (RMON statistics) ......................335
To activate an Ethernet port for the count of the RMON statistics .......................................337
To deactivate an Ethernet port from the count of the RMON statistics .................................338
To capture the RMON statistics of an Ethernet port in a specific instant ...............................338
To save the RMON statistics of an Ethernet port captured in a specific instant to file .............339
To display the history of the RMON statistics of an Ethernet port ........................................340
To activate an Ethernet port for the count of the history of the RMON statistics ....................343
To deactivate an Ethernet port from the count of the history of the RMON statistics..............343
To save the history of the RMON statistics of an Ethernet port ...........................................344
To verify the enabling and the criteria for the activation/deactivation of alarms relevant to a
counter (RMON statistics) .............................................................................................344
To enable and define the criteria for the activation/deactivation of an alarm relevant to a
counter (RMON statistics) .............................................................................................344
To disable an alarm relevant to a counter (RMON statistics) ..............................................345
Implementation of the RMON standard in the equipment managed by NMS5LX ....................346
Ethernet counters (RMON) ............................................................................................349
XML EXPORT.....................................................................................................................351
To save the complete equipment configuration into a XML file............................................351
To display the active cronjobs (XML Export) ....................................................................353
To create a cronjob (XML Export)...................................................................................354
To delete one or more cronjobs (XML Export) ..................................................................354
To display the list of the XML files present in a given directory ...........................................355
To display the list of the Log files relevant to the creation of XML files ................................356
To display the list of HTML files obtained from the conversion of XML files ...........................356
To convert a XML file into a HTML file .............................................................................356
To display the content of a XML, Log or HTML file.............................................................357
To delete one or more XML, Log or HTML files .................................................................359
To send email with one or more XML, Log or HTML in attachment ......................................359
Function XML Export (more information).........................................................................360
NMS5LX 6.4.8 - MN.00272.E - 001 10

OPTIONS.............................................................................................................................. 363
NETWORK SEVERITY CODE.................................................................................................364
To verify the network severity of the alarms relevant to a specific equipment type ...............364
To modify the network severity of the alarms relevant to a specific equipment type..............365
EQUIPMENT SEVERITY CODE ..............................................................................................366
To verify the alarms characteristics (status, sending status of the trap, local severity) of an
equipment ..................................................................................................................366
To enable/disable the alarms and to send of the traps and/or to modify the local severity of
the alarms of an equipment ..........................................................................................367
NMS5LX SYSTEM USERS ....................................................................................................369
NMS5LX System Users - Superuser ................................................................................369
To display the list of the NMS5UX users present in all the existing maps........................369
To create a new map..............................................................................................370
To add a NMS5UX user ...........................................................................................370
To modify the characteristics of the NMS5UX users.....................................................371
To delete a NMS5UX user........................................................................................371
To add a NMS5UX user (manual login to the LX Map Manager window - active) ..............372
NMS5LX System Users - Entry, Normal, Advanced, Privileged user .....................................373
To display the characteristics of the user who opened the map ....................................373
To modify the password associated to one's NMS5UX user ..........................................374
NMS5LX LOGGED USERS ....................................................................................................375
To display the list of the NMS5UX users who have a map open ..........................................375
To require the disconnection (logout) of a NMS5UX user ...................................................376
To force the disconnection (logout) of a NMS5UX user ......................................................377
To send a message to one or all the NMS5UX users..........................................................377
To filter the NMS5UX users list ......................................................................................377
To display the list of the active NMS5LX applications ........................................................378
To require the closure of an NMS5LX application ..............................................................379
To force the closure of an NMS5LX application .................................................................379
To filter the NMS5LX applications list ..............................................................................380
LCT EQUIPMENT USERS .....................................................................................................381
To display the LCT users list of an equipment ..................................................................381
To add a new LCT user .................................................................................................382
To modify the characteristics of the LCT users .................................................................383
To delete a LCT user ....................................................................................................383
User list (more info).....................................................................................................383
LCT LOGGED USERS ..........................................................................................................384
To display the list of the users (LCT and NMS5UX) connected to an equipment.....................384
To force the disconnection (logout) of a LCT user .............................................................385
LCT and NMS5UX users (more info) ...............................................................................385
REMOTE ELEMENT TABLE ...................................................................................................386
To display the remote equipment list of an equipment ......................................................386
To add a station to the remote equipment list..................................................................387
To rename a station of the remote equipment list ............................................................388
To delete a station from the remote equipment list ..........................................................388
To add an equipment to the remote equipment list...........................................................388
To add more equipment at the same time to the remote equipment list ..............................389
To modify the characteristics of an equipment of the remote equipment list.........................390
To delete an equipment from the remote equipment list ...................................................391
To move an equipment within the remote equipment list ..................................................391
To save to a file the remote equipment list......................................................................392
To restore from file the remote equipment list .................................................................392
Remote equipment list (more info).................................................................................392
Example of definition of a remote ALplus node in the remote equipment list ........................393
Example of definition of a remote ALCplus2 node in the remote equipment list.....................394
NMS5LX 6.4.8 - MN.00272.E - 001 11

NE SW/FW DOWNLOAD ......................................................................................................395
To update the WEB LCT application ................................................................................397
Equipment software (more info) ....................................................................................398
WEB LCT application (more info)....................................................................................398
SCHEDULED SW DWL STATUS ............................................................................................399
To display the list of the equipment scheduled for the software updating.............................399
To delete one or more NEs from the list ..........................................................................401
To stop the updating of the software ..............................................................................401
To save the list of the scheduled equipment ....................................................................401
To re-execute the software update.................................................................................402
To switch the memory bench.........................................................................................402
To filter/sort the list of the scheduled equipment .............................................................403
NE SW/FW RELEASE ..........................................................................................................405
To display the software version of an equipment ..............................................................405
To update the software of an equipment .........................................................................406
To switch the operation of the memory benches of an equipment controller.........................407
To delete the software present in the memory bench in standby of an equipment.................407
FAMXC-NE SW/FW DOWNLOAD ...........................................................................................408
To update the equipment software (FAMxc).....................................................................408
Equipment software (FAMxc) (more info) ........................................................................409
FAMXC-SCHEDULED SW DWL STATUS..................................................................................410
To display the list of the FAMxc scheduled for the software updating...................................410
To delete one or more equipment from the list (FAMxc) ....................................................411
FAMXC-NE SW/FW RELEASE ...............................................................................................412
To display the software version of a FAMxc equipment......................................................412
To switch the operation of the memory benches and to restart a FAMxc ..............................413
MISC .................................................................................................................................... 414

ALARM HISTORY BACKUP ...................................................................................................415
To backup the alarm history..........................................................................................415
ALARM HISTORY RESTORE .................................................................................................416
To restore the alarm history from disk ............................................................................416
To restore the alarm history from tape ...........................................................................416
ALARM HISTORY DELETE BACKUP........................................................................................417
To delete the backup files of the alarm history.................................................................417
PERFORMANCE MONITORING BACKUP..................................................................................418
To save the PM measures (backup) ................................................................................418
PERFORMANCE MONITORING RESTORE ................................................................................419
To restore the PM measures from disk ............................................................................419
To restore the PM measures from tape ...........................................................................419
PERFORMANCE MONITORING DELETE ..................................................................................420
To delete the backup files of the PM measures.................................................................420
NMS5LX GLOBAL DATABASE BACKUP ...................................................................................421
To save the database (backup)......................................................................................421
NMS5LX GLOBAL DATABASE RESTORE .................................................................................422
To restore the database................................................................................................422
RING MANAGER ................................................................................................................... 423

EDIT > RM-ADD RING........................................................................................................424
To create Ring objects..................................................................................................424
EDIT > RM-DELETE RING ...................................................................................................425
To delete a Ring object from the map .............................................................................425
NMS5LX 6.4.8 - MN.00272.E - 001 12

EDIT > RM-MODIFY/VIEW RING ..........................................................................................426
To verify/modify the parameters of a Ring object .............................................................426
FAULT > RM-NETWORK ALARM HISTORY ..............................................................................427
To display the alarm history of the equipment present in the Rings managed by the
supervision system ......................................................................................................427
To save the alarms list (RM-Network Alarm History) .........................................................429
To delete the alarms (RM-Network Alarm History) ............................................................429
To mark the alarms (RM-Network Alarm History) .............................................................430
To realign the alarm table of Ring Manager to that of NMS5LX (RM-Network Alarm History)...430
To activate/deactivate the automatic updating of the data (RM-Network Alarm History) ........431
To filter the alarms list (RM-Network Alarm History) .........................................................431
To sort the alarms list (RM-Network Alarm History) ..........................................................433
To display the acknowledge information of an alarm (RM-Network Alarm History) ................433
Modality of the updating of data (RM-Network Alarm History) ............................................434
Modality of recording of the alarms (RM-Network Alarm History) ........................................434
FAULT > RM-NETWORK CURRENT ALARM .............................................................................435
To display the alarms active in the equipment present in the Rings managed by the
To save the alarms list (RM-Network Current Alarm) ........................................................436
To mark the alarms (RM-Network Current Alarm) ............................................................437
To realign the alarm table of Ring Manager to that of NMS5LX (RM-Network Current Alarm) ..437
To activate/deactivate the automatic updating of the data (RM-Network Current Alarm)........437
To filter the alarms list (RM-Network Current Alarm) ........................................................437
To sort the alarms list (RM-Network Current Alarm) .........................................................439
To display the acknowledge information of an alarm (RM-Network Current Alarm) ................440
Modality of the updating of data (RM-Network Current Alarm) ...........................................440
FAULT > RM-NETWORK ALARM SUMMARY ............................................................................441
To display the summary of the alarm history subdivided for the severity relevant to the
equipment present in the Rings .....................................................................................441
To filter the alarm list (RM-Network Alarm Summary).......................................................442
To open the file, where a previously saved specific setting of filters is contained
(RM-Network Alarm Summary)......................................................................................444
To save the set filters to a file (RM-Network Alarm Summary) ...........................................444
To delete the file where a previously saved specific setting of filters is contained
(RM-Network Alarm Summary)......................................................................................445
To display the alarms stored in the alarm history (RM-Network Alarm Summary) .................445
To reset the indication of status change (RM-Network Alarm Summary) ..............................445
To modify the title of the RM - Alarm Summary window (RM-Network Alarm Summary) ........445
FAULT > RM-ELEMENT ALARM HISTORY ...............................................................................446
FAULT > RM-ELEMENT CURRENT ALARM...............................................................................447
FAULT > RM-ELEMENT ALARM SUMMARY ..............................................................................448
LOCATE > RM-RING BROWSER ...........................................................................................449
To display the list of the Rings managed by the NMS5LX ...................................................449
To open the Ring Manager window .................................................................................450
To search and highlight in the map the symbol of a Ring...................................................450
LOCATE > RM-PATH BROWSER ...........................................................................................451
To display the list of the Path present in the Rings of the current map ................................451
To save the list of the Path ...........................................................................................453
To delete one or more Paths .........................................................................................454
To delete the protection of a Path ..................................................................................454
To add the protection to a Path .....................................................................................455
To activate the management of a Path ...........................................................................455
To deactivate the management of a Path ........................................................................455
To switch the names of the Paths associated in a protection ..............................................455
To display the active alarms in the equipment implementing a Path....................................456
To display the alarm history relevant to the equipment implementing a Path .......................456
NMS5LX 6.4.8 - MN.00272.E - 001 13

To display/modify/save the information relevant to a Path ................................................456
To display/modify the configuration of a Path ..................................................................458
To display/modify the configuration of a Path protected ....................................................460
To search and highlight a Path in the Ring Manager window in which it is contained..............462
To search and highlight in the map window, the Ring symbol in which it is present a Path .....462
To filter/sort the list of the Path.....................................................................................462
LOCATE > RM-EQUIPMENT BROWSER ..................................................................................464
To display the list of the equipment present in the Rings of the current map ........................464
To filter the equipment list (RM-Equipment Browser) ........................................................465
To search and highlight the equipment symbol in the relevant Ring Manager window ............466
VLAN MANAGER ................................................................................................................... 467

EDIT > VM-ADD VLAN MAP .................................................................................................468
To create VLAN Map objects ..........................................................................................468
EDIT > VM-DELETE VLAN MAP ............................................................................................469
To delete a VLAN Map object from the map .....................................................................469
EDIT > VM-MODIFY/VIEW VLAN MAP ...................................................................................470
To verify/modify the parameters of a VLAN Map object .....................................................470
FAULT > VM-NETWORK ALARM HISTORY ..............................................................................471
To display the alarm history of the equipment present in the VLAN Maps managed by the
To save the alarms list (VM-Network Alarm History) .........................................................473
To delete the alarms (VM-Network Alarm History) ............................................................473
To mark the alarms (VM-Network Alarm History) .............................................................474
To realign the alarm table of VLAN Manager to that of NMS5LX (VM-Network Alarm History)..474
To activate/deactivate the automatic updating of the data (VM-Network Alarm History) ........474
To filter the alarms list (VM-Network Alarm History) .........................................................475
To sort the alarms list (VM-Network Alarm History) ..........................................................476
To display the acknowledge information of an alarm (VM-Network Alarm History).................477
Modality of the updating of data (VM-Network Alarm History) ............................................477
Modality of recording of the alarms (VM-Network Alarm History) ........................................478
FAULT > VM-NETWORK CURRENT ALARM .............................................................................479
To display the alarms active in the equipment present in the VLAN Maps managed by the
To save the alarms list (VM-Network Current Alarm) ........................................................480
To mark the alarms (VM-Network Current Alarm) ............................................................481
To realign the alarm table of VLAN Manager to that of NMS5LX (VM-Network Current Alarm) .481
To activate/deactivate the automatic updating of the data (VM-Network Current Alarm)........481
To filter the alarms list (VM-Network Current Alarm) ........................................................482
To sort the alarms list (VM-Network Current Alarm) .........................................................483
To display the acknowledge information of an alarm (VM-Network Current Alarm) ................483
Modality of the updating of data (VM-Network Current Alarm) ...........................................484
FAULT > VM-ELEMENT ALARM HISTORY ...............................................................................485
FAULT > VM-ELEMENT CURRENT ALARM...............................................................................486
LOCATE > VM-VLAN MAP BROWSER.....................................................................................487
To display the list of the VLAN Maps managed by the NMS5LX ...........................................487
To open the VLAN Manager Map window .........................................................................488
To search and highlight in the map the symbol of a VLAN Map ...........................................488
To filter the list of the VLAN Map....................................................................................488
LOCATE > VM-EQUIPMENT BROWSER ..................................................................................489
To display the list of the equipment present in the VLAN Maps of the current map ................489
To filter the equipment list (VM-Equipment Browser) ........................................................490
To search and highlight the equipment symbol in the relevant VLAN Manager Map window ....491
NMS5LX 6.4.8 - MN.00272.E - 001 14

HELP .................................................................................................................................... 492
ABOUT NMS5LX ................................................................................................................493
LICENSE INFORMATION .....................................................................................................494
To display the detail of the codewords relevant to its own supervisory system .....................494
DISPLAY LEGEND ..............................................................................................................495
To display the legend of the colours which the objects can assume.....................................495
NMS5LX SOFTWARE MODULE..............................................................................................496
To verify the list of the programs that constitute the NMS5LX software package...................496
To print the list of programs..........................................................................................497
SYSTEM ADMINISTRATOR ..................................................................................................498
OVERVIEW .......................................................................................................................499
… MANAGER .....................................................................................................................500
APPENDICES 501
MENUS AND COMMANDS ...................................................................................................... 501
OPERATIONS INDEX ............................................................................................................ 507
ASSISTANCE SERVICE.......................................................................................................... 516
NMS5LX 6.4.8 - MN.00272.E - 001 15

NMS5LX 6.4.8 - MN.00272.E - 001 16
GENERAL DESCRIPTION
NMS5LX SYSTEM
The NMS5LX system (Network Management System 5 LinuX) has been developed to monitor and manage
telecommunications equipment.
The user can communicate to the supervision system by means of a graphic window, called LX Map Man-
ager which represents the NMS5LX graphical interface at general level (see Fig.1).
The NMS5LX system has been developed to be used together with the Linux operating system and
makes use of all the functionalities of this system.
NMS5LX 6.4.8 - MN.00272.E - 001 17

MAIN FUNCTIONALITIES OF THE NMS5LX SYSTEM
• Monitoring of the equipment connected to the system; dynamic displaying of the detection of an
alarm and recording into the alarm history (resident on the machine disk).
The displaying stored into the alarm history are related among them: the date/time of detection
and clearing of the alarm are indicated in the same record. The alarm history can be saved and re-
covered later.
Management of the alarm Log stored in the controller of the equipment: storing of the Log on the
machine, deletion of the Log from the controller.
Management and change of the severity level coupled to each equipment alarm.
Notification via e-mail of the alarm detection.
• Graphic or table representation of the network.

The representation of the network is executed by the user by means of a series of predefined ob-
jects. It is possible to add, delete, move or change the configuration parameters of the objects an-
ytime.
The network can be represented in a single map, or subdivided in more maps. The objects of a map
can be saved to file and, then, imported in a different map.
The creation of the objects can be executed by the user by means of one of the following ways:
• Creation of each single object by means of a specific command (see Edit > Add menu).
• Creation of the objects by means of the Add Network From File functionality: automatic cre-
ation of the objects described in a file in csv format.
• Creation of the NE objects by means of the Auto Discovery functionality: detection of the
equipment present in the network and not managed yet by the supervision system; auto-
matic creation and connection of the discovered NE objects.
• Management of the measures of Performance Monitoring (PM) of all the equipment connected to
the system:
• Activation/deactivation of the measures also contemporary for more equipment of the same
type.
• Check of the result of the measures in graphic format.
• Store on disk/tape the results. Then, the data can be restored, displayed and saved (subdi-
vided by month) on a file. The saving operation can be executed for a single measurements
of a single equipment or for a measurement of all the equipment of the same type present
into the map.
• Management of the equipment software: immediate or scheduled updating of the software of the
equipment connected to the system, check of the software versions.
• Management of the equipment configuration: saving of the equipment configuration to file. Then,
it will be possible to transfer the configuration to any equipment present in the network.
• Management of the virtual equipment.
• Command Executor: program that executes predefined sequences of SNMP commands. The prede-
fined sequences of SNMP commands are provided at customer’s request by SIAE MICROELETTRO-
NICA.
• List of the application programs (browser, manager, etc.), relevant to the NMS5LX system, on
progress at the choice of the command.
• Possibility to require for or to force the closing of an application program on progress (browser,
manager, etc.) of the NMS5LX system.
• List of the users connected with the supervisory system. Possibility to require for or to force the
disconnection procedure (logout) of an user. Possibility to forward messages to a single user or to
all the users connected with the supervisory system.
• Management of the LCT user list stored for each single equipment.
• Access to the system with 5 different user profiles which determine the available commands and
the functions.
NMS5LX 6.4.8 - MN.00272.E - 001 18

MODULARITY OF THE NMS5LX SYSTEM
The NMS5LX supervision system is a modular system.
It is composed by a set of main applications which, depending on the type of equipment it must manage
or on the type of functionality you wish to implement, one or more applications are added to.
The group of main applications manages the NMS5LX graphic interface at general level (LX Map Manager
window - Fig.1) through which the user can represent graphically the network, manage the connection,
check the operating status, the results of the measures of Performance Monitoring, etc. of the equipment.
At this level, the equipment is considered on its whole.
The equipment additional application (called <equipment type> Manager) as the task to provide, to the
NMS5LX interface, specific commands and functions with respect to the type of equipment that must be
managed.
Each equipment additional application manages a specific equipment graphic interface (pag.47/pag.48)
through which the user can, besides checking the operating status of the equipment, directly intervene in
its management checking or modifying the configuration parameters and verifying the quality parameters
of the signal. The NMS5LX supervision system can be provided with one or more Manager applications ac-
cording to the equipment types present in its own network.
The access to the graphic interface at general level takes place at the opening of the LX Map Manager win-
dow, while the access to the graphic interface at equipment level takes place opening the equipment win-
dow relevant to the equipment itself. The opening of an equipment window depends on the opening of the
LX Map Manager window.
The additional application Ring Manager (RM) has the task to provide the NMS5LX interface with the com-
mands and the functions specific for the configuration and the management of the network paths (Path)
among the PDH and SDH telecommunications equipment.
The Ring Manager application is composed by a part integrated in the menus of the graphical interface
NMS5LX (menu Ring Manager - pag.424) which allows representing, by means of the Ring objects, the
subnetworks of equipment which implement Path directly in the maps, verifying the functional status of
the NEs/Links/Paths present in the Ring objects and displaying the list of the objects Ring, Path and NE.
At this level, the Ring object is considered as a whole.
From the graphical object Ring, you can access the Ring Manager window (pag.50) which allows represent-
ing and managing the single equipment, Links and Paths present in a Ring object.
The opening of a Ring Manager window depends on the opening of the LX Map Manager window. Moreover
a Ring Manager window can be opened only by an enabled NMS5UX user (see pag.55).
The additional application VLAN Manager (VM) has the task to provide the interface NMS5LX commands
and specific functions for the configuration and the network-level management of virtual LAN paths (VLAN
paths) among the radio equipment with Ethernet tributaries.
VLAN Manager application is composed by a part integrated in the menus of the graphical interface NMS5LX
(menu VLAN Manager - pag.469) which allows representing, by means of the VLAN MAP objects, the sub-
networks of equipment which implement VLAN paths directly in the maps, verifying the functional status
of the NEs present in the VLAN Map objects and displaying the list of the objects VLAN Map and NE. At this
level, the VLAN Map object is considered as a whole.
From the graphical object VLAN Map, you can access the VLAN Manager Map window (pag.51) which allows
representing and managing the single equipment, Links and VLAN paths present in a VLAN Map object.
The opening of a VLAN Manager Map window depends on the opening of the LX Map Manager window.
Moreover a VLAN Manager Map window can be opened only by an enabled NMS5UX user (see pag.55).
The additional application Remote Access NMS5UX (RAN) allows a NMS5UX user controlling and managing
the equipment connecting, via Internet, to his own NMS5LX system through his own PC and using the in-
stalled O.S. and the browser.
NMS5LX 6.4.8 - MN.00272.E - 001 19

The servlet RAN carries out the connection with the NMS5LX system and displays the Web page Remote
Access NMS5UX which allows monitoring/managing the equipment connected to one’s supervision system
and present in a map.
The access to the servlet RAN takes place opening the Web page Remote Access NMS5UX, which can be
opened only by an enabled NMS5UX user (see pag.55).
The additional application Geographical Redundancy (GR) allows managing the redundancy of the maps
among the different NMS5LX systems in order to keep the supervision/management of the maps of a mal-
functioning system through a different NMS5LX or NMS5UX-B system.
With map redundancy we mean the management, by a NMS5LX or NMS5UX-B system, of all the equipment
associated to that specific map.
The GM application has been designed to work as part of the NMS5LX, in fact its interface is integrated
within the TMNMENU window (start menu) of the NMS5LX graphic interface.
The additional application P.M. Data Export allows exporting the results of the Performance Monitoring
measures relevant to all the equipment managed by the NMS5LX system.
The data are exported directly from the tables of the NMS5LX database to a file in TLFF format. This oper-
ation can be both manually carried out by the user or set and periodic operation.
Moreover the application allows re-importing the data previously saved to file into the Oracle table of PM.
The P.M. Data Export application is not provided with a graphic interface but its implementation is executed
by typing specific commands in the command line of a terminal window.
The additional application Proxy Agent allows dispatching the alarm traps, relevant to all the equipment
managed by one’s NMS5LX system, to an higher level Central Element Manager.
The Proxy Agent application is, in part, integrated into the NMS5LX graphic interface (setting, at level of
single equipment, of the address of the machine, which the Proxy Agent sends the traps coming from the
equipment to) and, in part, integrated in the TMNMENU window (start menu) of the NMS5LX graphic in-
terface (activation, deactivation and management of the Proxy Agent application).
This manual describes the use of the NMS5LX graphic interface at general level (LX Map Manager win-
dow).
The use of the equipment graphic interface changes depending on the type of equipment which is referred
to. It is reported in the relevant user manuals.
For the description and use of the additional application:

• RM, VM, RAN and GR, refer to relevant documentation.
• PM Data Export, refer to the relevant technical specifications.
• Proxy Agent, refer to pag.142 (setting of the Proxy address of the equipment) and to the ad-
ministrator manual (management of the Proxy Agent application).
NMS5LX 6.4.8 - MN.00272.E - 001 20

MAPS
The NMS5LX system allows associating a map to each single NMS5UX user. More user can be associated
to the same map.
At the opening of the LX Map Manager window (Fig.1), the map associated to the user that executed the
operation opens.
The whole equipment network or a portion of it can correspond to a map. In this second case, the user
which the map is associated to, will receive only notifications coming from the equipment contained in his
portion of network.
To manage an equipment it is necessary to create a graphic symbol that represents it. The same symbol
can be created in more maps (creation of more copies of the symbol). In this way, the equipment data are
not duplicated in the database, but all the copies access to the same information.
Then, it is possible to save objects of a map into a file and export/import object of a map to another one.
NMS5LX 6.4.8 - MN.00272.E - 001 21

EQUIPMENT MANAGED BY NMS5LX
The NMS5LX system release 6.4.8 is able to manage the following equipment:
• ALS series radio with ALS IDU (ALS)

• ALS series radio with ALS-C IDU (ALS-C)
• ALS series radio with AL IDU (AL)
• ALS series radio with ALC IDU (ALC)
• ALS series radio with AL IDU plus (ALplus)
• ALS series radio with ALC IDU plus (ALCplus)
• ALS series radio with ALplus2 IDU (ALplus2)
• ALS series radio with ALCplus2 IDU (ALCplus2)
• ALS series radio with ALCplus2e IDU (ALCplus2e)
• EL series radio
• US series radio
• ELFO radio
• ALFO radio
• SDH N+1 radio
• ALplus node
Set of minimum 2 and maximum 3 equipment ALplus interconnected by Nodal Bus.
• ALCplus2 node
Set of minimum 2 and maximum 8 equipment ALCplus2 interconnected by a Nodal Bus (TDM
traffic) and/or by LAN (Ethernet traffic).
• FAMxc 5 RU multiplexer
• FAMxc 2.5 RU multiplexer
• ADM–1 multiplexer
• EXP63 multiplexer
• ADM–C multiplexer
• PMP system - Point to MultiPoint

By means of a single PMP object, one PMP sector is controlled and managed (together with the
master station, the peripheral station and the optional equipment).
• CommServer–S (CS)
• IPBOX
• AGS10
NMS5LX 6.4.8 - MN.00272.E - 001 22

RELEASE OF NMS5LX SYSTEM
The information contained in this manual refers to the system and the NMS5LX graphic interface release
6.4.8.
The release can be checked at the opening of the graphic interface (Login window) or selecting the Help
> About NMS5LX (pag.495).
NMS5LX 6.4.8 - MN.00272.E - 001 23

HARDWARE/SOFTWARE REQUIREMENTS
The detail of the hardware and software requirements required by the NMS5LX system is reported in the
administrator manual.
NMS5LX 6.4.8 - MN.00272.E - 001 24

MAXIMUM NUMBER OF EQUIPMENT MANAGED BY NMS5LX
The maximum number of equipment that can be contemporarily managed by the NMS5LX system depends
on the codeword required by the customer.
NMS5LX 6.4.8 - MN.00272.E - 001 25

MAXIMUM NUMBER OF NMS5UX USERS
The maximum number of NMS5UX users that can open the LX Map Manager window (Fig.1), using the
same map or different maps, depends on the codeword required by the customer.
NMS5LX 6.4.8 - MN.00272.E - 001 26

LX MAP MANAGER WINDOW
At the start of the NMS5LX graphical interface the LX Map Manager window opens. The window is displayed
in Fig.1. The elements that compose the window are:
• MENU bar (pag.28)
• TITLE bar (pag.29)
• TOOL bar (pag.30)
• MAP area (pag.32)
• VIEW area (pag.34)
• NEW OBJECT area (pag.35)
• OBJECTS (pag.36)
• STATUS bar (pag.44)
• PLATFORM STATUS bar (pag.45)
First time the LX Map Manager window of a new map opens, the Map and View areas are empty (unless
the system has been previously configured by SIAE MICROELETTRONICA). In this case, before connecting
the equipment, it is necessary to graphically represent the network in their own map (pag.77).
The NMS5LX graphic interface has been developed to be used in Linux environment, therefore it respects
the conventions - relevant to the menu arrangement, the window style, the use of the keyboard, of the
mouse and so on - typical of this operating system.
Fig.1 LX Map Manager window
MENU bar TITLE bar TOOL bar
OBJECTS
MAP area STATUS bar NEW OBJECT area VIEW area PLATFORM STATUS bar
NMS5LX 6.4.8 - MN.00272.E - 001 27

MENU BAR
Menu:
• Map (pag.128). It contains the commands for the management of the map: to update the data,
to resize the symbols, to manage the background, to change/delete the map, to export/import
the elements of a map to/from another one and to save on a file all the symbols (container, NE,
etc.) present into a map.
• Edit (pag.140). It contains the commands for the management of the objects: creation, modi-
fication, deletion, search, alignment.
• View (pag.156). It contains the commands to hide/show the elements of the LX Map Manager
window.
• Performance (pag.161). It contains the commands for the management of the measures of
Performance Monitoring (PM) of the equipment.
• Configuration (pag.175). It contains the commands to check the status/operation of an equip-
ment and the configuration of the software/hardware of the equipment.
• Locate (pag.225). It contains the commands to display and manage, in table format, the equip-
ment.
• Command (pag.243). It contains the commands for the management of the connection be-
tween the equipment and the NMS5LX system and for the execution of the download of the con-
figuration of an equipment to another equipment.
• Fault (pag.261). It contains the commands for the management of the equipment alarms and
for the display of the history of the operations executed by the NMS5UX users.
• Tools (pag.309). It contains the commands to start the Command Executor application, for the
management of the alarm notification via e-mail, to manage the periodic monitoring of param-
eters, to manage the statistics of the Ethernet tributaries, to manage the Auto Discovery and
XML Export functionality.
• Options (pag.364). It contains the commands for the management of the alarm severity, of the
NMS5LX/LCT users, of the list of remote equipment and the commands for the updating of the
equipment software.
• Misc (pag.415). It contains the commands to save/recover/delete from disk/tape the alarm his-
tory, the results of the PM measures and the system database.
• Ring Manager (pag.424). It contains the commands for the management of the Ring objects.
The menu is available only if the Ring Manager application is installed. For the use, refer to the
relevant documentation.
• VLAN Manager (pag.469). It contains the commands for the management of the VLAN Map
objects.
The menu is available only if the VLAN Manager application is installed. For the use, refer to the
relevant documentation.
• Help (pag.494). It contains the commands to open the on-line manuals of the supervisory sys-
tem and to check the list of the software programs that constitute the NMS5LX software pack-
age.
Each item, if selected, opens a cascade menu that lists a series of commands.
Some commands immediately execute the action associated to them, others open further cascade menus
(items followed by ).
When a command is displayed greyed out, instead of white, it means that it is not available.
The deactivation of a command can depend on the type of access to the map (pag.63), on the equipment
type or one's user profile (pag.57)does not foresee the use of the command or, even, to make the com-
mand available it is necessary to execute before another action as, for example, to select a symbol.
NMS5LX 6.4.8 - MN.00272.E - 001 28

TITLE BAR
This bar points out the window name, which can be configured by the superuser. By default, the name is
<company name - LX Map Manager>.
For description convenience, in this manual the main window of the graphic interface of the NMS5LX sys-
tem is identified by the wording LX Map Manager.
NMS5LX 6.4.8 - MN.00272.E - 001 29

TOOL BAR
Tab.1 shows the description of the push-buttons.
Tab.1 Push-buttons (LX Map Manager window)
Buttons Description Equivalent command
It closes the LX Map Manager window Map > Exit (pag.139)
It displays the objects present at Map level in -

the View area (pag.32)
It displays the objects present at the previous -

level (parent level) in the View area (pag.32)
It displays the objects present in the last select- -

ed container (go back push-button) into the
View area.
It searches a symbol in the map Edit > Find (pag.152)
It aligns two or more objects vertically * Edit > Arrange Symbols > Vertical (pag.153)
It aligns two or more objects horizontally * Edit > Arrange Symbols > Horizontal (pag.153)
It hides/displays the labels of the Link objects View > Show/Hide Link Label (pag.159)
(pag.80)
It hides/displays the Map area (pag.32) View > Show/Hide Map Tree (pag.157)
It hides/displays the platform status bar View > Show/Hide Platform Status (pag.158)
(pag.45)
It creates a new equipment Edit > Add > Network Element (pag.141)
It creates a new container Edit > Add > Container (pag.141)
It displays the list of the equipment Locate > Equipment List Locate (pag.226)
It displays the results of the PM measures for Performance > Performance Monitoring (pag.163)
the selected NE **
It displays the alarm history Fault > Network Alarm History (pag.262)
It displays the list of the alarms active on the Fault > Network Current Alarms (pag.271)
equipment
It executes the Line Test for the selected NE *** Command > Line Test > Network Element
(pag.244)
It connects the selected equipment *** Command > Connect > Network Element
(pag.246)
It disconnects the selected equipment *** Command > Disconnect > Network Element
(pag.248)
It re-aligns the alarms and the configuration for Command > Configuration Upload > Network Ele-
the selected equipment *** ment (pag.254)
It re-aligns the alarms for the selected equip- Command > Alarm Re-alignment > Network Ele-
ment *** ment (pag.252)
NMS5LX 6.4.8 - MN.00272.E - 001 30

Buttons Description Equivalent command
It reduces the graphic symbols size in the View Map > Map Properties (pag.130) (20 pixel)
area (Zoom 40%)
It restores the average size of the graphic sym- Map > Map Properties (pag.130) (38 pixel)
bol in the View area (Zoom 70%)
It enlarges the graphic symbols size in the View Map > Map Properties (pag.130) (50 pixel)
area (Zoom 100%)
* The push-button is available only if at least two objects are selected.

** The push-button is available only if one equipment is selected.
*** The push-button is available only if at least one equipment is selected.
NMS5LX 6.4.8 - MN.00272.E - 001 31

MAP AREA
The Map area is the part of the LX Map Manager window (Fig.1) where the map objects, created by the
user to represent the equipment network, are displayed (except for the Link and Label objects).
The displaying of the map is of tree type, in order to represent also the hierarchical links among the dif-
ferent items.
The Map: nms5ux level (see Fig.2) represents the highest hierarchical level: Map level. It is automatically
created on the creation of the map and its name corresponds to the name assigned by the user to the map.
This level cannot be deleted using the commands present in the LX Map Manager window, it is automati-
cally deleted on the deletion of the map.
The lower levels are represented by containers that can contain more NE (pag.78), Generic Symbol
(pag.79), Link (pag.80), Label (pag.80), Container (pag.78), Ring (pag.80) and VLAN Map (pag.80) ob-
jects. The presence of a Container object automatically creates a hierarchically lower level (child level) with
respect to the current level (parent level) as shown in Fig.2.
The subdivision of the equipment network into containers, and then into levels, allows creating areas where
grouping the equipment and items related by some characteristics, for example geographical or other.
In this way, when a Container object is selected, in the View area (pag.32) only the elements present in
the container will be displayed and not all the network elements.
In fact, the selection of a container (or of an element contained in it) changes the content of the View area.
All the objects present in the same level are listed in the area Map in alphanumeric order.
Each container (except for the Map level) has the + or - symbol, displayed one alternatively to the other
(see Fig.2). Symbol:
• +. The elements present in the container are not displayed in the Map area under the container
itself (collapsed list).
• -. The elements present in the container are displayed in the Map area under the container itself
(expanded list).
It is possible to expand/collapse a list selecting the +/- symbol.
The user (independently from its operating level or access type) can anytime display or hide the Map area
(pag.33).
Fig.2 Map area (LX Map Manager window)
Map
container “Child” level of the
Map container
“Child” level of the

Lower Map container.
container “Parent” level of
the “Station A”
container
“Child” level of the

“Venice” container
NMS5LX 6.4.8 - MN.00272.E - 001 32

Passing from one level to the other one in the Map area
To pass to the:
• Higher level (parent level), with respect to that selected and represented in the View area
(pag.32) press or select the container that represents the wished higher level.
• Lower level (child level), with respect to that selected and represented in the View area, select
the container that represents the wished lower level.
To pass to the main window of the map (Map level) press or select the Map:… container.
Objects of the Map area
The characteristics of the objects present in the Map area: symbol, check sign, note sign, colour, etc. are
described in the par. Objects (pag.36).
To display/hide the Map area
1. Select the View > Show/Hide Map Tree command or press .

The Map area is hidden.
2. Select the View > Show/Hide Map Tree command or press again to display the area again.
NMS5LX 6.4.8 - MN.00272.E - 001 33

VIEW AREA
The View area is the part of the LX Map Manager window where the objects present in the container, se-
lected in the Map area (pag.32), are displayed.
For example in Fig.1, if the Venice container is selected in the Map area, the NE objects ADM1 13.1, AL
plus 02, AL plus 03, AL plus 04, AL plus 05 and the possible Link and Label objects (objects that are not
displayed in the Map area) will be displayed in the View area.
The selected container, once selected the level displayed in the View area, is indicated above the area itself
in the Contents of Map:… field.
The symbol / separates the levels.
For example, in Fig.1, the Contents of Map: nms5ux/Venice field points out that the objects represented
in the View area are present in the nms5ux (parent level) and in the Venice container (current level).
Passing from one level to the other in the View area
To pass to the:
• Higher level (parental level), with respect to that represented in the View area, press .
• Lower level (child level), with respect to that represented in the View area, double click on the
container that represents the level you wish to access.
To pass to the main window of the map (Map level) press .
Objects of the View area
The characteristics of the objects present in the View area: symbol, check sign, note sign, colour, etc. are
described in the par. Objects (pag.36).
Background of the View area
It is possible to associate a background to each container, in such a way that, on its selection, the back-
ground is displayed in the View area besides the symbols present in the container (pag.131).
It is possible to associate a different background to each container of the same map.
NMS5LX 6.4.8 - MN.00272.E - 001 34

NEW OBJECT AREA
The new objects are parked in this area after their creation, waiting for their positioning by the user inside
the View area (pag.34).
NMS5LX 6.4.8 - MN.00272.E - 001 35

OBJECTS
An object is the representation, in the graphic interface of the NMS5LX system, of a network element.
The NMS5UX user must consider each part of the network as an object. For example, the network on its
whole is an object, the container (sub network, station, sub-station) where the equipment are located is
an object, each single equipment is an object.
An object can be:
• Created - see Edit > Add (pag.141), Tools > Auto Discovery (pag.327), Ring Manager > Edit >
RM-Add Ring (pag.425) and VLAN Manager > Edit > VM-Add VLAN Map (pag.470) command.
• Deleted - see Edit > Delete (pag.145), Ring Manager > Edit > RM-Delete Ring (pag.426) and
VLAN Manager > Edit > VM-Delete VLAN Map (pag.471) command.
• Modified - see Edit > Modify/View (pag.146), Ring Manager > Edit > RM-Modify/View Ring
(pag.427) and VLAN Manager > Edit > VM-Modify/View VLAN Map (pag.472) command.
• Moved. To move an object, it is sufficient to select it and, keeping pressed the left mouse but-
ton, bring it to the new position.
In the Map area (pag.32), it is possible to move the objects from a container to the other. In
the View area (pag.34) it is possible to put the object in a new position inside the area (contain-
er). Furthermore, it is possible to select an object in the View area and drag it into a container
of the Map area or vice versa.
All the created objects and the relevant values of the parameters are stored into the database of the
NMS5LX system. They will be stored until the user deletes the object.
The NMS5LX system has a series of predefined objects, which allow the user drawing his network and pro-
viding to the system all the information necessary for the supervision and the monitoring of each single
equipment.
In details, Container (pag.78), Network Element (NE) (pag.78), Generic Symbol (pag.79), Link (pag.80),
Label (pag.80), Ring (pag.80) and VLAN Map (pag.80) objects.
On the creation/deletion/modification/move of an object:
• Container, NE, Generic Symbol, Ring or VLAN Map, the object is represented/deleted/changed/
moved both in the Map area and in the View area.
• Link or Label, the object is represented/deleted/changed/moved only in the View area.
The graphic representation of the object is the symbol (pag.36).

A symbol is composed by the following elements: icon (pag.37), name (pag.38), check sign (pag.38),
notes (pag.39) and it is characterized by behavior (pag.39), colour (pag.40) and right button function
(pag.42).
Graphic representation of the object: symbol
When an object is created, its graphic representation in the map is the symbol.
More symbols can correspond to an object. In fact, if the same object is created more times, we do not
create a new object but simply a copy of its graphic representation, then a new symbol is created. The
symbol of the same object can be created more times in the same map or in other maps as shown in Fig.3.
In the system database, on the creation of the object, the relevant parameter are stored. On the creation
of the next copies (symbols) of the object, the values of the parameters are not inserted again, but the
values already present in the database are used.
To execute an operation, often it is necessary to select the symbol (or the symbols) which you wish to
operate on. The selected symbol is characterized by a dark grey square. It will remain selected until the
user selects another symbol.
It is possible to select one or more symbols at the same time pressing the left mouse button and drawing
an area containing the interested symbols or keeping pressed the Ctrl key selecting the symbols.
NMS5LX 6.4.8 - MN.00272.E - 001 36

Fig.3 Relation between object and symbol
Map 1 Map 2 Map 3
Container 1 Container 1
Graphical Symbol Symbol Symbol Symbol

representation A A A A
of the object A
in the maps
Symbol Symbol
A A
Information
relevant to
object A in Object A
the database
Symbol items: icon
The icon is the graphic representation of the symbol.
All the objects of the NMS5LX system, except for the Label object, has a its own icon.
Tab.2 points out the symbol and the relevant icons represented in the Map (pag.32) and View (pag.34)
areas.
Tab.2 Icon (LX Map Manager window)
Icon
Symbol Icon (View area)
(Map area)
Container -
Map
Container
...
Generic
Symbol
.....
Link -
Label -
Ring
VLAN Map
NMS5LX 6.4.8 - MN.00272.E - 001 37

Icon
Symbol Icon (View area)
(Map area)
Network ALS series radio with ALS series radio with ALS series radio with ALS series radio with ALS series radio with
Element ALS IDU/ALS-C IDU AL IDU/ALC IDU AL IDU plus ALC IDU plus ALplus2 IDU
ALS series radio with ALplus ALCplus2 EL US

ALCplus2 IDU node node series radio series radio
ELFO radio ALFO radio SDH N+1 radio FAMxc 5 RU Mult. FAMxc 2.5 RU Mult.
ADM-C Multiplexer ADM-1 Multiplexer EXP63 Multiplexer PMP System COMM. SEVER-S
IPBOX WEB Generic ALS series radio with AGS10

ALCplus2e IDU
Symbol items: name
The name (or label) is the string of characters displayed under the icon (View area - pag.34) or next to the
icon (Map area - pag.32).
All the objects of the NMS5LX system has a name defined on the creation of the object. For all the objects
the name can be modified later.
For the Link objects, it is possible to hide the name (see pag.143/pag.159).
For the Ring objects, the name represents the title of the window opened by the double selection of the
relevant symbol.
For the VLAN Map objects, the name represents a part of the title of the window which is opened on the
double selection of the relevant symbol (window title <VLAN Map object name> - VLAN Manager Map).
Symbol items: check sign
The check sign is an item that characterizes only the Container and Network Element objects, except for
the virtual Network Elements.
For the Network Element objects:

• The presence of the check sign points out that:
• At least one alarm (current and/or in the alarm history) relevant to the equipment has
not been marked (acknowledged).
To remove the symbol , mark the current alarms (pag.273) and/or in the alarm history
(pag.265).
• The LCT program has connected to the NE at least once in Configuration modality from
the last time that the Equipment window of the equipment has been opened.
NMS5LX 6.4.8 - MN.00272.E - 001 38

To remove the symbol , open the NE equipment window.
• The last operation of Configuration Upload towards the considered equipment is failed or
presents some errors.
The symbol is automatically removed at the first correctly executed operation of Con-
figuration Upload.
The check sign next to the icon points out that there is at least ONE of the listed condition.
It is possible to check the status of each condition in the Equipment Browser [List/Locate] win-
dow (Fig.35) and Information window (Fig.17).
By default, the symbol points out the status of the condition listed above.
It is possible to modify the list of the conditions associating the presence (or absence) of to
two or to only one of the above mentioned conditions. For example, it is possible to associate to
the check sign only the condition of failed Configuration Upload. The change can be made only
by the Superuser. More information is reported in the administrator manual.
• The absence of the check sign points out that:
• All the (current or historic) alarms of the equipment have been marked.
• LCT has not been connected in Configuration modality from the last time that the NE
equipment window has been opened.
• The last operation of Configuration Upload to the equipment has been successfully exe-
cuted.
For the Network Element of ALplus Node type or ALCplus2 Node type objects:
• The presence of the check sign points out that at least an equipment with is present in the
node.
• The absence of the check sign points out that no equipment with is present in the node.
For the Container objects:

• The presence of the check sign points out that at least a NE or Container object with is
present in the relevant container.
• The absence of the check sign points out that no NE or Container object with is present in
the relevant container.
Symbol items: notes
The note symbol ( ) is an item that characterizes only the Network Element objects. With details:
• The presence of the note symbol points out that there is an informative note written by the user
associated to the symbol.
It is possible to see (modify/delete) the note opening the Information window (Fig.17).
• The absence of the note symbol points out that there is no informative note associated to the
symbol.
Symbol characteristics: behavior
The behavior represents the action that is executed when a symbol is selected or is selected twice in fast
sequence in Map (pag.32) or View (pag.34) area.
Tab.3 displays for each object the relevant behavior.
NMS5LX 6.4.8 - MN.00272.E - 001 39

Tab.3 Behavior of symbol (LX Map Manager window)
Symbol Behaviour (Map/View area)
Container It displays in the View area the objects present in the container (child level)
NE (real) If connected at least once, the equipment window opens (pag.47)
NE ALplus Node type If connected at least once, the ALplus nodal window opens (pag.48)
NE ALCplus2 Node type If connected at least once, the ALCplus2 nodal window opens (pag.48)
The WEB page opens (via the default browser) available at the address set for the
NE WEB Generic type
specific object.
NE (virtual) The equipment window opens (pag.47) *
Generic Symbol No action is executed
Link No action is executed

Label No action is executed
Ring The Ring Manager window (pag.50) opens
VLAN Map The VLAN Manager Map window (pag.51) opens
* For virtual equipment, the equipment window is opened only if the configuration of a (real or virtual) NE
of the same type has been transferred to the considered virtual equipment (see pag.78 and pag.256).
Symbol characteristics: colour
The colour of the icon identifies the connection status or the alarm status of the symbols contained in it.
Tab.4 displays, for each object, the colours that be assumed by the relevant icon and the description of
the condition represented by them.
Tab.4 Colour of symbol (LX Map Manager window)
Symbol Colour Description
Container * Blue In the container:

• There is no equipment in connected status
• There is one or more equipment in connected status which the LCT program
in Configuration modality is connected to.
• There is one or more equipment in maintenance status.
Green In the container there is at least one equipment in connected status. No NE has
alarms.
Light blue In the container there is at least one equipment in connected status where at least
one alarm of Warning severity is active.
Yellow In the container there is at least one equipment in connected status where at least
one alarm of Minor severity is active.
Orange In the container there is at least one equipment in connected status where at least
one alarm of Major severity is active.
Red In the container there is at least one equipment in connected status where at least
one alarm of Critical severity is active and/or one NE in unreachable status.
NMS5LX 6.4.8 - MN.00272.E - 001 40

NE (real) ** Brown The equipment is in disconnected status (pag.105)
Green The equipment is in connected status (pag.106) and does not present any alarm.
Light blue The equipment is in connected status and at least one alarm of Warning severity is
present.
Yellow The equipment is in connected status and at least one alarm of Minor severity is
present.
Orange The equipment is in connected status and at least one alarm of Major severity is
present.
Red The equipment is in connected status and at least one alarm of Critical severity is
present.
Red with X The equipment is in unreachable status (pag.106)
Pink *** The equipment is in maintenance status (pag.107)
White *** The LCT program in Configuration modality is connected to the equipment.
NE ALplus Node Brown All the equipment in the node are in disconnected status
type*
Green All the equipment in the node are in connected status. No equipment has alarm.
Light blue All the equipment in the node are in connected status. The most serious alarm
present on the equipment of the node is Warning.
Yellow All the equipment in the node are in connected status. The most serious alarm
present on the equipment of the node is Minor.
Orange All the equipment in the node are in connected status. The most serious alarm
present on the equipment of the node is Major.
Red All the equipment in the node are in connected status. The most serious alarm
present on the equipment of the node is Critical.
Or
In the node there is at least one equipment in unreacheable status.
Red with X All the equipment in the node are in unreachable status.
Pink *** In the node there is at least one equipment in maintenance status.
White *** In the node there is at least one equipment which the LCT program in Configuration
modality is connected to.
NE ALCplus2 Node Brown All the equipment in the node are in disconnected status
type*
Green All the equipment in the node are in connected status. No equipment has alarm.
Light blue All the equipment in the node are in connected status. The most serious alarm
present on the equipment of the node is Warning.
Yellow All the equipment in the node are in connected status. The most serious alarm
present on the equipment of the node is Minor.
Orange All the equipment in the node are in connected status. The most serious alarm
present on the equipment of the node is Major.
Red All the equipment in the node are in connected status. The most serious alarm
present on the equipment of the node is Critical.
Or
In the node there is at least one equipment in unreacheable status.
Red with X All the equipment in the node are in unreachable status.
Pink *** In the node there is at least one equipment in maintenance status.
White *** In the node there is at least one equipment which the LCT program in Configuration
modality is connected to.
NE WEB Generic type Brown The colour is fixed and does not point out any status condition.
NE (virtual) Brown The colour is fixed and does not point out any status condition.
Generic Symbol Blue The colour is fixed and does not point out any status condition.
Link Black The colour is fixed and does not point out any status condition.
NMS5LX 6.4.8 - MN.00272.E - 001 41

Label Black The colour is fixed and does not point out any status condition.
Ring * Blue In the Ring:

Green In the Ring there is at least one equipment in connected status. No NE has alarms.
Light blue In the Ring there is at least one equipment in connected status where at least one
alarm of Warning severity is active.
Yellow In the Ring there is at least one equipment in connected status where at least one
alarm of Minor severity is active.
Orange In the Ring there is at least one equipment in connected status where at least one
alarm of Major severity is active.
Red In the Ring there is at least one equipment in connected status where at least one
alarm of Critical severity is active and/or one NE in unreachable status.
VLAN Map * Blue In the VLAN Map:

Green In the VLAN Map there is at least one equipment in connected status. No NE has
alarms.
Light blue In the VLAN Map there is at least one equipment in connected status where at least
one alarm of Warning severity is active.
Yellow In the VLAN Map there is at least one equipment in connected status where at least
one alarm of Minor severity is active.
Orange In the VLAN Map there is at least one equipment in connected status where at least
one alarm of Major severity is active.
Red In the VLAN Map there is at least one equipment in connected status where at least
one alarm of Critical severity is active and/or one NE in unreachable status.
* By default the color of the icon always reflects the colour of the (contained) object where the most serious
condition is present.
** By default, the colour of the icon always reflects the colour of the most serious alarm present on the
equipment.
*** This condition is not propagated to the icons of the Containers that contain the NE.
Symbol characteristics: right button function
The Map:… container (Map level) present in the Map area (pag.32) of the LX Map Manager window is
not provided with the right button function.
Selecting a symbol and pressing the right mouse button, a context menu is displayed where the following
commands are present:
• Open. If selected a:
• Real NE (connected at least once) opens the equipment window (pag.47).
• NE ALplus Node type (connected at least once) opens the ALplus nodal window (pag.48).
• NE ALCplus2 Node type (connected at least once) opens the ALCplus2 nodal window
(pag.49).
NMS5LX 6.4.8 - MN.00272.E - 001 42

• NE WEB Generic type opens the WEB page (via the default browser) available at the ad-
dress set for the specific object.
• Virtual NE opens the equipment window (pag.47).
• Container in the View area (pag.34), displays the objects present in the container.
• Ring opens the Ring Manager window (pag.50).
• VLAN Map opens the VLAN Manager Map window (pag.51).
Command available only if a NE, Container, Ring or VLAN object is selected.
• Delete. It deletes the selected object (see pag.145).
• Modify/View. It displays/modifies the configuration parameters of the object (see pag.146).
• Information. It opens the Information window (Fig.17).
Command not available if a Label or Link object is selected.
• Equipment Information. It opens the Equipment Information window (Fig.21).
Command available only if a NE object is selected.
• NE Current Alarm. It opens the Current Alarm Browser window (Fig.40).
• NE History Alarm. It opens the Alarm History Browser window (Fig.38).
• Ping. It executes the Ping in order to check the presence and reachability of the selected NE.
Each Ping command sends the test packet three times.
After the selection of the command, the Ping window is displayed, where the operation progress
and the final statistics (number of sent and received packets, percentage of lost packet, etc.)
are displayed.
The heading of the context menu points out the name of the selected symbol.
NMS5LX 6.4.8 - MN.00272.E - 001 43

STATUS BAR
This bar displays:

• Name of the currently open map (Map:…).
• Type of access to the map (Read-Write or Read Only).
• Push-button Read-Write Request: for users not connected in Read-Only modality to the map,
it allows requesting the access in Read-Write modality (pag.44)
• Name of the user who opened the map (User:…).
• Display status of the name of the Link objects. In detail, if:
• The wording [Link Label Off] is present, means that the names of the Links are not dis-
played.
• The wording [Link Label Off] is present, means that the names of the Links having the
parameter Show Label active are displayed in the View area (see pag.143).
The user (independently from his operating level or from the type of access to the map) can, in
any moment, display/hide the names of the Link objects (see pag.159).
At the opening of the LX Map Manager window, independently from its previous setting, the
display of the names of the Link objects is active (the wording [Link Label Off] is not present).
To request Read-Write access to a map
Push-button available only if the current access to the map is in Read-Only modality and one’s user has
profile Privileged, Advanced or Superuser.
1. Press the push-button Read-Write Request. If:

• no other user is connected to the same map in Read-Write modality, the modality of map access
immediately changes from Read Only to Read-Write,
• another user is connected to the same map in Read-Write modality, the request message will
be displayed to him. If:
• This second user accepts the request, one’s access modality immediately changes from
Read Only to Read-Write (push-button Read-Write Request is not displayed any more)
and the access modality of the user who haas confirmed the request immediately chang-
es from Read-Write to Read Only.
• This second user does not accept the request, the refusal message will be displayed on
one’s screen (push-button Read-Write Request remains displayed).
NMS5LX 6.4.8 - MN.00272.E - 001 44

PLATFORM STATUS BAR
Vertical bar where the following information is displayed. Box:
• NMS5UX. Status of the processes relevant to the NMS5LX system.

• PROXY. Status of the processes which manage the Proxy Agent.
• RING. Status of the processes which manage the Ring Manager application.
• VLAN. Status of the processes which manage the VLAN Manager application.
• Alr History Usage. Status and occupation percentage of the alarms in the table Alarm History of
NMS5LX.
• Transaction Log Usage. Status and occupation percentage of the list of the operations executed
by the NMS5UX users in the table Transaction Log of NMS5LX.
The colour of the NMS5UX, PROXY, RING and VLAN box points out the status of the specific process:
• Green. The process is active and operates correctly.
• Red. The process is inactive or it does not operate correctly.
In this condition, the function implemented by the process will be not execute (for example, the
alarms or the PM are not collected for the process relevant to NMS5UX).
Call one's network administrator in order to re-activate the process.
• Gray. The modules for the management of the relevant processes are not installed.
A double click of the left mouse button on a box allows checking the status of the relevant process.
The colour of the boxes Alr History Usage and Transaction Log Usage points out the occupation status of
the records in the relevant tables with respect to the maximum available status.
The maximum available status, considered as number of records which can be stored in each table, and
the occupation thresholds which determinate the status can be set by the Superuser. With reference to the
default values of the thresholds, the meaning assumed by the status colours are the following:
• Green. The records present in the specific table occupy less than 70% of the available space.
• Blue. The records present in the specific table occupy more than 70% but less than 75% of the
available space.
• Yellow. The records present in the specific table occupy more than 75% but less than 80% of
the available space.
• Orange. The records present in the specific table occupy more than 80% but less than 90% of
the available space.
• Red. The records present in the specific table occupy more than 90% of the available space.
In this condition a message is periodically displayed, warning about the critical situation.
The display of the message and the frequency which it is displayed at can be configured by Su-
peruser. Default: message display active, frequency: 60 seconds.
If during the day the following messages is displayed:

• Alarm History occupation exceeded 100%, means that the maximum capacity limit has been
reached for the table Alarm History.
In this case, the table stores all the alarms sent by the equipment (even if the limit has been
exceeded). At midnight, the system will delete, only among the alarms raised and then cleared,
the oldest records.
If the table Alarm History contains all alarms active and not cleared yet, the system will NOT
delete any record, even if their number exceeds the maximum set number.
• Transaction Log occupation exceeded 100%, means that the maximum capacity limit has been
reached for the table Transaction Log.
In this case, all the operations will be stored in the table (even if the limit has been exceeded).
At midnight the system will delete the oldest records.
The user (independently from its operating level or access type) anytime, can display or hide the platform
status bar.
NMS5LX 6.4.8 - MN.00272.E - 001 45

At the opening of the LX Map Manager window, independently from its previous setting, the platform status
bar is NOT displayed.
To display/hide the platform status bar
1. Select the View > Show/Hide Platform Status command or press .

The platform status bar is displayed.
2. Select the View > Show/Hide Platform Status command or press again to hide the bar again.
NMS5LX 6.4.8 - MN.00272.E - 001 46

EQUIPMENT WINDOW
The choice of a Network Element object allows accessing to the graphic interface at equipment level, level
represent by the equipment window.
At this level, the user can enter into the equipment to check and modify the configuration parameters, to
execute maintenance and test operations.
Each type of equipment, that can be currently managed by the NMS5LX system, is characterized by its own
equipment window.
The detailed description of each single equipment window and of the objects which it contains is reported
in the relevant Equipment user manual (see pag.502).
The management of each single equipment window is made from a specific application, called <equipment
type> Manager. These application are part of the NMS5LX system and are provided on request.
The equipment window of a NE can be opened by more users at the same time (see pag.67).
The first user that opens the window can check/modify the configuration parameters (Read-Write access).
The other users can only check the parameters (Read Only access).
What just said is valid only for the Superuser and the users with privileged or advanced profile. The
normal and entry users has always Read Only access to the equipment window, even if they are the first
to open it.
In the equipment window with Read Only access, the alarms will not be dynamically updated, it is neces-
sary to require the updating selecting a proper command.
The equipment window can be opened only if the NE has been connected at least once.
What just said is valid only for the objects that represent real equipment.
For the virtual NEs, the equipment window can be opened after having transferred, at least once, the con-
figuration of a (real or virtual) NE of the same type to the considered virtual equipment.
The selection of a NE object of type WEB Generic does not open the equipment window, because this
object does not represent a real equipment (see pag.79).
NMS5LX 6.4.8 - MN.00272.E - 001 47

ALPLUS NODAL WINDOW
The selection of a Network Element object of ALplus Node type allows accessing the graphic interface at
level of ALplus nodal system.
At this level, the user can enter into the node to verify the status and execute operations on the single
equipment constituting the ALplus nodal system as some commands, generally available for the NE objects
in the LX Map Manager window, are present in the nodal window for the node equipment.
Moreover, it is possible to access to the graphic interface of the single equipment only via the nodal win-
dow. In fact, it is not possible to create in the map a NE object of an equipment which is part of a nodal
system. It is automatically created in the database of the NMS5LX system when the ALplus Node NE object
is created.
The definition of node (equipment forming the node, relevant IP address, etc.) MUST be carried out at
local level via the SCT/LMT application. For more information, refer to the relevant documentation.
The nodal window can be opened:

• By one user at a time (see pag.68).
• Only if the node (and then all the node equipment) have been connected at least once.
The detailed description of the ALplus nodal window is reported in the user manual ...ALplus Node Manager
(see pag.502).
NMS5LX 6.4.8 - MN.00272.E - 001 48

ALCPLUS2 NODAL WINDOW
The selection of a Network Element object of ALCplus2 Node type allows accessing the graphic interface at
level of ALCplus2 nodal system.
At this level, the user can enter into the node to verify the status and execute operations on the single
equipment constituting the ALCplus2 nodal system as some commands, generally available for the NE ob-
jects in the LX Map Manager window, are present in the nodal window for the node equipment.
Moreover, it is possible to access to the graphic interface of the single equipment only via the nodal win-
dow. In fact, it is not possible to create in the map a NE object of an equipment which is part of a nodal
system. It is automatically created in the database of the NMS5LX system when the ALCplus2 Node NE
object is created.
The definition of node (equipment forming the node, relevant IP address, etc.) MUST be carried out at
local level via the SCT/LMT application. For more information, refer to the relevant documentation.
The nodal window can be opened:

• By one user at a time (see pag.68).
• Only if the node (and then all the node equipment) have been connected at least once.
The detailed description of the ALCplus2 nodal window is reported in the user manual ...ALCplus2 Node
Manager (see pag.502).
NMS5LX 6.4.8 - MN.00272.E - 001 49

RING MANAGER WINDOW
The selection of a Ring object allows accessing to the graphic interface of the Ring Manager application:
Ring Manager window.
This application has been developed to create, configure and manage the paths among SDH and PDH
equipment. A Path is a bidirectional connection between a source node and a destination node and is iden-
tified by an input channel on the source node and an output channel on the destination node.
The Ring Manager application is integrated in the NMS5LX system and supports the equipment (Network
Element) already managed by the supervision system.
The Ring Manager window, relevant to the same Ring object, can be opened by only one user at a time
(see pag.69).
The detailed description of the Ring Manager window and of the objects contained in it is reported in the
relevant user manual (see pag.502).
The Ring Manager application is optional and is provided on demand.
Moreover the Ring Manager window can be opened only by an enabled NMS5UX user (see pag.371/
pag.372).
NMS5LX 6.4.8 - MN.00272.E - 001 50

VLAN MANAGER MAP WINDOW
The selection of a VLAN Map object allows accessing to the graphic interface of the VLAN Manager appli-
cation: VLAN Manager Map window.
This application has been developed to create, configure and manage the virtual LAN paths (VLAN path)
among radio equipment with Ethernet tributaries.
VLAN Manager application is integrated in the NMS5LX system and supports SNMP equipment (Network
Element) of series ALS (AL, ALC, ALS, ALS-C, ALplus, ALCplus, ALplus2, ALCplus2, ALCplus2e), AGS10
equipment and ALFO equipment already managed by the supervision system.
The VLAN Manager Map window, relevant to the same VLAN Map object, can be opened by only one user
at a time (see pag.70).
The detailed description of the VLAN Manager window and of the objects contained in it is reported in the
relevant user manual (see pag.502).
The VLAN Manager application is optional and is provided on demand.
Moreover the VLAN Manager Map window can be opened only by an enabled NMS5UX user (see pag.371/
pag.372).
NMS5LX 6.4.8 - MN.00272.E - 001 51

NMS5UX USERS
The NMS5LX graphic interface can be started at the same time on more PCs or terminals connected by an
Ethernet connection.
In this way, the displaying of the information relevant to the equipment network is contemporaneous for
all the terminals and the insertion of the data or the sending of the commands by one user is possible from
all the terminals.
To open a copy of the NMS5LX graphic interface, it is necessary to have a NMS5UX user.
The supervision system is provided with a predefined NMS5UX user (see pag.54). In a second moment, it
will be possible to create all the wished NMS5UX users (see pag.371).
NMS5LX 6.4.8 - MN.00272.E - 001 52

RELATION BETWEEN LINUX USER AND NMS5UX USER
The NMS5LX system has been developed to be used with the Linux operating system.
For each NMS5UX user you want to create, it is necessary to create a Linux user. There is a specific con-
nection between them: it is possible to associate a single NMS5UX user to a Linux user.
Then, before creating the NMS5UX user, it is necessary to create the relevant Linux user.
The username and the password defined at the creation of the Linux user will be automatically used by the
supervision system during the creation of the NMS5UX user.
It is not necessary to create a Linux user for the Superuser (predefined NMS5UX user provided with the
supervision system - pag.54) because during the installation of the NMS5LX system a Linux user with
nms5ux username and password is created, which a NMS5UX user with nms5ux username and password
is associated to.
NMS5LX 6.4.8 - MN.00272.E - 001 53

PREDEFINED NMS5UX USER
During the installation of the system, a NMS5UX user is created with the following characteristics:
• Username - nms5ux
• Password - nms5ux
• map - nms5ux
• Profile - Superuser
• Timeout password - Not expired
• Internet - Active (if required by the user the RAN application (see pag.19).
• Ring/VLAN - Active (if required by the user the relevant application: Ring Manager/VLAN Man-
ager (see pag.19).
NMS5LX 6.4.8 - MN.00272.E - 001 54

CHARACTERISTICS OF A NMS5UX USER
Each NMS5UX user is characterized by an username (pag.55), a password (pag.55), a map (pag.56), a
profile (pag.57), the Internet enabling (pag.58) and Ring/VLAN enabling (pag.59).
The username and the password allow to the system acknowledge the user as NMS5UX user authorized
to start the graphic interface.
The same NMS5UX user can open more NMS5LX graphic interfaces (on different PCs/terminals or on the
same) using the same username and password.
A map is associated to each user. The supervision system, at the start-up of the NMS5LX interface, auto-
matically opens the map associated to the user that executed the operation.
The profile allows starting the NMS5LX graphic interface and having determinate commands and functions
available.
The Internet enabling allows the use of the RAN application (optional) (see pag.19).
The Ring/VLAN enabling allows the use of the (optional) applications Ring Manager and/or VLAN Manager
(see pag.19).
Username
Each NMS5UX user is characterized by a name.

The name of the NMS5UX Superuser is defined during the installation of the system.
The name of the other NMS5UX users is automatically set by the system during their creation: the NMS5UX
user is assigned the same name of the Linux user which is associated to.
If for one’s system the function of manual Login to the LX Map Manager window is active (pag.61), at
the creation of the NMS5UX user, an username different from that of the relevant Linux user can be de-
fined. Moreover, in this condition the name of the NMS5UX user can be modified (operation available only
for the Superuser).
Password
Each NMS5UX user is characterized by a password.

The password of the NMS5UX Superuser user is defined during the installation of the system.
The password of the other NMS5UX users is automatically set by the system during the creation of the
user: the NMS5UX user is assigned the same password of the Linux user which is associated to.
If for one’s system the function of manual Login to the LX Map Manager window is active (pag.61), at
the creation of the NMS5UX user the user password must be defined.
Then the Superuser can modify its password and the passwords of all other NMS5UX users. If an user
should forget his password, it is necessary to call SIAE MICROELETTRONICA.
The privileged, advanced, normal or entry users can modify their own password. If an user should forget
his password, the Superuser can define a new one.
Expiry of the password
The expiry of the password is managed by the operating system Linux according to the modes reported in
the relevant documentation.
NMS5LX 6.4.8 - MN.00272.E - 001 55

Only if, for one’s system, the function of manual Login to the LX Map Manager window (pag.61) is ac-
tive, the management of the expiry of the password is executed, only for the NMS5UX users, by the
NMS5LX system as described here below.
The NMS5LX system manages the periodic password change, which consists in asking the user the change
of his own password each N days (for example, each 6 months).
The functionality can be activated/deactivated by the system administrator who, if activates the function-
ality, sets the interval between a password change and the next one.
If the functionality is active, 5 days before the expiry of the password, a message is displayed at the open-
ing of the NMS5LX interface, which allows the user modifying his own password. In detail, the message:
• Your Password is going to expire on <data>. Please change it, signals that one’s password is
expiring.
This window is displayed 5 days before the expiry of the user password. It will be displayed each
time the user will start the graphic interface, until when he changes the password or this one
expires.
• Password expired. Please change it to login, signals that one’s password is expired.
To open the NMS5LX interface, it is necessary to change the password.
The activation of the periodic password change does not influence the expiry date of the user, which can
be set during the creation of a NMS5UX user. The two functionalities are independent and can coexist at
the same time.
Map
The map corresponds to a network or to the network part graphically represented and managed by the
system. It can be arranged by the user according to his needs.
Each map has its own LX Map Manager (Fig.1).
The NMS5LX system can manage more maps at the same time.
The map, where he can operate, is associated to each NMS5UX user.
The access to a map is made via the start of the NMS5LX graphic interface: automatically, the system
opens the map associated to the NMS5UX user who required the start of the graphic interface.
It is possible to associate, on the creation of the user, to each NMS5UX user, a map that will constitute the
default map of the user.
The Superuser and the users with privileged profile can open their own default map and, then, change map
choosing among those managed by the system (see pag.137).
The users with advanced, normal and entry profile can open only one's default map.
On the installation of the system, the nms5ux map is created. Then, it will be possible to create a new map
(see pag.371).
More NMS5UX users, who can open and use the map at the same time, can be associated to the same map
(more users can have the same default map).
In this case, only the first user who access to the map will have the Read-Write access, all the other users
will have Read Only access (see pag.63).
normal and entry users has always Read Only access to the map, even if they are the first to open it.
The max number of NMS5UX users who can access at the same time to the same map depends on the
codeword required by the customer.
The same NE object can be created in more map and/or more times in the same maps. In this way, on the
creation of the first copy of the object in a map, all the parameters of the object must be set.
On the creation of the successive copies, it will be sufficient to enter the physical or logical address and,
automatically, the system will set the parameter and will associate the status of connection of the twin
object already present in the map.
NMS5LX 6.4.8 - MN.00272.E - 001 56

nms5ux map
During the installation of the system, the nms5ux map is created, associated to the Superuser, named
nms5ux (the name of the Superuser can be modified by the user itself).
This map will result the default map of the nms5ux user but, as all the other maps, it can be opened also
by privileged users and be assigned, as default map, to other users.
Profile
The NMS5LX system can be started at different operating level.
A group of enabling of commands, execution of operations, etc. corresponds to each level (also called pro-
file).
The profile that characterizes each NMS5UX user is determined on the creation of the user himself.
After his creation, it is possible to modify the profile of each NMS5UX user, except for the Superuser.
The NMS5LX system has 5 operating levels (profiles):
• Superuser (pag.57)
• Privileged (pag.57)
• Advanced (pag.58)
• Normal (pag.58)
• Entry (pag.58)
The availability of the commands of the LX Map Manager window depends on the profile of the NMS5UX
user who opened the map.
Tab.13 point out, for each command, the profile that the NMS5UX user must own to be able to use it.
Superuser
The Superuser can start the NMS5LX graphic interface relevant to all the maps managed by the system.
In each map, the Superuser can access both in Read-Write and Read Only modality and can verify/set/
modify all the parameters.
The detail of the operations that the Superuser can execute in the equipment window is reported in the
specific equipment User Manual.
The NMS5LX system manages ONLY one Superuser. It is created during the installation of the system. In
a second moment, it will not be possible to delete the user or modify his profile.
Privileged
The privileged user can start the NMS5LX graphic interface relevant to all the maps managed by the sys-
tem.
In each map, the privileged user can access both in Read-Write and Read Only modality.
The detail of the commands/operations available to the privileged user is reported in Tab.13.
The detail of the operations that the privileged user can execute in the equipment window is reported in
the specific equipment User Manual.
On the installation of the system, there is no privileged user. Then, it is possible to create more privileged
users.
NMS5LX 6.4.8 - MN.00272.E - 001 57

Advanced
The advanced user can start the NMS5LX graphic interface relevant to the only map associated to his
NMS5UX user (default map).
The advanced user can access to his map both in Read-Write and Read Only modality.
The detail of the commands/operations available to the advanced user is reported in Tab.13.
The detail of the operations that the advanced user can execute in the equipment window is reported in
the specific equipment User Manual.
On the installation of the system, there is no advanced user. Then, it is possible to create more advanced
users.
Normal
The normal user can start the NMS5LX graphic interface relevant to the only map associated to his NMS5UX
user (default map).
The normal user can access to his map only in Read Only modality.
The detail of the commands/operations available to the normal user is reported in Tab.13.
The detail of the operations that the normal user can execute in the equipment window is reported in the
On the installation of the system, there is no normal user. Then, it is possible to create more normal users.
Entry
The entry user can start the NMS5LX graphic interface relevant to the only map associated to his NMS5UX
user (default map).
The entry user can access to his map only in Read Only modality.
In his map, the user can only verify the parameters.
The detail of the operations that the entry user can execute in the equipment window is reported in the
On the installation of the system, there is no normal user. Then, it is possible to create more normal users.
Internet
Each NMS5UX user is characterized by the Internet option.

Setting this option determines if the user can use the Remote Access NMS5UX (RAN) application or not
(see pag.19)
In detail, if the options is:
• Active. The NMS5UX user can open the Web page Remote Access NMS5UX.
• Inactive. The NMS5UX user cannot open the Web page Remote Access NMS5UX.
The setting of the Internet option for the NMS5UX Superuser user is defined during the installation of the
system and depends on the presence or not, in the installation packet, of the RAN application.
The setting of the Internet option for the other NMS5UX users is defined during the creation of the relevant
user. After the creation of the user, it is possible to modify the setting of the Internet option of any NMS5UX
user (operation available only to the Superuser).
NMS5LX 6.4.8 - MN.00272.E - 001 58

Ring/VLAN
Each NMS5UX user is characterized by the Ring/VLAN option.

The setting of this option determines if the user can use the Ring Manager and/or VLAN Manager applica-
tion or not (see pag.19)
In detail, if the option is:
• Active. The NMS5UX user can open the Ring Manager window (pag.50) and/or VLAN Manager
Map window (pag.51).
• Inactive. The NMS5UX user cannot open the Ring Manager and/or VLAN Manager Map window.
The setting of the Ring/VLAN option for the NMS5UX Superuser user is defined during the installation of
the system and depends on the presence or not of the Ring Manager and/or VLAN Manager application in
the installation packet.
The setting of the Ring/VLAN option for the other NMS5UX users is defined during the creation of the rel-
evant user. After the creation of the user, it is possible to modify the setting of the Ring/VLAN option of
any NMS5UX user (operation available only to the Superuser).
The application:
• Ring Manager, besides the Ring Manager window, is constituted by a part integrated in the men-
us of the NMS5LX graphic interface (menu Ring Manager - pag.424).
The use of commands of the Ring Manager menu is not affected by the possible use of the
Ring/VLAN option: any NMS5UX user, independently from his setting of the Ring/VLAN option,
can create, delete, etc. a Ring object.
• VLAN Manager, besides the VLAN Manager Map window, is constituted by a part integrated in
the menus of the NMS5LX graphic interface (menu VLAN Manager - pag.469).
The use of commands of the VLAN Manager menu is not affected by the possible use of the
Ring/VLAN option: any NMS5UX user, independently from his setting of the Ring/VLAN option,
can create, delete, etc. a VLAN Map object.
NMS5LX 6.4.8 - MN.00272.E - 001 59

EXPIRY OF A NMS5UX USER (ACCOUNT)
During the creation of a NMS5UX user, it is possible to assign a validity of n days to the relevant user (ac-
count) (see pag.371).
At the expiry of this period, when the NMS5LX graphic interface is started, the system displays the message
Your Account is expired. Please contact the system administrator.
The displaying of the message forbids the opening of the LX Map Manager windows.
In order to modify one’s user or its validity period, contact the Superuser.
If the message is displayed when the Superuser opens the LX Map Manager window, it is necessary to call
SIAE MICROELETTRONICA.
NMS5LX 6.4.8 - MN.00272.E - 001 60

FUNCTION OF MANUAL LOGIN TO THE LX MAP MANAGER WINDOW
As rule, the username and the password of the Linux user with which the terminal is started, determine
even the NMS5UX user with which the graphical interface NMS5LX is started.
In fact, at his creation the NMS5UX user automatically gets the username and the password of the relevant
Linux user.
This involves the user, in order to access the LX Map Manager window, is asked to enter the username and
the password only at the start-up of the terminal (see pag.72).
The NMS5LX system manages the function of manual login to the LX Map Manager window.
This function, is active, allows defining, at the creation of the NMS5UX user, a username and a password
different from those defined for the relevant Linux user.
In this case, the user shall enter, at the start-up of the terminal, the username and the password of the
Linux user and, for the start of the LX Map Manager window, will be asked to enter the username and the
password of the NMS5UX user.
The function can be activated on demand when the supervision system is installed.
NMS5LX 6.4.8 - MN.00272.E - 001 61

FUNCTION OF INACTIVITY CHECK - USER
The NMS5LXB system depends on the function Inactivity Check - User.
The function, if active, allows defining a continue inactivity period which must pass during a NMS5LX ses-
sion, before the suspension of this session for inactivity.
Before closing the LX Map Manager window (NMS5LX session) due to inactivity, the message INACTIVITY
CHECK!! If you don’t acknowledge this dialog in x min your session will automatically be closed is displayed.
If the user confirm his presence pressing OK, the session is not closed.
The continue inactivity period (frequency with which the inactivity message is displayed) and the period
during which the warning message is displayed on the screen (value x pointed out in the message) can be
configured by Superuser. These settings are valid for ALL the NMS5UX users.
The function Inactivity Check (User and RW Map) can be activated on demand when the supervision
system is installed.
NMS5LX 6.4.8 - MN.00272.E - 001 62

ACCESS TO THE MAP (READ-WRITE/READ ONLY)
The NMS5LX graphic interface relevant to the same map can be started on more PCs/terminals at the same
time.
In order to avoid conflicts between the graphic interfaces started on different terminals that use the same
map, it is possible to open the LX Map Manager window (Fig.1) in two different modalities:
• Read-Write. The user who accesses the map in this modality can add, delete, move the sym-
bols contained in the map and modify the characteristics of the symbols.
• Read Only. The user who accesses the map in this modality can control the status of the map
and of the contained symbols, but he cannot create, delete or move any symbol or execute any
modification on the symbols.
The map can be opened in Read Only modality by all the user.
The access in Read-Write modality for each map is assigned to one user at a time.
This user corresponds to the first authorized NMS5UX user who opens the NMS5LX graphic interface (then
the associated map) on any of the PCs/terminals.
The users who will connect in a second moment to the same map will have the access in Read Only mo-
dality.
The access modality is displayed in the lower bar of the LX Map Manager window.
The map can be opened in Read-Write modality only by the Superuser and by the user with
privileged or advanced profile. A normal or entry user, even if he is the first user that access to
the map, will open the map in Read Only modality.
The availability of the commands of the LX Map Manager window depends on the modality of access to
the map.
Tab.13 point out, for each command, the access to the map necessary to use it.
NMS5LX 6.4.8 - MN.00272.E - 001 63

UPDATING OF THE LX MAP MANAGER WINDOW IN READ ONLY MO-
DALITY
All the changes executed by Read-Write user in a map, are NOT dynamically displayed also in the LX Map
Manager window of the users, who have access to the same map, in Read Only modality.
To update the data of a map in Read Only modality, it is necessary to select the Map > Refresh (pag.129)
command.
NMS5LX 6.4.8 - MN.00272.E - 001 64

PASSING FROM READ ONLY MODALITY TO READ-WRITE MODALITY
If the user, with access to the map of Read-Write type, closes his LX Map Manager window, the Read-Write
access becomes available to all the other users (Read Only) that opened the LX Map Manager window rel-
evant to the same map.
The user who wishes to modify his modality from Read Only to Read-Write must select the Map > Refresh
(pag.129) command.
The first users who executes the updating of the map changes his access from Read Only to Read-Write.
The availability of the Read-Write access is not signalled to the Read Only users.
It is possible to require (pag.377) or force (pag.378) the disconnection of one user, whose access is Read-
Write. If the user accept the request, his map is closed and the Read-Write access will be available.
NMS5LX 6.4.8 - MN.00272.E - 001 65

FUNCTION OF INACTIVITY CHECK - RW MAP
The NMS5LX system is provided with the function Inactivity Check - RW Map.
The function, if active, allows defining a continue inactivity period which must pass during a NMS5LX ses-
sion with Read Write access to the map (see pag.63), before the suspension of this session due to inactiv-
ity.
Before closing the LX Map Manager [Read-Write] window (NMS5LX session with access to the RW map)
due to inactivity, the message INACTIVITY CHECK!! If you don’t acknowledge this dialog in x min your ses-
sion will automatically be closed is displayed.
If the user confirm his presence pressing OK, the session is not closed.
The continue inactivity period (frequency with which the RW inactivity message is displayed) and the period
during which the RW warning message is displayed on the screen (value x pointed out in the message) can
be configured by Superuser. These settings are valid for ALL the NMS5UX users with Read Write access.
The function Inactivity Check - RW Map can be activated on demand when the supervision system is
installed.
NMS5LX 6.4.8 - MN.00272.E - 001 66

MODALITY OF ACCESS TO THE EQUIPMENT WINDOW
The equipment window can be opened by more user at the same time.
In this window, the Read-Write access modality is acquired by the first user who opens the window itself
(independently if his access to the map is Read-Write or Read Only).
All the users, who open later the same equipment window, will have the access in Read Only modality.
normal and entry users has always Read Only access to the equipment window, even if they are the first
to open it.
The closure of the equipment window is not signalled on video.
It is not possible to request or to force the closure of the equipment window in Read-Write modality, but
it is possible to require (pag.380) or force (pag.380) the closure of the relevant Manager application.
NMS5LX 6.4.8 - MN.00272.E - 001 67

MODALITY OF ACCESS TO THE NODAL WINDOW
The nodal window (ALplus o ALCplus2) can be opened by one user at the same time.
It is not possible to request or to force the closure of the nodal window, but it is possible to require
(pag.380) or force (pag.380) the closure of the relevant Manager application.
NMS5LX 6.4.8 - MN.00272.E - 001 68

MODALITY OF ACCESS TO THE RING MANAGER WINDOW
The Ring Manager window relevant to the same Ring object can be opened by only one user at a time.
Instead more Ring Manager windows relevant to different Ring objects can be opened at the same time.
It is not possible to request or to force the closure of a Ring Manager window, but it is possible to require
NMS5LX 6.4.8 - MN.00272.E - 001 69

MODALITY OF ACCESS TO THE VLAN MANAGER MAP WINDOW
The Ring Manager window relevant to the same Ring object can be opened by only one user at a time.
Instead more Ring Manager windows relevant to different Ring objects can be opened at the same time.
It is not possible to request or to force the closure of a Ring Manager window, but it is possible to require
NMS5LX 6.4.8 - MN.00272.E - 001 70

PROCEDURES
START-UP/CLOSING OF NMS5LX GRAPHICAL INTER-

FACE (LOGIN/LOGOUT)
The first time that the NMS5LX graphic interface starts, after the installation of the system, refer to the
First start-up of the NMS5LX interface procedure (pag.74).
The next times, refer to the Start-up of the NMS5LX interface procedure (pag.72).
The start-up of the NMS5LX graphic interface corresponds to the opening of the LX Map Manager win-
dow (Fig.1).
It is possible to start more NMS5LX interfaces on more machines or on the same machine.
The maximum number of NMS5LX graphic interfaces that can be started at the same time depends on the
codeword required by the user.
NMS5LX 6.4.8 - MN.00272.E - 001 71

START-UP OF THE NMS5LX INTERFACE
The following procedure presumes that the NMS5LX system has been already installed on the machine
and that the processes necessary for the start-up of the interface. The procedure for the installation and
the start-up of the NMS5LX system is reported in the administrator manual.
It is supposed that the Linux user and the corresponding NMS5UX user, which you wish to use for the start-
up of the interface, have been created.
1. Start the machine up (pc, terminal, etc.).

The login window of the Linux operating system opens.
2. Type the name and the password of the Linux user in the relevant box.
If you have two or more Linux users, use the name/password of the Linux user associated to the
NMS5UX user that you wish to use to open the map.
3. Press the confirmation push-button.
If the typed data are correct, one's Linux operating system is started-up.
4. Open a terminal window.
5. On the command line, type:

cd /opt/nms5ux/start
./nmsWinMenu
6. Press Enter.
The TMNMENU window, shown in Fig.4 opens.
7. Double click on the icon:

• NMS5LX Login, to start the NMS5LX graphic interface.
If the user, used to start the interface, has profile:
• Superuser, privileged or advanced and it is the first user to access the default map rele-
vant to one's user, this one is opened in Read-Write modality.
• Superuser, privileged or advanced and it is not the first user to access to the default map
relevant to one's user, this one is opened in Read Only modality.
• Normal or entry, the default map relevant to one's user is opened in Read Only modality.
• NMS5LX Login R/O, to start the NMS5LX graphic interface; the default map, relevant to one's
user, is opened in Read Only modality.
The Login window opens and then the LX Map Manager window (Fig.1) opens with the default map as-
sociated to its user.
The Superuser and the users with privileged profile can change the map anytime (pag.137).
If the system displays the Your Account is expired. Please contact the system administrator message,
one's account is expired. Contact the Superuser to set a new user or modify the current validity period.
If the function of Manual login to the LX Map Manager window (pag.61) is active, in the Login window
it is necessary to:
a. Type the username of one's NMS5UX user into the Login box.
If you have two or more NMS5UX users, type the username of the NMS5UX user associated to
the Linux user used to start the operating system.
b. Type the password of the NMS5UX user into the Password box.
c. Press OK.
The LX Map Manager window opens with the default map associated to its user.
If the system displays the message:
• Incorrect Login, the typed name of the NMS5UX user is incorrect.
• Wrong Password, the typed password of the NMS5UX user is incorrect.
• Wrong Linux User, the used NMS5UX user is not compatible with the Linux user used for
the start-up of the operating system.
• Your Password is going to expire on <data>. Please change it, one's password is expiring.
To change it:
• Type, in the Old password box, the current password.
• Type, in the New password box, the new password (alphanumeric string,
NMS5LX 6.4.8 - MN.00272.E - 001 72

minimum 6 characters and maximum 21 characters).
• Type again, in the Confirm New Password box, the new password and press Ok.
If the Cancel push-button is pressed, the password is not changed and the LX Map Man-
ager window opens. On the next start of the NMS5LX graphic interface, the window for
the change of the password will be displayed again.
This window is displayed 5 days before the expiry of the user password. It will be dis-
played each time the user starts the graphic interface until the user changes the pass-
word or this one expires.
• Password expired. Please change it to login, one's password is expired. To change it:
• Type, in the Old password box, the current password.
• Type, in the New password box, the new password (alphanumeric string, mini-
mum 6 characters and maximum 21 characters).
• Type again, in the Confirm New Password box, the new password and press Ok.
If the Cancel push-button is pressed, the password is not changed and the LX Map Man-
ager window opens. To change the password and start the graphic interface, execute the
procedure of step 7 again.
If, after more attempts, the Incorrect Login, Wrong Password or Wrong Linux User message
is displayed for three times consecutively, the Login window is automatically closed. To start the
graphic interface, it is necessary to execute again the procedure of the step 7.
The Your Password is going to expire on <data>. Please change it and Password expired. Please
change it to login message are displayed ONLY if the periodical password change functionality
IS ACTIVE. It consists in requiring to the user to change his own password each N days (for ex-
ample each 6 months).
The functionality can be activated/deactivated by the Superuser, who, if he activates the func-
tionality, sets the interval between a password change and the successive one.
The activation of the periodical password change does not influence the expiry date of the user,
which can be set during the creation of a NMS5UX user. The two functionalities are independent
and can coexist at the same time.
Fig.4 TMNMENU window
Icons for the

management of
the database and
of the NMS5LX
platform (2)
Icons for the

start of the
NMS5LX
graphic
interface (1)
Fig.4 notes
(1) The selection of the icon:

• NMS5LX Login, allows starting the NMS5LX graphic interface.
If the user used to start the interface has profile:
• Superuser, privileged or advanced and it is the first user that access to the default
map relevant to one's user, this one is opened in Read-Write modality.
• Superuser, privileged or advanced and it is not the first user that access to the default
map relevant to one's user, this one is opened in Read Only modality.
• Normal or entry, the default map relevant to one's user is opened in Read Only mo-
dality.
• NMS5LX Login R/O, allows starting the NMS5LX graphic interface; the default map relevant
to one's user is opened in Read Only modality.
(2) The description and the use of these icons is reported in the administrator manual of the NMS5LX
system.
NMS5LX 6.4.8 - MN.00272.E - 001 73

FIRST START-UP OF THE NMS5LX INTERFACE
The following procedure supposes that the NMS5LX system has been already installed on the machine
and that the processes necessary to the start-up of the interface have been already activated. The proce-
dure for the installation and the start-up of the NMS5LX system is reported in the administrator manual.
1. Start-up the machine (PC, terminal, etc.).

The login window of the Linux operating system opens.
2. Type the name of the Linux user: nms5ux.
3. Type the password of the Linux user: nms5ux.
4. Press the confirmation push-button.

If the typed data are correct, one's Linux operating system is started.
5. Open a terminal window.
6. At the command line, type:

cd /opt/nms5ux/start
./nmsWinMenu
7. Press Enter.
The TMNMENU window, shown in Fig.4 opens.
8. Double click on the NMS5LX Login.

The Login window opens and then the The LX Map Manager window (Fig.1) opens with the nms5ux
map, which is empty if the system has not been pre-configured by SIAE MICROELETTRONICA.
The NMS5UX user, which the graphic interface has been started with, is assigned with the Superuser.
AS first operation, it is suggested to modify the password associated to this user (pag.372).
If the function of Manual login to the LX Map Manager window (pag.61) is active, in the Login window
it is necessary to:
a. Type, in the Login box, the name of the user: nms5ux.

b. Type, in the Password box, the user password: nms5ux.
c. Press OK.
The LX Map Manager window opens with the nms5ux map.
The displaying of the Incorrect Login message points out that the typed name or password are incorrect.
If, after more attempts, the Incorrect Login message is displayed for three times consecutively, the Login
window is automatically closed. To start the graphic interface, it is necessary to execute again the proce-
dure of the step 7.
NMS5LX 6.4.8 - MN.00272.E - 001 74

CLOSING OF THE NMS5LX GRAPHICAL INTERFACE
The closure of the NMS5LX graphical interface corresponds to the closing of the LX Map Manager window
(see pag.139).
The closure of the LX Map Manager window causes the automatic closure of all the possible open window
of NMS5LX (Alarm History Browser, Equipment Information, etc.).
NMS5LX 6.4.8 - MN.00272.E - 001 75

AUTOMATIC CLOSING OF THE NMS5LX GRAPHICAL INTERFACE
The LX Map Manager window is automatically closed when:
• The system displays the WARNING!! Forced Logout from Superuser message. The Superuser
user has forced the disconnection of the user from the map (see pag.378).
• The user closes the operation system.
NMS5LX 6.4.8 - MN.00272.E - 001 76

GRAPHIC NETWORK REPRESENTATION
After the installation of the NMS5LX system, it is necessary to represent the network graphically.
The network configuration can be executed both by SIAE MICROELETTRONICA and by the user. If the net-
work has been configured by SIAE MICROELETTRONICA, pass to the equipment connection (pag.101). In-
stead, if the network must be represented, follow the indication reported below.
The network representation is made using a series of predefined objects (see pag.78).
To create them, some general rules pointed out at pag.81 must be respected.
The creation of the objects can be executed using:
• Specific commands - Edit > Add menu (pag.84)

• Add Network From File functionality (pag.90)
• Auto Discovery functionality (pag.97)
NMS5LX 6.4.8 - MN.00272.E - 001 77

OBJECTS PRE-DEFINED FOR THE NETWORK REPRESENTATION
The pre-defined objects, available to the user for the network graphic representation, are:
• Container objects (pag.78)

• Network Element (NE) objects (pag.78)
• Generic Symbol objects (pag.79)
• Link objects (pag.80)
• Label objects (pag.80)
• Ring objects (pag.80)
• VLAN Map objects (pag.80)
Container objects
These objects are used as containers of equipment, symbols or other containers.
No special meaning is assigned by NMS5LX to these objects. They have been introduced to help the user
to arrange the network to rapidly locate the equipment.
In fact the Container objects allow having a better overview of the network, as they allow grouping the
items according to criteria that can be geographical or simply logical, for example they group equipment
that belong to the same department or are located in the same area.
The Container objects can be compared to the directories in the arrangement of the files on a PC.
Network Element objects
These objects are used to identify the real or virtual equipment: Radio SDH, Radio PDH, etc.
Real NE
Real equipment means those objects that have the corresponding equipment physically present in the net-
work.
A real NE is not automatically managed by the NMS5LX system when the relevant object is created, but
it is necessary to connect it. The only exception is when the created NE is already present in a map and it
is in connected status; in this case, the NE just after its creation acquires the condition of the same symbol
present in the other map.
Virtual NE
Virtual equipment means those objects that have not the corresponding equipment physically present in
the network.
When a virtual equipment is created, its configuration database is empty. In order to configure a virtual
equipment, it is necessary to copy the configuration of an equipment of the same type (real or virtual with
an already configured database) to the virtual equipment just created by means of the command Config-
uration Download (pag.256).
NMS5LX 6.4.8 - MN.00272.E - 001 78

Select the symbol of the virtual NE to open the relevant equipment window and set the configuration pa-
rameters, the user inputs, the user outputs, the control parameters for the PM measures, etc. More infor-
mation are reported in the equipment Manual.
Then the configuration of the virtual equipment can be transferred, always by means of the command Con-
figuration Download, to any equipment compatible with the considered virtual equipment.
NE of ALplus Node type
With NE object of ALplus Node type we do not mean a single equipment but a set of minimum 2 and max-
imum 3 ALplus equipment (nodal matrix) interconnected by Nodal Bus (Node).
These equipment are not managed one by one by the NMS5LX system, but are managed as a set repre-
sented by the object of ALplus Node type, which has not a corresponding real object present in the network
but works as container for the equipment of the nodal system.
The equipment of a node are not automatically managed by the NMS5LX system when the relevant
ALplus Node object is created, but it is necessary to connect them. The only exception is if the created
node is already present in a map in connected status; in this case, the equipment of the node will auto-
matically acquire the condition of the same ALplus Node symbol present in the other map.
NE of ALCplus2 Node type
With NE object of ALCplus2 Node type we do not mean a single equipment but a set of minimum 2 and
maximum 8 ALCplus2 equipment interconnected by a Nodal Bus (TDM traffic) and/or by LAN (Ethernet traf-
fic). (Node).
These equipment are not managed one by one by the NMS5ULX system, but are managed as a set repre-
sented by the object of ALCplus2 Node type, which has not a corresponding real object present in the net-
work but works as container for the equipment of the nodal system.
The equipment of a node are not automatically managed by the NMS5LX system when the relevant
ALCplus2 Node object is created, but it is necessary to connect them. The only exception is if the created
node is already present in a map in connected status; in this case, the equipment of the node will auto-
matically acquire the condition of the same ALCplus2 Node symbol present in the other map.
NE of WEB Generic type
This object is used to identify equipment, not managed by NMS5LX, which are provided with a WEB man-
agement interface.
In fact, these objects can be assigned an IP address and a NSAP address (as for the creation of a normal
NE to manage with the NMS5LX system). Selecting them, however, starts the default system browser with
the WEB page, available at the set address, active.
These objects were born in never connected (disconnected) status and their status do not change for the
rest of their life because, differently from other NE objects, the objects of WEB Generic type must not be
connected to start the connection.
In fact, for this type of object, not all the commands available for the NE objects are meaningful, for ex-
ample Connect, Disconnect, Network Alarm History, etc.
Generic Symbol objects
These objects are used to graphically represent elements present in the network as, for example: pc, mo-
dem, etc.
NMS5LX 6.4.8 - MN.00272.E - 001 79

The Generic Symbol objects, even if they have a physical match in the network, do not allow managing
the physical element which they are referred to, as they are a simple graphical representation.
Link objects
These objects are used to graphically represent a connection between two objects.
The Link objects, even if they have a physical match in the network, do not allow managing the con-
nections, which they are referred to, as they are a simple graphical representation.
Label objects
These objects are used to type a text string into the map.
Ring objects
These objects are used to identify subnetworks of PDH and SDH equipment, managed by the NMS5LX sys-
tem, which implement Paths.
The selection of a Ring object allows accessing to the relevant graphic interface represented by the Ring
Manager window (pag.50).
The use of the Ring Manager window is reported in the relevant user manual (see pag.502).
VLAN Map objects
These objects are used to identify subnetworks of radio equipment with Ethernet tributary, managed by
the NMS5LX system, which implement virtual LAN paths (VLAN path).
The selection of a VLAN Map object allows accessing to the relevant graphic interface represented by the
VLAN Manager Map window (pag.51).
The use of the VLAN Manager Map window is reported in the relevant user manual (see pag.502).
NMS5LX 6.4.8 - MN.00272.E - 001 80

RULES FOR THE CREATION OF THE OBJECTS
All the predefined objects must be created by the user. It is possible to add, delete, move or change the
configuration parameters of the objects anytime.
The network can be represented in a single map, or subdivided in more maps (see pag.21).
The objects of a map can be saved to file and, then, imported in a different map (see pag.132).
To avoid contemporaneous operations on the same object, only one user at a time can change the network
configuration in a map. This one has the access to the map in Read-Write modality: Read-Write user.
More users can access to the map at the same time. Only the Read-Write user can modify the network
configuration. The changes made by the Read-Write user are not dynamically displayed by the Read Only
users.
To update the information of a map in Read Only modality, it is necessary to update the LX Map Manager
window selecting the Map > Refresh command.
Besides the general instructions described above, for some objects the rules described here below must
be respected.
NE objects
It is possible to create all the equipment in a network in a single map or to subdivide the network in two
or more parts and to associate two or more maps to these parts.
In this case, at the opening of each map, only the part of network associated to this map will be visible
and manageable.
A NE object is displayed ONLY in the map where it has been created. If you wish that an equipment is
present in two different maps, it is necessary to create the relevant symbol in both the maps.
If the created NE symbol is already present in a map, it will automatically acquire the status of the already
existing object. For example, if the NE-1 symbol in connected status is present in the map A, when the NE-
1 symbol (same IP/Physical address) is created in the map B, the symbol will result connected as it inherits
the status of the twin symbol.
The same NE object can be created in more maps and/or more times in the same map.
It is possible to create new NE objects even if these have not been physically installed in the network, for
example because they are foreseen for a future installation. In this case, it will be possible to open the
relevant equipment window only after the first connection; then, only after the equipment has been phys-
ically installed in the network and has been connected.
It is, instead, possible to create virtual NE objects, that is objects not having a corresponding equipment
present in the network, but which can be configured as a normal NE. Then this configuration can be trans-
ferred to any (real or virtual) equipment compatible with the virtual NE (see pag.78).
The NE objects of WEB Generic type (see pag.79), after their creation, do not require any operation (line
test, connection) to be used.
NMS5LX 6.4.8 - MN.00272.E - 001 81

NE objects of ALplus Node type
For the NE objects of ALplus Node type, besides the rules defined for the NE objects, it is necessary to
follow the indications reported here below for their creation:
• Before creating an ALplus Node object, it is necessary that the ALplus node* has been already
defined (equipment forming the node, relevant IP address, etc.) locally by means of SCT/LMT
application. For more information, refer to the relevant documentation.
* The ALplus node term indicates the set of minimum 2 and maximum 3 ALplus equipment with
nodal matrix interconnected by Nodal Bus.
• If in the map there are already one or more copies of NE objects relevant to equipment belong-
ing to a node, before creating the relevant node it is necessary to DELETE all the copies of these
objects. This because the management of an equipment belonging to a node is supported by the
NMS5LX system only through the relevant nodal window.
• After the creation of a node, it is not possible to create NE objects relevant to the equipment
forming the node. Their management is carried out from the nodal window and not directly from
the map yet.
• During the creation of the node, the system requires the IP address of the node. This corre-
sponds to the IP address of the main equipment forming the node.
As general rule for the node management.
All the commands, present in the map menu and executed selecting the node, are automatically executed
for all the equipment composing the node (for example Connect, Disconnect, etc.). Instead, the command
not available in the map menu but available in the nodal window are executed selecting the single equip-
ment of the node (for example Configuration Download, NE Sw/Fw Release).
The connection/alarm status of the node always reflects the most severe status/alarm condition present
in the equipment composing the node.
NE objects of ALCplus2 Node type
For the NE objects of ALCplus2 Node type, besides the rules defined for the NE objects, it is necessary to
follow the indications reported here below for their creation:
• Before creating an ALCplus2 Node object, it is necessary that the ALCplus2 node* has been al-
ready defined (equipment forming the node, relevant IP address, etc.) locally by means of SCT/
LMT application. For more information, refer to the relevant documentation.
* The ALCplus2 node term indicates the set of minimum 2 and maximum 8 ALCplus2 equipment
interconnected by a Nodal Bus (TDM traffic) and/or by LAN (Ethernet traffic)
• If in the map there are already one or more copies of NE objects relevant to equipment belong-
ing to a node, before creating the relevant node it is necessary to DELETE all the copies of these
objects. This because the management of an equipment belonging to a node is supported by the
NMS5LX system only through the relevant nodal window.
• After the creation of a node, it is not possible to create NE objects relevant to the equipment
forming the node. Their management is carried out from the nodal window and not directly from
the map yet.
• During the creation of the node, the system requires the IP address of the node. This corre-
sponds to the IP address of the main equipment forming the node.
As general rule for the node management.
All the commands, present in the map menu and executed selecting the node, are automatically executed
for all the equipment composing the node (for example Connect, Disconnect, etc.). Instead, the command
not available in the map menu but available in the nodal window are executed selecting the single equip-
ment of the node (for example Configuration Download, NE Sw/Fw Release).
The connection/alarm status of the node always reflects the most severe status/alarm condition present
in the equipment composing the node.
NMS5LX 6.4.8 - MN.00272.E - 001 82

Container objects
The container map windows allow subdividing the network into hierarchical levels in such a way that it is
possible to arrive from a general view to the displaying of the single elements, passing through interme-
diate levels.
In fact the network, made by the objects that the supervision system must manage and control, can be
considered from different points of view.
It can be observed taken as a whole, as distribution of elements in a geographical area (for example sub
networks), or you can decide to study a single object to see its configuration; the user can decide at which
level, and then which detail, to access to the network information. In this way, subdividing the network in
containers, it is possible to easily pass from a general overview to a more and more detailed view.
The user is totally free in the creation of the number and type of levels that better fits to the structure of
one's network.
Ring objects
A Ring object is displayed ONLY in the map where it has been created. If you wish that a Ring is present
in two different maps, it is necessary to create the relevant symbol in both the maps.
If the created Ring symbol is already present in a map, it will automatically acquire the configuration of
the already existing object.
For instance, if in the map A there is the symbol Ring-1, where are configured the equipment NE-A, NE-B
and NE-C and the relevant Paths/Links, when the Ring–1 symbol (same physical address) is created in the
map B, the equipment NE-A, NE-B and NE-C and the relevant Paths/Links will result configured in the sym-
bol because the new symbol inherits the configuration of the twin symbol.
The same Ring object can be created in more maps and/or more times in the same map.
The commands for the creation/modification/deletion of the Ring objects are present in the Ring Manager
(pag.424) menu.
The menu is present in the LX Map Manager window only if the Ring Manager application, optional and
provided on demand, is installed.
VLAN Map objects
A VLAN Map object is displayed ONLY in the map where it has been created. If you wish that a VLAN Map
is present in two different maps, it is necessary to create the relevant symbol in both the maps.
If the created VLAN Map symbol is already present in a map, it will automatically acquire the configuration
of the already existing object.
For instance, if in the map A there is the symbol VLAN Map-1, where are configured the equipment NE-A,
NE-B and NE-C and the relevant VLAN paths/Links, when the VLAN Map–1 symbol (same physical address)
is created in the map B, the equipment NE-A, NE-B and NE-C and the relevant VLAN paths/Links will result
configured in the symbol because the new symbol inherits the configuration of the twin symbol.
The same VLAN Map object can be created in more maps and/or more times in the same map.
The commands for the creation/modification/deletion of the VLAN Map objects are present in the VLAN
Manager (pag.469) menu.
The menu is present in the LX Map Manager window only if the VLAN Manager application, optional and
provided on demand, is installed.
NMS5LX 6.4.8 - MN.00272.E - 001 83

OBJECTS CREATION - EDIT MENU
By means of the commands available in the LX Map Manager window, it is possible to create all pre-defined
objects available in the NMS5LX system.
In detail for the creation of the objects:
• Container, NE, Generic Symbol, Link and Label use the Edit > Add menu (pag.141).
• Ring use the Ring Manager > Edit > RM-Add Ring command (pag.425).
• VLAN Map use the VLAN Manager > Edit > VM-Add VLAN Map command (pag.470).
Here below a series of examples of graphic representation of a hypothetic network in one or more maps,
using the commands of Edit menu, is reported.
Examples of network graphical representation
Let us suppose to have to graphically display a certain Italia network shown in Fig.5, in such a way to be
able to execute its supervisory operations by means of the NMS5LX system.
The network is composed by Radio SDH, Radio PDH and PMP equipment.
The NMS5LX system is loaded on a PC connected to an equipment by means of an Ethernet LAN.
A specific IP address has been locally assigned to each equipment by means of LCT.
Fig.5 Example of network
Lan
Radio SDH Radio PDH Equipment

10.10.10.20 10.10.10.30 type
PMP
10.10.10.40
Radio SDH
Radio PDH Local IP address
10.10.10.21 of the
10.10.10.31
equipment
Radio SDH Radio PDH

10.10.10.22 10.10.10.32
Radio PDH
10.10.10.33
Before creating the objects that will allow to the system the management of the equipment, it is necessary
to subdivide the network into containers, objects, etc. Doing this, it is suggested to consider as the equi-
pment is connected and where they are located on the field.
In the first example (pag.85) the network is subdivided and graphically represented in the same map.
In the second example (pag.87) the network is subdivided and represented graphically in two maps. In
this case, at the opening of this map, only the part of the network associated to the specific map will be
visible and manageable.
NMS5LX 6.4.8 - MN.00272.E - 001 84

Graphical representation of the network into a map
In this example, we suppose that all the equipment of the Italia network (Fig.5) is created in the same
map: Italia map.
A possible subdivision of the network is shown in Fig.6.
Fig.6 Subdivision of the network into objects
Italia
(map)
Nord Italia
(container) 1
Milano
(container) 3
Sud Italia
Torino (container) 2
(container) 4
Lan
9 5
Radio SDH Radio PDH

10.10.10.20 10.10.10.30 12
10
PMP
6 10.10.10.40
Radio SDH
10.10.10.21 Radio PDH
10.10.10.31
11
7
Radio SDH Radio PDH
10.10.10.22 10.10.10.32
Radio PDH
10.10.10.33
In Fig.6, a name identifying a geographic area or a town has been associated to the containers. It is pos-
sible to assign any name to the Container objects, but it is suggested to set a name having a geographic
reference. In this way, it will be possible to determine the position of the equipment just from the name
of the symbol of the container.
An IP address and a logical address, different for each created NE object, have been assigned to each NE
object.
The IP Address must coincide with the IP Address locally set (by means of the LCT program) for the relevant
equipment. If the values do not coincide, it will not be possible to activate the connection with the equip-
ment.
The logical address corresponds to the name of the equipment that is displayed under the relevant icon.
Also in this case, as for the Container objects, it is possible to assign any value. It is suggested to assign
a name that makes easy the acknowledgement of the equipment.
Create the Italia map. The Superuser can create the map with a specific command (pag.371) or during the
creation of a new user privileged or advanced (pag.371).
Open the LX Map Manager window with a user associated to the Italia map (pag.72).
Now proceed in the creation of the objects (pag.141).
In order to create the objects, the map must be in Read-Write modality.
During the operation, follow a determinate order because it is not possible to create an object, for example
NE, if the Container object that must contain it has not been previously created.
NMS5LX 6.4.8 - MN.00272.E - 001 85

The first symbols that must be created are the Container objects: Nord Italia and Sud Italia.
Then open, for example, the Nord Italia container and create the objects present in it, and so on.
In Fig.6, all the objects that must be created by the user, in such a way that each equipment of the Italia
network can be managed by NMS5LX, are identified by a number (1, 2, etc.) located in the upper right
corner.
In Tab.5, for each object present in Fig.6 and identified by a number, some information is reported that
allows understanding how and where the symbol must be created. In detail, there is the indication of the
type of object that must be created, which values must be assigned to the parameters of the object and
in which container the symbol must be inserted. Furthermore, the order of the objects respects a possible
creation order that assures the creation of the Container objects before the creation of the objects con-
tained in them. The Generic Symbol, Link and Label objects can be added in any container.
In Tab.5 not all the parameters are indicated, but only those whose setting is necessary for the creation
of the object.
Tab.5 Subdivision of the network into objects
Type of object that Container where the Setting of the values of the
Object
must be created object must be created main parameters
1 Container Italia * Label: Nord Italia
2 Container Italia * Label: Sud Italia
3 Container Nord Italia Label: Milano
4 Container Nord Italia Label: Torino

IP Address: 10.10.10.30
5 Network Element Milano Logical Address: PDH 30 **
Type: Radio PDH
IP Address: 10.10.10.31
Type: Radio PDH
IP Address: 10.10.10.32
Type: Radio PDH
IP Address: 10.10.10.33
Type: Radio PDH
IP Address: 10.10.10.20
9 Network Element Torino Logical Address: SDH 20 **
Type: Radio SDH
IP Address: 10.10.10.21
Type: Radio SDH
IP Address: 10.10.10.22
Type: Radio SDH
IP Address: 10.10.10.40
12 Network Element Sud Italia Logical Address: PMP 40 **
Type: PMP
* Main container that represents the map: it is created with the map and automatically acquires its name.
** The user can set any value, different from the displayed one.
The creation of an object implies the displaying of the relevant symbol on video.
By means of the Container symbol, it is possible to display the detail of the network where the equipment
is contained, for example as shown in Fig.7, for the PMP 40 equipment of the Italia network.
NMS5LX 6.4.8 - MN.00272.E - 001 86

Fig.7 Example of network (LX Map Manager window)
Now the NMS5LX system knows all the information that allows managing each single equipment when it
will be connected.
Graphic representation of the network in more map
In this example, we suppose that the Italia network (Fig.5) is subdivided and graphically represented in
two map, in such a way that at the opening of the map only the part of network associated to the specific
map will be visible and manageable.
A possible subdivision of the network is shown in Fig.8.
NMS5LX 6.4.8 - MN.00272.E - 001 87

Fig.8 Example of network subdivided in more maps
Nord Italia
(map)
Milano
(container) 1
Sud Italia
Torino (map)
(container) 2
Lan
7 3
Radio SDH Radio PDH

10.10.10.20 10.10.10.30 10
8 PMP
4 10.10.10.40
Radio SDH
10.10.10.21 Radio PDH
10.10.10.31
9 5
Radio SDH Radio PDH
10.10.10.22 10.10.10.32
Radio PDH
10.10.10.33
In Fig.8, a name identifying a geographical area or town has been associated to the maps and to the con-
tainers. It is possible to assign any name to the maps and to the Container objects, but it is suggested to
set a name that has a geographical reference. In this way, it will be possible to determine the position of
the equipment just from the name of the map and of the container symbol.
An IP address and a logic address, different for each created NE object, have been assigned to each NE.
The IP Address must coincide with the locally set IP Address (via LCT program) for the relevant equipment.
If the values do not coincide, it will not be possible to activate the connection with the equipment.
The logical address corresponds to the name of the equipment that is displayed under the relevant icon.
Also in this case, as for the Container object, it is possible to assign any value. It is suggested to assign a
name that makes easy the acknowledging of the equipment.
Now proceed in the following way:
1. Create the Nord Italia and Sud Italia maps.

Create the Italia map. The Superuser can create the map with a specific command (pag.371) or during
the creation of a new user privileged or advanced (pag.371).
2. Open the LX Map Manager window with a user, which the Nord Italia map is associated to (pag.72).
3. Create some objects (pag.141).

In order to create the objects, the map must be in Read-Write modality.
During the operation, a specific order must be followed as it is not possible to create an object, for ex-
ample NE, if before the Container object that must contain it has not been created.
The first symbols that must be created are the Container objects: Milano and Torino.
Then, open the Milano container and create the objects present in it, and so on.
In Fig.8, all the objects that must be created by the user, in such a way that each equipment of the
Nord Italia map can be managed by NMS5LX, are identified by a number (1, 2, etc.) located in the upper
right corner.
In Tab.6, for each object present in Fig.8 and identified by a number, some information is reported that
allows understanding how and where the symbol must be created. In detail, there is the indication of
the type of object that must be created, which values must be assigned to the parameters of the object
and in which container the symbols must be inserted. Furthermore, the order of the objects list reflects
NMS5LX 6.4.8 - MN.00272.E - 001 88

a possible creation order that ensures the creation of the Container objects before the creation of the
objects which these must contain.
The Generic Symbol, Link and Label objects can be added in any container.
In Tab.6 not all the parameters are indicated, but only those whose setting is necessary for the creation
of the object.
4. Close the Nord Italia map.
5. Open the LX Map Manager window with an user which the Sud Italia map is associated to.
6. Create the objects as displayed in Tab.6.
At the opening of each map, only the part of network associated to the open map will be visible and
manageable.
It is possible to create a NE symbol in two different maps. In this case, it is necessary to create the symbol
in both the map, assigning to it the same characteristics (IP address, type, etc.). At the creation of the
second symbol, given that the object is already present in a map, it will automatically acquire the status
of the already existing twin symbol.
Tab.6 Objects of a network subdivided in more maps
Map where
Type of object Container where
the object Setting of the values of the
Object that must be the object must
must be main parameters
created be created
created
1 Nord Italia Container Nord Italia * Label: Milano
2 Nord Italia Container Nord Italia * Label: Torino
3 Nord Italia Network Element Milano IP Address: 10.10.10.30
Logical Address: PDH 30 **
Type: Radio PDH
Type: Radio PDH
Type: Radio PDH
Type: Radio PDH
7 Nord Italia Network Element Torino IP Address: 10.10.10.20
Logical Address: SDH 20 **
Type: Radio SDH
Type: Radio SDH
Type: Radio SDH
10 Sud Italia Network Element Sud Italia * IP Address: 10.10.10.40
Logical Address: PMP 40 **
Type: PMP
* Main container that represents the map: it is created with the map and automatically acquires its name.
** The user can set any value, different from the displayed one.
NMS5LX 6.4.8 - MN.00272.E - 001 89

OBJECTS CREATION - ADD NETWORK FROM FILE FUNCTIONALITY
The Add Network From File functionality allows automatically adding a group of predefined objects whose
characteristics have been edited in a file (csv format) to a map of the NMS5LX system.
The predefined objects, which can be automatically created by the considered functionality, are:
• Container objects (pag.78)

• Network Element objects (pag.78)
• Link objects (pag.80)
• Label objects (pag.80)
The use of the functionality is structured in the following phases:
1. To create the file in csv format (pag.90).
2. To copy the file (.csv) to the server where the NMS5LX system is installed (default directory opt/
nms5ux/data/files).
The file must be transferred in ASCII format.
3. To open the LX Map Manager window:
• Relevant to the map defined in the file (see pag.92).
The map must be opened in Read-Write mode.
• With a user whose profile is Advanced, Privileged or Superuser.
4. To open the file (.csv) by means of the Edit > Add > Network From File command.
Opening the file involves the automatic creation of the objects in the LX Map Manager window.
At the end of the operation, the result of the creation is pointed out for each object.
The use of the Network From File command is pointed out at (pag.144).
At pag.94 an example is reported of complete use of the Add Network From File functionality.
To create the file in csv format
The Add Network From File functionality supports files in csv format with a predefined structure.
The user can create the file in the wished mode, but always respecting:
• The format (.csv)
• The file structure described at pag.90.
• The rules for the compilation of the file, pointed out at pag.92.
At pag.93 the procedure for the creation of the csv file, starting from a model in xls format, is reported.
Structure of the csv file
Tab.7 points out the structure of a row of csv file. The column:
• Parameter, displays the fields of the row.
According to the csv format, each field is separated from the next one by the character ";".
• Possible values, displays the valid values.
Entering a different value or a value not in compliance with what displayed prevents the creation
of the object.
Fig.11 shows an example of structure of a csv file opened by a text editor.
NMS5LX 6.4.8 - MN.00272.E - 001 90

Tab.7 File structure (Add Network From File functionality)
Parameter Possible values
Category If you wish to create an object:

(Category of the object • Label, type 1 or LABEL
you wish to create) • Container, type 2 or CONTAINER
• NE, type 3 or NE
• Link, type 100 or LINK
Type The possible values for this parameter change depending on the value set for the
(Type of object, within the Category parameter.
category, you wish to cre- In detail, if you wish to create a:
ate)
Container object of type:
• Subnetwork, type 501 or Subnetwork
• Station, type 502 or Station
• SubStation, type 503 or Substation
• Radio Station, type 504 or Radio Station
• Small Station, type 505 or Small Station
NE object of type
• EL series radio, type 1 or Radio PDH
• US series radio, type 2 or Radio SDH
• PMP system, type 3 or PMP
• CommServer–S equipment, type 4 or CS
• ADM–C multiplexer, type 5 or ADM-C
• ALS series radio with AL IDU/ALC IDU, type 7 or Radio PDH-AL
• ELFO radio, type 8 or ELFO
• ADM–1 multiplexer, type 9 or ADM-1
• ALS series radio with ALS IDU/ALS-C IDU, type 11 or ALS
• ALFO radio, type 12 or ALFO
• ALS series radio with AL IDU plus, type 14 or ALplus
• SDH N+1 radio, type 15 or SDH N+1
• ALS series radio with ALC IDU plus, type 16 or ALCplus
• ALS series radio with ALplus2 IDU, type 17 o ALplus2
• ALS series radio with ALCplus2 IDU, type 18 o ALCplus2
• ALS series radio with ALCplus2e IDU, type 19 or ALCplus2e
• FAMxc 5RU multiplexer, type 22 or FAMxc
• FAMxc 2.5RU multiplexer, type 24 or FAMxc 2.5
• IPBOX equipment, type 40 or IP-BOX
• AGS10 equipment, type 20 or AGS10
• EXP63 multiplexer, type 41 or EXP63
• ALplus node, type 64 or ALplus Node
• ALCplus2 node, type 61 or ALCplus2 Node
• Web Generic, type 94 or WEB Generic
Link object of type:

• Generic line, type 1 or GENERIC
• Dashed line, type 2 or DASHED
• Dotted line, type 3 or DOTTED
• Dotdash line, type 4 or DOTDASH
Label object, compiling this field is not meaningful. Type “-”
NMS5LX 6.4.8 - MN.00272.E - 001 91

Parameter Possible values
IP-ADDRESS If you are creating a NE object, type the IP address (SNMP agent) of the equipment.
(Parameter meaningful For the NE object type:
only for the NE object) • ALplus Node or ALCplus2 Node, type the IP address of the main equip-
ment of the node.
• PMP, type the IP address of the Proxy interface used for the connection
to the master station.
If you are creating a Label, Container or Link object, compiling this field is not
meaningful. Type "-"
NSAP If you are creating a NE object into an OSI network, white the NSAP address
(Parameter meaningful (GOSIP) of the equipment.
only for NE objects insert-
ed in an OSI network) If you are creating a Label, Container, Link or NE object not inserted in an OSI
network, compiling this field is not meaningful. Type “-”
Name If you are creating an object:
(Object name) • NE, type an alphanumeric string of max 32 characters
• Container, type an alphanumeric string of max 48 characters
• Link, type an alphanumeric string of max 40 characters
• Label, type an alphanumeric string of max 50 characters
Map Type the name of the map where you wish to create the object
(Map name)
Path If you are creating a NE, Container or Label object, type the complete path where
(Position of the map where you wish to create the object.
the object must be creat- Use the symbol / to point out the different level.
ed) Example. If you are creating a NE object and you type the path Europe/Italy/Rome,
this means that the equipment must be created in the container Rome, contained
in the container Italy contained, in its turn, in the container Europe.
If you are creating a Link object, compiling this field is not meaningful. Type “-”
x If you are creating a NE, Container or Label object, type the position X (range 0-
(Position X of the object in 10) the object must take in the View area of the LX Map Manager window.
the View area. If X = 0 and Y = 0, the graphic symbol is created in the New Object area.
An 10x10 hypothetic grid
is taken as reference) If you are creating a Link object, compiling this field is not meaningful. Type “-”
y If you are creating a NE, Container or Label object, type the position Y (range 0-
(Position Y of the object in 10) the object must take in the View area of the LX Map Manager window.
the View area. If X = 0 and Y = 0, the graphic symbol is created in the New Object area.
An 10x10 hypothetic grid
is taken as reference) If you are creating a Link object, compiling this field is not meaningful. Type “-”
Rules of the compilation of the csv file
Every Container, NE, Label or Link object you wish the Add Network From File functionality automatically
creates must be inserted in the csv file.
Every object corresponds to a row.
All the object parameters (Category, Type, etc.) must be compiled as pointed out in Tab.7. If a parameter
is not meaningful for the considered object, type the character - (hyphen) in the relevant field.
Besides the general indications described above, some of the rules described below must be respected.
NMS5LX 6.4.8 - MN.00272.E - 001 92

Map parameter
All the objects inserted in a file must have the same value for the Map parameter.
This means that you must insert into a csv file only the objects you wish to create in a specific map.
This map is the map the user shall open (in Read-Write mode) (see step 3 of the procedure described
at pag.90).
If you wish to create the objects of a network which must be represented in more maps, the objects shall
be subdivided according to the belonging map and a csv file shall be created for each map.
Path parameter
The Path parameter represents the position, within the map, where the object must be created.
To point out the containing levels, use the symbol /.
Example. If you are creating a NE object, typing the path:
• Europe/Italy/Rome, means that the equipment must be created within the container Rome, con-
tained in the container Italy, in its turn contained in the container Europe.
• /, means that the equipment must be created within the main container (level Map - see Fig.2).
If the container name includes the character / the container name must be enclosed between inverted
commas (" ") in the description of the Path.
For example, in the description of a path the container Station A/B must be inserted in the following way
/Europe/Italy/”StationA/B”
If an object must be created in a container, this container must be already present in the map or must be
defined in the csv file (then created) before the object it must contain.
Example. Suppose to have to create the object NE1 in the container Italy and this container is not already
present in the map. In the csv file, the row defining the container Italy must be placed before the row de-
fining the NE object.
Link object definition
For the creation of a Link object, the parameters Category, Type, Name and Map must be pointed out.
The parameters IP Address and NSAP are not meaningful.
In this case, even the parameters Path, X, Y are not meaningful as the position of a Link object is deter-
mined by the position of the two objects Container and/or NE and/or Label which it must end.
This position is determined by the following rule:
A Link object is created as connection between the two Container/NE/Label objects described
in the two previous rows.
If an object of Link type is present in the two rows before (e.g., in row 8) the row of a Link (e.g., in row
10), the creation of the Link (e.g. in row 10) will not be carried out.
To compile the csv file starting from a model
A model file, which can be used as starting point for the creation of the file, is available in the server where
one’s NMS5LX system.
The considered path/model file is the following:

opt/nms5ux/data/files/AddNetworkFromFile_TEMPLATE.xls.
The model is in xls format and the user must have an application program supporting this format (e.g., MS
Excel) to use it.
NMS5LX 6.4.8 - MN.00272.E - 001 93

For the creation of the csv file through the model AddNetworkFromFile_TEMPLATE.xls, carry out the fol-
lowing operations:
1. If one’s machine is not provided with an application program supporting the xls format, copy the file
AddNetworkFromFile_TEMPLATE.xls to a PC provided with this application program.
2. Open the AddNetworkFromFile_TEMPLATE.xls file and rename it as you wish.
3. Define every single object you wish insert in the file typing the relevant characteristics in the specified
column of the table named TEMPLATE.
Each row represents an object.
Tab.7 reports, for every column, the list of values you can insert.
Before compiling the file, it is suggested to read the rules pointed out at pag.92.
The rows, whose first character is #, have been inserted only to help the user in the file compilation.
The information present in these rows WILL NOT be considered in the automatic creation of the objects,
then it is not necessary to remove them at the end of the compilation of the file.
The only information used for the automatic creation of the objects are those present in the
TEMPLATE table.
4. Save the file in csv format.
Example of use of Add Network From File functionality
Suppose to wish to graphically represent an hypothetic link ALplus1 - ALplus2 in the map nms5ux using
the Add Network From File functionality.
Before compiling the csv file, it is necessary to define if the link must be placed at the main level in the LX
Map Manager window or if it must be inserted into a container and which auxiliary objects (Link and Label)
you wish to create.
A possible representation of the link is depicted in Fig.9.
Fig.9 Representation of the link (example Add Network From File)
Example (Container)
Station A (Container)
ALplus 1
(NE)
ALplus 1 - ALplus 2 (Link)
Remote ALplus2 (Label)
Station A- Station B (Link)
Remote ALplus1 (Label)
ALplus 1 - ALplus 2 (Link)
ALplus 2
(NE)
Station B (Container)
Fig.9 points out, for every item to insert in the csv file, the object category (between brackets) and the
name.
At this point, the csv file can be created.
NMS5LX 6.4.8 - MN.00272.E - 001 94

Taking the model AddNetworkFromFile_TEMPLATE.xls (seepag.93) as reference and following the rules
pointed out at pag.92 and in Tab.7, the AddNetworkFromFile_EXAMPLE.csv file, depicted in Fig.10, has
been created.
Fig.11 shows the same file opened by means of a text editor.
Fig.10 AddNetworkFromFile_EXAMPLE.csv file (Add Network From File example)
Fig.11 AddNetworkFromFile_EXAMPLE.csv file (test editor)
At this point, it is necessary to copy the file AddNetworkFromFile_EXAMPLE.csv to the server where the
NMS5LX system is installed (directory opt/nms5ux/data/files).
Then open the LX Map Manager window with the map nms5ux in Read-Write mode using a user with profile
Advanced, Privileged or Superuser (pag.72).
NMS5LX 6.4.8 - MN.00272.E - 001 95

Select the Edit > Add > Network From File command and open the opt/nms5ux/data/files/
AddNetworkFromFile_EXAMPLE.csv file.
The Add From File Report...AddNetworkFromFile_EXAMPLE.csv window, shown in Fig.12, opens.
Fig.12 Add From File Report window (Add Network From File example)
The automatic creation of each objects implies the displaying of the relevant symbol on LX Map Manager
window as shown in Fig.13.
Fig.13 LX Map Manager window (Add Network From File example)
NMS5LX 6.4.8 - MN.00272.E - 001 96

OBJECT CREATION - AUTO DISCOVERY FUNCTIONALITY
The Auto Discovery functionality allows detecting the equipment present in the network and not managed
yet by the supervision system.
When a new equipment is detected, NMS5LX automatically carries out the following actions:
• It inserts the detected equipment into the Auto Discovery table.
• It creates the corresponding object in a given map/container (optional operation).
• It connects the NE object (optional operation).
Moreover the functionality can detect and notify the user if the type of an object, already managed by
NMS5LX, is changed.
The Auto Discovery functionality puts two modalities to detect new equipment present in the network at
user’s disposal:
• Network Scan modality (pag.97)
• NE Wake Up modality (pag.99)
In order to work, the two modalities must be configured and activated by the user and can
be active at the same time or one at a time.
Network Scan modality
The Network Scan modality has the purpose to detect new equipment in the network, not managed by
NMS5LX yet, and equipment whose type is changed (equipment described in the DB of the supervision
system, but of a type not corresponding to the real one).
The search is executed by a cyclic scanning of the network, executing a SNMP get on all the IP addresses
belonging to given intervals (configurable by the user).
When an equipment answers to the SNMP get, if the equipment:
• Is NOT managed by NMS5LX yet, it is inserted into the list of the detected equipment and the
relevant NE object, if configured by the user, is created and connected.
• Is already managed by NMS5LX but with a type different from that pointed out in the network
for the specific IP Address, a notify of type change is inserted in the Auto Discovery table.
Example. Suppose that an EL series equipment with address 172.22.13.6 is managed by
NMS5LX. At a given moment, the EL equipment in the network is replaced by an ALplus equip-
ment. The address 172.22.13.6 is assigned to the new equipment.
If the user activates the Network Scan modality and defines that the address 172.22.13.6 is in-
cluded in the scanned IP address, on the detection of the 172.22.13.6 address a notify of type
change is inserted in the Auto Discovery table.
The equipment captured by the Network Scan and NE Wake Up modalities and the notify of the equip-
ment whose type is changed are inserted in the Auto Discovery table.
The table can be displayed any time by the user opening the Network Element Captured window (Fig.53).
For the new captured equipment, besides the characteristics, the action automatically executed by the sys-
tem on the detection are pointed out.
In order to work, the Network Scan modality must be activated by the user. Before activating it, it is nec-
essary to define the operating parameters of the modality.
Then it will be possible to modify, in any moment, one or more parameters and establish if activating im-
mediately the new configuration or, if the modality is already active, waiting for the expiry of the current
scanning in progress.
Moreover, it is possible to save a given setting of the parameters to a file an retrieve it in a second moment
(see pag.332).
NMS5LX 6.4.8 - MN.00272.E - 001 97

Setting of the parameters for the execution of the Network Scan mode
The parameters, which must be defined by the user and must be used by the Network Scan modality, are
the following:
• IP addresses which must be scanned. One or more ranges of addresses and/or single IP address
can be defined.
• Scheduling of execution of the cyclic scanning: once per day or continuous each X (hours:min-
utes) and number of IP addresses which must be scanned at the same time each X (seconds).
Example. Suppose that the cyclic scanning is set to be continuous each 3 hours and that, at each
scanning, 5 equipment must be scanned each 4 seconds. The IP addresses to scan in total count-
ing groups and single addresses are 15.
The scheduling of the cyclic scanning will take place as displayed in the following figure.
Interrogation Interrogation
4s 4s 4s 4s
5 IP Add. 5 IP Add. 5 IP Add. 3h 5 IP Add. 5 IP Add. 5 IP Add.
• Action to execute automatically on the detection of a new equipment. It is possible to choose

among one of the following actions:
• Insertion in the Auto Discovery table, creation and connection of the relevant NE symbol.
• Insertion in the Auto Discovery table and creation of the NE symbol.
In this case, the equipment can be connected in a second moment.
• Only insertion in the Auto Discovery table.
In this case, it will be possible then to create the equipment by means of a command
present in the Auto Discovery table (pag.335) or by the command Edit > Add (pag.142)
and to connect it.
• Map where the NE symbol must be possibly created.
When the NE is created (automatically or manually by means of command of the Auto Dis-
covery table), if the map where the object must be created (map A) is different from that cur-
rently open (map B), the creation of the NE object will take place in the following way:
• If the map A is open in Read-Write modality, the object is created and dynamically dis-
played in the map.
• If the map A is open in Read Only modality, the object is created but not displayed. It is
necessary to execute a Refresh command on the map in order to display it.
• Container where the NE symbol must be possibly created.
If the container is not present in the set map, on the creation of the NE object, the container
will be automatically created too.
The NE object is not directly created into the container set by the user, but in the following
path:
/ <container set by the user> / <year> / <year/month> / <day/month/year>
Example. Suppose to have set the container Station-A. On June 23th 2009 the equipment AL24
is created (automatically or manually by means of the command of the Auto Discovery table)
and the corresponding symbol will be created in the container:
Station-A / 2009 / 06/2009 / 23/06/2009
Fig.14 displays an example.
NMS5LX 6.4.8 - MN.00272.E - 001 98

Fig.14 Path containing the NE (example Auto Discovery)
The procedure to set the parameters for the execution of the Network Scan modality is reported at
pag.329.
Activation (deactivation) of the Network Scan modality
Once the execution parameters have been defined, it is necessary to activate the Network Scan modality.
The modality is automatically activated if at least one IP address or a group of IP addresses has been set
and the configuration has been saved by means of the command Save as Active Conf (Fig.52).
The Network Scan modality remains active until when the user deactivates it removing all the values
present in the areas Range IP Addresses and Specific IP Addresses (Fig.52) and saving the new setting by
means of the command Save as Active Conf.
The procedure to activate and deactivate the Network Scan modality is respectively reported at pag.329
and pag.331.
NE Wake Up modality
The NE Wake Up modality has the purpose to detect new equipment in the network not managed yet by
NMS5LX.
In this modality, the supervision system intercepts the Wake Up notifications sent by the equipment and
containing the information necessary to the connection and the management of the equipment itself.
When a Wake Up trap is intercepted, the NMS5LX system carries out the following actions:
• It disables the sending of Wake Up traps by the equipment (trap switch-off).

• If the equipment which sent the trap:
• Is NOT managed yet by NMS5LX, this inserts it in the list of detected equipment and, if
configured by the user, creates and connects the relevant NE object.
• Is already managed by NMS5LX but with a type different from that pointed out in the
network for the specific IP Address, a notify of type change is inserted in the Auto Dis-
covery table.
Example. Suppose that an EL series equipment with address 172.22.13.6 is managed by
NMS5LX. At a given moment, the EL equipment in the network is replaced by an ALplus
equipment. The address 172.22.13.6 is assigned to the new equipment.
If the user activates the NE Wake Up modality and defines that the address 172.22.13.6
is included in the scanned IP addresses, on the detection of the 172.22.13.6 address a
notify of type change is inserted in the Auto Discovery table.
The Wake Up notification is a SNMP trap sent by the equipment to the supervision system to notify its
presence in the network.
The configuration of the Wake Up trap (activation or not of the trap, IP/NSAP address of the machine which
NMS5LX 6.4.8 - MN.00272.E - 001 99

the trap must be sent to, modality of trap sending, etc.) MUST be executed by the local management pro-
gram LCT. For more information, see the relevant documentation.
The equipment captured by the Network Scan and NE Wake Up modalities and the notify of the equipment
whose type is changed are inserted in the Auto Discovery table.
The table can be displayed any time by the user opening the Network Element Captured window (Fig.53).
For the new captured equipment, besides the characteristics, the action automatically executed by the sys-
tem on the detection are pointed out.
In order to work, the NE Wake Up modality must be activated by the user. Before activating it, it is nec-
essary to define the operating parameters of the modality.
Then it will be possible to modify, in any moment, one or more parameters and establish if activating im-
mediately the new configuration or, if the modality is already active, waiting for the expiry of the current
scanning in progress. Moreover, it is possible to save a given setting of the parameters to a file an retrieve
it in a second moment (see pag.332).
Setting of the parameters for the execution of the NE Wake Up mode
The parameters, which must be defined by the user and must be used by the NE Wake Up modality, are
the following:
• Action which must be automatically executed on the detection of a new equipment. It is possible
to choose among one of the following equipment:
• Insertion in the Auto Discovery table, creation and connection of the relevant NE symbol.
• Insertion in the Auto Discovery table and creation of the NE symbol.
In this case, the equipment can be connected in a second moment.
• Only insertion into the Auto Discovery table.
In this case, the equipment can be created in a second moment by means of the com-
mand present in the Auto Discovery table (pag.335) or by the command Edit > Add
(pag.142) and connect it.
• Map where the NE symbol must be possibly created.
When the NE is created (automatically or manually by means of command of the Auto Dis-
covery table), if the map where the object must be created (map A) is different from that cur-
rently open (map B), the creation of the NE object will take place in the following way:
• If the map A is open in Read-Write modality, the object is created and dynamically dis-
played in the map.
• If the map A is open in Read Only modality, the object is created but not displayed. It is
necessary to execute a Refresh command on the map in order to display it.
• Container where the NE symbol must be possibly created.
If the container is not present in the set map, on the creation of the NE object, the container
will be automatically created too.
The NE object is not directly created into the container set by the user, but in the following
path:
/ <container set by the user> / <year> / <year/month> / <day/month/year>
Example. Suppose to have set the container Station-A. On June 23th 2009 the equipment AL24
is created (automatically or manually by means of the command of the Auto Discovery table)
and the corresponding symbol will be created in the container:
Station-A / 2009 / 06/2009 / 23/06/2009
The procedure to set the parameters for the execution of the NE Wake Up modality is reported at pag.331.
Activation (deactivation) of the NE Wake Up modality
Once the execution parameters have been defined, it is necessary to activate the NE Wake Up modality.
The modality is activated (deactivated) activating (deactivating) the Manage Wake-up trap option and sav-
ing the configuration by means of the command Save as Active Conf (Fig.52).
The procedure to activate and deactivate the NE Wake Up modality is reported respectively at pag.331 and
pag.332.
NMS5LX 6.4.8 - MN.00272.E - 001 100

EQUIPMENT CONNECTION
After having graphically represented the network, it is necessary to activate the connection, then the com-
munication, between the NMS5LX system (logic NE objects created by the users) and the peripheral area
(physical equipment).
Doing this, we suppose that the correct operation of the physical connection is ensured by the TCP/IP
network.
NMS5LX 6.4.8 - MN.00272.E - 001 101

CONNECTION PROCEDURE
When the user sends the connection command, the NMS5LX system sends a test message to verify the
reach ability of the equipment (Line Test).
If the test has result:

• NEGATIVE, the procedure is stopped: the equipment is not connected.
• POSITIVE, the system sends the global network parameters and then reads/acquires from the
equipment the current configuration and the alarms: the equipment is connected.
At the first connection the system, having no information stored in the database, acquires all the informa-
tion from the NE.
Then, the equipment itself will spontaneously inform the supervisory system about possible changes con-
cerning the configuration or the status of the alarms (SNMP trap).
A polling cycle from the supervisory system is kept only to check the reachability status of the equipment.
The connection of an equipment causes the automatic insertion of the equipment itself into the specific
polling cycle.
Only after that an equipment has been connected at least once, it is possible to open the relevant equip-
ment window.
NMS5LX 6.4.8 - MN.00272.E - 001 102

COMMANDS FOR THE MANAGEMENT OF THE CONNECTION
In order to modify the connection status of an equipment or to execute some tests or to re-align the infor-
mation stored in the database, the following commands are available:
• Line Test (pag.103)

• Connect (pag.103)
• Disconnect (pag.103)
• Alarm Re-alignment (pag.104)
• Configuration Upload (pag.104)
Line Test command
The Line Test command checks the real reach ability of the equipment.
The check consists in the request of the NMS5LX system to an NE of the value of the chosen parameter:
if the NE answers, the test has successful result, otherwise it fails.
All the NE, independently from their type or connection status, are programmed to answer to the test
message. Furthermore, the sending of the command does not influence the connection or alarm status of
the Network Element.
For the use of the command, refer to the par. Line Test (pag.244).
Connect command
The Connect command activates the connection between the NMS5LX system and the remote equipment.
At the end of the procedure, if the result is positive, the system will be able to communicate with the NE,
it will have all the information relevant to the current status of the alarms and to the configuration and will
have sent the network time to the equipment.
It is not possible to connect an equipment in connected status. Furthermore, the connection command
towards an equipment in unreachable status is automatically sent by the system at regular intervals.
For the use of the command, refer to par. Connect (pag.246).
Disconnect command
The Disconnect command deactivates the connection between NMS5LX and the remote equipment: the
system stops the management of the present NE.
The disconnection of an equipment does not involve the deletion of the relevant information from the
database; they stay stored, even if the equipment is disconnected; the user can open the relevant equip-
ment window where the last acquired configuration is displayed.
For the use of the command, refer to par. Disconnect (pag.248).
NMS5LX 6.4.8 - MN.00272.E - 001 103

Alarm Re-alignment command
The Alarm Re-alignment command re-aligns the current alarms of an equipment.
The re-aligning procedure involves that the system deletes the information present in the current alarms
table, relevant to the NE involved in the operation. Then the system requires to the NE the status of its
alarms and stores them in the current alarms table. The content of the current alarms table can be di-
splayed opening the Current Alarms Browser window (Fig.40).
This operation does not influence the connection status of the NE or its configuration.
It is suggested to select the command only when you suppose that a misalignment between the alarm
information known by the NMS5LX system and the real alarm situation present on NE occurred. In fact this
command does not represent the normal procedure to acquire the operating status of an equipment.
For the use of the command, refer to par. Alarm Re-alignment (pag.252).
Configuration Upload command
The Configuration Upload command re-aligns the information, relevant to the configuration and the
alarms, stored in the database to those really present in the equipment.
The execution mode of the procedure is fundamentally equal to the one used for the execution of the re-
aligning procedure on the alarms (pag.104); the only difference is that the system requires to the equip-
ment the status of the alarms and also the configuration information relevant to all the objects known by
the equipment itself. Also in this case, the information replace the ones recorded into the database.
This operation does not influence the status of connection of the NE.
It is suggested to select the command only when you suppose that a misalignment between the alarm
information known by the NMS5LX system and the real configuration and operating status of the NE oc-
curred. In fact this command does not represent the normal procedure to acquire the information relevant
to an equipment.
For the use of the command, refer to par. Configuration Upload (pag.254).
NMS5LX 6.4.8 - MN.00272.E - 001 104

CONNECTION STATUSES OF THE EQUIPMENT
The connection status of an equipment shows to the user if the equipment is managed by NMS5LX and, if
managed, its operating status (alarms).
The status of an equipment are:
• Disconnected (pag.105)
• Connected (pag.106)
• Unreachable (pag.106)
• Maintenance (pag.107)
In the LX Map Manager window, the current status of an equipment is represented by the colour of the
relevant NE symbol. In fact, one or more colours correspond to each status (pag.40).
The colour of the NE symbol influences also the colour of the Container symbols that contain the equipment
in the following way. If a container:
• Contains at least one connected NE, the Container object will assume the colour relevant to the
connected status: green (if NE is not alarmed) or light blue/yellow/orange/red (if the NE is
alarmed).
• Contains more connected NEs or other Container objects, the colour of the Container object will
be determined by the colour of the NE or Container symbol where the most serious alarm is
present.
The colour of the NE icon in maintenance status does not affect he colour if the Container icons where
it is present the NE. For instance, if into a Container object there is an equipment in connected status (gre-
en colour) and an equipment in maintenance status (pink colour), the Container icon will get the colour
relevant to the connected status (green).
Disconnected status
Initial status of an equipment just after its creation; then it is the status reached after a disconnection com-
mand.
In this condition, the equipment is not managed by the system: no message is sent or received and no
polling procedure is executed.
OPERATIONS that the user can execute when an equipment is disconnected

• Send the Line Test (pag.244) and Connect (pag.246) command.
• Delete the NE object (pag.145).
• It is possible to open the equipment window only if the equipment has been connected at least
once.
The disconnection does not involve the deletion of the database of the information on the equip-
ment configuration. In this case, however, the status and the values of the attributes of the ob-
jects contained in the window are not referred to the current condition of the equipment but to
the last known configuration.
Conditions/commands that determine the PASSING FROM ONE STATUS TO THE OTHER
After the sending of the Connect command:

• If the operation is successfully, the equipment passes to connected status.
• If the operation fails, the equipment passes in an unreachable status.
COLOUR of the NE symbol

The colour of the icon associated to the disconnected status is BROWN.
NMS5LX 6.4.8 - MN.00272.E - 001 105

Connected status
Status reached after a connection procedure gone well. In this condition, the equipment correctly answers
to the system polling.
During the period when the equipment is connected, the user can send commands and require information.
Only exception to this rule is the presence of LCT in Configuration modality (pag.108).
OPERATIONS that the user can execute when an equipment is connected

• Open the equipment window and verify/modify the NE configuration.
The configuration/operating status of the NE corresponds to the real situation of the equipment.
• Send the commands for the management of the equipment.
Condition/commands that determine the PASSING FROM ONE STATUS TO THE OTHER
After:
• The user sends the disconnection command, the equipment switches to disconnected status.
• A system polling, if the equipment does not send any answer, the status from connected be-
comes unreachable.

The colour of the symbol of a connected NE depends on the alarms present in the equipment itself. De-
pending on the severity of the current alarms, the colour can be:
• Green. The equipment is not alarmed.
• Light blue. At least one alarm of Warning level is present on the equipment (simple signalling).
• Yellow. At least one alarm of Minor level is present on the equipment (alarm).
• Orange. At least one alarm of Major level is present on the equipment (serious alarm).
• Red. At least one alarm of Critical level is present on the equipment (very serious alarm).
If there are more alarms of different severity on the equipment at the same time, the colour of the NE
symbol will represent the most serious alarm.
Unreachable status
This is the status reached when the equipment, thought the automatic repetition of the messages, does
not answer to the polling of NMS5LX or sends unknown messages.
In this condition, the NE is not managed by the system, which however sends a connection command at
regular interval.
OPERATIONS executable by the user when an equipment is unreachable

• Sending the Disconnect (pag.248), Line Test (pag.244) and Connect (pag.246) command.
• The equipment window can be opened only if the equipment has been connected at least once.
The status and the values of the attributes of the objects contained in the window will not be
referred to the current condition of the equipment but to the last known configuration.
Conditions/commands that cause the PASSING FROM ONE STATUS TO ANOTHER ONE
After the user or the NMS5LX system has sent the connection command (automatic re-connection):
• If the operation is successful, the equipment passes to connected status.
• If the operation fails, the equipment remains in unreachable status.
After an user has sent the disconnection command:

• If the operation is successful, the equipment passes to disconnected status.
• If the operation fails, the equipment remains in unreachable status.
The colour of the NE icon associated to the unreachable status is RED with an X on the symbol.
NMS5LX 6.4.8 - MN.00272.E - 001 106

Maintenance status
The maintenance status indicates a transient condition.
The equipment assumes this status during the execution of an operation, for example during the connec-
tion. At the end of the operation, the NE will assume the status associated to its condition (connected, dis-
connected, unreachable).
OPERATIONS executable by the user when an equipment in unreachable
When the NE is in maintenance status, no operation can be executed.
The colour of the NE icon associated to the maintenance status is RED.
NMS5LX 6.4.8 - MN.00272.E - 001 107

LOM/LCT
LOM/LCT term means the software application, developed to manage/control locally the equipment: Local
Operator Manager, Local Craft Terminal, WEB Local Craft Terminal.
The operations that can be executed via LOM/LCT are basically those that can be executed via NMS5LX.
More information on the use of the LOM/LCT program is reported in the specific documentation. Here
below only some indications are reported about the relationships between LOM/LCT and NMS5LX:
• Types of LOM/LCT-equipment connection: Monitoring, Configuration (pag.108)

• Indication of the presence of the LOM/LCT user to the NMS5UX user (pag.109)
• Enabling/disabling of the LCT-equipment connection in Configuration modality (pag.109)
Types of LOM/LCT-equipment connection: Monitoring, Configuration
The local user can activate the LOM/LCT-equipment connection in Monitoring modality (the user can only
verify the equipment configuration) or in Configuration modality (the user can both verify and modify the
equipment configuration).
The local activation of a LOM/LCT-equipment connection in modality:

• Monitoring, does not influence the acquisition of the alarms or the sending of commands by the
system: the NMS5UX user can open the equipment window and verify/modify the equipment
configuration itself.
• Configuration, influences the acquisition of the alarms or the sending of the commands by the
system.
The NMS5UX user can open the equipment window (except for the equipment of PMP type) but
it cannot modify the configuration and send commands with the following exceptions:
• Execute the software reset of an equipment (pag.259)
• Transfer the configuration of an equipment to another one of the same type (pag.256)
• Updating the equipment software (pag.396)
• Forcing the disconnection (logout) of a LCT user (pag.378)
During the period when the connection is active, no modification relevant to the alarms is sig-
nalled to the NMS5LX system.
When the local LCT-equipment connection is deactivated, the NMS5LX system automatically re-
aligns the configuration (sending of the Configuration Upload command - pag.104) to control
possible changes executed by the local user and to acquire the current alarms.
If the local user has changed the configuration of the remote equipment, the new values are
acquired and replaced to those previously present stored in the database.
For SCT/WEB LCT program, the:

• Monitoring modality corresponds to the activation of the SCT-equipment connection with Read
Only user profile.
• Configuration modality corresponds to the activation of the SCT-equipment connection with
Read And Write, Station Operator or System user profile.
NMS5LX 6.4.8 - MN.00272.E - 001 108

Indication of the presence of the LCT user to the NMS5UX user
The activation and the deactivation of the local connection, both in Monitoring and Configuration modality,
are spontaneously communicated by the equipment to the NMS5LX system and signalled to the user:
• In the map, a check sign is indicated next to the NE icon ( ) is indicated next to the NE icon.
This information is forwarded also to the Container objects containing the NE.
Furthermore, the activation of the local connection in Configuration modality is signalled to the
user in the map: the NE icon assumes the white colour.
This information is not forwarded by the Container objects that contain the NE symbol. For
example, if a Container object contains a connected NE (green colour) and an equipment which
the LCT program in Configuration modality is connected (white colour), the Container symbol
will assume the colour relevant to the connection status (green).
• In the Alarm History Browser window (Fig.38), Current Alarms Browser (Fig.40), Equipment
Browser [List/Locate] (Fig.35), Information (Fig.17).
• In the equipment window of the NE.
To enable/disable of the LCT-equipment connection in Configuration modal-

ity
The NMS5UX user can enable/disable the LCT user to connect to the equipment in Configuration modality
setting the LCT Config.
If the parameter has value:

• Enabled, points out that the LCT user can activate the connection with the equipment both in
Monitoring and Configuration modality.
• Disabled, points out that the LCT user can activate the connection with the equipment only in
Monitoring modality.
Independently from the previous setting, when the equipment is switched off and switched on or reset, the
LCT Config parameter is automatically set to the Enabled value.
The command to set the LCT Config parameter is present in the equipment window. Besides the status of
the LCT Config parameter is displayed in the Equipment Browser [List/Locate] equipment (Fig.35).
NMS5LX 6.4.8 - MN.00272.E - 001 109

ALARM MANAGEMENT
Functionality of primary importance of the NMS5LX system is the detection, visual signalling and central-
ized storing of the alarm/status/event signallings present in the equipment that manages.
The alarm term defines the fault signalling generated by an error or by a bad operation of the NE or of
any element that composes it.
The status and event terms identify the signallings that do not indicate a bad operation but a status
change, a running operation or an operation condition. In detail, the signallings of:
• Status, are communicated spontaneously from the NE to the system, as for example:
• The activation/deactivation of the LCT-equipment connection
• The start/end of the updating of the software of the equipment
• The activation/deactivation of the manual operations
• The status of active/stand-by of duplicated parts of NE.
• Event, are generated by the system itself, as for example the start of an operation of alarm re-
alignment.
In the following of the chapter, the alarm generic term indicates the alarm/status/event signalling.
NMS5LX 6.4.8 - MN.00272.E - 001 110

ACQUISITION OF THE ALARMS
The detection and reset signals of an alarm are spontaneously forwarded to the supervisory centre by the
equipment (trap SNMP).
A polling process executed by the supervisory centre is kept only to check the reachability status of the
equipment.
The equipment in disconnected or unreachable status are not cyclically subjected to polling
It is possible to force the acquisition of the alarms of an equipment using the Alarm Re-alignment
(pag.252) or Configuration Upload command (pag.254).
NMS5LX 6.4.8 - MN.00272.E - 001 111

DYNAMIC DISPLAYING OF THE ALARMS
At each change of the status of the alarms on the equipment present in the network, the NMS5LX system
informs the user by means of the LX Map Manager window, executing the following operations:
• If present in the open map, the NE symbol where the alarm has been detected changes colour
according to the severity associated to the alarm.
If a alarm more serious than the detected one is present on the equipment, the icon does not
change colour, because it is determined by the alarm more serious present on the equipment.
The NE icon reports also the information that a not yet checked alarm is present.
• The status of the NE (change of colour and presence of a not yet checked alarm) is signalled
also by the Container symbols that have, inside them, this NE (the colour of the Container icons
changes).
The colour of the Container symbol is determined by the colour of the NE symbol contained in-
side it, where the most serious alarm is present.
• If open, in the Alarm History Browser window (Fig.38) the record relevant to the detected alarm
is added.
• If open, in the Current Alarm Browser window (Fig.40) the record relevant to the detected alarm
is added.
• If open, in the equipment window relevant to the NE, where the alarm has been detected, the
NE symbol is graphically modified.
If the equipment window has Read Only access the alarm is not signalled, as the window is not
dynamically updated. To update the alarms, it is necessary to require a new reading of the table
relevant to the current alarms.
In the Alarm History Browser and Current Alarm Browser window if:
• Some filters are active, it is possible that the record is not added as it does not satisfy the set
filtering criteria.
• The freezing of the window is activated, the record is not added.
NMS5LX 6.4.8 - MN.00272.E - 001 112

DISPLAYING OF THE CURRENT ALARMS AND OF THE ALARM HISTORY
The user can anytime display:

• The history of the alarms relevant to all the equipment (Network Alarm History command -
pag.262) or only to the selected equipment (NE Alarm History command - pag.283).
The alarm history term means the list of alarms, acquired and recorded by the supervision sys-
tem in the time. The alarm history records both the detection signalling and the clearing signal-
ling of the alarm.
In the alarm history, it is possible to configure the maximum number of records (value that can
be set by the Superuser) that can be stored.
During the day, all the alarms sent by the equipment are stored in the table (even if their
number exceeds the maximum value of records). At midnight, the number of record is checked;
if this exceeds the maximum set number, the system will delete, only among the raised and
cleared signallings, the oldest records.
If the alarm history contains all active and not cleared alarms and their number exceeds the
maximum set value, the system will NOT delete any record.
When the maximum number of records in the table is exceeded, the message Alarm History oc-
cupation exceeded 100% is periodically displayed, warning about the critical situation. The dis-
play of the message and the frequency at which it is displayed can be configured by Superuser.
Default: display of the message active; frequency: every 60 seconds.
• The list of the alarms currently active on all the equipment (Network Current Alarms com-
mand - pag.271) or only in the selected equipment (NE Current Alarms command - pag.284).
NMS5LX 6.4.8 - MN.00272.E - 001 113

ALARM CORRELATION
The alarm correlation term means the functionality that puts in relationship, in the alarm history, the ac-
tivation of an alarm with that of its clearing.
In detail, in the Alarm History Browser window (Fig.38) the notification of the activation of the alarm is
displayed by a record where the date/time of activation of the alarm activation is displayed. The clearing
of the same alarm is indicated adding, to the already existing record, the indication of the deactivation
date/time.
After a forced alignment of the alarm status, not all the notifications of the alarms active on the equipment
are recorded, but only the possible new alarms.
Furthermore, after the forced realignment, for the alarms that are not active anymore, the deactivation
date/time will be inserted in the relevant record.
If an equipment is disconnected, all the (detected and detected/cleared) alarms relevant to that equip-
ment are removed by the alarm history.
NMS5LX 6.4.8 - MN.00272.E - 001 114

SAVING OF THE ALARMS
It is possible to save the alarm history stored in the NMS5LX database. In detail, it is possible:
• To save all the alarm history to tape and/or to disk present in the database (pag.416).
Then, it will be possible to recover the data (pag.417) and display them in the Old History Brows-
er window (Fig.41).
• To save to file the whole alarm history (or a part) present in the database of the system
(pag.265).
• To save to file the whole alarm history (or a part) recovered from tape or disk (pag.279).
NMS5LX 6.4.8 - MN.00272.E - 001 115

ALARM SEVERITY
Each alarm, acknowledged and managed by the NMS5LX system, has associated a severity which deter-
mines the alarm importance.
Each severity is identified by a name and a colour, as indicated in Tab.8.
Tab.8 Alarm severity
Severity Name Color

Very serious alarm Critical Red
Serious alarm Major Orange
Alarm Minor Yellow
Minor alarm Warning Light blue
The alarm severity is the criterion used by NMS5LX to represent graphically the operational status of the
equipment.
When an alarm raises in a connected alarm, the icon that represents the equipment modifies its colour
according to the severity of the active alarm present inside it.
The colour of the Container symbols containing the NE reflects the condition of current alarm.
If more alarms of different severity are present at the same time, the colour of the icon will represent the
most serious alarm; the same occurs for the container icons.
The severity of an alarm is reported also in the Alarm History Browser (Fig.38) and Current Alarm Browser
(Fig.40).
Modification of the alarm severity
The NMS5LX system allows modifying, for each alarm, the severity of network and the local severity.
Network severity means the severity that characterizes the alarm when displayed by the NMS5LX system.
For each alarm, the network severity is COMMON to all the NEs of the same type present in all the maps.
To modify the network severity of an alarm, use the Network Severity Code command (pag.365 - com-
mand available only to the Superuser).
Local severity means the severity that characterizes the alarm when stored by the controller of the NE and
displayed by the local management system (LCT); this severity is not used by NMS5LX. For the same
alarm, it is possible to define a local severity different from NE to NE. To modify the local severity of an
alarm, use the Equipment Severity Code command (pag.367).
Example
Suppose that two types of SDH Radio are connected to the NMS5LX system: NE-A and NE-B.
By means of the Equipment Severity Code command, it is defined that, locally, the alarm x for NE-A has
severity Major, while for the NE-B has severity Minor.
Instead, using the Network Severity Code command, it is defined that the alarm x for all the NEs of SDH
Radio type of Critical severity.
In the NE-A, the detection (or cleared) of the alarm x will be stored in the controller of the NE and seen by
LCT with Major severity, while it will be seen by NMS5LX with Critical severity.
Instead, in the NE-B, the detection (or clearing) of the alarm x will be stored in the controller of the NE
and seen by LCT with Minor severity, while it will be seen by NMS5LX with Critical severity.
NMS5LX 6.4.8 - MN.00272.E - 001 116

Modification of the severity of the alarms of User Input
What described below is valid for all the alarms of all the types of equipment, with the exception of the
alarms used by the user input.
The severity of the alarms of User Input is defined by means of a specific command present in the equip-
ment window.
This severity constitutes both the network and the local severity.
For example, if the User Input x alarm for an equipment is defined having a Critical severity, on its detec-
tion the alarm will be stored in the controller of the NE, seen by LCT and by NMS5LX with Critical severity.
The setting of the severity is independent for each alarm of User Input, and local to the NE selected for the
operation. This means that the setting must be executed for each single alarm of user Input of each single
NE.
More information on the user inputs and on the command to modify the severity is reported in the equip-
ment manual of the NMS5LX.
NMS5LX 6.4.8 - MN.00272.E - 001 117

ENABLING/DISABLING OF THE ALARMS
The NMS5LX system allows enabling/disabling the alarms and/or the sending of the relevant traps. In de-
tail, it is possible:
• To disable the alarm; in this case the detection (or clearing) of the alarm is not recorded in the
controller of the NE and it is not communicated to the supervision program: as the alarm has
never occurred.
• To disable the sending of traps; in this case, the detection (or clearing) of the alarm is recorded
in the controller of the NE, but it is not communicated to the supervision system.
If the Configuration Upload (pag.254) or Alarm Re-alignment (pag.252) command is

sent to NE, also the alarms, whose trap sending is disabled, will be acquired.
• To enabled the alarm and the sending of trap; in this case the detection (or clearing) of the alarm
is recorded in the controller of the NE and communicated to the supervision system (with the
sending of the relevant trap) that display it in the current alarms and in the alarm history (de-
fault condition).
The enabling/disabling of the alarm and of the trap sending is independent for each alarm, and local to
the selected NE for the operation. This means that the setting must be made for each single alarm of each
single NE.
To enable/disable the alarms and the sending of traps of an equipment, use the Equipment Severity Co-
de command (pag.367).
It is possible to verify the list of the NEs that have at least one disabled alarm/trap opening the Equipment
Browser [List/Locate] window (Fig.35) and configuring properly the filter.
NMS5LX 6.4.8 - MN.00272.E - 001 118

FLEETING ALARMS
Sometime there can be that, in an equipment, an alarm is detected and is cleared many times in a brief
period.
The instability that characterizes these alarms, defined fleeting, causes a such number of alarms to satu-
rate the network. In fact, each time the alarm raises/clears, the system records a signalling.
For this cause, before recording an alarm, the stability of the alarm itself is verified.
The criterion used to determine if an alarm is fleeting or not is the following: an alarm is considered fleeting
when NMS5LX, during a period of time t, records that the number of activation of the alarm is higher than
the thr_in threshold.
An alarm will not be considered fleeting anymore if, during the successive period of time t, the number of
activation of the alarm is lower than the thr_out threshold.
Example
Suppose that the values t=120, thr_in=3, thr_out=1 are set.
The alarm A, within 120 seconds, activates and clears twice and, on its third activation, (thr_in=3) the
supervision system marks it as fleeting alarm: the successive activation/clearing are not recorded in the
Alarm History table.
At the successive period of 120 seconds, if the alarm A activates and clears only once (thr_out=1), the
supervision system does not consider the alarm A as fleeting anymore.
The parameter t and the thr_in and thr_out thresholds can be modified by the Superuser. Their default
values are: t = 120 sec., thr_in = 3, thr_out =1.
In the Alarm History Browser window, when an alarm exits from the fleeting status and the last signalling
came to the equipment pointed out the deactivation of the alarm, the management of the signalling alarm
will take place without differences with respect to a normal signalling of cleared alarm: the alarm is corre-
lated to the previous signalling.
Differently, when an alarm exits from the fleeting status and the last signalling came to the equipment
pointed out the activation of the alarm, the management will take place in the following way: first a sig-
nalling of cleared alarm will be forwarded, which will be correlated with the previous signalling of fleeting
alarm, and then a new signalling of active alarm of active alarm will be forwarded: in the Alarm History
Browser window, a record of fleeting alarm will be displayed, followed by a record of active alarm.
The fleeting condition of an alarm is not deleted at the forced realignment of the status of the alarms
(Alarm Re-alignment command - pag.252).
NMS5LX 6.4.8 - MN.00272.E - 001 119

MARKING OF THE ALARMS (ACKNOWLEDGE)
The current alarms and those present in the alarm history can be marked: in the relevant window there is
the indication that the user acknowledged the detection or/and the clearing of the alarm.
For the alarms stored in the alarm history and listed in the Alarm History Browser window (Fig.38) or in
the Old History Browser (Fig.41), it is possible to mark both the detection and the clearing of the alarm
(pag.265).
An alarm:
• Detected and marked is identified by the letter S in the Ack column of the Alarm History Browser
or Old History Browser window.
• Detected/cleared and marked is identified by the letter C in the Ack column of the Alarm History
Browser or Old History Browser window.
When the list of alarms is filtered or in the windows where the total number of marked alarms, the rules
to define if an alarm is considered marked or not are the following.
A marked alarm is:

• An alarm detected and not yet cleared, for which the user has marked the detection (presence
of the letter S).
• An alarm detected and cleared, for which the user has marked the clearing (presence of the let-
ter C).
A not marked alarm is:

• An alarm detected and not yet cleared, for which the user has not marked the detection (ab-
sence of the letter S).
• An alarm detected and cleared, for which the user has not marked the clearing (absence of the
letter C).
In this case, even if the user has marked the detection of the alarm (presence of the letter
S), it is considered as not marked because the user has not marked its clearing.
For the current alarms, listed in the Current Alarms Browser window (Fig.40), there is not the above men-
tioned distinction, because it is possible to mark only the detected alarms (pag.273).
NMS5LX 6.4.8 - MN.00272.E - 001 120

MANAGEMENT OF NE LOG
With NE Log (Network Element Log) we mean a file where are recorded the signals of alarm/status (alarms)
stored in the controller of an equipment.
The Log read by an equipment (NE Log) is stored into the machine disk, available for the next reading by
the user.
The creation of a NE Log can be manually done by the user and/or automatically by the system.
The manual creation of the NE Log of one or more equipment can be done by the user by means of the
command Fault > NE History Log (pag.285).
By means of the commands, it is even possible to manage the NE Logs (delete, display the content) and
delete the alarms stored in the controller of an equipment.
The automatic creation of the NE Logs, if the relevant function is active, consists in the automatic creation
of the NE Log for the equipment which pass from the unreachable status to the connected status.
The function for the automatic creation of the NE Logs can be activated/deactivated by the system admin-
istrator during the installation of the NMS5LX system itself.
The NE Logs can be displayed only through the Equipment History Log Management Main Window (Fig.42).
NMS5LX 6.4.8 - MN.00272.E - 001 121

PERFORMANCE MONITORING MANAGEMENT
The quality of the signal of the telecommunication equipment can be controlled via measures of Perform-
ance Monitoring (PM).
A measure of PM consists in recording, during a set time period (observation period), the values of deter-
minated control parameters (BER, alarm counting, etc).
Threshold limits (that can be modified by the Superuser) have been assigned to these parameters.
The exceeding of threshold limit indicates a more or less serious degradation of the signal. This condition
generates an alarm, which is recorded and managed by the equipment and by the NMS5LX system as any
other alarm.
The number and the type of measures of PM and the relevant control parameters are specific for each
type of NE. For their description, refer to the relevant equipment Manuals.
The considered control parameters changes according to the type of equipment and of measures that this
equipment supports. Generally, all the executed measures refer to Recommendations of ITU-T (for exam-
ple G.826, G.821, etc.).
NMS5LX 6.4.8 - MN.00272.E - 001 122

ACTIVATION/DEACTIVATION OF THE PM MEASURES
It is possible to activate/deactivate the measures for a single equipment at a time or for more equipment
(of the same type) at the same time.
Furthermore, for each equipment, it is possible to activate/deactivate each single measure independently.
The command to activate/deactivate singly the PM measures is present in the specific equipment window.
The description of the equipment window and the procedure for the activation/deactivation of the PM me-
asures are contained in the equipment Manual relevant to the type of considered NE.
The command to activate/deactivate the measures for more equipment (of the same type) at the same
time is View/Modify PM Status (pag.169).
When a PM measure is activated, the controller of the equipment begins the storing of the values of the
control parameters.
The results of the measures are subdivided in records. Each record contains the values recorded in a spe-
cific time interval (observation period).
If, at the end of the observation period, the measure has not been deactivated, another observation period
begins and so on until the measure is not stopped.
When the system interrogates the equipment, this will send to it the records (daily and primary) that
stored.
The equipment managed by the NMS5LX, group the results of the PM measures in observation period of
15 minutes (primary records) and 24 hours (daily record).
The observation periods are not synchronized with the instant when the measure is activated, but refer,
for the primary records, to the quarter (00.00, 00.15, 00.30, etc.) and, for the daily records, to the time
00.00 UTC (Universal Time, Coordinated).
For example, if a measure starts at time 11.40, the first primary record will have, as observation period,
11.40...11.45 (corresponding to the interval 11.30...11.45), while the first daily record will have, as ob-
servation period, 11.40...00.00.
For each type of measure, the equipment keeps in memory the last 16 primary records (corresponding to
the last 4 hours) and the last 2 daily records (corresponding to the last 2 days). The previous records are
overwritten.
If an equipment has PM measures running and it is restarted or switched off, then, when it restarts to it is
switched on, the measures active before the switching off will be automatically restarted.
The (daily and primary) records relevant to the period when the measure has been interrupted will be emp-
ty and, if reached the limit of 16 primary records and 1 daily record, will overwrite the previous ones.
NMS5LX 6.4.8 - MN.00272.E - 001 123

ACQUISITION OF THE RESULTS OF THE PM MEASURES
The results of PM measures are acquired by the NMS5LX system by means of a polling process (PM polling),
executed at regular intervals which change depending on the equipment type. In detail, two modalities
configurable during the installation are possible:
• for all the equipment but type ALCplus2, ALCplus2e and AGS10: every 2 hours.
• for the equipment of type ALCplus2, ALCplus2e and AGS10: automatically every 24 hours via FTP
(for the equipment supporting this protocol).
The process of PM polling is managed by a dedicated program which, besides executing the polling, has
the function to determinate which equipment must be polled.
The rules that an equipment must satisfy to be polled are the following:
• Equipment type. Not all the equipment managed by the NMS5LX system supports the PM function.
This equipment are not considered in the PM polling cycle.
• Equipment status. Only the equipment in connected status are polled. The equipment in disconnect-
ed or unreachable status are not polled.
• Status of the PM measures. Only the equipment that have at least one measure active in progress
when the PM polling is executed.
After a PM polling, the polled equipment sends the daily and primary records relevant to the measures in
progress.
If the measure is deactivated, when the NMS5LX system executes the polling, the equipment sends all the
(primary and daily) records calculated until that moment, except the last one.
For example, if the measure is activated at 9.27 and deactivated at 18.42, the record relevant to the ob-
servation period 9.15...9.30 is transferred to the system in incomplete status, while the record relevant to
the period 18.30...18.45 is not sent.
If the measure is activated and deactivated more times during the same observation period, the record
containing the results of the last executed measure will be sent to the NMS5LX system.
For example, if the measure is activated at 9.02 and deactivated at 9.07, then it is re-activated at 9.09,
the record relevant to the observation period 9.00...9.15 will contain the results of the measures relevant
to the period 9.09...9.15, while the results relevant to the period 9.02...9.07 will not be sent.
PM Polling and sending of the commands
The PM polling is totally transparent to the user: it is automatically executed without affecting the opera-
tions executed by the NMS5UX user.
Being the only connection line between the system and the equipment, the sending of a command by the
centre is prioritary with respect to the process of cyclic polling.
For example, when a command is sent to an equipment A during the polling of an equipment B, the system
waits for the end of the polling in progress. After this, it executes the command towards the equipment A
and, then, it restarts the polling procedure from the point it has been suspended on the equipment B.
PM Polling and activation of the LCT-equipment connection
The activation of the local LCT-equipment connection does not affect the automatic acquisition of the re-
sults of the PM measures for the considered equipment.
NMS5LX 6.4.8 - MN.00272.E - 001 124

DISPLAYING OF THE RESULTS OF THE PM MEASURES
The NMS5UX user can anytime display the results of the PM measures of a given equipment, subdivided
in daily or primary records of the last 180 days.
To display the daily and primary records, select the equipment in the map and choose the Performance
Monitoring command (pag.163).
It is also possible to display the results of the PM measures, previously saved to disk by means of the Old
Performance Monitoring command (pag.167).
NMS5LX 6.4.8 - MN.00272.E - 001 125

SAVING OF THE RESULTS OF THE PM MEASURES TO DISK
It is possible to save the results of the PM measures stored in the database of the system.
In detail, it is possible to save to tape and/or disk all the results of the PM measures relevant to a month
present in the database (pag.419).
Then, it will be possible to recover the data (pag.420) and display them in the Graphic Performance Mon-
itoring - OLD window (pag.167).
NMS5LX 6.4.8 - MN.00272.E - 001 126

MENU AND COMMANDS
Some commands are optional ones. Therefore, such commands can be absent into the specific menu
of its own NMS5LX system.
For each command, the type of access to the system (Read Only, Read-Write) and the user profile (Entry,
Normal,...) necessary to use it are described. The Reading terms indicates that it is possible to verify the
parameters, the Writing term that it is possible to set or modify them.
NMS5LX 6.4.8 - MN.00272.E - 001 127

MAP
The Map menu contains the following commands:
• Refresh (pag.129). It updates the LX Map Manager window.

• Map Properties (pag.130). It changes the dimension of the symbols of the map.
• Submap Properties (pag.131). It associates/remove the background from a container.
• Import/Export (pag.132). It compares/imports/exports the objects from a map to another. It
saves the objects of a map into a file.
• Change Map (pag.137). It changes or deletes the map.
• Exit (pag.139). It closes the LX Map Manager window (NMS5LX graphic interface).
NMS5LX 6.4.8 - MN.00272.E - 001 128

REFRESH
System access Read Only, Read-Write

User profile Entry, Normal, Advanced, Privileged, Superuser
The Refresh command update the LX Map Manager window.
To update the LX Map Manager window
1. Select the Map > Refresh command.

The LX Map Manager window (Fig.1) is closed and then re-opened.
NMS5LX 6.4.8 - MN.00272.E - 001 129

MAP PROPERTIES
System access Read-Write

User profile Advanced, Privileged, Superuser
The Map Properties command modifies the size of the symbols present in the View area (pag.34) of the
LX Map Manager window (equipment, containers, etc.).
To modify the size of the symbols
1. Select the Map > Map Properties command.

The Map Properties window opens.
2. Select the option relevant to the wished size (in pixel).
3. Press OK (it executes the command and closes the window) or Apply (it executes the command and
does not close the window).
In the View area, the symbols of equipment, containers, etc. assume the new size.
NMS5LX 6.4.8 - MN.00272.E - 001 130

SUBMAP PROPERTIES

The Submap Properties command associates a background to the container in such a way that, on its
selection in the View area (pag.34), the background is displayed besides the symbols present in the con-
tainer.
It is possible to associate a different background to each container in the same map.
To associate/remove the background to a container
1. Select, in the Map area (pag.32), the container which you wish to associated the background to.
2. Select the Map > Submap Properties command.

The Submap Properties window opens.
3. To add the background, type in the Background Pixmap box, the path/name of the file and press OK.
The system acknowledges, as background, the files in GIF format.
Press Browse to search the wished file in the disk.
The background is displayed in the View area.
4. To remove the background, delete the file specified in the Background Pixmap box and press OK.
The background is removed in the View area.
NMS5LX 6.4.8 - MN.00272.E - 001 131

IMPORT/EXPORT

The Import/Export command imports/exports/compares the objects from a map to another and saves
the objects of a map into a file.
With details it is possible:
• To copy the objects of a map/container to a different map/container (pag.132)
• To copy the objects, previously saved to a file, into a map/container (pag.134)
• To save the objects of a map/container to a file (pag.134)
• To compare the objects of a map/container with the objects of a different map/container
(pag.135)
• To compare the objects, previously saved to a file, with the objects of a map/container
(pag.136)
To copy the objects of a map/container to a different map/container
1. Select the Map > Import/Export command.

The Import Export Map window opens (Fig.15).
2. Select, in the Operation area, the Copy data option.
3. Select, in the Import/Export area, the From Map/Submap to Map/Submap option.
4. Set the source map/container:

a. Press the Browse push-button next to the Source box.
The Select Submap window opens.
b. Select the wished map in the Map area.
c. If you wish to copy only the objects of a container of the map, select the container in the Submap
area.
d. Press OK.
The source map/container is pointed out in the Source box.
5. Set the destination map/container:
a. Press the Browse push-button next to the Destination box.

The destination map must be different from the source map.

c. If you wish that the objects of the source map or container are pasted into a container of the
destination map, select the container in the Submap area.
d. Press OK.
The destination map/container is pointed out in the Destination box.
6. Select, in the Mode area, the option:

• Clear and Copy All, if you wish that the objects present in the source map/container replace the
objects present in the destination map/container.
• Copy Only Differences, if you wish to add only the different objects present in the source map/
container to the destination map/container. The identical objects will not be added.
7. Press Apply.
The Messages area displays the detail regarding the executed operation. A record is displayed for each
deleted and/or created object.
NMS5LX 6.4.8 - MN.00272.E - 001 132

Fig.15 Import Export Map window
Menu
bar (1)
Parameters
to set to
import/export
the objects
(2)
The result of
the operation
is displayed,
according to
the executed
operation, in
this area (3)
Fig.15 notes
(1) Menu:
• File > Close. It closes the window.
(2) Option:
• Copy data. It copies the objects from a file or map/container to a different file or map/con-
tainer.
• Compare data. It compares the objects of a file or map/container to a different map/contain-
er.
• From Map/Submap to Map/Submap. It copies/compares the objects present in a map/con-
tainer into a different map/container.
• From File to Map/Submap. It copies/compares the objects present into a file to a map/con-
tainer.
• From Map/Submap to File. Copies the objects present in a map/container to a file.
• Clear and Copy All. It replaces the objects present into a file or map/container with those
present into a different file or map/container.
• Copy Only Differences. It compares the objects present in two different files or maps/con-
tainers and copies into the destination map/container only the different objects.
Box:
• Source. File or map/container from which the objects are copied (source).
• Destination. File or map/container to which the objects are pasted (destination).
(3) Each record identifies an object involved in the operation.

Depending on the type of executed operation, one or more fields will be present pointing out the
type of executed operation, the object involved in the operation and the result of the operation it-
self.
NMS5LX 6.4.8 - MN.00272.E - 001 133

To copy the objects, previously saved to file, into a map/container

3. Select, in the Import/Export area, the From File to Map/Submap option.

4. Set the file from which you wish to copy the objects:

The File Selection window opens.
b. Type the name of the file in the Selection box.
The system proposes the files present in the default directory. Change the path, if necessary.
c. Press OK.
The Source box displays the path/name of the source file.

c. If you wish that the objects stored in the file are pasted into a container of the destination map,
select the container in the Submap area.
d. Press OK.
6. Select, in the Mode area, the option:

• Clear and Copy All, if you wish that the objects present in the file replace the objects present in
the destination map/container.
• Copy Only Differences, if you wish to add only the different objects present in the file to the des-
tination map/container. The identical objects will not be added.
7. Press Apply.
deleted and/or created object.
To save the objects of a map/container to a file

3. Select, in the Import/Export area, the From Map/Submap to File option.

area.
d. Press OK.
5. Set the file into which you wish to save the objects:

NMS5LX 6.4.8 - MN.00272.E - 001 134

c. Press OK.
The Destination box displays the path/name of the destination file.
6. Press Apply.
saved object.
To compare the objects of a map/container with the objects of a different

map/container

2. Select, in the Operation area, the Compare data option.

A box opens.
3. Select the wished value in the box:

• View all data. Compares all the objects present in the source map/container with those present
in the destination map/container. The Messages area displays all the objects present in the
maps/containers.
• View aligned data. Compares the objects present in the map/container with those present in the
destination map/container. The Messages area displays only the objects present in both the
maps/containers.
• View not aligned data. Compares the objects present in the source map/container with those
present in the destination map/container. The Messages area displays only the different objects.
4. Select the From Map/Submap to Map/Submap option in the Import/Export area.

area.
d. Press OK.


c. If you wish that the objects stored in the file are compared with the objects present into a con-
tainer of the destination map, select the container in the Submap area.
d. Press OK.
7. Press Apply.
compared object.
NMS5LX 6.4.8 - MN.00272.E - 001 135

To compare the objects, previously saved to file, with the objects of a map/
container

2. Select, in the Operation area, the Compare data option.

A box opens.
3. Select the wished value in the box:
• View all data. Compares all the objects present in the file with those present in the destination
map/container. The Messages area displays all the objects present in the file and in the maps/
containers.
• View aligned data. Compares the objects present in the file with those present in the destination
map/container. The Messages area displays only the objects present in the file and in the map/
container.
• View not aligned data. Compares the objects present in the file with those present in the desti-
nation map/container. The Messages area displays only the different objects.
4. Select the From File to Map/Submap option in the Import/Export area.

5. Set the file containing the objects to compare:

c. Press OK.
The Source box displays the path/name of the source file.


c. If you wish that the objects stored in the file are compared with the objects present into a con-
tainer of the destination map, select the container in the Submap area.
d. Press OK.
7. Press Apply.
compared object.
NMS5LX 6.4.8 - MN.00272.E - 001 136

CHANGE MAP

User profile Privileged *, Superuser
* The Privileged user cannot delete the map.
The Change Map command changes or deletes the map.

• To close the open map and opening another one (pag.137)
• To delete a map (pag.138).
To close the open map and opening another one
1. Select the Map > Change Map command.

The Change Map window opens (Fig.16).
2. Select a map from the list.
If the map has access:
• Read-Write, press the push-button:
• Open Map READ/WRITE to open the map in Read-Write access.
• Open Map READ/ONLY to open the map in Read Only access.
• Read, press Open Map READ/ONLY to open the map in Read Only access.
The Open Map READ/WRITE push-button is not available.
The current map is closed and the new map is opened.
One's user and operating level are kept also in the new map.
Fig.16 Change Map window
List of
maps (1)
NMS5LX 6.4.8 - MN.00272.E - 001 137

Fig.16 notes
(1) For each map, it is displayed in the column:

• Map name. Name of the map.
• Permission. Type of available access:
• Read/Write; it is possible to open the map with Read-Write or Read Only access.
• Read; it is possible to open the map only with Read Only access (the Read-Write ac-
cess is already occupied).
• Comment. Additional notes.
The wording (Current Map) indicates the currently open map.
To delete a map
Operation available only to Superuser.

It is not possible to delete a map with Read access or the current map.
1. Select the Map > Change Map command.

The Change Map window opens (Fig.16).
2. Select a map with Read-Write access from the list.

3. Press Delete Map and confirm.
The map is removed from the list.
NMS5LX 6.4.8 - MN.00272.E - 001 138

EXIT

The Exit command closes the LX Map Manager window and then the NMS5LX graphic interface.
To close the LX Map Manager window
1. Select the Map > Exit command or press .

A confirmation window opens.
2. Press Ok.
The closure of the LX Map Manager window causes the automatic closure of all the possible open
window of NMS5LX (Alarm History Browser, Equipment Information, etc.).
NMS5LX 6.4.8 - MN.00272.E - 001 139

EDIT
The Edit menu contains the following commands:
• Add (pag.141). It creates objects for the graphic representation of the network in the map.
• Delete (pag.145). It deletes the objects from the map.
• Modify/View (pag.146). It displays and/or modifies the characteristics of the objects.
• Information (pag.149). It displays the information of the symbol.
• Graphical Symbol Properties (pag.151). It displays the graphic parameters of the symbol.
• Find (pag.152). It searches an object of the map.
• Arrange Symbols (pag.153). It aligns vertically/horizontally the symbols.
• Generate Info for WEB (pag.154). It checks the database information necessary to the RAN
(Remote Access NMS5UX) application.
• Set Current Window Geometry For All Containers (pag.155). It sets the size of the con-
tainers windows such as the size of the window where the command is selected.
These commands are used to represent graphically the equipment network in the maps and to provide
to NMS5LX the parameters to manage and control each single object.
Before using them, it is suggested to read the Graphic network representation (pag.77) where the modal-
ities to configure correctly and rapidly one's supervision system are described.
NMS5LX 6.4.8 - MN.00272.E - 001 140

ADD

The Add command creates objects for the graphic representation of the network in the map.
• To create Container objects (pag.141)
• To create Network Element (pag.142)
• To create virtual Network Element (pag.142)
• To create Generic Symbol objects (pag.143)
• To create Link objects (pag.143)
• To create Label objects (pag.144)
• To create Container, NE, Link and Label objects described in a file (pag.144)
Before creating an object, it is suggested to read the par. Rules for the creation of the objects (pag.81).
For more information about:

• Container object go to pag.78.
• NE object go to pag.22 and pag.78
• Generic Symbol object go to pag.79
• Link object go to pag.80
• Label object go to pag.80
• Add Network From File functionality go to pag.90.
To create Container objects
It is possible to create all the wished Container objects.
1. In the LX Map Manager window, move to the point of the map (container or main window) where you
wish to create the container.
2. Select the Edit > Add > Container command or press .

The Add Container window opens.
3. Type the name of the container (alphanumeric string of minimum 1 character and maximum 48 char-
acters) in the Label box.
The name will be displayed under the symbol of the container.
4. In the Type area, select the type of container you wish to create among: Subnetwork, Station, Substa-
tion, Radio Station.
5. In the Comment area, type possible information relevant to the object (max 100 characters).
The setting of this parameter is optional.
The container is displayed in the New Object Area of the LX Map Manager window (Fig.1). Move the
symbol in any point of the View area.
NMS5LX 6.4.8 - MN.00272.E - 001 141

To create Network Element object
The maximum number of NE objects that can be created depends on one's codeword.
wish to create the NE.
2. Select the Edit > Add > Network Element command or press .
The Add Equipment window opens.
3. Type, in the IP Address box, the IP address of the NE.

If you wish to create a:
• ALplus Node or ALCplus2 Node object, type the IP address of the main equipment of the node.
• PMP object, type the IP address of the Proxy interface used for the connection to the master
station.
The IP address set in this field must CORRESPOND to the IP address of the NE, locally defined. If the
address do not coincide, it will not possible to send commands to the NE itself.
After the creation of the NE, the IP address cannot be modified.

It is not possible to assign the same IP address to two different NEs, even of different type.
If a NE object with the IP address is already present in the map, the values assigned to the same object
present in the other map will be automatically displayed in all the other fields of the Add Equipment
window.
4. Type, in the Logical Address box, the logical address of the NE (alphanumeric string of max. 32 char-
acters)
The logical address will be displayed under the symbol of the NE.
It is possible to assign, as logical address, the same value to the IP Address, while it is not possible to
assign the same logical address to two NEs.
5. In the Type area, select the type of equipment you wish to create (see Tab.2).
6. ONLY if the equipment is managed by Proxy Agent and the Proxy Agent application is installed, activate
the Proxy Address box.
The box aside displays the default address, configured by the system administrator, with which the
equipment is acknowledged by Proxy Agent.
In order to modify the address, type in the box the new address of the machine to which the Proxy
Agent sends the traps coming from the equipment.
For the ALplus Node or ALCplus2 Node objects, if the Proxy Address box is activated, the addresses by
which the equipment belonging to the node are acknowledged by the Proxy Agent are configured.
7. In the Comment area, type additional information (max 100 characters).

The NE is displayed in the New Object Area of the LX Map Manager window (Fig.1). Move the symbol
in any point of the View area.
If the created NE symbol is already present in a map, it automatically will acquire the status of the ex-
isting object.
To create virtual Network Element object
It is possible to create all the wished virtual NE objects.
wish to create the virtual NE.
2. Select the Edit > Add > Virtual Network Element) command.
The Add Equipment window opens.
NMS5LX 6.4.8 - MN.00272.E - 001 142

3. Type, in the Logical Address box, the logical address of the virtual NE (alphanumeric string of max 32
characters).
The logical address will be displayed under the symbol of the NE.
It is not possible to assign the same logical address to two virtual NEs.
4. In the Type area, select the type of virtual equipment you wish to create (see Tab.2).

The virtual NE is displayed in the New Object Area of the LX Map Manager window (Fig.1). Move the
To create Generic Symbols (graphic symbols)
It is possible to create all the wished Generic Symbol objects.
wish to create the Generic Symbol.
2. Select the Edit > Add > Generic Symbol command.

The Add Generic Object window opens.
3. Type, in the Label box, the name of the generic symbol (alphanumeric string of max 40 characters).
The name will be displayed under the generic symbol.
It is possible to assign the same name to more graphic symbols even of different type.
4. In the Group area, select the group where the generic symbol is contained.
5. In the Object area, select the generic symbol you wish to create.
The Generic Symbol is displayed in the New Object Area of the LX Map Manager window (Fig.1). Move
the symbol in any point of the View area.
To create Link objects (connection)
It is possible to create all the wished Link objects.
wish to create the Link.
2. Select the two objects among which you wish to create the connection.
The operation is not executed if selected:
• A container and a NE or Generic Symbol
• Two containers
• A single object
• More than two objects
3. Select the Edit > Add > Link command.

The Add Generic Object window opens.
4. Type, in the Label box, the name of the connection (alphanumeric string of max 40 characters).
It is possible to assign the same name to more Links even of different type.
5. Activate the Show Label box if you wish that the name of the connection is displayed in the map.
NMS5LX 6.4.8 - MN.00272.E - 001 143

The display of the names of the Link objects is influenced even by the command View > Show/Hide
Link Label (see pag.159/Tab.9).
6. In the Connection type area, select the type of connection.

The connection line is displayed between the selected objects.
If one of the two object is moved, the line automatically adapted according to the move.
To create Label objects (wordings)
It is possible to create all the wished Label objects.
wish to create the wording.
2. Select the Edit > Add > Label command.

The Add Label window opens.
3. Type, in the Label box, an alphanumeric string of max 50 characters.

It is possible to insert the wording more times.
The object is displayed in the New Object Area of the LX Map Manager window (Fig.1). Move the symbol
To create Container, NE, Link and Label objects described in a file
Before executing the operation, it is necessary:

• To create the file (csv format) you wish to use for the automatic creation of the ob-
jects, as pointed out at pag.90.
• To copy the file (.csv) to the server where the NMS5LX system is installed (default di-
rectory opt/nms5ux/data/files).
1. Select the Edit > Add > Network From File command.
The Add Network From File window opens.
2. Select the wished file (.csv format) in the Files list.

The list points out the files present in the predefined directory (pointed out in the Selection box). Modify
the path, if necessary.
3. Press Ok.
The Add From File Report - <path/name of the selected file> window is displayed where, for every cre-
ated object, is pointed out in the column:
• Category and Type. Object type.
• Name. Logical address (NE) or name of the object.
• Message. Self-explanatory message about the result of the object creation.
If the total operation of object creation:
• Was successful, the objects described in the file will be present in the LX Map Manager.
• Was failed, the message SYNTAX ERROR - operation ABORTED is displayed in the Add From File
Report... window.
NMS5LX 6.4.8 - MN.00272.E - 001 144

DELETE

The Delete command deletes an object from the map.
To delete an object from the map
1. Into the LX Map Manager window select the object you wish to delete.
Object:
• Container. It can be deleted only if it does not contain objects.
• Network Element. If present only in one map, can be deleted only if it is in disconnected status
(brown symbol).
If the object is present in more maps, it is possible to delete the symbol even if it is in connected
status, except for the last copy for which the above mentioned rule is valid: it can be deleted
only if in disconnected status.
The virtual NE and NE WEB Generic type can be always deleted.
If the object is managed even by the Ring Manager and/or VLAN Manager application, first it
must be deleted from the Ring Manager and/or VLAN Manager Map window and then it can be
deleted from the map.
• Generic Symbol, Link or Label. It can be always deleted.
A connection is automatically deleted even when one of the two symbols, which is connected to,
is removed.
2. Select the Edit > Delete command or press the right mouse button, select Delete (command not
available if a Link object is selected) and confirm.
The object is removed from the map.
NMS5LX 6.4.8 - MN.00272.E - 001 145

MODIFY/VIEW
System access Reading Read Only

Reading/Writing Read-Write
User profile Reading Entry, Normal
Reading/Writing Advanced, Privileged, Superuser
The Modify/View command displays/modifies the characteristics of the objects.

• To verify/modify the parameters of a Container objects (pag.146)
• To verify/modify the parameters of a Network Element objects (pag.146)
• To verify/modify the parameters of a Generic Symbol objects (pag.147)
• To verify/modify the parameters of a Link objects (pag.147)
• To verify/modify the parameters of a Label objects (pag.148)
The values of some parameters cannot be changed. If it was necessary to modify these parameters, it
is suggested to delete the object and then re-create it assigning the new values to the parameters.
If the same object has been created into two different maps, at the changing of the parameter values of
such an object into a map, the system automatically changes the values of the parameters relevant to the
same object into the other map.
To verify/modify the parameters of a Container object
1. Select the wished Container object.

2. Select the Edit > Modify/View > Container command or press the right mouse button and select
Modify/View.
The Container Properties window opens. Box/area:
• Label. Container name.
• Type. Container type.
• Comment. Additional information
It is possible to change the all parameters. The setting mode of the parameters is the same one pointed
out to pag.141.
In the LX Map Manager window, the container assumes the new characteristics.
To verify/modify the parameters of a Network Element object
1. Select the wished NE or Virtual NE object.

2. Select the Edit > Modify/View > Network Element command or press the right mouse button and
select Modify/View.
The Equipment Properties window opens.
If a following objects is selected:
• Network Element is displayed in the box/area:
• IP Address, the IP address of the NE
• Logical Address, the logical address of the NE
• Type, the type of NE
NMS5LX 6.4.8 - MN.00272.E - 001 146

• Proxy Address, address of the machine to which the Proxy Agent sends the traps coming
from the NE.
• Comment, additional information
It is always possible to change the Logical Address, Type, Proxy Address and Comment param-
eters. The setting mode of the parameters is the same one pointed out to pag.142.
The change of the Logical Address parameter involves the change of the name even for the cop-
ies of the same NE present in the additional applications of the supervision system (for example,
Ring Manager, VLAN Manager, RAN, etc.).
It is not possible to change the Ip Address parameter.
• Virtual Network Element is displayed in the box/area:
• Logical Address, the logical address of the NE
• Type, the type of NE
• Comment, additional information
It is possible to change the all parameter. The setting mode of the parameters is the same one
pointed out to pag.142.
To verify/modify the parameters of a Generic Symbol object
1. Select the wished Generic Symbol object.
2. Select the Edit > Modify/View > Generic Symbol command or press the right mouse button and
select Modify/View.
The Generic Symbol Properties window opens. Box/area:
• Label. Generic symbol name.
• Group. Group containing the symbol.
• Object. Symbol.
out to pag.143.
In the LX Map Manager window, the generic symbol assumes the new characteristics.
To verify/modify the parameters of a Link object
1. Select the wished Link object.
2. Select the Edit > Modify/View > Link command.

The Link Properties window opens.
Box/area:
• Label and Show Label. Name of the connection and if this is displayed in the map are respectively
indicated.
The display of the names of the Link objects is influenced even by the command View > Show/
Hide Link Label (see pag.159/Tab.9).
• Connection type. Connection type.
• Comment. Additional information
out to pag.143.
In the LX Map Manager window, the connection assumes the new characteristics.
NMS5LX 6.4.8 - MN.00272.E - 001 147

To verify/modify the parameters of a Label object
1. Select the wished Label object.
2. Select the Edit > Modify/View > Label command or press the right mouse button and select Modi-
fy/View.
The Label Properties window opens.
The wording is displayed in the Label box.
3. To modify the parameter, type the new value (alphanumeric string of max 50 characters) in the Label
box.
The label is modified in the LX Map Manager window.
NMS5LX 6.4.8 - MN.00272.E - 001 148

INFORMATION

The Information command displays the information of the symbol.

• To verify the information (marking status of the alarms, of the signalling of LCT presence, In-
correct Upload and the notes) of a symbol (pag.149).
• To add/modify/delete the informative notes of a NE symbol (pag.150).
The command is not available for the Generic Symbol, Label or Link objects.
To verify the information (marking status of the alarms, of the signalling of

LCT presence, Incorrect Upload and the notes) of a symbol
1. Select the wished object.
2. Select the Edit > Information command or press the right mouse button and select Information.
The Information window opens, where the symbol characteristics is displayed (Fig.17).
Fig.17 Information window
Marking status
of the " alarms",
of the signalling
of "LCT presence"
and "Incorrect
Upload" (1)
Symbol
informative
note (2)
Fig.17 notes
(1) If the selection is an object:

• Network Element. Box:
• Ack Alarm - active ( ). In the selected NE, there is at least a not marked alarm (cur-
rent and/or in the alarm history).
To mark the alarm, open the Alarm History Browser window (Fig.38) and/or the Cur-
rent Alarm Browser window (Fig.40).
• Ack Alarm - inactive. All the possible alarms are marked.
NMS5LX 6.4.8 - MN.00272.E - 001 149

• Ack LCT - active ( ). From the last time the equipment window of the selected NE
has been opened, the LCT connected to the NE at least once in Configuration modality
(LCT presence signalling).
To mark the signalling, open the equipment window relevant to the NE.
• Ack LCT - inactive. From the last time the equipment window of the selected NE has
been opened, LCT has not connected in Configuration modality.
• Incorrect Upload - active ( ). The last Configuration Upload is failed or ended with
problems.
The signalling is automatically removed at the first correctly executed operation of
Configuration Upload.
• Incorrect Upload - active. The last Configuration Upload ended successfully.
For the virtual NE the Acknowledge Information area is not meaningful.
• Network Element of ALplus Node or ALCplus2 Node type. Box:
• Ack Alarm - active ( ). At least a NE of the selected node, has at least one not
marked alarm.
• Ack Alarm - inactive. No NE of the selected node, has not marked alarms.
• Ack LCT - active ( ). At least one NE of the selected node, has the signalling of LCT
presence.
• Ack LCT - inactive. No NE of the selected node, has the signalling of LCT presence.
• Incorrect Upload - active ( ). At least one NE of the selected node, has the signalling
of Incorrect Upload.
• Incorrect Upload -No NE of the selected node, has the signalling of Incorrect Upload.
• Container. Box:
• Ack Alarm - active ( ). At least a NE, present in the selected container, has at least
one not marked alarm.
• Ack Alarm - inactive. No NE, present in the selected container, has not marked
alarms.
• Ack LCT - active ( ). At least one NE, present in the selected container, has the sig-
nalling of LCT presence.
• Ack LCT - inactive. No NE, present in the selected container, has the signalling of LCT
presence.
• Incorrect Upload - active ( ). At least one NE, present in the selected container, has
the signalling of Incorrect Upload.
• Incorrect Upload - inactive. No NE, present in the selected container, has the signal-
ling of Incorrect Upload.
(2) If selected, an NE object, the Note area reports the possible informative notes inserted by the user.
To add/modify/delete the informative notes of a NE symbol
1. Select the wished NE object.

2. Select the Edit > Information command or press the right mouse button and select Information.
The Information window opens (Fig.17).
3. In the Note area, add/modify/delete the text (max 50 characters).
4. Press OK.
If some notes are present, the symbol , is added next to the equipment symbol.
NMS5LX 6.4.8 - MN.00272.E - 001 150

GRAPHICAL SYMBOL PROPERTIES

The Graphical Symbol Properties command displays the graphic parameters assigned by the system to
the symbol.
The command is not available for the Link symbol.
To verify the graphic parameters assigned by the system to the symbol
1. Select the wished symbol.
2. Select the Edit > Graphical Symbol Properties command.

The Graphical Symbol Properties window opens.
Box:
• Selection Name. Graphic name of the symbol
• Object Properties. Graphic parameters of the symbol
The parameters cannot be modified.
NMS5LX 6.4.8 - MN.00272.E - 001 151

FIND

The Find command searches a symbol in the map using, as criterion, an alphanumeric string that consti-
tutes one part or the whole name, the IP address or notes.
To search a symbol in the map
1. Select the Edit > Find command.

The Find window opens.
2. Type in the Text to find: box the alphanumeric wording relevant to the NE you wish to find.
It is possible to use the asterisk wild-card character (*). For example, typing in the box the letter:
• p, the equipment with name, address or notes equal to p will be searched.
• p*, the NEs with name, address or notes starting with p will be searched.
• p*o, the NEs with name, address or notes starting with p and ending with o will be searched.
3. Select, in the Search for area, the field where the alphanumeric string must be searched:
• Symbol Name. Name of the symbol.
• IP Address. IP address of the symbol (parameter valid only for NE objects).
• Note. Additional notes for the symbol (parameter valid only for NE objects).
4. Press Find.
In the Search result area, there are as many rows as the objects, present in the map, that satisfy search
conditions.
For each object, the name and the position (map/container/…) of the relevant symbol.
5. In order to bring the LX Map Manager window with a a highlighted symbol in foreground, select the
relevant row in the Search result area and, then, press Open or double click on the row itself.
NMS5LX 6.4.8 - MN.00272.E - 001 152

ARRANGE SYMBOLS

The Arrange Symbols command aligns the symbols.
To align the symbols
1. Select the symbols you wish to align.

The first selected symbol is taken as reference for the alignment.
2. To align:
• Vertically the symbols, select the Edit > Arrange Symbols > Vertical command or press .
• Horizontally the symbols, select the Edit > Arrange Symbols > Horizontal command or press
.
According to the selected command/push-button, the symbols are aligned vertically or horizontally.
NMS5LX 6.4.8 - MN.00272.E - 001 153

GENERATE INFO FOR WEB

The Generate Info for WEB command checks the database information necessary to the RAN. This op-
eration re-alignment the information between the NMS5LX and RAN application.
For more information about the RAN application refer to the specific documentation.
To check the database information necessary to the RAN
1. Select the Edit > Generate Info for WEB command.

The information present in the database is generated.
At the end a message is displayed with the result of the operation.
NMS5LX 6.4.8 - MN.00272.E - 001 154

SET CURRENT WINDOW GEOMETRY FOR ALL CONTAINERS

The Set Current Window Geometry For All Containers command allows to set the size of the contain-
ers windows such as the size of the window where the command is selected.
To set the size of the containers windows
1. To resize the LX Map Manager window (Fig.1) at will.
2. Select the Edit > Set Current Window Geometry For All Containers command.
When a container is selected, the LX Map Manager window will keep the size set at step 1.
NMS5LX 6.4.8 - MN.00272.E - 001 155

VIEW
The View menu contains the following commands:
• Show/Hide Map Tree (pag.157). It hides/displays the Map area.

• Show/Hide Platform Status (pag.158). It hides/displays the platform status bar.
• Show/Hide Link Label (pag.159). It hides/displays the labels of the Link objects.
• Pan and Zoom (pag.160). It allows zooming a specific portion of the map window.
NMS5LX 6.4.8 - MN.00272.E - 001 156

SHOW/HIDE MAP TREE

The Show/Hide Map Tree command hides/displays the Map area (pag.32).
To display/hide the Map area
1. Select the View > Show/Hide Map Tree command or press .

The Map area is hidden.
Select the View > Show/Hide Map Tree command or press again to display the area again.
NMS5LX 6.4.8 - MN.00272.E - 001 157

SHOW/HIDE PLATFORM STATUS

The Show/Hide Platform Status command hides/displays the platform status bar (pag.45)
To display/hide the platform status bar
1. Select the View > Show/Hide Platform Status command or press .

The platform status bar is displayed.
2. Select the View > Show/Hide Platform Status command or press again to hide the bar again.
NMS5LX 6.4.8 - MN.00272.E - 001 158

SHOW/HIDE LINK LABEL

The command Show/Hide Link Label hides/shows the names of the Link objects in the View area of the
The display status of the names of the Link objects is pointed out by the presence of the wording [Link
Label Off] in the status bar.
In detail, if the wording is:
• Present, points out that the names of the Link objects ARE NOT displayed in the View area.
• Not present, points out that the names of the Link objects ARE displayed in the View area.
The display of the name of a Link object is influenced even by the setting of the relevant parameter Show
Label.
This parameter is set during the creation of the object (see pag.143). Then, it can be changed in any mo-
ment (see pag.147).
Tab.9 points out the interaction between the setting of the parameter Show Label and the display status
of the names of the Link objects in a map for an hypothetical object Link A.
Tab.9 Display of the name of the Link objects in the map
Object Link A - Display of the names of the Display of the name of the
parameter Show Label Link objects in the map * object Link A in the map
Active Active Name displayed
Inactive Active Name not displayed

Active Inactive * Name not displayed
Inactive Inactive * Name not displayed
* The wording [Link Label Off] is present in the status bar of the LX Map Manager window.
To show/hide the names of the Link objects
1. Select the command View > Show/Hide Link Label or press .

At each selection of the command/button, the wording [Link Label Off] appears and disappears from
the status bar of the LX Map Manager window.
NMS5LX 6.4.8 - MN.00272.E - 001 159

PAN AND ZOOM

The command Pan and Zoom allows zooming a specific area (selected by the user) of the map window.
When the command is selected, a box is displayed at the right bottom corner of the map window (area
Pan and Zoom). The box contains a little display of the whole View area of the map window.
A selection is cancelled by the successive selection.
Within the box, the user can, clicking with the left button of the mouse and dragging, define a specific area
(delimited by a red dotted line). When the left button is released, the area View of the map window will
display only the selected part of the map.
The box contains three push-buttons:

• View All: when pressed, the area View of the map window displays the whole map. The dotted
line is removed from the box Pan and Zoom.
• Minimize/Expand: when pressed, the box Pan and Zoom is minimized/opened in the bottom
right corner of the window. The push-buttons Minimize and Expand are displayed alternative-
ly.
• Close: when pressed, it closes the box Pan and Zoom and restores the area View to the normal
display.
and is provided, on every side, with a direction button to move the area delimited by the red dotted line
within the box itself. The area View of the map window changes accordingly.
NMS5LX 6.4.8 - MN.00272.E - 001 160

PERFORMANCE
The Performance menu contains the following commands:
• Performance Monitoring Read (pag.162). It updates the results of the PM measures of an

equipment.
• Performance Monitoring (pag.163). It displays the results of the PM measures of an equip-
ment.
• Old Performance Monitoring (pag.167). It displays the results of the PM measures of an
equipment, saved and restored from tape or disk.
• View/Modify P.M. Status (pag.169). It displays the status and allows activating/deactivating
the PM measures of one or more equipment of the same type contemporarily.
NMS5LX 6.4.8 - MN.00272.E - 001 161

PERFORMANCE MONITORING READ

The Performance Monitoring Read command updates the results of the PM measures of an equipment.
The updating request is sent to the controller of the equipment.
To update the results of the PM measures of an equipment
Operation meaningful only for the NE in connected status.

For the NE objects of ALplus Node or ALCplus2 Node type, the operation is executed for all the equipment
of the node.
1. Select the desired NE.

2. Select the Performance > Performance Monitoring Read command.
NMS5LX 6.4.8 - MN.00272.E - 001 162

PERFORMANCE MONITORING

The Performance Monitoring command displays the results of the PM measures of an equipment.
• To verify the results of the PM measures of an equipment, subdivided in daily records (24 hours)
and, for each record, verifying the values of the control parameters (pag.163).
• To verify the results of the PM measures of an equipment, subdivided in primary records (15
minutes) and, for each record, verifying the values of the control parameters (pag.166).
The command is not available for the virtual NE objects and the NE objects of ALplus Node or ALCplus2
Node type (for the NE of a nodal system, the command is present in the nodal window - pag.48/pag.49).
For more information about the PM measures go to pag.122.
To verify the results of the PM measures of an equipment, subdivided in daily

records (24 hours) and, for each record, verifying the values of the control
parameters
1. Select the NE.

If the type of selected NE does not support the PM measures, a warning message will be displayed.
2. Select the Performance > Performance Monitoring command or press .

The Graphic Performance Monitoring window opens, where the period of time for which you wish to
verify the results of the PM measures is required. In the boxes:
• Date Reference, the start date (day/month/year) is displayed (by default, the current day is set).
• Day Previous, the number of days, previous to the set date, that constitute the duration of the
period (by default, 30 days is set) is displayed.
3. Set the Date Reference and Day previous boxes to the wished values.
It is possible to set a value within 10 and 180 days.
Remember that it is possible to display at most the daily records relevant to the last 180 days (starting
from the current day). The results of the PM measures are stored in the database of the system (Per-
formance Monitoring table). They are available for a period of 6 months, then they are automatically
removed.
4. Set the Auto Select box. In detail:

• Activate the box if you wish that, at the selection of a control parameter of a measure point, also
the other control parameters are automatically selected, compatible with the measure unit of
the selected item (see step 7).
• Deactivate the box if you wish that, at the selection of a control parameter, no other parameter
is selected.
5. Press OK.
The Graphic Performance Monitoring window opens.
6. Select the TPC menu.

All the types of measure (TPC - Termination Point Class - yellow wordings) and the measure points
(points where the control parameters are really measured) (TP - Termination Point - orange wording)
available for the selected equipment are selected.
The control parameters are contained in the pop-up menu that opens on the side of the measure point.
Generally, more control parameters refer to the same TP.
7. Select the control parameters, for which you wish to display the results of the PM measures.
All the control parameters of a TP can be displayed in the same graphic. They have been subdivided
according to the measure unit used for their counting: seconds, blocks, dBm, etc.
NMS5LX 6.4.8 - MN.00272.E - 001 163

The Graphic Performance Monitoring window displays the results of the selected control parameters
Fig.18 shows an example.
When a parameter is selected, the name of the relevant TP changes colour: from orange, it becomes
red. While the selected control parameter is characterized by a symbol on its left side.
When a control parameter is selected, it is possible to select all the parameters that have the same
measure unit present in the same TP or in anyone of the other TPs.
The control parameters that have not the same measure unit of the selected parameter are not avail-
able (wording of grey colour).
In order to display the results of the parameters with measure unit different from the currently selected
one, it is necessary to deselect all the control parameters (Option > Deselect all TPC command) and,
then, select the new parameters.
Fig.18 Graphic Performance Monitoring window
Caracteristic of the equipment Each column of the Characteristics

of the selected time interval Menu graph represents of the
and of the graph (1) bar (2) a daily record (3) records (4)
Characteristics of the selected control Date of the record where the mouse
parameters and relevant to the record is placed and which the characteristics of
where the mouse is placed (5) the control parameters below are refered to
NMS5LX 6.4.8 - MN.00272.E - 001 164

Fig.18 notes
(1) In order:
• Type and logical address of the equipment.
• Start date and End date.
• Type of displayed record (Daily, Primary).
• Type of graph (Histogram, Chart, Chart Comp).
(2) Menu:
• File > Exit. It closes the window.
• Option > Deselect all TPC. It deselects all the selected control parameters.
• Option > Thresholds. It displays in the graph a broken line that represents the threshold val-
ue of each selected control parameter.
Each broken line will have the colour that represents the parameter in the graph.
• Option > Type image. It modifies the type of graph. In detail:
• Histogram, graph with histograms
• Chart, line graph
• Chart Comp., compressed line graph.
• TPC. List of the types of measure (TPC - Termination Point Class - wordings in yellow) and
of the measure points (TP - Termination Point - wordings in orange) available for the selected
type of equipment.
• Help > Index. It opens the on-line manual.
(3) The window displays the records contained in the set time period. They are displayed from the old-
est to the newest one. Use the scrolling bar to move among the records.
Each control parameter, within the record column, is identified by a colour. The colour legend is
displayed in the Legend and measure.... area
(4) Each record is identified by the relevant date (day/month/year).

The result of all the active measures is pointed out by a coloured wording under the date of the
record. In detail:
• Not available. The record is not available, as in the observation period under examination no
measure was active.
• No error (green). The record has been completely acquired and the measures are not er-
rored.
• Above Thrs (red). The record has been completely acquired and at least a control parameter
has exceeded the relevant threshold value.
Besides the record, in this case, the NE sends an alarm of exceeding of the daily record that
is stored in the alarm history.
• Below Thrs (yellow). The record has been completely acquired and the measured control pa-
rameters have not exceeded their threshold value.
• Lost (black). The record is not arrived to the main controller of the NE for example because
the corresponding peripheral card has been physically extracted before sending the record
itself or due to generic hardware/software troubles.
• Incompl (yellow). The record has not been completely acquired during the corresponding ob-
servation period.
The record of measure start is always in this status. The daily record assumes this status
also when only one primary record of the corresponding day is in incomplete status.
The daily record of the current date will be always incomplete as the daily records are
acquired at 23.59 of each day.
• Restarted (black). The record was lost due to a reset of the NE.
When the NE has a software restart and verifies that, for a given measure point, the measure
is active, all the records of that measure point will result in this status.
(5) For each control parameter, the following columns indicate:

• Value, value of the control parameter.
The colour of the number that represents the value indicates the exceeding of the threshold:
• Red. Value greater than the set threshold value.
NMS5LX 6.4.8 - MN.00272.E - 001 165

• Yellow. Value lower than the set threshold value.
• White. Threshold value not set (threshold inactive).
The dash (-) indicates that the value is not available.
• Col., colour that represents the parameter within the graph
• State Rec., status of the record relevant to the control parameter.
For the description of the different statuses, see note (4).
• Threshold, threshold level over which the relevant alarm is activated.
The wording Disable indicates that the threshold is inactive.
• Description, name of the measure point (TP) and relevant to the control parameter.
The control parameters changes according to the TP. Their description is reported in the
equipment user Manual relevant to the type of NE which the measure is referred to.
The window displays contemporarily all the records relevant to the period set at the begin-
ning of the procedure.
• RLT (dbm), power threshold level.
The field is displayed and it is meaningful only for power control parameters (for example
RLTS, RLTM, etc.).
To verify the results of the PM measures of an equipment, subdivided in pri-

mary records (15 minutes) and, for each record, verifying the values of the
control parameters
1. Open the Graphic Performance Monitoring window (see pag.163).

2. Double click on the record relevant to the day whose primary records you wish to display.
Another Graphic Performance Monitoring window opens.
In this window, it is possible to verify the results of the PM measures of all the primary records of the
selected day.
The items of the window and their description are the same shown in Fig.18, the only difference is that
instead of the daily records, each column will represent a primary record (15 minutes).
3. To return to the displaying of the primary records, double click on any point of the window.
NMS5LX 6.4.8 - MN.00272.E - 001 166

OLD PERFORMANCE MONITORING

The Old Performance Monitoring command displays the results of the PM measures of an equipment,
saved and restored from tape or disk.
• To verify the results of the PM measures of an equipment, subdivided in daily records (24 hours)
present in the Old Performance Monitoring table (pag.167).
• To verify the results of the PM measures of an equipment, subdivided in primary records (15
minutes) present in the Old Performance Monitoring table (pag.168).
The command is not available for the virtual NE objects and the NE objects of ALplus Node or ALCplus2
Node type.
In the Old Performance Monitoring table are stored the results of the PM measures saved (see pag.419)
and restored (see pag.420) from tape or disk.
To verify the results of the PM measures of an equipment, subdivided in daily

records (24 hours) present in the Old Performance Monitoring table
1. Select the NE.

If the type of selected NE does not support PM measures, a warning message will be displayed.
2. Select the Performance > Old Performance Monitoring command.

The Graphic Performance Monitoring window opens, where the time period, for which you wish to verify
the results of the PM measures, is required.
In the boxes:
• Date Reference, the date (day/month/year) of period start (by default the current day is select-
ed) is displayed.
• Day Previous, the number of days, previous to the set date, that constitute the period duration
is displayed (by default 30 days is set).
Remember that it is possible to display, at most, the daily records relevant to the last 180 days (starting
from the current day).

• Activate the box if you wish, on the selection of a control parameter of a measure point, also
the other control parameters, compatible with the measure unit of the selected item (see step
7) are automatically selected.
• Deactivate the box if you wish that, on the selection of a control parameter, no other parameter
is selected.
5. Press OK.
The Graphic Performance Monitoring - OLD window opens.
If, at the opening of the window, the table is empty, it is necessary to restore from the backup file
saved before the list of the wished measures (see pag.420).
They will remain available in the Old Performance Monitoring table and in the Graphic Performance
Monitoring - OLD window, until a different list of measures is not restored.

All the types of measure (TPC - Termination Point Class - wordings in yellow) and the measure points
(TP - Termination Point - wordings in orange) available for the selected equipment are listed.
NMS5LX 6.4.8 - MN.00272.E - 001 167

7. Select the control parameters for which you wish the display the results of the PM measures.
In the same graph not all the control parameters of a TP can be displayed. They have been subdi-
vided according to the measure unit used for their counting: seconds, blocks, dBm, etc.
The Graphic Performance Monitoring - OLD window displays the results of the selected control param-
eters.
The items of the Graphic Performance Monitoring - OLD window and their description are the same
shown in Fig.18.
When a parameter is selected, the name of the relevant TP changes colour: from orange it becomes
red. The selected control parameter is characterized by a symbol on its left.
measure unit present in the same TP or in any of the other TP.
The control parameters that have not the same measure unit of the selected parameter will not be
available (wording in grey colour).
In order to display the results of parameter with measure unit different from the currently selected
one, it is necessary to deselect all the control parameters (Option > Deselect all TPC command)
and, then, select the new parameters.
To verify the results of the PM measures of an equipment, subdivided in pri-

mary records (15 minutes) present in the Old Performance Monitoring table
1. Open the Graphic Performance Monitoring - OLD window (see pag.167).
2. Double click on the record relevant to the day for which you wish to display the primary records.
An addition Graphic Performance Monitoring - OLD window opens.
In this, it is possible to verify the results of the PM measures of all the primary records of the selected
day.
The items of the window and their description are the same shown in Fig.18, the only difference is that,
instead of the daily records, each column will represent a primary record (15 minutes).
3. In order to come back to the displaying of the primary records, double click on any point of the window.
NMS5LX 6.4.8 - MN.00272.E - 001 168

VIEW/MODIFY P.M. STATUS

User profile Normal, Advanced, Privileged, Superuser
The View/Modify P.M. Status command displays the status and allows activating/deactivating the PM
measures of one or more equipment of the same type contemporarily.
• To verify the operating status of the PM measure points of one or more equipment of the same
type (pag.169)
• To activate at the same time one or more PM measures for one or more equipment of the same
type (pag.171)
• To deactivate at the same time one or more PM measures for one or more equipment of the
same type (pag.171)
• To activate/deactivate a PM measure point for a specific NE (pag.172)
• To verify/modify the activation thresholds of the alarms relevant to PM for a specific NE
(pag.174)
The command is not available for the virtual NE objects.

For the NE objects of ALplus Node or ALCplus2 Node type, the operations will be executed on all the
node equipment.
To verify the operating status of the PM measure points of one or more NEs
of the same type
1. Select the real NE(s) of the same type.

2. Select the Performance > View/Modify P.M. Status command.
The View/Modify P.M. Status window opens, where the operating status of the measure points is dis-
played (Fig.19).
If more NE objects of different type are selected, the PM measures relevant to the first type of se-
lected NE are displayed. For example, if selected in order, one NE of SDH type, one NE of FAM type and
one NE of PDH type, on the selection of the command, the PM measures that characterize the SDH
equipment are displayed.
NMS5LX 6.4.8 - MN.00272.E - 001 169

Fig.19 View/Modify P.M. Status window
In this area, it is possible to filter the measure This area (Termination This area points out the
points displayed in the area are the right side Point) points out the Menu detail of the executed
(Termination point area) (1) measure points (2) bar (3) operations and their result
Fig.19 notes
(1) Area:
• Equipment. Equipment selected in the map. Select the option:
• All Equipment, to display the measure points relevant to all the equipment in the Ter-
mination Point area.
• Selected Equipment, to display the measure points relevant only to the selected
equipment in the Termination Point area.
The option is available only after having selected at least one equipment.
• Termination Point Class. Types of measures relevant to the type of equipment selected in
the map. Select the option:
• All TP Class, to display the measure points relevant to all the types of measure in the
Termination Point area.
• Selected TP Class, to display the measure points relevant only to the selected types
of measure in the Termination Point area.
The option is available only after having selected at least one type of measure.
• Termination Point Instances. Status of the measure point. Activate the box:
• Running Counters to display the active measure point in the Termination Point area.
• Not Running Counters to display the inactive measure point in the Termination Point area.
NMS5LX 6.4.8 - MN.00272.E - 001 170

(2) For each measure point, the following column points out:
• Logical Addr., the logical address of the equipment.
• TP Class, the name of the type of measure.
• TP Instance, name of the measure point.
• Status, status of the measure: active (wording: Running), inactive (wording Not running).
(3) Menu:
• Action > Start. It activates the PM measures.
• Action > Stop. It deactivates the PM measures.
• Action > Refresh Info. It updates the information contained in the window.
• Action > Attributes manager. It activates/deactivates the reading of PM and configures the
intervention thresholds of the relevant alarms for a specific equipment.
This functionality is available only for equipment managed via WebLCT (AGS10,
ALCplus2e and later).
• Help > On Usage. It opens the on-line manual.
• Help > About Application. Version of the module that manages the considered functionality.
To activate at the same time one or more PM measures for one or more
equipment of the same type

The View/Modify P.M. Status window opens (Fig.19).
3. To activate:
• All the PM measures of all the NE of the same type selected in the map, select the Action >
Start > All command.
• The measures relevant to the measure points present in the Termination Point area select the
Action > Start > Filtered command.
• The measures relevant to the measure points selected in the Termination Point area, select the
Action > Start > Selected command.
In the Message area, the result of the operation is displayed.
To deactivate at the same time one or more PM measures for one or more
equipment of the same type

The View/Modify P.M. Status window opens (Fig.19).
3. To deactivate:
Stop > All command.
• The measures relevant to the measure points present in the Termination Point area, select the
Action > Stop > Filtered command.
Action > Stop > Selected command.
In the area Message, the result of the operation is displayed.
NMS5LX 6.4.8 - MN.00272.E - 001 171

To activate/deactivate a PM measure point for a specific equipment
This functionality is available only for equipment managed via WebLCT (AGS10, ALCplus2e and later).
1. Select a real NE.
2. Select the command Performance > View/Modify P.M. Status.

The window View/Modify P.M. Status is displayed showing the status of the measure points (Fig.19).
3. Select the command Action > Attributes manager.
The window Attributes manager (Fig.20) is displayed, allowing managing the PM measure points for the
selected equipment.
The command is displayed only if a NE has been selected in the map.

The groups of measure points for the selected equipment are reported in the left column of the window.
4. Select the group of PM measure points containing the specific measure point you wish to activate/de-
activate (to do this, click on the group name or on the symbol +).
The group expands and displays the single measure points belonging to it. The symbol next to the group
name becomes -.
5. Select the wished PM measure point.

In the right area of the window, the field Instance Selection displays the name of the selected meas-
ure point and the box Start Stop displays the activation status of the measure point:
• Start. The selected measure point is active.
• Stop. The selected measure point is deactivated.
6. To activate the measure point, select the box Start Stop and then the value Start.
To deactivate the measure point, select the box Start Stop and then the value Stop.
The selected value becomes red to signal that it has not been communicated to the equipment yet.
7. Press Send Set to execute the configuration.

The set value becomes black again.
NMS5LX 6.4.8 - MN.00272.E - 001 172

Fig.20 Attributes manager window
IP of the equipment Name of the measure point

selected in the map selected in PM area
Menu
File
(1)
Expanded group
of measure points
Status of
PM measure
activation/
points of the
deactivation
expanded
of the measure
group
point (3)
Compressed
group of
measure
points
Alarm
Area of groups thresholds
of PM measure for the
points (2) selected
measure
point
(4)
Press this push-button to Press this push-button to

execute the configuration update the data in the window
Fig.20 notes
(1) Menu File contains the command Close which allows closing the window.
(2) This area displays by the symbol of a:

• blue diamond: the physical address of the equipment selected in the map
• blue square: the group of PM measure points. Next to every group, a sign + is displayed if
the group is compressed (press the symbol + to expand it) or a sign - if the group is expand-
ed (press the symbol - to compress it). The expansion of a group displays the single PM
measure points belonging to the group itself, the compression of a group hides them.
The selection of a PM measure point displays, in the right area, the activation status (note 3) and
the current alarm thresholds of the measure point itself (note 4).
Available PM measure points change depending on the type of considered equipment.
(3) Activation status of the selected PM measure point:

• Start. The selected measure point is active.
• Stop. The selected measure point is deactivated.
(4) The number above every cursor points out the value set as alarm threshold for every single control
parameter. If the number is red, the threshold value has been modified but not communicated to
the equipment yet (to communicate it press the push-button Send Set).
NMS5LX 6.4.8 - MN.00272.E - 001 173

To verify/modify the activation thresholds of the alarms relevant to PM for
a specific equipment
This functionality is available only for equipment managed via WebLCT (AGS10, ALCplus2e and later).
1. Select a real NE.
2. Select the command Performance > View/Modify P.M. Status.

The window View/Modify P.M. Status is displayed which shows the status of measure points (Fig.19).
3. Select the command Action > Attributes manager.
The window Attributes manager (Fig.19) is displayed, which allows managing the PM measure points
for the selected equipment.
The command is available only if a NE has been selected in the map.

In the left column of the window are reported the groups of PM measure points available for the selected
equipment.
4. Select the group of PM measure points containing the specific measure point you wish to activate/de-
activate (to do this click on the name of the group or on the symbol +).
The group expands and displays the single measure points belonging to it. The symbol next to the name
becomes -.
5. Select the wished PM measure point.

In the right area of the window, the field Instance Selection displays the name of the selected meas-
ure point and the cursors ... Threshold points out the alarm thresholds for every measure parameters.
6. To modify the value of a threshold, use the arrow keys to increase or decrease the value or drag and
drop the cursor on the wished value. The threshold value becomes red (not communicated to the equip-
ment yet).
7. To make the change effective, press the push-button Send Set.
NMS5LX 6.4.8 - MN.00272.E - 001 174

CONFIGURATION
The Configuration menu contains the following commands:
• Equipment Info (pag.176). It displays the characteristics and the functional status of the
equipment.
• Software Inventory (pag.178). It displays the software version and the units list (where a
controller or a FPGA is present) of the equipment present into the open map.
• OAM Status (pag.184). It manages the OAM Domain/Level configuration for a multiple selec-
tion of SNMP NEs.
• E1 Browser (pag.196). It manages the 2 Mbit/s tributaries of SNMP equipment present in the
open map.
• Equipment Port Configuration (pag.200). It displays the settings of the communication ports
of the equipment present into the open map.
• NE PPP Interfaces (pag.209). It displays the settings relevant to the PPP communication ports
of an equipment.
• NE Routing Table (pag.211). It displays the Routing Table and the Default Gateway address
of an equipment.
• Hw Inventory (pag.215). It displays the hardware version of the equipment present into the
open map.
• NE Backup/Restore (pag.219). It displays the backup files of the equipment present into the
open map.
NMS5LX 6.4.8 - MN.00272.E - 001 175

EQUIPMENT INFO

The Equipment Info command displays the characteristics and the functional status of the equipment.
To verify the characteristics and the functional status of an equipment
2. Select the Configuration > Equipment Info command or press the right mouse button and select
Equipment Information.
The Equipment Information window opens, where the characteristics and the functional status of the
equipment are displayed (Fig.21).
Selecting more NE symbols and choosing this command, more Equipment Information window open for
each selected NE.
Fig.21 Equipment Information window
Characteristics
and funtional
status of
the NE (1)
Press this push-button

to update the data
Press this push-button

to close the window
Fig.21 notes
(1) Option:
• Physical Address. Physical address of the NE.
• Logical Address. Logical address of the NE.
• Type. Type of NE.
• Equipment Status. Status of the connection between the NE and the supervision system.
• Alarm Status. Functional status (alarms) of the NE.
NMS5LX 6.4.8 - MN.00272.E - 001 176

The severity level of the alarm present on the NE is displayed. If more alarms of different
severity are present, the level relevant to the more serious alarm will be displayed.
• LCT Presence. Status of the connection between the local program and the NE. Value:
• Absent. The LCT user is not connected to the equipment.
• LCT Config. The LCT user is connected to the equipment in Configuration modality.
• LCT Monitor. The LCT user is connected to the equipment in Monitoring modality.
• Alarm History. Number of alarms relevant to the NE, stored in the alarm history. Box:
• Total. Total number of alarms.
• Ack. Number of marked alarms.
• Not Ack. Number of not marked alarms.
• Current Alarms. Number of alarms currently present on NE.
If a NE object of ALplus Node or ALCplus2 Node type is selected, the displayed information is
referred in part to the node (Physical Address, Logical Address and Type) and in part to the sum of
the information of the equipment belonging to the node (Equipment Status, Alarm Status, LCT Pres-
ence, Alarm History and Current Alarms).
NMS5LX 6.4.8 - MN.00272.E - 001 177

SOFTWARE INVENTORY

User profile Entry *, Normal, Advanced, Privileged, Superuser
* The user with entry profile cannot switch the operating of the memory benches.
The Software Inventory command displays the software version and the units list (where a controller or
a FPGA is present) of the equipment present into the open map.
• To verify the software version of the equipment present into the open map (pag.178)
• To verify the units list (where a controller or a FPGA is present) of the equipment present into
the open map (pag.180)
• To save/print the list of the equipment/units (pag.180)
• To open the equipment window (pag.180)
• To verify the configuration/functional status of an equipment (pag.181)
• To update the equipment software (pag.181)
• To switch the operating of the memory benches of an equipment controller (pag.181)
• To require the updating of the data to the controller of an equipment (pag.182)
• To filter/order the list of the equipment/units (pag.182)
To verify the software version of the equipment present into the open map
1. Select the Configuration > Software Inventory command.

The Snmp NE Software Inventory window opens.
2. Select the NE Software Inventory option.

The window displays the list of the NEs and the detail of the software (Fig.22).
Fig.22 Snmp NE Software Inventory window
Menu
bar (1)
The selected
push-button
points out the
type of data
displayed in
the table (2)
Equipment/
units list (3)
Status
bar (4)
Fig.22 notes
(1) Menu:
• File > Print/Save. It prints or save to file the information.
NMS5LX 6.4.8 - MN.00272.E - 001 178

• Action > Open Equipment. It opens the equipment interface.
• Action > Equipment Info. It displays the configuration/operation status of an equipment.
• Action > Software Download. It updates the equipment software.
• Action > Read Data From NE. It sends a request for the updating of the information to the
controller of the selected NE.
• Action > Bench Switch. It switches the operation of the memory benches of the controller of
the selected NE.
• View > Set Filter. It filters the list according to specific criteria.
(2) The lists (equipment and units) are not displayed contemporarily in the window. They are displayed
one instead of the other, according to the selected option. In detail, if active, the option
• NE Software Inventory, the list of the NEs and the detail of the equipment software is dis-
played.
• Unit Software Inventory, the list of the units is displayed.
The list points out all equipment present in the open map except for FAMxc, ELFO and SDH N+1.
For the NE objects of ALplus Node or ALCplus2 Node type, the detail of the equipment of the nodal
system is pointed out. This equipment is identified by the logic address:
• <node name>.X, where X can assume the value A, B or C (ALplus Node object).
• <node name>.Y, where Y can assume a value from 1 to 8 (ALCplus2 Node object).
(3) If active, the NE Software Inventory option, for each equipment, displays in the column:
• Logical Address. Logical address of the equipment.
• Type. Type of equipment.
• Ip Addr. IP address of the equipment.
• Status. Status of the connection between the equipment and NMS5LX.
• Release Bench 1. File name and version of the software present on the memory bench 1.
• Bench 1 Status. Operating status of the memory bench 1:
• Running. The software of the considered memory bench is running.
• Loaded. The software is present on the bench, but is not currently running (standby).
• Not loaded. The software is not loaded in the memory bench.
• Downloading. The updating of the software of the memory bench is running.
• Release Bench 2. File name and version of the software present on the memory bench 2.
• Bench 2 Status. Operating status of the memory bench 2. The detail of the wordings is the
same pointed out by the Bench 1 Status parameter.
If active, the Unit Software Inventory option displays in the column, for each unit:
• Logical Addr. Logical address of the equipment where the unit is present.
• Type. Type of equipment where the unit is present.
• Ip Address. IP address of the equipment where the unit is present.
• Status. Status of the connection between the equipment, where the unit is present, and
NMS5LX.
• Unit. Name of the unit.
• Element. Name of the element, where the software is loaded, present in the unit: controller,
programmable logic, etc.
• Actual Release. Name of the file and version of the software present in the element.
The information present in the table refers to the moment when the command is selected or the
refresh is executed.
(4) Field:
• xx of yy. Number of displayed records (xx) and number of total records (yy). If they are not
active filters, the number of displayed records corresponds to the total number of records.
• View... Activation of one or more filters.
• Date and time when the window has been opened or updated.
NMS5LX 6.4.8 - MN.00272.E - 001 179

To verify the units list (where a controller or a FPGA is present) of the equip-
ment present into the open map

The Snmp NE Software Inventory window opens (Fig.22).
2. Select the Unit Software Inventory option.

The window displays the list of the units.
To save/print the list of the equipment/units

2. Select the option:

• NE Software Inventory, to display the list of the equipment.
• Unit Software Inventory, to display the list of the units.
3. To print or save to a file:

• All the records stored in the database, select the File > Print/Save > All items command.
• The displayed records, select the File > Print/Save > Filtered Items command. If the filters
are not active, the displayed records correspond to the record stored in the database.
• A group of records, select the records and then the File > Print/Save > Selected Items com-
mand.
The Output Device Selection window opens.
4. To print the data:

a. Select the Output To Printer option.
In the Printer Name box, the default printer is automatically set (Default Printer).
If you want to print to another peripheral device, type in the box the name of the printer you
wish to use.
b. Choose the layout of the page, selecting the Landscape or Portrait option.
c. Press OK.
The format used to print the information corresponds to the format used to display it.
To save the data to a file:
a. Select the Output To File option.

b. Type, in the File Name box, the path and the name of the file where the information must be
saved.
Typing only the filename, this will be saved in the /opt/nms5ux/data/export/<application
name> directory.
c. Press Ok.
The files are saved in text format and can be opened using any text editor.
To open the equipment window

2. Press the NE Software Inventory option.
3. Select the equipment.
4. Select the Action > Open Equipment command.
NMS5LX 6.4.8 - MN.00272.E - 001 180

The equipment interface opens.
Selecting two or more records, it is possible to open more equipment window at the same time.
It is possible that, on the selection of the command, a message is displayed.
The description of the equipment window and of the messages that can be displaying at its opening are
reported in the specific equipment user manual.
The equipment window can be opened also by a double click on the record of the equipment.
To verify the configuration/functional status of an equipment


4. Select the Action > Equipment Info command.
The Equipment Information window opens (Fig.21).
Selecting two or more records, it is possible to open more windows at the same time.
To update the equipment software


Selecting two or more records, it is possible to open more windows at the same time.
4. Select the Action > Software Download command.

The Software Download window opens (Fig.77).
To switch the operation of the memory benches of an equipment controller
The operation is not available for the Entry user.

It is not possible to switch the memory bench when the updating of the software is in progress and when
the software is not present in the bench.
The operation causes an automatic disconnection and reconnection of the NE. If the re-connection fails,
the NE assumes the unreachable status and the command of re-connection will be sent, at regular inter-
vals, by the supervision system.

4. Select the Action > Bench Switch command and confirm.

At the end a message is displayed with the result of the operation. If this one was successful, the bench
in running status is forced to loaded status and vice versa.
NMS5LX 6.4.8 - MN.00272.E - 001 181

To require the updating of the data to the controller of an equipment

3. Select the wished equipment in connected status.

4. Select the Action > Read Data From NE command.
To filter/order the list of the equipment/units

• NE Software Inventory, to display and filter the list of the equipment.
• Unit Software Inventory, to display and filter the list of the unit.
3. Select the View > Set Filter command.
The View Filter window opens.
Select one or more boxes present in the window, depending on the criteria you wish to use.
The activation of each box expands the window, displaying a section containing the following options:
• Match Logical Address. Logical address of the NE.
To set the criterion, type the address of the NE in the text field.
It is possible to use the wild-card asterisk character (*). For example, typing in the box the let-
ter:
• p, the NE with logic address p will be displayed in the window.
• p*, the NEs whose logic address start with p will be displayed.
• p*o, the NEs whose address starts with p and ends with o will be displayed in the win-
dow.
• Match equipment type. Type of equipment.
To set the criterion, select the option relevant to the type of wished equipment.
• Match IP Address. IP address of the equipment.
To set the criterion, type the wished IP Address in the text fields. It is possible to use the wild-
card asterisk character (*).
• Match connection status. Status of the connection between the NE and NMS5LX.
To set the criterion, select the option relevant to the wished status.
• Match Bench Release. Version and/or usage status of the software present in the memory
benches of the equipment.
To set as criterion the version of the software, select the wished release from the list (the list
displays the releases of the software present in the equipment pointed out in the Snmp NE Sof-
tware Inventory window). The selected item is displayed in the text field.
To set as criterion the usage status of the software, activate the option:
• Not Loaded, to display the NEs whose memory benches have not the software loaded.
This option is not available if the software release is selected.

• Loaded, to display the NEs whose version of software corresponds to that set in the box,
whose software is in Loaded status (software present in the memory bench, but not used
at the moment).
• Running, to display the NEs whose software version corresponds to that set in the box,
whose software is in Running status (software present in the memory bench and used at
the moment).
NMS5LX 6.4.8 - MN.00272.E - 001 182

The filter is available only when the NE Software Inventory option is active in the Snmp NE
Software Inventory window.
• Match Object. Unit and/or element of the unit.
To set the criterion:
• Select the unit in the Unit Type list.
It is possible to select only one unit or all the units selecting All Units.
• Select the element (controller, programmable logic, etc.) in the Element Type list.
It is possible to set only one element or all the elements of the unit set in the Unit Type
box, selecting All Elements.
The filter is available only when the Unit Software Inventory option in the Snmp NE Software
Inventory window is active.
• Match Actual Release. Version of the software present in an element (controller, programmable
logic, etc.).
To set the criteria, select from the list the wished release (the list displays the releases of the
software present in the equipment pointed out in the Snmp NE Software Inventory window). The
selected item is displayed in the box.
The filter is available only when the Unit Software Inventory option in the Snmp NE Software
Inventory window is active.
The system displays in the Snmp NE Software Inventory window only the records that satisfy the acti-
vated criteria.
Each time that the list is filtered, all the records are considered, both the displayed ones and the hidden
ones.
In the window there are also the Clear (it removes the activation of the filters and displays the com-
plete list) and Cancel (it closes the window and does not execute the operation) push-buttons.
When the Snmp NE Software Inventory window closes, the possible activation of the filters is automat-
ically removed.
NMS5LX 6.4.8 - MN.00272.E - 001 183

OAM STATUS

The OAM Status command is available only for all the equipment supporting OAM functionality.
The OAM Status command allows the configuration of OAM-FM Domain/Level for a multiple selection of
SNMP NEs.
In detail, it is possible:
• To verify the characteristics of OAM-FM of one or more equipment (pag. 184)
• To define an OAM-FM Domain for one or more equipment (pag. 186)
• To remove the OAM-FM Domain for one or more equipment (pag. 187)
Every equipment manages only a single OAM-FM Domain.
The name or the level of an OAM-FM Domain associated to one or more equipment cannot be changed. In
order to modify one of the two parameters, it is necessary to remove the current Domain and to define a
new one.
The description of OAM-FM Ethernet functionality is described at pag. 187.
To verify the characteristics of OAM-FM Domain of one or more equipment
1. In the open map, select the SNMP equipment whose characteristics relevant to OAM-FM Domain you
wish to verify.
2. Select the command Configuration > OAM Status.

The OAM Manager window (Fig.23) is displayed, with the selected equipment displayed in the box
Equipment.
NMS5LX 6.4.8 - MN.00272.E - 001 184

Fig.23 OAM Manager window
Equipment display
area (6)
Menu
bar (1)
Filter on
equipment
(2)
Filter
on domain
status (3)
Domain
creation
area (4)
Domain
deletion
buttons
(5)
Messages area (7)
Fig.23 notes
(1) Commands of menu bar:

• File > Close, closes the OAM Manager window.
• Action > Refresh info..., updates the data displayed in the window.
• Help > On Usage, opens the user manual relevant to system NMS5LX.
• Help > About Application, opens a window with the information relevant to version of
NMS5LX.
(2) The View area allows selecting which equipment will be listed in the equipment display area.
The Equipment box points out the name of considered ALCplus2 equipment. Selecting the option
push-button:
• All Equipment, the equipment display area shows the considered equipment.
• Selected Equipment, the equipment display area shows the equipment selected in the
Equipment box. If no equipment is selected in area Equipment, this push-button is not avail-
able (greyed out).
(3) The Status Filter area allows filtering the display of the equipment depending on their association
to an OAM-FM Domain. In detail, if the operator selects the check-box:
• Absent, the equipment display area shows the considered equipment only if this is not as-
sociated to any OAM-FM Domain.
NMS5LX 6.4.8 - MN.00272.E - 001 185

• Present, the equipment display area shows the considered equipment only if this is associ-
ated to an OAM-FM Domain.
(4) The area Domain/Level Setting allows associating an OAM-FM Domain to the equipment selected/
displayed in the equipment display area. In detail:
• the field Domain is used to enter the name of OAM-FM Domain which must be associated.
• the combo-box Level is used to select the level (0-7) to assign to the OAM-FM Domain (value
0: level with lowest priority, 7: level with highest priority).
• the button Create Filtered associates the OAM-FM Domain with the above mentioned char-
acteristics to the equipment present in the equipment display area.
• the button Create Selected associates the OAM-FM Domain with the above mentioned char-
acteristics to the equipment selected in the equipment display area.
(5) Push-buttons:
• Delete Filtered removes the OAM-FM Domain from the equipment present in the equipment
display area.
• Delete Selected removes the OAM-FM Domain from the equipment selected in the equip-
ment display area.
(6) This area points out the following information:

• column Logical Addr, logical address (name) of the equipment.
• column Domain, OAM-FM Domain which the equipment is associated to. The symbol - means
that the equipment is not associated to any OAM-FM Domain.
• column Level, level of the OAM-FM Domain. The symbol - means that equipment is not as-
sociated to any OAM-FM Domain.
• column Status, status of association of the equipment to a given OAM-FM Domain. The word-
ing:
• Absent, points out that equipment is not associated to any OAM-FM Domain.
• Present, points out that equipment is associated to an OAM-FM Domain.
To define an OAM-FM Domain for one or more equipment
An OAM-FM Domain can be associated to an equipment only if the equipment has no Domain associat-
ed.
1. In the open map, select the SNMP equipment which you wish to define an OAM-FM Domain for.

The OAM Manager window (Fig.23) is displayed with the selected equipment displayed in the box Equip-
ment.
3. Select the rows relevant to the equipment in the box Equipment or the option push-button All Equip-
ment (if the domain must be assigned to all the present equipment).
4. If the field Domain is empty, type the name of the Domain you wish to associate to the equipment (al-
phanumerical string with minimum length of 1 character and maximum length of 45 characters).
5. Select, in the combo-box Level, the level of the Domain you wish to associate to the equipment (value
0: level with lowest priority, 7: level with highest priority).
6. Press:
• the push-button Create Filtered to associate the OAM-FM Domain with the above mentioned char-
acteristics to the equipment present in the equipment display area.
• the push-button Create Selected to associate the OAM-FM Domain with the above mentioned
characteristics to the equipment selected in the equipment display area.
NMS5LX 6.4.8 - MN.00272.E - 001 186

To remove the OAM-FM Domain for one or more equipment
It is not possible to remove an OAM-FM Domain containing at least one MA.
1. In the open map, select the SNMP equipment which you wish to remove an OAM-FM Domain for.

The OAM Manager window (Fig.23) is displayed.
3. Select the rows relevant to the equipment in the box Equipment or the option push-button All Equip-
ment (if you wish to remove the domain from all the present equipment).
4. Select the push-button Delete Selected.
OAM-FM Ethernet functionality implemented in equipment managed by

NMS5LX
OAM (Operations, Administration and Maintenance) Ethernet functionality represents the set of processes,
activities, rules, etc. which allow managing the operation, the monitoring and the fixing of troubles in the
Ethernet networks.
These services are defined by the following reference specifications, which you must refer to for the de-
tailed description of OAM Ethernet functionality:
• Recommendation ITU-T Y.1731 - OAM Functions and Mechanisms for Ethernet based Networks.
• Standard IEEE 802.1ag - IEEE Standard for Local and Metropolitan Area Networks – Virtual
Bridged Local Area Networks – Amendment 5: Connectivity Fault Management.
Among the above mentioned specifications, Siae equipment implement the functionality relevant to Con-
nectivity Fault Management (CFM).
This functionality has the purpose to monitor, in a Layer-2 Ethernet network, the end to end availability of
a service (implemented by a VLAN) and to monitor, in case of out-of-service, tools (LoopBack and Link
Trace) helping the operator in the analysis of the troubles.
In detail, through NMS5LX application, it is possible:
• To define the network segment to monitor:

• To define the OAM-FM Domain (pag.188) of maintenance (name and level).
• To define, for each VLAN (service) configured on the equipment, the maintenance points necessary
to diagnostic the connection troubles within a maintenance Domain:
• To define, for every service (VLAN), a Maintenance Association (MA - pag.188) to monitor.
• To define the end points to monitor the maintenance area (MEP - pag.188).
• To define the intermediate monitoring points of the maintenance area (MIP - pag.190).
• To manage, for every local MEP, the relevant table of Remote MEPs (pag.190) (RMep table).
• To manage the Continuity Check messages (CCM - pag.192) which allow end-to-end monitoring of
a service instance (VLAN) pointing out any interruption.
• To manage the LoopBack messages (LBM - pag.193) which, after the detection of a fault, allow
isolating the point where the fault occurred.
• To manage the Link Trace messages (LTM - pag.193) which allow tracing the path followed by an
OAM-FM packet between two different MEPs within the same VLAN.
Here below a brief description of the above mentioned OAM-FM elements together with their management
are reported.
Moreover, an example of configuration of an OAM-FM maintenance Domain for a set of ALCplus2 equipment
is reported (VLAN creation, Domain, maintenance points, etc.) (see pag.194).
NMS5LX 6.4.8 - MN.00272.E - 001 187

OAM-FM Domain
The term OAM-FM Domain defines a network or a part of a network owned and managed by a single entity
(operator) and where the connection troubles can be managed.
The OAM-FM Domain is characterized by a name and a layer.
The name identifies the Domain. The layer is used to define the hierarchical relationship among domains.
Greatest is the Domain, highest will be the layer. In fact, the layer corresponds to a value from 0 to 7,
where 0 represents the lowest layer (lowest priority) and 7 the highest layer (higher priority).
All the other entities defined by OAM refer to the Domain: MA (MIP) (pag.188/pag.190) and MEP
(pag.188).
Every equipment manages a single OAM-FM Domain.
OAM-FM Domain must be defined in any equipment you wish to belong to the same OAM-FM maintenance
segment (see pag.188).
Once an OAM-FM Domain has been defined, its name or layer cannot be changed. To do this, the Domain
must be removed and a new one must be created with the new values.
An OAM-FM Domain cannot be removed if at least one VLAN exists, which one MA has been defined for.
This Domain is transparent as regards the OAM-FM messages with higher priority (messages to/from the
higher domains), while stops all the messages with lower priority (messages to/from lower domains).
MA
The term MA (Maintenance Association) identifies the service (VLAN) you wish to monitor.
A Maintenance Association is associated to an user-defined VLAN. Creating a MA means enabling the con-
trol of the specified VLAN.
Within a specific OAM-FM Domain, there are as many MAs as the VLANs the user wishes to monitor.
The equipment manages one MA per each single VLAN.
On an equipment the definition of a MA can be executed:

• by the user through a specific command or
• automatically by the system, after that the user has defined a MEP.
For the description of the above mentioned operations, refer to the user manual of single equipment.
The definition of a MA in a VLAN, which a MEP is not defined for, corresponds to the automatic definition
of a MIP (pag.190) per every single port of the Switch which the specific VLAN is enabled for.
Once a MA has been defined, its name cannot be changed. To do this, the MA must be removed from the
VLAN and a new MA must be created with the new values.
The removal of a MA involves even the automatic removal of the MEP (if present) from the VLAN.
MEP
The term MEP (Maintenance End Point) defines the entity, associated to a specific service instance (VLAN),
representing the end point of a MA (pag.188).
MEP can generate and terminate OAM-FM messages regarding the fault management and the performance
monitoring.
MEP is the entity intended for the control of the service (VLAN) as, within the OAM-FM maintenance seg-
ment, the set of MEPs created in the end points of a VLAN allows controlling the correct end to end oper-
ation of the VLANs.
The control is achieved by means of the periodic transmission, by each MEP, of the CCM messages
(pag.192) and of the control of the reception of the same messages by the remote MEPs (pag.190).
NMS5LX 6.4.8 - MN.00272.E - 001 188

The equipment manages a single MEP per each MA (VLAN) and a maximum of 32 MEPs (32 MA/VLAN).
MEP must be defined only in the equipment acting as end points of the same VLAN (see equipment user
manual).
The definition of a MEP for a VLAN involves even the automatic definition of the MA, if not already done.
The definition of a MEP requires the setting of:
• A numeric identifier, which must be univocal within the network for the specific VLAN.
• The name of the relevant MA (only if not already defined).
• The time interval used for the transmission of the continuity check messages (CCM).
Once MEP has been created, the transmission of the CCM messages is disabled. They must be en-
abled by the user (see equipment user manual).
• The port of the Ethernet Switch, where you wish to map the MEP, and the direction to which you
wish to send CCMs. Possible directions:
• Direction UP. CCM messages are sent as they were in input from the considered port to the
other ports of the Switch interested by the considered VLAN.
• Direction DOWN. CCM messages are sent in output from the selected port.
Once a MEP has been defined, its configuration cannot be changed. To do this, remove the MEP from the
VLAN and create a new one with the new configuration.
The removal of a MEP involves event the automatic removal of the relevant MA from the VLAN.
The equipment, for every single MEP, manages the following alarms:
• MEP Fail - OAM-FM MA: <MA name> MEP Id:<local MEP identifier> Fail Alarm
The alarm becomes active when at least one of the remote MEPs present in the RMep table of the
specific local MEP is in status Start or Failed.
• MEP Configuration Mismatch - OAM-FM MA:<MA name> MEP Id:<local MEP identifier> Config. Mis-
match Alarm.
The alarm becomes active when the local MEP receives at least one CCM message, containing con-
figuration data different from those set for the local MEP itself, from one of the remote MEPs.
With configuration data we mean: Domain name, MA name, CCM interval.
When this alarm is active, the remote MEP, which has raised the alarm, cannot be enabled in the
RMep table.
Fig.24 OAM-FM functionality - Maintenance points
Domain: Test
A.1 MEP 10
A.2 A.3 MEP 11
A.4
Switch Switch MIP Switch Switch
1 1 1 1
VLAN Id: 20
A 2 MA: Vlan 20
2 A A 2 2 A
3 3 3 3
4 4 4 4
A.5 A.6 A.7

Switch MIP Switch Switch
1 1 1
2 A A 2 2 A
3 3 3
4 4 4
MEP 12
NMS5LX 6.4.8 - MN.00272.E - 001 189

MIP
The term MIP (Maintenance Intermediate Point) defines a passive entity, associated to a specific service
instance (VLAN).
MIPs are defined on transit equipment for the monitored VLAN, intermediate among the MEPs (pag.188).
MIP can reply to the LoopBack messages (LBM - pag.192), sent in unicast by a MEP (MAC Address), and
to the Link Trace messages (LTM - pag.193), sent by a MEP, but it cannot generate requests of LoopBack
and Link Trace towards other MIP or MEP.
MIP is defined by the operator in equipment which acts as intermediate points of the same VLAN and
the same OAM-FM maintenance segment.
The definition of a MIP takes place after the definition of the MA (see pag.188).
The definition of a MA, within a VLAN for which a MEP is not defined, corresponds to the automatic definition
of a MIP for every single port of the Switch for which the specific VLAN is enabled.
Once a MA/MIP has been defined, its name cannot be changed. To do this, remove the MA/MIP from the
VLAN and create a new one with the new name.
Remote MEPs
The term Remote MEP (Maintenance End Point) defines entities which represent the other end points (re-
mote points) of a VLAN with respect to the local MEP.
Example
With reference to Fig.24, if you are connected by the supervision system to the equipment A.1, the
local MEP will be MEP 10 while the remote MEPs will be MEP 11 and MEP 12.
Otherwise, if you are connected by the supervision system to the equipment A.4, the local MEP will be
MEP 11 while the remote MEPs will be MEP 10 and MEP 12.
A table of the remote MEPs (RMep table) is associated to every local MEP (then to every MA/VLAN).
This table records the remote MEPs from which the local MEP is waiting for a CCM message (pag.192).
If the CCM message does not arrive within a timeout period equal to 2,5 CCM interval set for the local MEP,
the remote MEP is set to status Failed and the relevant alarm is activated (OAM-FM MA:... MEP Id:... Fail
Alarm).
Example
With reference to Fig.24, if you are connected by the supervision system to the equipment A.1, MEP
11 and MEP 12 will be recorded in the RMep table (relevant to MEP 10).
The transmission of CCM messages is enabled at intervals of 10 sec between a transmission and the
next one.
If, after 25 sec. (2,5 times the CCM interval), MEP 10 does not receive a CCM message, for example
from MEP 11, in the RMep table MEP 11 will be set to status Failed and the alarm OAM-FM MA: Vlan 20
MEP Id: 10 Fail Alarm will be activated, pointing out that a Remote Mep in Failed is present in the RMep
table of the local MEP 10.
The remote MEP remains in status Failed until the local MEP receives a valid CCM message from the
remote MEP or the user removes the remote MEP from the table.
The recording of remote MEPs in the RMep table consists of two parts: the entry in the table and the ena-
bling of the remote MEP (operation necessary so that the remote MEPs are acknowledged as valid end
points by the local MEP).
The entry of MEP in the table takes place:
a. AUTOMATICALLY, after the reception of the first CCM sent by a remote MEP.
For these remote MEPs, the table points out the identifier of the remote MEP and the MAC Ad-
dress of the equipment which the remote MEP belongs to.
The enabling for this type of remote MEPs must be executed manually by the operator (see
Fig.25).
b. MANUALLY, after a command of the operator, who adds the remote MEP.
NMS5LX 6.4.8 - MN.00272.E - 001 190

For these remote MEPs, the table points out the identifier of the remote MEP (provided by the
operator) while the MAC Address is set to zero.
The enabling for this type of MEP takes place automatically when the equipment receives the
first CCM message sent by the specific remote MEP.
When the first CCM is received, the field MAC Address gets the value of the MAC Address of the
remote equipment, source of CCM.
The status of a remote MEP is pointed out in the table by the parameter MEP State and can be:
• Start. Initial status of the remote MEP after its (automatic or manual) insertion in the table or
status assumed by remote MEP after it has been disabled.
The operations a user can execute when a remote MEP is in status Start and the conditions which
cause the passage of the remote MEP from a status to another one change depending on the
type of insertion of the MEP in the RMep table (automatic or manual) as depicted in Fig.25.
• Conn. Status the remote MEP reaches from the status Start after an enabling command or at
the reception of the first CCM message sent by the specific remote MEP, if previously recorded
by the operator (see Fig.25).
The operations a user can execute when a remote MEP is in status Conn and the conditions which
cause the passage of the remote MEP from a status to another one are depicted in Fig.25.
• Failed. Status the remote MEP reaches when the local MEP does not receive (for a period of 2,5
times the CCM interval) a CCM message from the specific remote MEP, as described at the be-
ginning of the chapter.
The operations a user can execute when a remote MEP is in status Failed and the conditions
which cause the passage of the remote MEP from a status to another one are depicted in Fig.25.
After the (automatic or manual) insertion of a remote MEP in the table, it can be removed only manually
by the operator.
In NMS5LX, the RMep table of a local MEP can be displayed only after the local MEP has been associated
to a VLAN.
Fig.25 OAM-FM - Management of Remote MEP status in the RMep table
The remote MEP is automatically inserted The remote MEP is manually

in RMep table when the local MEP receives the inserted in the RMep
first CCM message sent by remote MEP table by the operator (1)
Remote MEP status Remote MEP status

Start Start
The local MEP
The user The user The user
receives the
disables the disables the disables the
first CCM sent
remote MEP remote MEP remote MEP
by the remote
(3) (2) (3)
MEP

Conn. Conn.
The user
Local MEP does deletes the
Local MEP Local MEP does Local MEP
not receive the remote MEP
receives not receive the receives
CCMs from (4)
again the CCMs from remote again the
remote MEP
CCMs from MEP anymore CCMs from
anymore
remote MEP remote MEP
Failed Failed
The user deletes The user deletes

the remote MEP (4) the remote MEP (4)
Removal of remote MEP Removal of remote MEP

from RMep table from RMep table
NMS5LX 6.4.8 - MN.00272.E - 001 191

CCM
The term CCM (Continuity Check Message) defines the messages which constantly monitor the path of the
service instance pointing out the connection troubles.
CCMs are multicast messages sent by a MEP entity to the other MEP entities belonging to the same MA
(Remote MEPs - pag.190), are unidirectional messages (do not need a reply) and are periodically sent.
Within a MA which n MEPs belongs to, every MEP periodically sends a CCM in multicast; every MEP waits
to periodically receive n-1 CCMs.
The missed reception of a CCM by a MEP means the presence of a fault in the path of the service instance
(VLAN).
When a MEP does not receive a CCM message, it goes to status Failed: this status is notified to the other
MEPs setting the field RDI (Remote Defect Indicator) present in the sent CCM message.
In this way, all the MEP entities know the existence of a fault along their own path.
The remote MEP is automatically inserted in the RMep table when the local MEP receives the first CCM mes-
sage sent by the remote MEP.
The CCM management in the equipment is strictly bound to the MEP management.
In fact, the configuration parameters of the CCM messages must be set when MEP is created. In detail, the
user is required to define:
• The time interval used for the transmission of CCMs (CCM interval).
For a correct operation of the CCM messages, the CCM interval must be the same for all the MEPs
of the same VLAN.
• The direction you wish to send the CCM messages to.
Once the MEP has been defined, the enabling of the transmission of CCMs is required.
Then, the user can disable and enable again the transmission of the CCM messages at his wish (see equip-
ment user manual).
The configuration parameters of the relevant CCMs (interval and direction) cannot be modified. To do this,
remove the MEP from the VLAN and create a new one with the new values.
In the equipment, the CCM messages (OAM-FM packets) are routed on the VLANs only if the control of Tag
VLan Id is active (parameter Ingress Filtering Check - set value Fallback or Secure - see equipment user
manual).
In the CCM messages sent in multicast (OAM-FM packets) is used as:
• Destination address (Destination MAC address): 01-80-C2-00-00-3x with x from 0 to 7 according

to the layer of OAM-FM Domain.
• Source address (Source MAC address): physical address of the equipment which has generated the
CCM message (MAC Address associated to the management LAN port of the controller).
LBM
The term LBM (LoopBack Message) defines the LoopBack messages which, once a fault has been detected
through the CCM messages (pag.192), allow isolating the point where the fault has occurred.
The operation modality of OAM-FM LoopBack is similar to IP ping.
From a MEP an OAM-FM packet is sent in unicast with a request of Echo Request (LoopBack Message) to a
MIP or MEP belonging to the same MA. The MEP waits for the relevant reply Echo Reply (Loopback Replies)
sent in unicast from the remote maintenance point.
The missing reply to a LBM message points out the presence of a fault between the MEP which has sent
the message and the maintenance point which has not replied to the message.
The LBM messages are sent after a command from operator (see equipment user manual).
The transmission of LoopBack messages requires the setting of:
• The local MEP, which you wish to send the messages from.
NMS5LX 6.4.8 - MN.00272.E - 001 192

• The remote maintenance point, belonging to the same Domain and the same MA of the local MEP,
which you wish to send the messages to. The setting of a:
• MEP can be done choosing the MEP in the RMep table or setting the MAC Address of the
equipment where the remote MEP is defined.
• MIP can be done setting the MAC Address of the equipment where MIP is defined.
• Number of messages (OAM-FM packets - Echo Request) you wish to send in sequence with a single
sending confirmation (minimum 1 maximum 5).
At the end of the operation, a statistics is available with the number of sent packets (Sent messages), the
number of received correct packets (Valid), the number of packets received out of sequence (Out Of Order)
and the number of packets received with unknown format (Bad Msdu).
Equipment, in the LBM messages sent in unicast, uses as:
• Destination address (Destination MAC address): physical address of the addressee of the LoopBack
message.
LoopBack message.
LTM
The term LTM (Link Trace Message) defines the Link Trace messages which allow determining the path
covered by an OAM-FM packet between the end-points of a service instance (VLAN).
The operating modality of OAM-FM Link Trace is similar to TraceRoute IP.

A Link Trace message is sent in multicast from a MEP (local) to a remote MEP, whose physical address must
be known.
In the Link Trace messages, the TTL (Time To Live) field, which points out the number of equipment of the
specific OAM-FM Domain the packet can pass through before being declared expired, is properly config-
ured.
The LTM messages are captured by all the MEPs-MIPs (defined on the same VLAN) present on the equip-
ment crossed to reach the destination MEP.
Every MEP-MIP, once the message has been intercepted, decreases the TTL field, replies to the source MEP
with an unicast message and forwards the LTM message to the destination MEP.
This operation is repeated until the packet arrives to the addressee remote MEP.
At the end of the operation, the local MEP has acquired the list of the physical addresses (MAC Address) of
the equipment where the Link Trace messages have passed.
The LTM messages, to trace the path between two different MEPs of the same VLAN, are sent after a com-
mand by operator (see equipment user manual).
To trace a path, the operator must set the two path ends:
• Local MEP.
• Remote MEP. This setting can be done choosing the MEP from the RMep table or setting the MAC
Address of the equipment whose remote MEP has been defined.
The remote MEP, to make the operation being successful, must be in status Conn. (see Fig.25).
Then the operator must send the LTM message (Run Test).
At the end of the operation, will be displayed the list of the MAC Addresses of the MIPs-MEPs crossed to
reach the remote MEP with the indication of the distance in Hops from the source MEP.
The LTM messages are sent in multicast (OAM-FM packets), use as:
• Destination address (Destination MAC address): 01-80-C2-00-00-3y with y from 8...0xF accord-
ing to the layer of the OAM-FM Domain.
Link Trace message.
NMS5LX 6.4.8 - MN.00272.E - 001 193

Example of configuration of a OAM-FM maintenance Domain for a set of ALCplus2
equipment
Fig.26 shows an example of configuration of a maintenance OAM-FM area including four ALCplus2 equip-
ment (A.1, A.2, A.3 and A.4). This area is used to monitor the end to end availability of VLAN 20.
Fig.26 OAM-FM - Example of configuration of a maintenance area
Domain: Test
A.1 MEP 10
A.2 A.3 MEP 11
A.4
Switch Switch MIP Switch Switch
1 1 1 1
A 2 2 A A 2 2 A
3 3 3 3
4 VLAN Id: 20 4 4 4
MA: Test 20
The steps to execute, through NMS5LX application on every single equipment, are the following:
1. Configure the VLAN with identifier 20 on the 4 equipment (see equipment user manual).
The VLAN must be operating so, besides creating it, it is necessary:
• To execute the proper physical connections.
• To activate the Ethernet ports interested by the VLAN (see equipment user manual - parameter
Rate Control).
• To configure properly the transit of the messages in input from the Ethernet port (see equipment
user manual - parameter Port Based VLAN).
• To activate the control of Tag VLan Id (see equipment user manual - parameter Ingress Filtering
Check).
2. Define the OAM-FM Domain with name Test (see pag.186) and level 5.
OAM-FM Domain must be defined in every equipment of the Domain Test. The name and the level of
the Domain must be the same for all the equipment.
3. Associate the MA (pag.188) with name Test to the VLAN (see equipment user manual).
MA must be associated to VLAN 20 in every equipment of Domain Test. The name of MA must be the
same for all the equipment.
4. Define the MEPs (pag.188) (see equipment user manual) in the following way:
• Only for equipment A.1, associate a MEP with the following characteristics to VLAN 20:
• Identifier: 10
• CCM interval: 10 sec.
• Ethernet port: LAN 3
• Direction of CCMs: Down - The CCM messages (pag.192) are sent in output from LAN 3.
• Only for equipment A.4, associate a MEP with the following characteristics to VLAN 20:
• Identifier: 11
• CCM interval: 10 sec.
• Ethernet port: LAN 1
• Direction of CCMs: Down - The CCM messages are sent in output from LAN 1.
5. Enable the transmission of CCM messages for the MEPs created in the previous step (see equip-
ment user manual).
After some seconds, the RMep table (see Remote MEPs - pag.190) relevant to MEP 10 (equipment A.1)
records the MEP 11 in status Start and the alarm OAM-FM MA: Test 20 MEP Id: 10 Fail Alarm becomes
active.
At the same time, the RMep table relevant to MEP 11 (equipment A.4) records the MEP 10 in status
Start and the alarm OAM-FM MA: Test 20 MEP Id: 11 Fail Alarm becomes active.
6. In RMep tables, enable the remote MEPs (see equipment user manual).
In the RMep table relevant to MEP 10 (equipment A.1), the remote MEP 11 changes to status Conn and
the OAM-FM MA: Test 20 MEP Id: 10 Fail Alarm alarm becomes inactive.
In similar mode, in the RMep table relevant to MEP 11 (equipment A.4), the remote MEP 10 changes
to status Conn and the OAM-FM MA: Test 20 MEP Id: 11 Fail Alarm alarm becomes inactive.
NMS5LX 6.4.8 - MN.00272.E - 001 194

The configuration of the maintenance area depicted in Fig.26 is completed and the end to end monitoring
of VLAN 20 is active.
At this point:
• When a fault is detected (activation of the alarm OAM-FM... Fail Alarm) or in order to execute checks
on the OAM-FM path, the operator can use the LTM messages (pag.193) to verify the path of the
VLAN.
• When the Fail alarm is detected, the operator can use the LBM messages (pag.192) to detect the
interruption point of the VLAN.
NMS5LX 6.4.8 - MN.00272.E - 001 195

E1 BROWSER
System access Reading/Writing Read Only, Read-Write

User profile Reading Entry
Reading/Writing Normal*, Advanced, Privileged, Superuser
* The user with profile Normal can set only the parameters relevant to maintenance (MAN. OP).
The E1 Browser command allows managing the 2Mbit/s tributaries of the SNMP equipment selected in the
open map.
• To verify the status of 2Mbit/s tributaries (pag.196)
• To verify/modify the label of a tributary (pag.198)
• To activate/deactivate the use of 2Mbit/s tributaries (pag.198)
• To activate/deactivate the loops of 2Mbit/s tributaries (pag.199)
To verify the status of 2Mbit/s tributaries
1. Select the SNMP equipment you wish to verify the status of 2 Mbit/s tributaries for.
2. Select the command Configuration > E1 Browser.

The E1 Tributaries Management window is displayed showing the status of tributaries, loops and alarms
(Fig.27).
NMS5LX 6.4.8 - MN.00272.E - 001 196

Fig.27 E1 Tributaries Management window
File
menu
(1)
Box to select
the group of
tributaries (5)
Status of
use of the
tributary
(2)
Status of
line side
loop (4)
Tributary Status of
label internal
side loop
(4)
Management
of LOS alarm
when the
tributary is
not used (3)
Press this push-button Press this push-button to

to update the information communicate the configuration
displayed in the window to the equipment
Fig.27 notes
(1) File menu contains the command Exit to close the window.
(2) Symbol:
• , the tributary is not active (tributary not used). In this condition, alarms are inhibited
and LOS alarm is raised or not depending on the setting of box LOS Inv (see note 4).
• , the tributary is active (tributary used). In this condition, the controller does not in-
hibit alarms.
If the symbol of a tributary is not available (greyed), this means that the tributary cannot be
configured because already used for other functionalities (as, for example, synchronization). For
more information, refer to the user manual of the single equipment.
(3) If the box is:

• , alarms are not inhibited and LOS alarm is NOT raised if, with tributary disabled, the
2Mbits/s signal is however connected.
• , alarms are inhibited and LOS alarm is raised if, with tributary disabled, the 2Mbits/s
signal is however connected.
The status of box LOS Inv IS MEANINGFUL ONLY if the tributary is not used.
NMS5LX 6.4.8 - MN.00272.E - 001 197

(4) Symbol:
• , loop on line side is active.
• , loop on internal side is active.
• , loop is inactive.
(5) Select the box to display the list of the groups of 2Mbit/s tributaries present on the equipment.
The number of available tributaries depends on the equipment type.
To verify/modify the label of a tributary
1. Select the SNMP equipment which you wish to modify the label of one or more 2Mbit/s tributaries for.
2. Select the command Configuration > SNMP-E1 Browser.

The E1 Tributaries Management window is displayed showing the label of every single tributary
(Fig.27).
3. To modify the label of a tributary, click on the corresponding text box.

The cursor for the editing of the text is displayed in the box.
4. Type an alphanumeric string of 40 characters at most.
5. Press Send New Setting and confirm.
To activate/deactivate the use of 2Mbit/s tributaries
If the symbol of a tributary is not available (greyed), this means that the tributary cannot be configured
because already used for other functionalities (as, for example, synchronization). For more information,
refer to the user manual of the single equipment.
1. Select the SNMP equipment which you wish to activate/deactivate the use of one or more 2 Mbit/s trib-
utaries for.

The E1 Tributaries Management window is displayed (Fig.27).
3. Select the tributary you wish to enable (or disable).

The tributary gets the status complementary to the previous one (if enabled, it changes to disabled and
vice versa) and the symbol assumes colour yellow (configuration not communicated yet to the equip-
ment). Pressing:
• Ok, LOS alarm is NOT raised if, with E1 disabled, the signal is however connected.
• No, LOS alarm is raised if, with E1 disabled, the signal is however connected.
When the tributary is disabled, the management status of LOS alarm can be changed in the following
way. If the box LOS Inv. is:
• , LOS alarm is NOT raised if, with E1 disabled, the signal is however connected.
• , LOS alarm is raised if, with E1 disabled, the signal is however connected.
Select the box to enabled or disable the management of the alarm. On every selection, the box gets
the status complementary to the previous one (if enabled, it changes to disabled and vice versa).
4. Press Send New Setting and confirm.

The tributary takes the new status and the corresponding symbol becomes white again.
NMS5LX 6.4.8 - MN.00272.E - 001 198

To activate/deactivate the loops of 2Mbit/s tributaries
Maintenance operation (MAN. OP).
1. Select the SNMP equipment which you wish to activate/deactivate one or more tributary loop for.

The E1 Tributaries Management window is displayed (Fig.27).
3. Select the loop you wish to activate (or deactivate).
The loop gets the status complementary to the previous one (if active, it changes to inactive and vice
versa) and the symbol becomes yellow (configuration not communicated yet to the equipment).
The activation of the loop on internal side automatically enables the tributary, if this is not already
enabled.
4. Press Send New Setting.

If you are activating one loop at least, a message is displayed warning that you are executing a forcing
and showing the current setting of timeout.
5. Press Yes to continue the operation.

The tributary loop assumes the new status and the symbol becomes white.
The activation of one loop at least raises the alarm MAN. OP. If the equipment is switched off and then
switched on, the loops are inactive independently from the setting before the switch off.
If the message Operation fail! ...Wrong user profile! is displayed, verify that the used user profile can
enable the tributary.
NMS5LX 6.4.8 - MN.00272.E - 001 199

EQUIPMENT PORT CONFIGURATION

Reading/Writing Normal, Advanced, Privileged, Superuser
The Equipment Port Configuration command displays the settings of the communication ports of the
equipment (except FAMxc and SDH N+1) present into the open map.
• To verify the settings of the communication ports of the equipment present into the open map
(pag.200)
• To display the settings of the PPP communication ports of an equipment (pag.202)
• To display the Routing Table and the Default Gateway of an equipment (pag.202)
• To verify/modify the IP Access Control List (pag.202)
• To enable/disable the management LAN ports (pag.205)
• To executes the Ping of an equipment (pag.206)
• To open a Telnet session towards equipment (pag.202)
• To display the equipment with Logical Address and Station Id different (pag.207)
• To modify the Logical Address of an equipment as its Station Id or vice versa (pag.207)
• To filter/order the list of the equipment (pag.207)
To verify the settings of the communication ports of the equipment present

into the open map
1. Select the Configuration > Equipment Port Configuration command.

The Port Communication Browser window opens, where the list of the NEs and the detail of the com-
munication ports is displayed (Fig.28).
Fig.28 Port Communication Browser window
Menu
bar (1)
Equipment
list (2)
Fig.28 notes
(1) Menu:
• View > Filter. It filters the list according to specific criteria.
NMS5LX 6.4.8 - MN.00272.E - 001 200

• View > Show mismatched (Station Id - Logical Address) only. It displays only the equipment
whose equipment identifier (Station Id) is different from the Logical Address.
• View > Show all equipment. It displays all the equipment (except from FAMxc and SDH N+1)
present in the open map.
• Commands > NE PPP Interfaces. It displays the PPP communication ports of an equipment.
• Commands > NE Routing Table. It displays/changes the routing table of an equipment.
• Commands > Ping Check. It executes the Ping to check the presence and the reachability of
an equipment.
• Commands > ACL. It displays/changes the IP access control list of the selected equipment.
• Commands > Lan Port Manag Win. It displays/changes the configuration of the LAN commu-
nication ports of the equipment.
• Commands > Ping Check. It executes the Ping to check the presence and the reachability of
an equipment.
• Commands > Telnet. It opens a Telnet session to an equipment.
• Commands > Set Station Id (like Logical Address). It changes the equipment identifier (Sta-
tion Id). The new value corresponds to the logical address of the equipment (Logical Ad-
dress).
• Commands > Set Logical Address (like Station Id). It changes the logical address of an
equipment (Logical Address). The new value corresponds to the equipment identifier (Sta-
tion Id).
• Order by > Logical Address. It sorts the list according to the logical address of the NE.
• Order by > Address. It sorts the list according to the IP address of the NE.
• Order by >Type. It sorts the list according to the NE type.
• Order by > Status. It sorts the list according to the status of the connection between NE and
NMS5LX.
(2) For each equipment, displays in the column:

• Logical Address. Logical address of the equipment (NE object).
• Address. IP address of the equipment (NE object).
• Type. Equipment type.
• Station Id. Equipment identifier set locally (SCT or WEB LCT - Equipment Id parameter).
• OSI ip. IP address of the inner port of the equipment, for the interfacing with the OSI router
(IP over OSI port).
• OSI ip Netmask. Mask for the network address definition (IP over OSI port).
• ip Address. IP address, of the communication port with the LAN network, of the equipment
(LAN port).
• ip Netmask. Mask for the network address definition (LAN port).
• Mac Address. Physical address of the equipment.
• In band. Activation status of the in band supervision (the connection to the supervision is
achieved by means of the traffic Lan tributaries). Value:
• Disabled. The in band supervision is not active.
• Enabled. The in band supervision is active.
• ---. The considered type of equipment does not support the supervision in band.
The columns OSI... are meaningful only if the equipment is managed with OSI protocol.
The information present in the table refers to the moment when the command is selected or the
refresh is executed.
The list points out all the equipment in connected or unreacheable status present in the open
map except for FAMxc and SDH N+1.
• <node name>.X, where X can assume only the value A, B or C (ALplus Node object).
• <node name>.Y, where Y can assume only a value between 1 and 8 (ALCplus2 Node object).
NMS5LX 6.4.8 - MN.00272.E - 001 201

To display the settings of the PPP communication ports of the selected
equipment

The Port Communication Browser window opens (Fig.28).
3. Select the Commands > NE PPP Interfaces command.

The PPP Interface Browser window opens, where the setting of the PPP communication ports available
for the equipment for the input/output of the supervisory signal is displayed (Fig.31).
To display the Routing Table and the Default Gateway of an equipment


3. Select the Commands > NE Routing Table command.
The Routing Table window opens, where the setting of the Routing Table and the Default Gateway ad-
dress currently used by the equipment is displayed (Fig.32).
To verify/modify the IP access control list (ACL)

3. Select the Commands > ACL command.

The ACL Management window is displayed, showing the list of the rules for the access to the equipment.
By means of the commands in the window, it is possible:
• To add a rule to the IP access control list (pag.203)
• To remove a rule from the IP access control list (pag.204)
• To enable/disable the use of the IP access control list (pag.204)
The command ACL is available only for equipment of type ALCplus2, ALCplus2e and AGS10.
For more information about the IP access control list, go to pag.204.
NMS5LX 6.4.8 - MN.00272.E - 001 202

Fig.29 ACL Management window
List of the
rules (1)
Status of use
of the access
control list (2)
Push-buttons
(3)
Fig.29 notes
(1) The table displays the rules used by the IP Access Control List. Each line identifies a rule. For each
rule, is pointed out in the column:
• Name. Name of the rule. The check sign next to the rule name points out that the rule has
been selected to be removed.
• IP Address. IP subnetwork or single IP network which the rule refers to.
• Mask. Netmask relevant to the IP subnetwork or to the IP address which the rule refers to.
• Permission. Usage conditions of the rule:
• Allow. The IP subnetwork/IP address is allowed accessing the equipment.
• Deny. The IP subnetwork/IP address is not allowed accessing the equipment.
The rules in the list are sorted in alphanumeric order with respect to their name (column Name).
(2) If the active option is:

• Enable. The use of the IP Access Control List is enabled: the access to the equipment by oth-
er elements (equipment, PC, etc.) is allowed only if the IP address of the element matches
the rules pointed out in the list.
• Disable. The use of the IP Access Control List is disabled: the access to the equipment by
other elements (equipment, PC, etc.) is not defined by the rules pointed out in the list.
To add a rule to the IP access control list
A maximum of 32 rules can be inserted in the list.


The ACL Management window is displayed.
4. In the Name box, set the name of the rule.
5. In the IP Address box, set the IP subnetwork or the single IP address which the rule refers to.
6. In the Mask box set the netmask relevant to the IP subnetwork/IP address which the rule refers to (if
a single IP is set, the mask is 255.255.255.255).
NMS5LX 6.4.8 - MN.00272.E - 001 203

7. In the Permission box, set the usage condition of the rule:
• Deny. The IP subnetwork/IP address is not allowed accessing the equipment.
• Allow. The IP subnetwork/IP address is allowed accessing the equipment.
8. If you wish the equipment allows or denies the access to any IP address, activate the check-box Any.
In detail, if you activates the check-box Any with selected the option:
• Deny, the equipment will refuse packets sent by any IP address (with the exception pointed out
at pag.204).
• Allow, the equipment will accept packets sent by any IP address.
Selecting the check-box Any is equivalent to setting IP address to 0.0.0.0 and netmask to 0.0.0.0.
9. Press Apply.
The rule is inserted in the list in alphanumerical order with respect to the name (column Name).
10.Press Apply and confirm.
To remove a rule from the IP access control list


4. Select the row relevant to the rule you wish to delete from the list. A check sign is displayed next to
the rule name.
Multiple selections can be executed using the Ctrl or Shift keys.
5. Press Remove and confirm.

The rule is removed from the list.
To enable/disable the use of the IP access control list


4. Select respectively:
• Enable, to enable the use of the IP Access Control List.
• Disable, to disable the use of the IP Access Control List.
5. Press Apply and confirm.
IP access control list (more information)
The IP Access Control List is a mechanism used to control and filter the source IP addresses which are al-
lowed accessing to an equipment.
This mechanism consists in a list of rules (Access Control Entry) which determine if an IP subnetwork or a
single IP address is allowed accessing to the selecting equipment.
Every rules are composed by a descriptive part and a decision-making part. The descriptive part of the rule
is represented by the IP address (or by a set of IP addresses) source of the packet. The decision-making
part is the action to execute: making the packet passes (Allow) or refusing it (Deny).
NMS5LX 6.4.8 - MN.00272.E - 001 204

The analysis of the packet consists in considering the following conditions:
1. The rules present in ACL are considered only if the use of ACL itself is enabled.
2. The control is applied only to the packets destined to the local equipment.
3. The access to the equipment is always allowed by the LCT PPP port.
4. The access is always allowed if the IP address coincides with that of an user who has executed a Login
procedure. The user is allowed modifying ACL without involving the loss of the connection with the
equipment.
5. The access is allowed only if the source IP address of the packet is not contained in any deny rule.
6. The access is allowed only if the source IP address of the packet is contained in, at least, one any rule.
7. If ACL does not contain rules, enabling it is equivalent to forbidding the access to the equipment from
the Ethernet ports to every IP address.
To enable/disable the management LAN ports
The window Management LAN-Port is read-only (push-button Apply unavailable) if the Ethernet cable
is present in connector LAN and the port is enabled. The presence of the cable in the connector is signalled
to the user by a message.


3. Select the Commands > Lan Port Manag Win command.
The Management LAN-Port window (Fig.30) is displayed, showing the status of the management LAN
ports.
• mdi. LAN management enabled: the inversion of the Tx and Rx lines is not active (Network In-
terface Card modality).
• mdi-x. LAN management enabled: the inversion of the Tx and Rx lines is active (Switch modal-
ity).
• auto. LAN management enabled: the inversion of the Tx and Rx lines is active in automatic mo-
dality.
• disable. LAN management disabled.
4. To change the parameter, select the relevant box and then the option from the list.
5. Press Apply.
NMS5LX 6.4.8 - MN.00272.E - 001 205

Fig.30 Management LAN Port window
Led alarm
severity (1)
Enabling/disabling
of the port and
status of Tx and
Rx lines (2)
Push-buttons (3)
Fig.30 notes
(1) The led signals the severity status of the alarm missing/faulted connection cable of the Ethernet
LAN port. It can assume the colours:
• Green, no alarm present.
• Red, orange, yellow and light blue, to signal the presence of the alarm with severity respec-
tively Critical, Major, Minor and Warning.
(2) Enabling status of management LAN ports:

• mdi. Management LAN enabled: the inversion of Tx and Rx lines is not active (modality Net-
work Interface Card).
• mdi-x. Management LAN enabled: the inversion of Tx and Rx lines is active (modality
Switch).
• auto. Management LAN enabled: the inversion of Tx and Rx lines is active in automatic mo-
dality.
• disable. Management LAN disabled.
(3) Push-buttons:
• Close. Closes the window.
• Refresh. Updates the data displayed in the window.
To executes the Ping of an equipment

3. Select the Commands > Ping Check command.

The Ping window opens, where the operation progress and the final statistics (number of sent and re-
ceived packets, percentage of lost packet, etc.) are displayed.
NMS5LX 6.4.8 - MN.00272.E - 001 206

To open a Telnet session towards equipment

3. Select the Commands > Telnet command.

The window telnet is displayed, which allows establish a telnet communication to the selected equip-
ment.
To display the equipment with Logical Address and Station Id different

2. Select the View > Show mismatched (Station Id - Logical Address) only command.
The window displays only the equipment whose value in the column Station Id is different from that
present in the column Logical Address.
To modify the Logical Address of an equipment to its Station Id or vice versa


3. Select the:
• Commands > Set Station Id (like Logical Address) command. The value present in the col-
umn Station Id is changed. The new value corresponds to the logical address of the equipment
(Logical Address).
• Commands > Set Logical Address (like Station Id) command. The value present in the col-
umn Logical Address is changed. The new value corresponds to the equipment identifier (Station
Id).
To filter/order the list of the equipment

2. To ORDER the list, select the command
• Order by > Address. It sorts the list according to the IP address of the NE.
• Order by > Status. It sorts the list according to the status of the connection between the NE
and the supervision system.
When the Port Communication Browser window is opened, independently from the previous setting, the
equipment is listed in alphabetical order according to the NE type.
3. To FILTER the list, select the View > Filter command.

The Filter Selection window opens.
Select one or more boxes present in the window, depending on the criteria you wish to use.
The activation of each box expands the window, displaying a section containing the following options:
NMS5LX 6.4.8 - MN.00272.E - 001 207

To set the criterion, type the address of the NE in the text field.
ter:
• p*o, the NEs whose address starts with p and ends with o will be displayed in the window.
• Match IP Address. IP address of the equipment.
To set the criterion, type the wished IP Address in the text fields. It is possible to use the wild-
card asterisk character (*).
• Match equipment type. Type of equipment.
• Match Station Id. Local identifier of the equipment.
To set the criterion, type the NE identifier in the text field.
ter:
• p, the NE with identifier p will be displayed in the window.
• p*, the NEs whose identifier start with p will be displayed.
• p*o, the NEs whose identifier starts with p and ends with o will be displayed in the win-
dow.
The system displays in the Port Communication Browser window only the records that satisfy the acti-
vated criteria.
Each time that the list is filtered, all the records are considered, both the displayed ones and the hidden
ones.
When the Port Communication Browser window closes, the possible activation of the filters is automat-
ically removed.
NMS5LX 6.4.8 - MN.00272.E - 001 208

NE PPP INTERFACES

The NE PPP Interfaces command displays the settings relevant to the PPP communication ports available
for an equipment for the input/output of the supervisory signal.
The command is available only if it has been selected a single equipment except for the ELFO, SDH
N+1, FAMxc, ALFO, ALplus2 Node and ALCplus2 Node.
For NE objects of ALplus Node or ALCplus2 Node type, the command is present in the nodal window
(pag.48/pag.49).
To display the settings of the PPP communication ports of an equipment
1. In the LX Map Manager window, select the equipment.
2. Select the Configuration > NE PPP Interfaces command.

The PPP Interface Browser window opens, where the setting of the PPP communication ports available
for the equipment for the input/output of the supervisory signal is displayed (Fig.31).
Fig.31 PPP Interface Browser window
Menu
bar (1)
Equipment
info (2)
PPP
communication
ports (3)
Fig.31 notes
(1) Menu:
(2) This area lists in order: Logical address of the NE (Type of NE-IP address of NE) - connection status
of NE.
(3) The available values change depending on the type of selected equipment. For the detail of all the
available ports for each type of equipment, refer to the equipment documentation.
The window displays the more meaningful characteristics for each communication ports. In details,
the column:
• Interface. PPP communication ports name.
• IP Address. IP/PPP address of the port.
• IP Netmask. Mask for the network address definition.
• Mode. Functioning mode of the PPP protocol.
• Speed. Transmission rate of the port.
• Signal Input. Type of signal in input to the port (e.g. E1, STM-1, etc.).
NMS5LX 6.4.8 - MN.00272.E - 001 209

• 2Mbit Selector, Slot Selector and 16Kbit Map. Respectively setting of the tributary 2Mb,
timeslot and 16Kbit (channel EOC E1).
The symbol ”-” points out that the value is not meaningful for the considered type of port.
If the equipment is in disconnected status because it has been just created and the first connec-
tion has not been executed yet, the window will result empty because the required information is
not present in the database of the supervision system.
NMS5LX 6.4.8 - MN.00272.E - 001 210

NE ROUTING TABLE

The NE Routing Table command displays the static Routing Table and the Default Gateway address cur-
rently used by an equipment (Routing Table Running and Default Gateway).
• To display the Routing Table and the Default Gateway of an equipment (pag.211)
• To add an element to the Routing Table (pag.212)
• To delete an element from the Routing Table (pag.213)
• To set or modify the IP address used as Default Gateway (pag.213)
• To delete the IP address used as Default Gateway (pag.213)
The command is available only if it has been selected a single equipment except for the ELFO, SDH
N+1, FAMxc, ALFO, ALplus2 Node and ALCplus2 Node.
(pag.48/pag.49).
For more information about the Routing Table and Default Gateway go to pag.213.
To display the Routing Table and the Default Gateway of an equipment
2. Select the Configuration > NE Routing Table command.

The Routing Table window opens, where the setting of the Routing Table and the Default Gateway ad-
dress currently used by the equipment is displayed (Fig.32).
Fig.32 Routing Table window
Menu Supervision port of

bar (1) the local equipment
which the Gateway
equipment is
Equipment connected to (3)
info (2)
Modality of connection
Elements of the (direct or indirect)
routing table between the specific
port (Interface) and
IP address of the destination
the destination IP network (4)
IP network
or element IP address
of the equipment which
IP NetMask of acts as Gateway
the destination
IP network
Supervision port of
or element
the local equipment
IP address which the equipment
of the equipment acting as Default
which acts as Gateway is
Gateway connected to (3)
NMS5LX 6.4.8 - MN.00272.E - 001 211

Fig.32 notes
(1) Menu:
• Commands > Refresh. It updates the information contained in the window.
• Commands > Add New Route. It adds an element to the Routing Table.
• Commands > Delete Route. It deletes an element from the Routing Table.
(2) This area points out in order: Logical address of the NE (Type of NE-IP Address of NE) - connection
status of NE.
If the equipment is in disconnected status because it has been just created and the first connec-
tion has not been executed yet, the window will result empty because the required information is
not present in the database of the supervision system.
(3) The available values change depending on the type of selected equipment. Here below are reported
the ports generally present in all the equipment. For the detail of all the ports available for each
type of equipment, refer to the equipment documentation.
Wording:
• Lan. Communication port with the LAN network.
• Lan/OSI. Communication port that interfaces itself with the router OSI.
• Lct. Port for the connection with the PC where resides the SCT/LMT management program
or the browser for the start of WEB LCT.
• RS232. Serial port for the connection with other network elements.
• Radio. Communication port represented by the radio signal.
• 2Mb/s. E1 communication port (2Mb/s).
• - . Inner port (internal loopback).
(4) Wording:
• Direct. The IP network or the element are directly connected to the equipment interface. The
IP network or the element are automatically inserted by the equipment software.
• Indirect. The IP network or the element are not directly reachable by the equipment inter-
face. The IP network or the element have been automatically inserted by the OSPF protocol
(dynamic element).
To add an element to the Routing Table

The Routing Table window opens (Fig.32).
3. Select the Commands > Add New Route command.
The Add Route window opens.
4. Into the Destination box, type the IP Address of the IP network or of the destination element.
For each one of the four available spaces (sub-divided by a dot), insert a number comprised between
0 and 255.
5. Into the NetMask box, type the mask for the destination IP network.
0 and 255.
6. Into the Hop box, type the IP Address of the Gateway equipment for the destination network.
0 and 255.
7. Press Add.
NMS5LX 6.4.8 - MN.00272.E - 001 212

The new element is inserted into the table. The system records the new element into the currently used
Routing Table (Running Routing Table) and into the backup memory of the equipment (Stored Routing
Table).
To delete an element from the Routing Table

3. Select the element(s) of the Routing Table.

Items automatically inserted by the controller (items with Direct protocol) cannot be deleted.
4. Select the Commands > Delete Route command and confirm.
The system deletes the element into the currently used Routing Table (Running Routing Table) and into
the backup memory of the equipment (Stored Routing Table).
To set or modify the IP address used as Default Gateway

3. Into the Default Gateway area, type, into each one of the four available spaces, a number comprised
between 0 and 255.
The supervision port which the IP address of the Gateway equipment is automatically pointed out be-
tween brackets.
4. Press Apply and confirm.

The insertion of a new IP address used as Default Gateway can fail if the new IP address does not belong
to an IP network directly connected to the equipment interface.
To delete the IP address used as Default Gateway

3. In the Default Gateway area, press Delete and confirm.

The system deletes the Default Gateway IP address into the currently used Routing Table (Running
Routing Table) and into the backup memory of the equipment (Stored Routing Table).
Routing Table and Default Gateway (more info)
When all the equipment belong to the same IP network, it is not necessary to define the Routing Table
and the address of the gateway equipment because the network is able to manage its own inner traffic.
The setting of these parameters is necessary when the equipment belong to different networks, then, the
traffic has to be routed again from a network to the other one.
NMS5LX 6.4.8 - MN.00272.E - 001 213

Routing Table
The function of the Routing Table is the one to check the routing of the supervisory messages exchanged
among the elements (PCs, equipment, etc.), that use the TCP/IP protocol, from one network to the other
one.
Routing Table (Running)
Each equipment at its initialization (start-up operation) automatically sets the elements of the Routing Ta-
ble that identify the supervisory ports of the equipment (communication ports provided with the equipment
for the input/output of the supervisory signal).
These elements are set according to the IP addresses assigned to each port.
If the user changes the IP address of a supervisory port, the system does not dynamically change it into
the equipment Routing Table. It is necessary to execute a reset of the equipment, because the elements
of the Routing Table are set at the equipment start-up.
If it is necessary, the user can add to these elements (automatically set) some other ones.
The system records each new element (manually set) into the currently used Routing Table (Running Rout-
ing Table) and into the backup memory of the equipment controller (Stored Routing Table); the system
does not record the elements (automatically set) into the backup memory of the controller because they
are newly set at every equipment start-up.
The Running Routing Table is a static one. The system updates such a table, through the elements present
into the Stored Routing Table, at every equipment start-up.
Stored Routing Table
The equipment does not currently use the Stored Routing Table. This table becomes operative on the
equipment restart. In fact, in this case, the system inserts the elements of the Stored Routing Table into
the Routing Table used by the equipment (Running Routing Table). What just said is valid only for the el-
ements whose router equipment (Hop) is associated to an active interface.
The setting of the Stored Routing Table id necessary, for instance, when the user wants to change an ad-
dress of the equipment supervisory ports. In such a case, it is not possible to change the currently used
Routing Table (Running Routing Table). The changes have to be inserted into the Stored Routing Table. At
the next equipment start-up, the system inserts the elements of the Stored Routing Table into the Routing
Table used by the equipment.
The Stored Routing Table can be displayed/modified through the local management program of the equip-
ment (SCT/LMT and/or WEB LCT).
Default Gateway
The system forwards to the equipment with the Default Gateway function the data that have a receiver
unreachable through the routes present into the Routing Table.
NMS5LX 6.4.8 - MN.00272.E - 001 214

HW INVENTORY

The Hw Inventory command displays the hardware version of the equipment present into the open map
(Hw Inventory functionality).
• To display the hardware of the equipment present in the open map (pag.215)
• To save the data to file (pag.217)
• To save periodically the data to file (pag.218)
• To deactivate the periodic saving of the data to file (pag.218)
The Hw Inventory functionality is optional and available only for the equipment of type EL, US, ADM-1,
EXP63, ALFO, AGS10 and ALS series (AL, ALC, ALS, ALS-C, ALplus, ALCplus, ALplus2, ALCplus2,
ALCplus2e).
To display the hardware of the equipment present in the open map
1. Select the Configuration > Hw Inventory command.

The Hw Inventory page opens in the default browser (Fig.33).
2. Select, in the Equipment Type area, the equipment types for which you wish to display the hardware
data.
3. Type, in the Max Rows box, the maximum number of records you wish to display.
4. Press Read.
The window displays the hardware data relevant to all the types of NE selected present in the open map.
5. If you wish to display a specific detail of the data, execute one or more of the following settings, ac-
cording to the filter criteria you wish to use:
To set the criterion, type the logical address of the NE in the text field and press Add.
It is possible to use the asterisk (*) as jolly character only at the end of the alphanumeric string.
The values set in this way are inserted in the list above the text field.
It is possible to delete an item from the list pressing, after having highlighted it, Del.
• IP Address. IP address of the NE.
To set the criterion, type the wished IP address.
It is possible to use the asterisk (*) as jolly character only for the final fields (the asterisk cannot
be before a numeric field). For example, the values 172.18.54.* or 172.18.*.* are allowed, whi-
le the value 172.18.*.215 is not allowed.
Pressing IP Clear to delete the IP Address.
• Unit Type. Type of unit of the equipment.
The filter is available and meaningful only if the Expansion display modality is selected.
To set the criterion, select the wished units. It is possible to select a maximum of three units.
To select the units, press the Ctrl key and the unit.
Moreover it is possible to define, for each type of equipment, which units must not be used in
the Unit Type in the following way:
• Press Not managed unit type.
The FilterUnitType window opens.
• In the Select equipment type area, select the type of equipment for which you wish to
hide the units.
NMS5LX 6.4.8 - MN.00272.E - 001 215

In the area below, the detail of the relevant units is displayed.
The highlighted units are already hidden.
• In the Select not managed unit area, select the units you do not want to display in the
Unit Type list for the selected equipment type.
Select the Select All option to select all the units or the Deselect All option to deselect all
the units.
• Press Apply.
• Part Number. Part Number of the unit.
To set the criterion, type a 10 characters alphanumeric string in the text field.
• HW Edition. Hardware version of the unit.
• Bar Code. Bar code of the unit.
6. Press Read.
The hardware data relevant to all the NEs, present in the open map, satisfying the set criteria are dis-
played.
7 Select the option:

• Expansion to display the data in expanded format: for each equipment, the hardware charac-
teristics of all the units are displayed.
• Compact to display the data in compact format: for each equipment, the hardware characteris-
tics of the controller unit are displayed.
8. To delete all the set option filter, press Reset Filter.
Fig.33 Hw Inventory page
Filter criteria of Data display List of Toolbar

hardware data (1) modality (2) hardware data (3) (4)
Select the arrow to sort the list (5)
Fig.33 notes
(1) In detail, the available filters are:

• Equipment Type. Type of equipment.
The selection of this filter is mandatory to display the hardware data. The setting of all the
other data is optional.
NMS5LX 6.4.8 - MN.00272.E - 001 216

• Unit Type. Type of unit of the equipment.
The filter is available only if selected the Expansion display modality.
• Part Number. Part Number of the unit.
• HW Edition. Hardware version of the unit.
(2) The option:

• Expansion, displays the data in expanded format: for each equipment, the hardware char-
acteristics of all the units are displayed.
• Compact, displays the data in compact format: for each equipment, the hardware charac-
teristics of the controller unit are displayed.
To switch from a display modality to the other, select the relevant option.
In case of compact display, it is also possible to switch to the expansion modality pressing the Exp
push-button next to each row of the table. In this case, the table will display only the hardware data
relevant to the expanded equipment (the IP address field is automatically set, as filter, the IP ad-
dress of the expanded equipment).
The Max Rows box points out the maximum number of displayed records.
The x of y Rows field points out the number of displayed records (x) with respect to the number of
total records (y) which satisfy the set filter criteria.
To display all the records that satisfy the set criteria, it is necessary to type the total number of
records in the Max Rows box.
(3) The displayed hardware parameters are:

• Eq. Type. Type of equipment.
• Description. Description of the equipment.
• Hw Edition. Hardware version of the unit.
• Part Num. Part Number of the unit.
• Serial Num. Serial number of the unit.
(4) Push-button:
• Read. It reads the data stored in the database of the NMS5LX system and display them ac-
cording to the set filter.
• Reset Filter. It deletes the filter setting.
• Export timer. It periodically saves the displayed data to file.
• Export manual. It saves the displayed data to file.
(5) Selecting the heading of a column, a red arrow is displayed.

Select the arrow to sort the rows in alphanumeric order with respect to the considered column.
When the arrow is selected, the list is re-sorted in increasing order. At the next selection, the list is
re-sorted in decreasing order and so on.
To save the data to file

2. Filter the data you wish to save to file (see pag.215).
3. Press Export manual.

The Export window opens, where an hypertextual link is present with the name/extension of the file
where the data will be saved.
NMS5LX 6.4.8 - MN.00272.E - 001 217

By default, the name of the file has the following format HwInv <day-month-year> <hour-minute-sec-
ond>.zip. The name and the extension of the file can be configured by the Superuser. The formats of
the managed files are: csv, xml, zip (cvs zipped or xml zip).
4 Select the hypertextual link.
5. Set the path where you wish to save the file.
6. Confirm the operation.

The system saves in the file all the hardware data which satisfy the set filter criterion and not only those
relevant to the displayed records.
To save periodically the data to file

2. Filter the data you wish to periodically save to file (see pag.215).
3. Press Export timer.

The ExpTimer window opens.
In the Filter description area, the filter criteria are displayed which will be applied to each periodic sav-
ing.
4. Type the name of the filter into the Filter Name box.
5. Type, in the Export periodicity day box, the periodicity in days of the data export and, in the Hour box,
the time when the export is executed.
6 Press Insert.
At the first set time interval, a file will be saved containing the hardware data of the equipment that
satisfy the criteria present in the filter.
The file will be saved in the directory /opt/nms5ux/ExpHwInv, in the format .cvs and .xml, and will ba
named HwInv-filtername-<date_time>.
The files will be saved until when the user does not remove the filter (see pag.218).
To deactivate the periodic saving of the data to file

2. Press Export timer.
The ExpTimer window opens.
The Delete Filter area lists the filters defined by the user.
3. Select the filter you wish to deactivate.

The Select filter to be deleted area points out the detail of the filter.
4 Press Delete.
The filter is removed.
NMS5LX 6.4.8 - MN.00272.E - 001 218

NE BACKUP/RESTORE

The NE Backup/Restore command displays the backup files of the equipment present into the open map.
• To display the backup files of the equipment present in the open map (pag.219)
• To transfer the configuration present in a backup file to an equipment (configuration restore)
(pag.222)
• To save the equipment configuration to a file (configuration backup) (pag.222)
• To lock/unlock a backup file (pag.222)
The equipment list for which the NE Backup/Restore functionality is configurable. Default: EL, US, ADM-
1, EXP63, ALFO and ALS series (AL, ALC, ALS, ALS-C, ALplus, ALCplus, ALplus2, ALCplus2).
The supervision system periodically saves to disk the configuration of the equipment (backup files). For
more info about the backup and restore modalities go to pag.223.
To display the backup files of the equipment present in the open map
1. Select the Configuration > NE Backup/Restore command.

The NE Backup/Restore page opens in the default browser.
2. In the Equipment Type area, select the equipment types whose files you wish to display.
3. If you wish to display a specific detail of the files, execute one or more of the following basic settings,
according to the filter criteria you wish to use:
It is possible to set the logical addresses in one of the following ways:
• Type the logical address of the NE into the text field and press Add.
• Press Tree. A window opens, where are displayed the containers and the equipment
present in the map. Select the wished equipment. The equipment is pointed out in the
text field. Press Add.
The Tree push-button is only available in the page open with the Microsoft Internet Ex-
plorer browser.
The values set in this way are inserted in the list above the text field.
To delete a record from the list, select the address and press Del.
In order to set the criterion, type the wished IP address.
It is possible to use the asterisk (*) as jolly character only for the final fields (the asterisk cannot
precede a field with numbers). For example, the value 172.18.54.* or 172.18.*.* are allowed,
while the value 172.18.*.215 is not allowed.
Pressing IP Clear to delete the IP Address.
• File lock. Status of the file. Selecting the option:
• All, the list will display all the backup files.
• Unlocked, the list will display only the unlocked files.
• Locked, the list will display only the locked files.
• Eligible, the list will display only the files matching all the following rules:
• Last backup file of a NE for which no locked backup file already exists.
• The backup file must not contain errors.
NMS5LX 6.4.8 - MN.00272.E - 001 219

To set the criterion select the wished option.
4. Type, in the Max Rows box, the maximum number of files you wish to display.
5. Press Apply Filter.

The window displays the backup files of the NEs, present in the open map, which satisfy the set criteria
(Fig.34).
6. Press the Info push-button, relevant to a backup file to display its detail.
The File Property window opens with the following information:
• Logical Address. Logic address of the NE.
• File Name. Name of the backup file. The format of the name of the file is the following: <Equip-
ment ID> <hours minutes seconds> <days months years>_U.bku.
• File Date. Date/time of saving of the backup file.
• Backup Result. Result of the operation of file saving.
• Restore Date. Date/time when the operation of file restore has been executed.
• Restore Result. Result of the operation of file restore.
The presence of the symbol - signals that the information is not available.
For the Backup Result and Restore Result the background color:
• Green, points out that the operation was successful.
• Red, points out that the operation is failed.
Fig.34 NE Backup/Restore page
Filter criteria for File display List of the Push-buttons

the backup files (1) modality (2) backup file (3) bar (4)
Select the arrow to sort the list (5)
NMS5LX 6.4.8 - MN.00272.E - 001 220

Fig.34 notes
(1) In detail, the available filters are:

• Equipment Type. Type of equipment.
The selection of this filter is mandatory to display the backup file. The setting of all the other
filters is optional.
• File lock. Status of file. If active the option:
• All, the list will display all the backup files.
• Unlocked, the list will display only the unlocked files.
• Locked, the list will display only the locked files.
• Eligible, the list will display only the files matching all the following rules:
• Last backup file of a NE for which no locked backup file already exists.
• The backup file must not contain errors.
(2) The Max Rows box points out the maximum number of displayed files.
The x of y Rows field points out the number of displayed records (x) with respect to the number of
total records (y) which satisfy the set filter criteria.
In order to display all the records satisfying the set criteria, it is necessary to type the total
number of records into the Max Rows box.
(3) Each record identifies a backup file. For each file, is pointed out in the column:
• Backup Date. Date/time of creation of the backup file.
• Lock. Status of the file: Locked, <empty box> (unlocked).
• Backup file name. Name of the backup file. The format of the name of the file is the following:
<Equipment ID> <hour minutes seconds> <days months years>_U.bku.
• Operations available. Push-button:
• Info. It displays the characteristics of the file. If the color of the box backgrounds:
• Green, there are not errors in the backup file.
• Red, there are errors in the backup file.
• Restore. It transfers the configuration stored in the file to the relevant equipment
present in the map.
• Backup. It saves the current equipment configuration to file.
• Lock/Unlock. It locks/unlocks the file. The push-buttons are displayed one in alter-
native to the other, depending on the status of the file.
When a push-button is disabled, it means that the relevant function is not available.
(4) Push-button:
• Apply Filter. It reads the data stored in the database of the NMS5LX system and displays
them according to the set filters.
• Switch to Equipment. It displays all the equipment, managed by the NE Backup/Restore
functionality, present in the map. The records with the available Backup push-button cor-
respond to the equipment in connected status, whose configuration can be saved.
• Switch to Backup File. It displays the backup files of the equipment, managed by the NE
Backup/Restore functionality, present in the map.
• Reload. It re-reads the data stored in the database of the NMS5LX system.
• Lock All. It locks all file present in the list.
The Switch to Equipment and Switch to Backup File push-buttons are displayed one in alter-
native to the other.
(5) Selecting the heading of a column, a red arrow is displayed.

Select the arrow to sort the rows in alphanumeric order with respect to the considered column.
When the arrow is selected, the list is re-sorted in increasing order. At the next selection, the list is
re-sorted in decreasing order and so on.
NMS5LX 6.4.8 - MN.00272.E - 001 221

To transfer the configuration present into a backup file to an equipment
(configuration restore)

The NE Backup/Restore page opens in the default browser (Fig.34).
2. Display the backup file you wish to transfer to the equipment (see pag.219).
3. Press the relevant Restore push-button.

The NE Restore window opens with the following information:
• File Name. Name of the backup file.
4. Press Confirm.
The operation is scheduled to the process which manages the procedure of periodic file saving.
To save the equipment configuration to a file (configuration backup)

2. Continue in one of the following ways:
a. Display the backup file/files of the equipment whose configuration you wish to save (see
pag.219).
b. Press Backup near the file/files.
Or:
a. Press Switch to Equipment.
All the equipment, managed by the NE Backup/Restore functionality and present in the map,
are displayed.
The records with the available Backup push-button correspond to the equipment in connected
status, whose configuration can be saved.
b. Press the Backup push-button relevant to the equipment whose configuration you wish to save.
The NE Backup window opens with the following information:
3. Press Confirm.
The operation is scheduled to the process which manages the procedure of periodic file saving.
To lock/unlock a backup file

2. Display the backup file you wish to transfer to the equipment (see pag.219).
3. To LOCK the file, press the relevant Lock push-button.

The file is locked (label Locked - column Lock).
It is possible to lock all the files present in the NE Backup/Restore page pressing Lock All.
To UNLOCK a file, press the relevant Unlock push-button.

The file is unlocked (column Lock empty).
NMS5LX 6.4.8 - MN.00272.E - 001 222

NE Backup/Restore functionality (more info)
The NE Backup/Restore functionality allows saving to file the complete configuration of an equipment
(Backup operation), displaying the list of the available backup files and transferring the configuration
stored in a file to the relevant equipment (Restore operation).
The list of equipment for which the NE Backup/Restore function is configurable. Default: equipment of
type EL, US, ADM-1, EXP63, ALFO and ALS series (AL, ALC, ALS, ALS-C, ALplus, ALCplus, ALplus2,
ALCplus2).
Backup operation
The saving of the backup files is automatically executed by the supervision system or it can be forced in
any moment (see pag.222).
The saving modalities by the supervision system are the following: NMS5LX periodically verifies if, for each
equipment, one of the following conditions has occurred:
• No backup file is available.
• A change (set) has been executed to the equipment configuration.
• A connection in Configuration modality has been activated between LCT and the equipment.
• The connection between the supervision system and the equipment has been activated or re-
activated.
• A new operation has been stored in the Command Log stored in the equipment controller.
For each equipment, which at least one of the above mentioned conditions has occurred for, the system
saves the complete configuration into a file. At the successive check, if at least one of the above mentioned
conditions has occurred again, the complete configuration of the equipment will be saved into a different
file and so on.
With complete configuration of an equipment we mean:

• Configuration of the equipment.
• Configuration of the communication port (IP Ethernet, PPP RS-232, etc.) of the routing tables
and of the possible OSPF parameters.
• List of remote equipment (Remote Element Table).
The periodicity of the control by NMS5LX can be configured by the Superuser.
A maximum of N files (N configurable - default=3) for each equipment is saved on the disk of the machine
where the supervision system is installed. The file successive to the maximum number will overwrite the
oldest backup file.
It is possible to lock one or more files in such a way that the system does not overwrite them (see pag.222).
These files will not enter in the count of the maximum number of files saved for each managed equipment.
This means they will not be overwritten until the user unlocks them.
For example, suppose that the system saves a maximum of 3 files for each equipment. For the equipment
A, the files A1, A2 and A3 are automatically saved in this order. If the oldest file (A1) is locked, when the
fourth file is generated, this will not overwrite the file A1, but a new file (A4) will be created. If no other
file is locked, when a new file (A5) is generated, this will overwrite the oldest file (A2). In this way, the
locked files + the last three saved files will be always available to the user.
It is possible to lock as many files as you wish. The files will remain locked until the user unlocks them.
Two files with the same content will be available for each backup file in the system disk, one for each for-
matting compatible with the O.S.:
• Linux. The path, where the file is saved, can be configured. The name of the file has the following
format: <Equipment ID> <hour minute second> <day month year>_U.bku.
• WINDOWS. The path, where the file is saved, can be configured. The name of the file has the
following format: <Equipment ID> <hour minute second> <day month year>_W.bku.
This file is compatible with the applications SCT, WEB LCT, SCT BKU Builder and is available on
the disk of the machine where one’s supervision system is installed.
NMS5LX 6.4.8 - MN.00272.E - 001 223

By means of the RAN (Remote Access NMS5UX) application, it is possible to copy a backup file to a different
machine or external disk by means of a proper push-button present in the NE Backup/Restore page.
Restore operation
The Restore operation (see pag.222), transfers to the equipment ONLY the configuration parameters
present in the backup file.
The restore of the communication parameters (IP Address, routing tables, etc.) can be executed only
through the SCT o WEB LCT application. The restore of the Remote Element Table can be configured
through the Remote Element Table command (pag.387) or through the SCT/WEB LCT application.
NMS5LX 6.4.8 - MN.00272.E - 001 224

LOCATE
The Locate menu contains the following commands:
• Equipment List Locate (pag.226). It displays the list of the equipment managed by the
NMS5LX system.
• Proxy Equipment List (pag.241). It displays the list of the equipment managed by the Proxy
Agent and their Proxy address.
NMS5LX 6.4.8 - MN.00272.E - 001 225

EQUIPMENT LIST LOCATE

User profile Entry, Normal, Advanced *, Privileged *, Superuser *
* Only the Superuser can verify in which maps is present the symbol of an equipment and can reset and
rewrites the equipment table.
The Command Executor application can be started only by the Superuser or by the user with privileged or
advanced profile.
The Equipment List Locate command displays the list of the equipment managed by the NMS5LX.
• To display the list of the equipment (pag.227)

• To save/print the list of the equipment (pag.229)
• To filter/sort the list of equipment (pag.230)
• To open the equipment window (pag.231)

• To verify the configuration/operation status of an equipment (pag.231)
• To verify the marking status of the alarms, of the signalling of LCT presence and Incorrect Up-
load of an equipment (pag.231)
• To verify in which maps the symbol of an equipment is present (pag.231)
• To add/remove a prefix to the logical address of an equipment (pag.232)
• To delete and rewrite the equipment table (pag.232)
• To verify the results of the PM measures of an equipment (pag.232)

• To activate/deactivate one or more PM measures at the same time (pag.233)

• To update the equipment software (FAMxc) (pag.235)
• To verify/modify the status/severity of the alarms and the status of the trap sending of an equip-
ment (pag.236)
• To verify/modify the LCT user list of an equipment (pag.237)

• To verify the LCT/NMS5UX users connected to an equipment (pag.237)
• To verify the reach ability of the equipment (Line Test) (pag.237)

• To connect one or more equipment (pag.238)
• To disconnect one or more equipment (pag.238)
• To re-align the alarms of one or more equipment (pag.239)
• To acquire the configuration of one or more equipment (pag.239)
• To transfer the configuration of an equipment to another equipment of the same type (pag.240)
• To start the Command Executor application (pag.240).
NMS5LX 6.4.8 - MN.00272.E - 001 226

To display the list of the equipment
1. Select the Locate > Equipment List Locate command or press .

The Equipment Browser [List/Locate] window opens, where the list of the equipment is displayed
(Fig.35).
If the profile of the user who has selected the command is:
• Superuser, the information is referred to the equipment present in ALL the map managed by
NMS5LX.
• Entry, Normal, Advanced or Privileged, the information is referred ONLY to the equipment
present in the open map.
At the opening of the Equipment Browser [List/Locate] window, it is possible that a warning window
opens, where it is pointed out that the database contains a number of equipment higher than N.
For this cause, the user is asked if he wishes that the information about the active measures of PM is
made available (operation that can take a lot of time). To press the push-button:
• Yes, the Equipment Browser [List/Locate] window opens and, for each NE in the list, it will be
possible to verify the activation status of the PM measures (Perf. column).
• No, the Equipment Browser [List/Locate] window opens, but the information relevant to the ac-
tive measures of PM will be not available.
The N limit is, by default, 100. The value can be modified by the Superuser.
Fig.35 Equipment Browser [List/Locate] window
Menu
bar (1)
List of
equipment
(2)
Status
bar (3)
Fig.35 notes
(1) Menu:
• File > Print/Save. It prints or saves to file the information.
• Actions > Open Equipment. It opens the equipment window.

• Actions > Equipment Info. It displays the configuration/operation status of an equipment.
• Actions > Refresh Info. It updates the information contained in the window.
• Actions > Performance Monitoring. It displays the results of the PM measures of an equip-
ment.
• Actions > View/Modify PM Status. It activates/deactivates one or more PM measures at the
same time.
• Actions > NE Sw/Fw Download. It updates the equipment software.
• Actions > FAMxc-NE Sw/Fw Download. It updates the equipment software (FAMxc).
NMS5LX 6.4.8 - MN.00272.E - 001 227

• Actions > Equipment Severity Code. It displays/changes the status/severity of the alarms
and the status of the trap sending of an equipment.
• Actions> LCT Equipment User. It displays/changes the LCT user list of an equipment.
• Actions > Location. It adds/removes a prefix to the logic address of the equipment.
• Actions > Map Structure Rebuild. It deletes and rewrites the table where the information rel-
evant to the equipment present in the map is present (equipment table).
• Commands > Line Test. It verifies the real reach ability of the equipment.
• Commands > Connect. It activates the connection between NMS5LX and the equipment.
• Commands > Disconnect. It deactivates the connection between NMS5LX and the NE.
• Commands > Alarm re-alignment. It forces the acquisition of the equipment alarms.
• Commands > Configuration Upload. It forces the acquisition of the equipment configuration
• Commands > Configuration Download. It transfer the configuration of an equipment to an-
other NE of the same type.
• Commands > Command Executor. It executes series of SNMP commands stored to file.
• View > Acknowledge Status. It displays the marking status (acknowledge) of the alarms
(current and/or alarm history), of the presence of LCT in Configuration modality and of the
not correctly executed Configuration Upload operation.
• View > Equipment Location (Map). It lists the maps where the symbol of the selected equip-
ment is present.
• View > LCT Logged Users. It displays the LCT/NMS5UX users connected to an equipment.

(2) For each equipment, the following columns report:

• Logical Addr. Logical address of the equipment.
• Alarm. Functional status (alarms) of the equipment.
The severity level of the alarm present in the equipment opens. When more alarms of dif-
ferent severity are present, the level relevant to the more serious alarm is displayed.
• Alr Disabled. Enabling status of the alarms and of the sending of the equipment traps to the
supervision system. Symbol:
• X. At least an alarm or the sending of an equipment trap is disabled.
To verify the disabled alarms and the disabled sending of traps, open the Equipment
Severity Code window (Fig.65).
• -. The equipment has not alarms or sending of traps disabled.
• Lct Presence. Status of the connection between the LCT program and the equipment:
• ABSENT. The LCT user is not currently connected to the equipment.
• CONFIGURING. The LCT user is connected to the equipment in Configuration modal-
ity.
• MONITORING. The LCT user is connected to the equipment in Monitoring modality.
• Lct Config. Enabling status of the LCT for the possible connection to the equipment:
• Enabled. The LCT user can activate the connection to the equipment both in Monitor-
ing and in Configuration modality.
• Disabled. The LCT user can activate the connection to the equipment only in Monitor-
ing modality.
• Perf. Activation status of the Performance Monitoring (PM) measures. Symbol:
• X. At least one measure of PM is active.
• -. No measure of PM is active.
• . . . Information is not available. In the warning window, displayed at the opening of
the Equipment Browser [List/Locate] window, the No push-button has been selected.
• Ack. Marking status (acknowledge) of the following signalling:
• Alarm (current and/or in the alarm history).
• Presence of LCT in Configuration modality.
NMS5LX 6.4.8 - MN.00272.E - 001 228

• Operation of Configuration Upload not correctly executed.
Symbol:
• X. At least one not marked signalling is present.
• -. Not marked signallings are not present.
• IP Address. IP address of the equipment.
The wording VIRTUAL EQ. points out that the record refers to a virtual NE.
The information corresponds to the characteristics/operating status of the equipment when the
Equipment Browser [List/Locate] window has been opened or updated.
The presence of the - symbol points out that the information is not available as not meaningful for
the status and/or the type of equipment, which is referred to.
(3) Field:
• xx of yy. Number of displayed records (xx) and number of total records (yy). If no filter is
active, the number of displayed records corresponds to the number of total records.
To save/print the list of equipment

The Equipment Browser [List/Locate] window opens (Fig.35).
• All the equipment stored in the database, select the File > Print/Save > All Items command.
• The displayed equipment, select the File > Print/Save > Filtered Items command. If the fil-
ters are not active, the displayed records correspond to the records stored in the database.
• A group of equipment, select the record and, then, the File > Print/Save > Selected Items
command.

wish to use.
c. Press OK.

saved.
name> directory.
c. Press Ok.
NMS5LX 6.4.8 - MN.00272.E - 001 229

To filter/sort the list of the equipment


Select one or more boxes present in the window, according to the criteria you wish to use.
The activation of each box expands the window displaying a section containing the following options:
• Match Logical Address. Logic address of the NE.
To set the criteria, type the address of the NE in the text field.
It is possible to use the wild-card asterisk character. For example, typing in the box the letter:
• p*o, the NEs whose address starts with p and ends with o will be displayed in the win-
dow.
• Match IP Address. Type (real or virtual) and IP address of equipment.
To set as criterion the equipment:
• Real, activate the SNMP Equipment option, and type the IP address of the wished NE in
the text fields.
• Virtual, activate the Virtual Equipment option.
• Match connection status. Status of the connection between the NE and NMS5LX.
• Match equipment type. Equipment type.
• Match performance. Activation status of the Performance Monitoring (PM) measures.
To set the criterion, select the option:
• Enabled, the NEs with at least one PM measure will be displayed.
• Disabled, the NEs with no active PM measures will be displayed.
The box is not available if in the warning window, displayed at the opening of the Equipment
Browser [List/Locate] window, the No push-button has been pressed.
• Match Alarm. Severity level of the alarms of the NE.
To set the criterion, select the option relevant to the wished severity.
• Match Alarm Disabled. Enabling status of the alarms/trap sending of the equipment to NMS5LX.
• Enabled, the NEs that have not alarms or enabled trap sending will be displayed.
• Disabled, the NEs that have at least one alarm or one disabled trap sending will be dis-
played.
• Match Gosip Address. Filter not available for the current version of the system.
• Sort by. Sorts the records.
• Logical Address, the equipment will be listed in alphabetical order, with respect to the
logic address.
• Type, the equipment will be listed according to the type of equipment.
To expand/compress a filter criterion without affecting its activation/deactivation status, use the up/
down arrows on the right side.
The system displays in the Equipment Browser [List/Locate] window only the records that satisfy the
activated criteria.
Each time the list is filtered, all the records are considered, both the displayed and the hidden ones.
plete list), Cancel (it closes the window and does not execute the operation) and Help (it opens the
on-line manual) push-buttons.
When the Equipment Browser [List/Locate] window closes, the possible activation of filters is automat-
ically deleted.
NMS5LX 6.4.8 - MN.00272.E - 001 230

To open the equipment window


Selecting two or more records, it is possible to open more equipment window contemporarily.
3. Select the Actions > Open Equipment command.
The equipment window opens.
It is possible that, on the selection of the command, a message is displayed. The description of the
equipment window and of the message that can be displayed at its opening is described in the specific
equipment User Manual.
The equipment window can be opened also by a double click on the equipment record.
To verify the configuration/operating status of an equipment


Selecting two or more records, it is possible to open more Equipment Information window at the same
time.
3. Select the Actions > Equipment Info command.

The Equipment Information window opens (Fig.21).
To verify the marking status of the alarms, of the signalling of LCT presence
and Incorrect Upload of an equipment

2. Select the wished equipment, with marked signalling (symbol x in the column Ack - see Fig.35).
3. Select the View > Acknowledge Status command.

The Information window opens (Fig.17).
To verify in which map the symbol of an equipment is present
Operation available only for the Superuser.

3. Select the View > Equipment Location (Map) command.

The Equipment Location window opens. Box/column:
• Ip/Ph Address. IP or physical address of the NE.
• Map name. Maps where the equipment is present.
NMS5LX 6.4.8 - MN.00272.E - 001 231

To add/remove a prefix to the logical address of an equipment

2. To add a prefix:
a. Select one or more equipment which you wish to add the same prefix.
b. Select the Actions > Location > Assign command.
The Location window opens.
c. Type, in the New Location Name box, the prefix you wish to add to the logical address of the
equipment (alphanumeric string of minimum 1 maximum 10 characters).
d. Press Apply.
In the Logical Addr column of the selected equipment, the prefix is added (prefix - logic ad-
dress).
The prefix is furthermore added in all the windows where the <logic address> field is present.
The only exception is the label of the icon that represents the equipment in the map, where the
prefix is not pointed out.
If the equipment was already provided with prefix, the new value replaces the previous one.
3. To remove a prefix:
a. Select one or more equipment which you wish to remove the prefix to.
b. Select the Actions > Location > Remove command.
The prefix is removed from the logic address of the equipment.
To delete and rewrite the equipment table
Operation available only for the Superuser.

The command must be used only in case of a supposed misalignment between the information
present in the equipment table and the equipment represented on video in the maps.

2. Select the Actions > Map Structure Rebuild command.
To verify the results of the PM measures of an equipment
Operation not available for virtual NE objects and virtual NE objects of ALplus Node and ALCplus2 Node
type (for the equipment of a nodal system, the command is present in the nodal window - pag.48/pag.49).

Selecting two or more records, it is possible to open more Graphic Performance Manager window at the
same time.
3. Select the Actions > Performance Monitoring command.
The Graphic Performance Monitoring window opens, where the period of time for which you wish to
verify the results of the PM measures is required.
In the boxes:
• Date Reference, the start date (day/month/year) is displayed (by default, the current day is
set).
NMS5LX 6.4.8 - MN.00272.E - 001 232

• Day Previous, the number of days, previous to the set date, that constitute the duration of the
period (by default, 30 days is set) is displayed.
Remember that it is possible to display at most the daily records relevant to the last 180 days (starting
from the current day). The results of the PM measures are stored in the database of the system (Per-
formance Monitoring table). They are available for a period of 6 months, then they are automatically
removed.

• Activate the box if you wish that, at the selection of a control parameter of a measure point, also
the other control parameters are automatically selected, compatible with the measure unit of
the selected item (see step 7).
• Deactivate the box if you wish that, at the selection of a control parameter, no other parameter
is selected.
6. Press OK.
The Graphic Performance Monitoring window opens.

All the types of measure (TPC - Termination Point Class - yellow wordings) and the measure points
(points where the control parameters are really measured) (TP - Termination Point - orange wording)
available for the selected equipment are selected.
8. Select the control parameters, for which you wish to display the results of the PM measures.
All the control parameters of a TP can be displayed in the same graphic. They have been subdivided
according to the measure unit used for their counting: seconds, blocks, dBm, etc.
The Graphic Performance Monitoring window displays the results of the selected control parameters
When a parameter is selected, the name of the relevant TP changes colour: from orange, it becomes
red. While the selected control parameter is characterized by a symbol on its left side.
measure unit present in the same TP or in anyone of the other TPs.
The control parameters that have not the same measure unit of the selected parameter are not avail-
able (wording of grey colour).
In order to display the results of the parameters with measure unit different from the currently selected
one, it is necessary to deselect all the control parameters (Option > Deselect all TPC command) and,
then, select the new parameters.
To activate/deactivate one or more PM measures at the same time
Operation not available for the virtual NE objects.

For the NE objects of ALplus Node and ALCplus2 Node type, the operation will be executed on all the node
equipment.


Selecting two or more records of the same type, it is possible to activate/deactivate the PM measures
of all the selected NEs at the same.
3. Select the Actions > View/Modify PM Status command.

The View/Modify P.M. Status window opens, where the status of the measure points is displayed
(Fig.19).
NMS5LX 6.4.8 - MN.00272.E - 001 233

4. To activate:
Start > All command.
• The measures relevant to the measure points present in the Termination Point area select the
Action > Start > Filtered command.
Action > Start > Selected command.
To deactivate:
Stop > All command.
• The measures relevant to the measure points present in the Termination Point area, select the
Action > Stop > Filtered command.
Action > Stop > Selected command.
In the area Message, the result of the operation is displayed.

2. Select the equipment, except for ELFO, SDH N+1, FAMxc, ALplus Node and ALCplus2 Node.
Selecting two or more records of the same type, it is possible to execute the operation for all the equip-
ment at the same type.
3. Select the Actions > NE Sw/Fw Download command.
4. In the Selection file DWL box, set the file you wish to use for the updating.
It is possible to type the path and the name of the file or press Select (the Select file for download
window opens) and select the file among the available ones.
If the file you wish to use for the operation is not in the home/ftp directory, it is necessary to copy
it in this directory as the supervision system needs, in order to execute correctly the download opera-
tion, to find the file for the updating in the home/ftp directory.
To press Read to display a brief description that illustrates the content of the selected file.
5. Set the type of download you wish to execute. Select the option:
• Forced, to update the software of the equipment controller.
• Only different or not present, to update the software of peripheral units (FPGA file and/or oper-
ating code).
6. Activate the Bench switch? box if you wish that, at the end of the download, a switching of the memory
bench is automatically executed in order to use the bench with the updated software.
7. Set the execution modality of the download. If you wish that the updating is:
• Immediately executed, activate the Immediate Download box.
It is possible to activate the box only if a single NE has been selected.

• Scheduled to be executed in a second moment, set the date/time in the Scheduling data time
for Download area.
8. Press Start Dwl.

If in the previous step, it has been:
• Activated the Immediate Download box, a window opens where the physical address, logic ad-
dress and the type of NE which is updating the software, and the status of the operation (Wait-
ing, Downloading, Complete, etc.) are displayed.
The operation takes some minutes.
Before starting the updating of the controller of the NE, it executes a compatibility check be-
tween the software that must be sent and the one present in the controller itself.
NMS5LX 6.4.8 - MN.00272.E - 001 234

The check consists in verifying the technology and the type of NE (pointed out by the first 2 char-
acters of the file name). For some types of NEs, checks are executed also on the 3rd character
of the filename. More information is reported in the equipment user manual relevant to the spe-
cific type of NE.
If the parameters are compatible, the download starts. Otherwise, the updating of the software
will not be executed.
If the operation is successful, opening the RelSw window (Fig.80), in the Release box relevant
to the updated memory bench, the new version of the software is pointed out.
If it is not successful, the Status box relevant to the updated memory bench displays the old
version or the wording not loaded.
• Set a date/time of execution for the updating of the software, the Software Download window
is closed.
In the list of the scheduled equipment for the download, a record is added for each NE present
in the Equipment list for download area.
To update the equipment software (FAMxc)

2. Select the wished FAMxc.

Selecting two or more records of the FAMxc type, it is possible to execute the operation for all the
NEs at the same type.
3. Select the Actions > FAMxc-NE Sw/Fw Download command.

The Insert window opens (Fig.81).
4. In the File Selection box, set the file you wish to use for the updating.
It is possible to type the path and the name of the file or press Browse (the fileSelection... window
opens) and select the file among the available ones.
If the file you wish to use for the operation is not in the home/tftpdir directory, it is necessary to
copy it in this directory as the supervision system needs, in order to execute correctly the download
operation, to find the file for the updating in the home/tftpdir directory.
5. Set the date/time when you wish to schedule the operation in the Date/Time Scheduled for Download
box.
6. Activate the Switch Bench and Restart box if you wish that, at the end of the download, a switch of the
memory bench and a restart of the equipment are executed.
The setting is valid for all the equipment present in the Equipment List area. If you wish to execute
a different setting for an equipment of the list:
a. Select the equipment.

b. Select the Action > Bench Info command.
The Equipment Bench Releases window opens (Fig.83).
c. Activate/deactivate the Switch Bench and Restart box as you wish.
d. Press Ok
The wording Modified (Equipment List area) is displayed in the record of the selected equipment.
During the execution of the operation for the selected equipment, the setting of the Switch Bench and
Restart parameter in the Insert window will not be considered; instead, the setting of the same param-
eter if the Equipment Bench Releases window will be considered.
7. If enabled, type the access code of the equipment in the Password box.
If the Superuser has defined the equipment password in the configuration file of the system, it is not
necessary to insert the code to access the equipment. It is sufficient to activate the Password Default
box.
The set password is valid for all the equipment present in the Equipment List area. If an equipment
has a different password, it is necessary to set in the following way:
NMS5LX 6.4.8 - MN.00272.E - 001 235

c. Type the equipment access code in the Password box.
d. Press Ok
The wording Modified (Equipment List area) is displayed in the record of the selected equipment.
During the execution of the operation for the selected equipment, the setting of the Switch Bench and
Restart parameter in the Insert window will not be considered; instead, the setting of the same param-
eter if the Equipment Bench Releases window will be considered.
8. Press OK.
The Software Download window is closed.
In the list of the scheduled equipment for the download, a record is added for each NE present in the
Equipment List.
To verify/modify the status/severity of the alarms and the status of the trap
sending of an equipment
Operation available only if it has been selected a single equipment in connected status, except for the
ELFO, SDH N+1, FAMxc, ALplus Node and ALCplus2 Node.
(pag.48/pag.49).


3. Select the Actions > Equipment Severity Code command.
The Equipment Severity Code window opens pointing out the list of the alarms relevant to the selected
equipment.
For each alarm, the status (enabled/disabled), the transmission status of the relevant trap from the NE
to the NMS5LX system and the local severity level of the alarm are displayed (Fig.65).
In the list are not present the alarms of the user inputs, which have a different management of the
severity (see pag.116).
4. To modify the characteristics of an alarms double click on the wished alarm or select the alarm and then
the Action > View/Modify Severity command.
The View/Modify Severity Code window opens, where it is pointed out in the box/area:
• Alarm Description. Name of the alarm.
• Status. Status of the alarm and of the trap sending by the NE to the system. If active the option:
• Enabled, the alarm and the sending of trap is enabled.
• Trap Disabled, the sending of trap is disabled.
• Alarm Disabled, the alarm is disabled.
• Severity. Severity level associated to the alarm.
The label (NMS5LX default) points out the default setting associated to that alarm by the super-
vision system.
5. To modify the enabling status of alarm/trap sending and/or the severity level, select the push-button
relevant to the wished value respectively in the Status and/or Severity area.
If the Alarm Disabled option is selected (Status area) the severity level associated to the alarm can-
not be modified.
6. Press Modify.
The possible modification of the enabling status of alarm/trap sending is pointed out in the Equipment
Severity Code window.
NMS5LX 6.4.8 - MN.00272.E - 001 236

To verify/modify the LCT users list of an equipment
ELFO, SDH N+1, FAMxc, ALFO, ALplus Node and ALCplus2 Node.
(pag.48/pag.49).

3. Select the Actions > LCT Equipment Users command.

The LCT User Manager window opens (Fig.70).
4. The procedures to modify the list of the LCT users are the same pointed out at par.
• To add a new LCT user (pag.383)
• To modify the characteristics of the LCT users (pag.384)
• To delete a LCT user (pag.384)
To verify the LCT/NMS5UX users connected to an equipment
(pag.48/pag.49).

3. Select the View > LCT Logged Users command.

The Logged Users window opens, where the list of the users (LCT and NMS5UX) connected to the NE
when the command is selected is displayed (Fig.71).
To verify the reach ability of the equipment (Line Test)

3. Select the Commands > Line Test command.

The LINE TEST command window opens.
In the Command Scope area, the selected NEs, for which the operation will be execute, are displayed.
Each NE has a dedicated record, which reports in order: logic address and type.
To delete one or more NEs from the list, select the equipment and press Remove From List. To filter
the NEs according to the type, to activate/deactivate the boxes present in the Filter On Type area.
4. Press Execute.
Another LINE TEST command window opens, where for each NE there is the indication of:
• Address column. Logic address.
• Type column. Type of NE.
• Status column. Result of the operation:
• OK. The operation was successful.
• FAILED!... The operation is failed; a message explaining the cause of the failure is dis-
played among brackets.
NMS5LX 6.4.8 - MN.00272.E - 001 237

During the operation, the Stop push-button is available, which stops the procedure, if selected. For
example, if the execution of the operation has been required for ten NEs, the system sends the com-
mand to the first NE, then it will pass to the next one. If, during the execution of the command for the
second NE, the user presses Stop, the system will terminate the operation in progress and then will
terminate the procedure. So, the list will display only the first two NEs.
To print the displayed information press Print.
To connect one or more equipment

3. Select the Commands > Connect command.

The CONNECT command window opens.
4. Press Execute.
The request will be sent only to the NEs in disconnected or unreachable status.
Another CONNECT command window opens where, for each NE, there is the indication of:
• OK. The operation was successful, the symbol of the NE changes colour: from brown it
becomes green, light blue, yellow, orange or red depending on the severity of the alarms
present on the NE.
To disconnect one or more equipment

3. Select the Commands > Disconnect command.

The DISCONNECT command window opens.
4. Press Execute.
The request will be sent only to the NEs in connected or unreachable status.
Another DISCONNECT command window opens where, for each NE, there is the indication of:
• Address field, logic address.
• Type field, type of NE.
• Status field, result of the operation:
• OK, the operation was successful, the symbol of the NE changes colour: from the current
colour, it becomes brown.
NMS5LX 6.4.8 - MN.00272.E - 001 238

• FAILED! ...., the operation is failed; a message explaining the cause of the failure is dis-
To re-align the alarms of one or more equipment

3. Select the Commands > Alarm Re-alignment command.

The ALARM RE-ALIGNMENT command window opens.
4. Press Execute.
The request will be sent only to the NEs in connected status.
Another ALARM RE-ALIGNMENT command window opens where, for each NE, there is the indication of:
To acquire the configuration of one or more equipment

3. Select the Commands > Configuration Upload command.

The UPLOAD command window opens.
4. Press Execute.
Another UPLOAD command window opens where, for each NE, there is the indication of:
NMS5LX 6.4.8 - MN.00272.E - 001 239

To transfer the configuration of an equipment to another equipment of the

same type
Operation not available for the equipment type: ELFO, SDH N+1, FAMxc, PMP, ALplus Node and
ALCplus2 Node.
(pag.48/pag.49).


3. Select the Commands > Configuration Download command.
The Configuration Download window opens (Fig.37).
4. Depending on the operation you wish to execute, follow (from the step 3) the procedure:
• To transfer the configuration of an equipment (virtual or real) to one or more real equipment
(pag.256)
• To transfer the configuration of an equipment (virtual or real) to one or more virtual equipment
(pag.258)
To start the Command Executor application
Operation available only to the Superuser and to the user with privileged or advanced profile.

2. Select the equipment for which you wish to execute the series of SNMP commands stored on file.
3. Select the Commands > Command Executor command.
If the message No Command available for the selected equipment is displayed, the supervision sys-
tem is not provided, for the selected equipment type, with files containing the sequences of SNMP com-
mands. SIAE MICROELETTRONICA provides, on demand, files containing specific sequences of SNMP
commands.
The Execute Command window opens.
4. Into the Select Command area, select the desired action.
5. Press Start Command Executor.

The SNMP Command Executor window opens (Fig.48).
6. Press Start Command.

In the Message area, the progress of the operations is displayed.
It is possible to stop the procedure pressing OK, present in the Command Executor window displayed
at the activation of the operation.
NMS5LX 6.4.8 - MN.00272.E - 001 240

PROXY EQUIPMENT LIST

The Proxy Equipment List command displays the list of the equipment managed by the Proxy Agent and
their Proxy address.
• To display the list of the equipment managed by the Proxy Agent (pag.241)
• To verify/modify the Proxy configuration parameters of an equipment (pag.242)
The Proxy Agent function is an optional one. The function and the subject command are available if
requested by the customer only.
To display the list of the equipment managed by the Proxy Agent
1. Select the Locate > Proxy Equipment List command.

The Equipment Managed by Proxy window opens, where the list of the equipment managed by the
Proxy Agent is displayed (Fig.36).
Fig.36 Equipment Managed by Proxy window
Menu
bar (1)
Equipment
list (2)
Status
bar (3)
Fig.36 notes
(1) Menu:
• Actions > Refresh. It refreshes the information present into the window.
(2) One record is devoted to each equipment. Such a record provides the following information:
• Logical Addr. Logic address of the equipment.
NMS5LX 6.4.8 - MN.00272.E - 001 241

• Eq. Proxy Addr. Address of the equipment that is acknowledged by the Proxy Agent: Proxy
address of the equipment (parameter defined by the user during the creation phases of the
equipment - pag.141).
The information correspond to the characteristics of the equipment at the selection of the command.
• <node name>.Y, where Y can assume a value between 1 and 8 (ALCplus2 Node object).
(3) Into the status bar, the system points out the following information:
• The activation of the filter. With details, if it has been activated:
• The Managed by Proxy Agent box, the system displays into the window the equipment
managed by Proxy Agent.
• The Not Managed by Proxy Agent box, the system displays into the window the equip-
ment that are not managed by the Proxy Agent.
• The Managed by Proxy Agent and Not Managed by Proxy Agent box, the system dis-
plays into the window the all equipment.
• The number of the displayed records and the total number of records (xx of yy). If it has not
been activated any filter, the number of the displayed records corresponds to the total
number of records.
To verify/modify the Proxy configuration parameters of an equipment
1. Select the Locate > Proxy Equipment List command.

The Equipment Managed by Proxy window opens (Fig.36).
2. Select the wished equipment.
3. Select the Actions > Modify Proxy Parameters command.

The Modify Proxy Parameters window opens.
Box:
• Equipment Proxy Address. Address used by the Proxy Agent to “acknowledge” the equipment.
• Primary IP Address Trap Destination. Address of the machine to which the Proxy Agent forwards
the traps coming from the equipment.
• Secondary IP Address Trap Destination. Address of an additional machine to which the Proxy
Agent forwards the traps coming from the equipment.
4. To modify one or more parameter, type the new value into the relevant boxes.
If a NE of type ALplus Node or ALCPlus2 Node is selected, the addresses used by Proxy Agent to rec-
ognize the equipment belonging to the node are automatically configured.
5. Press Apply.
NMS5LX 6.4.8 - MN.00272.E - 001 242

COMMAND
The Command menu contains the commands:
• Line Test (pag.244). It verifies the real reach ability of the equipment.
• Connect (pag.246). It activates the connection between NMS5LX and equipment.
• Disconnect (pag.248). It deactivates the connection between NMS5LX and equipment.
• Force NE Disconnect (pag.250). It forces the software disconnection of the equipment.
• Ping (pag.251). It executes the Ping in order to check the presence and reachability of the se-
lected equipment.
• Alarm Re-alignment (pag.252). NMS5LX acquires the alarm status present on the equipment.
• Configuration Upload (pag.254). NMS5LX acquires the current configuration of equipment.
• Configuration Download (pag.256). It transfers the configuration of an equipment to another
equipment of the same type.
• Reset Equipment Controller (pag.259). It executes the software reset of the equipment.
• PMP Clear Alarm Table (pag.260). It transfers to the PMP the alarm default table stored in the
NMS5LX database.
NMS5LX 6.4.8 - MN.00272.E - 001 243

LINE TEST

The Line Test command verifies the real reach ability of the equipment.
• To execute the Line Test for one or more equipment (pag.244)
• To execute the Line Test for the equipment of one or more containers (pag.244)
For more info about the command go to pag.103.
To execute the Line Test for one or more equipment
1. Select the NE or the group of NEs, for which you wish to execute the test.
2. Select the Command > Line Test > Network Element command or press .
3. Press Execute.
• Type field column. Type of NE.
• Status column. Result of the test:
• OK. The test was successful.
• FAILED!... The test is failed; a message explaining the cause of the failure is displayed
among brackets.
To execute the Line Test for the equipment of one or more containers
1. Select the container symbol(s) that contain the NEs for which you wish to execute the test.
2. Select the Command > Line Test > Container command.
3. Press Execute.
NMS5LX 6.4.8 - MN.00272.E - 001 244

• OK. The test was successful.
• FAILED!... The test is failed; a message explaining the cause of the failure is displayed
among brackets.
NMS5LX 6.4.8 - MN.00272.E - 001 245

CONNECT

The Connect command activates the connection between NMS5LX and equipment.
• To connect one or more equipment (pag.246)
• To connect the equipment of one or more containers (pag.246)
To connect one or more equipment
1. Select the NE or the group of NEs for which you wish to connect.
2. Select the Command > Connect > Network Element command or press .
3. Press Execute.
present on the NE.
To connect the equipment of one or more containers
1. Select the container symbol(s) that contain the NEs you wish to connect.
2. Select the Command > Connect > Container command.
NMS5LX 6.4.8 - MN.00272.E - 001 246

3. Press Execute.
present on the NE.
NMS5LX 6.4.8 - MN.00272.E - 001 247

DISCONNECT

The Disconnect command deactivates the connection between NMS5LX and equipment.
• To disconnect one or more equipment (pag.248)
• To disconnect the equipment of one or more containers (pag.248)
To disconnect one or more equipment
1. Select the NE or the group of NEs for which you wish to disconnect.
2. Select the Command > Disconnect > Network Element command or press .
3. Press Execute.
• OK. The operation was successful, the symbol of the NE changes colour: from the current
colour it becomes brown.
To disconnect the equipment of one or more containers
1. Select the container symbol(s) containing the NEs you wish to disconnect.
2. Select the Command > Disconnect > Container command.

NMS5LX 6.4.8 - MN.00272.E - 001 248

3. Press Execute.
• OK. The operation was successful, the symbol of the NE changes its current colour brown.
NMS5LX 6.4.8 - MN.00272.E - 001 249

FORCE NE DISCONNECT

The Force NE Disconnect command forces the software disconnection of the equipment.
With software disconnection we mean that the NMS5LX system set graphically the equipment in discon-
nected status (brown icon), but it does not communicate the operation to the equipment itself.
The use of this command is necessary if the equipment remains graphically blocked in maintenance status
(pink icon).
To force the software disconnection of one or more equipment
1. Select the NE or the group of NEs for which you wish to disconnect.
2. Select the Command > Force NE Disconnect command.
The FORCED DISCONNECT command window opens.
3. Press Execute.
The request will be sent only to the NEs in connected, unreachable or maintenance status.
Another FORCED DISCONNECT command window opens where, for each NE, there is the indication of:
• OK. The operation was successful, the symbol of the NE changes colour: from the current
colour it becomes brown.
NMS5LX 6.4.8 - MN.00272.E - 001 250

PING

The Ping command executes the Ping in order to check the presence and reachability of the selected equip-
ment.
To executes the Ping of an equipment

If an object of type ALplus Node or ALCPlus2 Node is selected, the ping will be sent to the IP address
of the main equipment of the node.
2. Select the Command > Ping command or press the right mouse button and select Ping.
The Ping window opens, where the operation progress and the final statistics (number of sent and re-
ceived packets, percentage of lost packet, etc.) are displayed.
NMS5LX 6.4.8 - MN.00272.E - 001 251

ALARM RE-ALIGNMENT

The Alarm Re-alignment command acquires the alarm status present on the equipment.
• To re-align the alarms of one or more equipment (pag.252)
• To re-align the alarms of the equipment of one or more containers (pag.252)
To re-align the alarms of one or more equipment
1. Select the NE or the group of NEs for which you wish to re-align the alarms.
2. Select the Command > Alarm Re-alignment > Network Element command or press .
3. Press Execute.
Another ALARM RE-ALIGNMENT command window opens where, for each NE, there is the indication of:
To re-align the alarms of the equipment of one or more containers
1. Select the container symbol(s) that contain the NEs for which you wish the re-align the alarms.
2. Select the Command > Alarm Re-alignment > Container command.

3. Press Execute.
NMS5LX 6.4.8 - MN.00272.E - 001 252

Another ALARM RE-ALIGNMENT command window opens, where for each NE there is the indication of:
NMS5LX 6.4.8 - MN.00272.E - 001 253

CONFIGURATION UPLOAD

The Configuration Upload command acquires the current configuration of equipment.

• To acquire the configuration of one or more equipment (pag.254)
• To acquire the configuration of the equipment of one or more containers (pag.254)
To acquire the configuration of one or more equipment
1. Select the NE or the group of NEs, which you wish to acquire the configuration.
2. Select the Command > Configuration Upload > Network Element command or press .
3. Press Execute.
Another UPLOAD command window opens, where for each NE there is the indication of:
To acquire the configuration of the equipment of one or more containers
1. Select the container symbol(s) that contain the NEs, which you wish to acquire the configuration.
2. Select the Command > Configuration Upload > Container command.

3. Press Execute.
NMS5LX 6.4.8 - MN.00272.E - 001 254

Another UPLOAD command window opens, where for each NE there is the indication of:
NMS5LX 6.4.8 - MN.00272.E - 001 255

CONFIGURATION DOWNLOAD

The Configuration Download command transfers the configuration of an equipment to another equip-
ment of the same type.
• To transfer the configuration of an equipment (virtual or real) to one or more real equipment
(pag.256)
• To transfer the configuration of an equipment (virtual or real) to one or more virtual equipment
(pag.258)
The command is not available for the equipment type: ELFO, SDH N+1, FAMxc, PMP, ALplus Node and
ALCPlus2 Node.
For NE objects of ALplus Node or ALCPlus2 Node type, the command is present in the nodal window
(pag.48/pag.49).
For more info on the real and virtual NE objects go to pag.78.
To transfer the configuration of an equipment (virtual or real) to one or more

real equipment
1. Select the equipment whose type/configuration correspond to the characteristics of the equipment
wished for the transferring of the configuration.
2. Select the Command > Configuration Download command.

3. Select, in the Source area, the (real or virtual) NE having the configuration you wish to transfer.
4. Activate, in the Destination area, the Real Equipment (download) option.
5. Press Parameter Selection to define the configuration parameters you wish to transfer.
The View Download Parameter window opens.
In the area:
• Group, the logic groups, which the configuration parameters of the type of the considered equip-
ment are subdivided in, are displayed.
• Attributes, the attributes relevant to the selected group in the Group area are displayed.
Each group and parameter is characterized by a check box.
If the box is active, it points out that the group/parameter will be transferred during the download. If
the box is inactive, it points out that the group/parameter will not be transferred during the download.
6. Activate the check boxes relevant to the groups/parameters that you do not wish to transfer.
The activation of one group is prioritary with respect to the setting of the parameters contained in
it. For example, if the group A is activated, when the configuration will be transferred, the values of the
parameters associated to the group A will be transferred, even if the box of the single parameters is
not active.
In order to activate all the check boxes at the same time, press Select all. In order to deactivate all
the check boxes at the same time, press Deselect all.
7. Select, in the Destination area, the NE or the group of NEs to which you wish to transfer the configu-
ration.
8. Select the Command > Download Configuration command and confirm.
In the Messages area, the start and the end of the operation are displayed as messages.
NMS5LX 6.4.8 - MN.00272.E - 001 256

Fig.37 Configuration Download window
Menu
bar (1)
List of (real
and/or virtual)
NEs, present
in the map, List of (real
with the same and/or virtual
characteristics (3)) NEs, present
(type and values of in the map, with
the configuration the same
parameters) of characteristics
the selected NE, (type and values
from which it is of the configuration
possible to COPY parameters) of the
the configuration selected NE, to
to transfer (2) which it is possible
to TRANSFER
the configuration
(4)
This area
displays,
in form of
messages,
the operations
in progress
Fig.37 notes
(1) Menu:
• Command > Download Configuration. It transfer the configuration of a (real or virtual) NE
to one or more real NEs.
• Command > Copy Configuration. It transfer the configuration of a (real or virtual) NE to one
or more virtual NEs.
• Action > Refresh. It updates the data present in the window.
(2) In the list, it is possible to display real and virtual NEs at the same time.
For the first ones, it is necessary to activate the Real Equipment box, for the second ones the Virtual
Equipment box.
(3) In the list, it is possible to display only real NEs or only virtual NEs.
To display the real ones, it is necessary to select the Real Equipment (download) option, to display
the virtual ones the Virtual Equipment (copy) option.
(4) The list will not contain the (real or virtual) NE selected in the Source area, as the NE, which the
configuration to be transferred from is taken, is automatically excluded by the list of the NEs which
the configuration can be transferred to.
NMS5LX 6.4.8 - MN.00272.E - 001 257

To transfer the configuration of an equipment (virtual or real) to one or more
virtual equipment
1. Select the equipment whose type/configuration correspond to the characteristics of the wished equip-
ment for the transfer of the configuration.
2. Select the Command > Configuration Download command.

3. Select, in the Source area, the (real or virtual) NE having the configuration you wish to transfer.
4. Activate, in the Destination area, the Virtual Equipment (copy) option.
5. Select from the list the NE or the group of NEs, which you wish to transfer to configuration to.
6. Select the Command > Copy Configuration command and confirm.

In the Messages area, the start and the end of the operation are displayed as messages.
NMS5LX 6.4.8 - MN.00272.E - 001 258

RESET EQUIPMENT CONTROLLER

The Reset Equipment Controller command executes the software reset of the equipment.
The operation consists in the re-initialisation of all the communication channels (for example, with the su-
pervision system) of the equipment. Its execution causes a temporary disconnection of the equipment from
NMS5LX.
The command is not available for the equipment type: ELFO, SDH N+1 and FAMxc.
To execute the software reset of an equipment

2. Select the Command > Reset Equipment Controller command.
NMS5LX 6.4.8 - MN.00272.E - 001 259

PMP CLEAR ALARM TABLE

User profile Superuser
The PMP Clear Alarm Table command transfer to the PMP equipment the default table of the alarms
stored in the NMS5LX database.
The files, which contains the tables of the default alarms relevant to each type of NE managed by the
NMS5LX, are copied in the database during the installation of the system.
To transfer to the PMP the default table of the alarms
1. Select the PMP.
2. Select the Command > PMP Clear Alarm Table command.

NMS5LX 6.4.8 - MN.00272.E - 001 260

FAULT
The Fault menu contains the following commands:
• Network Alarm History (pag.262). It displays/manages the alarm history stored in the
NMS5LX database, relevant to the equipment of the open map.
• Network Current Alarms (pag.271). It displays/manages the alarms active in the equipment
of the open map.
• Old Alarm History (pag.277). It displays/manages the alarm history previously saved to file.
• NE Alarm History (pag.283). It displays/manages the alarm history of an equipment.
• NE Current Alarms (pag.284). It displays/manages the alarms active in an equipment.
• NE History Log (pag.285). It displays/manages the alarm list stored on the controller of an
equipment.
• NE Command Log (pag.289). It displays/manages the list of the operations executed by the
users, stored on the controller of an equipment.
• Alarm Summary (pag.293). It displays/manages the summary of the alarm history stored in
the NMS5LX database, relevant to the equipment of the open map.
• Event Statistics (pag.298). It displays the alarm statistics of all equipment present in the net-
work.
• Transaction Log (pag.303). It displays/manages the list of the operations executed by the
NMS5UX users, who have modified the configuration of the network, of the supervision system
and of an equipment.
The alarm generic term indicates the alarm/status/event signalling.
NMS5LX 6.4.8 - MN.00272.E - 001 261

NETWORK ALARM HISTORY

User profile Entry*, Normal*, Advanced, Privileged, Superuser
* The Entry or Normal user cannot delete or mark the alarms.
The Network Alarm History command displays/manages the history of the alarm/status/event signall-
ings (alarms) stored in the NMS5LX database, relevant to the equipment of the open map.
• To display the alarm history of the equipment present in the map (pag.262)
• To save/print the alarms list (pag.264)
• To copy the alarms list to a text editor (pag.265)
• To delete the alarms (pag.265)
• To mark the alarms (pag.265)
• To display the acknowledge information of an alarm (pag.266)
• To activate/deactivate the automatic updating of the data (pag.267)
• To filter the alarms list (pag.267)
• To highlight in the map the symbol of an equipment (pag.268)
• To verify the time interval between two different alarms (pag.269)
• To sort the alarms list (pag.269)
As help to the description of the command, see:

• Modality of the updating of data (pag.270)
• Modality of recording the alarms (pag.270)
To display the alarm history of the equipment present in the map
1. Select the Fault > Network Alarm History command or press .

The Alarm History Browser window opens, where the alarm history of the equipment present in the
open map is displayed (Fig.38).
At the opening of the window a filter is applied to the alarms list: only the alarms, whose detection
date is successive to the midnight of the current day, are displayed. Besides, by default, the automatic
updating of the information is inactive.
A warning message could be displayed, informing that the database contains a number of alarms great-
er than N.
For this cause, the window will display only the records, in chronological order from the newest to the
oldest one, until N.
The N limit is not a memory limit, but simply a limit in the displaying of the alarms.
In order to read the alarms successive to N, it is sufficient to delete some records.
The N limit can be modified by the Superuser.
NMS5LX 6.4.8 - MN.00272.E - 001 262

Fig.38 Alarm History Browser window
Menu
bar (1)
Alarms
list (2)
Status
bar (3)
Fig.38 notes
(1) Menu:
• File > Print/Save. It prints or saves to file the alarms list.
• File > Export. It copies into a text editor the alarms list.
• Action > Delete. It deletes one or more records from the databases.
• Action > Acknowledge. It marks one or more records, in such a way that the system mem-
orizes that the user has seen the alarms.
• Action > Freeze Window/Unfreeze Window. The commands are displayed one in alternative
to the other: the first stops the automatic updating of the data, the second one reactivates it.
• Action > Re-read Database. It updates the data present in the window.
• View > Set Filter. It filters the alarms list.
• View > Elapsed Time. It determines the time interval between the recordings of two different
alarms.
• View > HighLight Equipment On Map. It highlights in the map the symbol of the NE which
the selected record is referred to.
• View > ClearHighlights. It removes the highlighted condition from all the symbols marked
by the HighLight Equipment On Map command.
• View > Equipment Info. It displays the characteristics and the operating status of the NE
which the selected record is referred to.
• View > Sort Mode. It sorts the alarms list.
(2) The parameter is represented by a coloured box and by a wording, in detail:

• Severity. Type of signalling: alarm, status and event and if the signalling has been detected
or is cleared; for the alarms also the severity is displayed.
The parameter is represented by a coloured box and by a wording, in detail:
Background colour Wording Description
Green Normal Detected event signalling
Blue Status Detected status signalling
Light blue Warning Detected alarm with Warning severity
Yellow Minor Detected alarm with Minor severity
Orange Major Detected alarm with Major severity
Red Critical Detected alarm with Critical severity
No background Normal Cleared event signalling
No background Status Cleared status signalling
No background Warning Cleared alarm with Warning severity
No background Minor Cleared alarm with Minor severity
No background Major Cleared alarm with Major severity
No background Critical Cleared alarm with Critical severity
NMS5LX 6.4.8 - MN.00272.E - 001 263

• Ack. Marking status of the record. If the field is empty, the alarm has not been marked, if
the character is present:
• S, means that the record has been marked when the alarm has been detected but not
cleared yet. In this case, if the alarm is cleared, it is possible to mark the record again.
• C, means that the record has been not marked when the alarm has been detected
and cleared.
• Set Time. Date and time of the alarm detection.
• Clear Time. Date and time of the alarm clearing.
• Address. Logic address of the Network Element.
• Type. Type of Network Element.
• Object. Name of the physical or logical object which the alarm refers to. The event signallings
is not provided with this information.
• Message. Alphanumeric string that specifies the nature of the alarm.
The date/time is set by the element that generated the alarm; in the most cases it is the NE con-
troller.
(3) The symbol:

• , indicates that the data are not dynamically updated: they are freezed.
• , indicates that the data are dynamically updated.
• , indicates that the displayed data are misaligned with respect to those stored in the da-
tabase; to re-align them, select the symbol itself.
Field:
• xx of yy. Number of displayed records (xx) and number of total record (yy). If no filter is
• Filters:... Activation of one or more filters.
• Sort:... Order used to list the alarms.
To save/print the alarms list

The Alarm History Browser window opens (Fig.38).

• A group of alarms, select the records and then the File > Print/Save > Selected command.
• The displayed alarms, select the File > Print/Save > Filtered command. If no filter is active,
the displayed records correspond to the records stored in the database.

wish to use.
c. Press OK.

saved.
NMS5LX 6.4.8 - MN.00272.E - 001 264

name> directory.
c. Press Ok.
To copy the alarms list to a text editor

2. To copy into a text editor:

• A group of alarms, select the records and then the File > Export > Selected command.
• The list of displayed alarms, select the File > Export > Filtered command. If no filter is active,
The default text editor window opens.
For the use of the text program, refer to the specific documentation.
To delete the alarms
Operation available only to the Superuser and to the users with privileged or advanced profile.
The operation is not available if the symbol is present in the status bar of the Alarm History Browser
window. To execute the operation, it is necessary first to update the window, selecting the check sign.

2. To delete from the list and from the NMS5LX database:

• A group of alarms, select the records and then the Action > Delete > Selected Alarms com-
mand.
• The displayed alarms, select the Action > Delete > Filtered Alarms command. If the filters
are not active, the displayed records correspond to the records stored in the database.
• All the alarms of the database, select the Action > Delete > All Alarms command.
The records are deleted.
To mark the alarms
The operation is not executed if the symbol is present in the status bar of the Alarm History Browser
window. To execute the operation, it is necessary first to update the window, selecting the check sign.
After a record has been marked, the operation cannot be undone.

2. To mark:
• A group of alarms, select the records and then the Action > Acknowledge > Selected Alarms
command.
• The displayed alarms, select the Action > Acknowledge > Filtered Alarms command. If the
filters are not active, the displayed records correspond to the records stored in the database.
• All the alarms of the database, select the Action > Acknowledge > All Alarms command.
It is possible to mark an alarm also by a double click of the mouse button.
NMS5LX 6.4.8 - MN.00272.E - 001 265

The Acknowledged Info window opens.
The User box displays the username of the NMS5UX user who required the marking of the records. The
value of the box is automatically set to the username of the NMS5UX user who opened the map. The
value cannot be changed.
3. Type in the Trouble Identification Code box a code identifying the records (alphanumeric string of max
16 characters); it can be used later as search criterion.
4. Type in the Comment box some additional information (alphanumeric string of max 500 characters).
5. Press Ok.
If the selected record refers to an alarm:
• Detected, but not cleared yet, the record will be marked with the letter S.
• Detected and cleared, the record will be marked with the letter C.
Only for the records marked with the letter S, when the relevant alarm is cleared, it will be possible to
mark, by means of the present procedure, the record again. After the second marking, the letter S will
be replaced by the letter C.
To display the acknowledge information of an alarm

2. Select the record which you wish to display the detail of the acknowledge for.
3. Press and keep pressed the right mouse button.

The Ack Info pop-up window opens, where the acknowledge information of the alarm is displayed
(Fig.39).
Fig.39 Ack Info window
Identification Detailed
code (1) information
of the
acknowledge
Detailed when the signal
information was in status:
of the detected
acknowledge (2) (3)
when the signal
was in status:
detected and
cleared
(2) (3)
Fig.39 notes
(1) Identification code of the record assigned by the user during the alarm acknowledge.
(2) Option:
• User. Username of the NMS5UX user who executed the acknowledgement of the record.
• Time. Moment when the record has been acknowledged <day-month-year hours:min-
utes:seconds>.
• Comment. Additional information.
(3) If the alarm has been acknowledged the first time when it was in “detected-cleared” status, the data
present in the SET Ack Info and CLEAR Ack Info areas are the same.
If the alarm has never been acknowledged, all the fields will be empty.
NMS5LX 6.4.8 - MN.00272.E - 001 266

To activate/deactivate the automatic updating of the data

At the opening of the window, by default, the automatic updating of the information is inactive.
2. To activate the automatic updating of the data, select the Action > Unfreeze Window command or
the symbol .
3. To deactivate again the automatic updating of the data, select the Action > Freeze Window com-
mand or the symbol .
The Freeze Window and Unfreeze Window commands are displayed alternatively.
To filter the alarms list


The Filters Setting window opens.
The activation of each box enables the criterion or expands the window displaying a section that con-
tains the following options:
• <Severity>. Type of signalling (alarm/status/event), activation status of the signalling and, for
the alarms, their severity (the colour of the box, when it is active, reflects the colour associated
to the severity of the alarm or the type of signalling). Activating the box:
• Critical (red), the alarms with Critical severity will be displayed.
• Major (orange), the alarms with Major severity will be displayed.
• Minor (yellow), the alarms with Minor severity will be displayed.
• Warning (light blue), the alarms with Warning severity will be displayed.
• Status (blue), the status signallings will be displayed.
• Normal (green), the event signallings will be displayed.
• Active Alarms, the detected alarms will be displayed.
• Cleared Alarms, the detected and cleared alarms will be displayed.
• Occurred After and Occurred Before. Date/time of the alarms.
Activating the box.
• Occurred After, the list displays only the records whose recording date is equal or after
that displayed next to the option.
• Occurred Before, the list displays only the records whose recording date is equal or before
To modify the date/time displayed next to the specific option, move the indicator of the scrolling
bar or click on the arrows located on the sides of the bar.
In the box located over the bar, selecting the Coarse Granularity item, it is possible to modify
the date/time with step of one hour, while selecting the Fine Granularity item with step of one
second.
Activating the boxes at the same time and setting properly the date/time, it is possible to de-
termine a time interval.
• Match Address. Logical address of the Network Element.
It is possible to set the logic address by means of one of the following ways:
• Select the symbol or the symbols of the wished NEs, directly in the map and press Add
From Map.
• Type the logic address of the NE in the Source box and press Add.
The set values in this way will be inserted in the area next to the Match Address box.
It is possible to delete a single item from the list pressing, after having highlighted it, the Re-
move push-button or all the items contemporarily pressing Remove All.
NMS5LX 6.4.8 - MN.00272.E - 001 267

• Match Object. Physical/logic objects that compose the NE.
• Open the Equipment Type menu and choose the type of NE.
• Open the Object menu and set the wished object.
It is possible to set only one class of object at a time or all the class contemporarily selecting
the All Objects item.
• Match Selected Alarm. Description (Message field) of the selected record.
To set the criterion, select a record in the Alarm History Browser window.
The criterion is not available if no record has been selected or if two or more records are select-
ed.
• Match Message String. Description of the alarm.
To set the criterion, type the wished string in the text field.
Activating the Case Sensitive box, distinction will be made between upper and lower case; de-
activating the box, no distinction will be made.
• Match Acknowledged and Match Unacknowledged. Marking status of the alarms.
Activating the Match Acknowledged box, the marked records will be displayed. Furthermore, it
is possible to specify:
• The identifying code assigned by the user to the record during the marking, activating
the TIC box and typing the code.
• The username of the NMS5UX user who executed the marking, activating the User box
and typing the username.
Activating the Match Unacknowledged box, the record not yet marked will be displayed.
The system displays in the Alarm History Browser window only the record that satisfy specific criteria.
Each time that the list is filtered, all the records are considered, both the displayed and the hidden ones.
When the Alarm History Browser window is closed, the possible activation of the filters is automatically
cleared.
In the window, there are the push-buttons:
• Save.... It saves the set criteria to a file.
On the choice of the push-button, the Save Filter window opens.
Type the name you wish to assign to the file in the Selection box and press OK.
• Load.... It opens the file, where a previously saved specific setting of filters is contained.
On the choice of the push-button, the Load Filter window opens.
Select the wished file in the Files list and press OK.
• Delete.... It deletes the file where a previously saved specific setting of filters is contained.
On the choice of the push-button, the Delete Filter window opens.
• Clear Filters. It clears the activation of all the filters, except for the <Severity>, Match Ac-
knowledged, Match Unacknowledged criteria.
• Cancel. It closes the window and does not execute the operation.
• Help. It opens the on-line manual.
The path indicated in the Selection box cannot be changed.
To highlight in the map the symbol of an equipment

2. Select the alarm relevant to the equipment you wish to highlight.
3. Select the View > HighLight Equipment On Map command.

In the map, the symbol of the NE is highlighted.
NMS5LX 6.4.8 - MN.00272.E - 001 268

To deselect the symbol, select the command View > ClearHighlights.
To verify the time interval between two different alarms

2. To determinate the time interval that separates:

• The detection of an alarm from its clearing, select a single detected/cleared alarm and then the
View > Elapsed Time > Set->Clear Time command.
• The detection of two alarms, select two different adjacent or not adjacent records and then the
View > Elapsed Time > Time between Set command.
• The detection of the oldest alarm with the clearing of the newest alarm, select two different ad-
jacent or not adjacent detected/cleared alarms and then the View > Elapsed Time > First
Set->Last Clear command.
• The clearing of the oldest alarm with the detection of the newest alarm, select two different ad-
jacent or not adjacent detected/cleared alarms and then the View > Elapsed Time > Clear-
>Set command.
A window opens with the interval expressed in days/hours/minutes/seconds.

2. Select the alarm relevant to the wished equipment.
Selecting two or more records relevant to different equipment, it is possible to open contemporarily the
specific Equipment Information windows.
3. Select the View > Equipment Info command.
The Equipment Information window opens (Fig.21) which displays the characteristics and the operating
status of the equipment.
To sort the alarms list

2. Select the View > Sort Mode command.

The Sort Mode window opens.
3. Select, in the Sort by area, the first sorting criterion:

• Set Time, the alarms will be sorted according to the detection date/time.
• * CLEAR Time, the alarms will be sorted according to the clearing date/time. The alarms not
cleared yet will be considered with clearing date/time equal to 0.
4. Select in the Sort by area, the option:

• Ascending; the first record of the table will correspond to the newest alarm; the successive ones
will be listed in descending order.
• Descending; the first record of the table will correspond to the oldest alarm; the successive ones
will be listed in ascending order.
5. If you wish that the alarms are sorted also according to their address, activate the box Group by Ad-
dress (second sorting criterion).
NMS5LX 6.4.8 - MN.00272.E - 001 269

6. Press Apply (it executes the sorting and closes the window) or Set (it stores the setting, but does not
execute the sorting and closes the window).
If pressed Apply, the Alarm History Browser window will list the records in the set order.
Modality of updating of the data
The information present in the Alarm History Browser window are dynamically updated only if the proce-
dure for the automatic updating is active (pag.267).
At the opening of the Alarm History Browser window, the procedure of automatic updating of the infor-
mation is, by default inactive (the default setting can be modified by the Superuser).
The presence of the symbol in the status bar of the window points out that the displayed information
are misaligned with respect to those stored in the database of NMS5LX.
This occurs when:

• Two or more NMS5UX users (each one on a different terminal) have opened the Alarm History
Browser window for the same map and, in a window, some records have been marked or delet-
ed, the system does not update all the open windows. This is necessary to avoid that the win-
dows must be continuously refreshed while the users are using them.
• One or more records are marked in a Current Alarms Browser window. The record is not auto-
matically marked also in the Alarm History Browser window, if open.
To update the window, it is sufficient to click on the symbol . It is possible to refresh the window also
modifying the order of the displaying of the records (pag.269) or applying a filter (pag.267).
The setting of the filters or the criteria used to sort the records in a Alarm History Browser window does
not influence the displaying of the information in the other open Alarm History Browser windows or in the
Current Alarms Browser window.
Modality of recording of the alarms
The alarms are stored in the database of NMS5LX (Alarm History table).
They remain stored for a certain number of days (which can be configured by the Superuser - by default
90 days), after which they are automatically deleted.
Also, it is possible to configure the maximum number of records in the Alarm History table (value that can
be set by the Superuser) that can be stored.
During the day, all the alarms sent by the equipment are stored in the table (even if their number exceeds
the maximum value of records). At midnight, the number of record is checked; if this exceeds the maxi-
mum set number, the system will delete, only among the raised and cleared signallings, the oldest records.
If the alarm history contains all active and not cleared alarms and their number exceeds the maximum set
value, the system will NOT delete any record.
When the maximum number of record in the table is exceeded, the message Alarm History occupation ex-
ceeded 100% is periodically displayed, warning about the critical situation. The display of the message and
the frequency with which it is displayed can be configured by the Superuser.
In any moment, it is possible:

• To display the occupation status of the table Transaction Log in the platform status bar (see
pag.45)
• To manually delete the alarms (pag.265). It is suggested to periodically delete and/or store to
file the less meaningful records, so to avoid the saturation of the table.
NMS5LX 6.4.8 - MN.00272.E - 001 270

NETWORK CURRENT ALARMS

The Network Current Alarms command displays/manages the alarm/status/event signallings (alarms)
active in the equipment of the open map.

• To display alarms active in the equipment of the map (pag.271)
• To highlight, in the map, the symbol of an equipment (pag.275)
As help to the description of the command, see par. Modality of updating of the data (pag.276)
To display alarms active in the equipment of the map
1. Select the Fault > Network Current Alarms command or press .

The Current Alarms Browser window opens, where the list of the alarms active in the equipment in the
map is displayed (Fig.40).
Fig.40 Current Alarms Browser window
Menu
bar (1)
Alarms
list (2)
Status
bar (3)
NMS5LX 6.4.8 - MN.00272.E - 001 271

Fig.40 notes
(1) Menu:
• File > Print/Save. It prints or save to file the alarm list.
• Action > Acknowledge. It marks one or more records, so that the system memorizes that
the user has seen the alarms.
• Action > Freeze Window/Unfreeze Window. The commands are displayed alternatively: the
first one stops the automatic updating of the data, the seconds re-activates it.
• View > Elapsed Time. It determines the time interval that separates the recording of two
different alarms.
• View > HighLight Equipment On Map. It highlights, in the map, the symbol of the NE which
• View > ClearHighlights. It deletes the condition of highlighted from all the symbols marked
by the HighLight Equipment On Map commands.
• View > Equipment Info. It displays characteristics and the functional status of the NE which
(2) For each alarm, it is pointed out in the column:

• Severity. Type of signalling: alarm, status or event; for the alarms the severity is pointed
out too. The parameter is represented by a coloured box and by a wording, in detail:
Green Normal Event signalling
Blue Status Status signalling
Light blue Warning Alarm with Warning severity
Yellow Minor Alarm with Minor severity
Orange Major Alarm with Major severity
Red Critical Alarm with Critical severity
• Ack. Marking status of the record.
If the field is empty, the alarm has not been marked; if the Y character is present, the alarm
has been marked.
• Date/Time. Date and time of the alarm detection. The date/time is set by the element that
generated the alarm; in the most cases it is the NE controller.
• Object. Name of the physical or logic object which the alarm is referred to. The event signal-
lings are not provided with this information.
(3) The symbol:

• , points out that the data are not dynamically updated: they are freezed.
• , points out that the data are dynamically updated.
Field:
NMS5LX 6.4.8 - MN.00272.E - 001 272


The Current Alarms Browser window opens (Fig.40).
2. To print or to save to file:

• The displayed alarms, select the File > Print/Save > Filtered command. If filters are not ac-
tive, the displayed records corresponds to the records stored in the database.

wish to use.
c. Press OK.

Option available only to the Superuser and to the users with privileged profile.
saved.
name> directory.
c. Press Ok.
To mark the alarms
After having marked a record, the operation cannot be cancelled.

2. To mark:
• A group of alarms, select the records and then the Action > Acknowledge > Selected Alarms
command.
• The displayed alarms, select the Action > Acknowledge > Filtered Alarms command. If fil-
• All the alarms of the database, select the Action > Acknowledge > All Alarms command.
It is also possible to mark an alarm, by means of a double click over it.
To activate/deactivate the automatic updating of the data

At the opening of the window, the automatic updating of the information is, by default, inactive.
2. To activate the automatic updating of the data, select the Action > Unfreeze Window command or
the symbol .
NMS5LX 6.4.8 - MN.00272.E - 001 273

3. To deactivate newly the automatic updating of the data, select the Action > Freeze Window com-
mand or the symbol .
The Freeze Window and Unfreeze Window commands are displayed alternatively.


The activation of each box enables the criterion or expands the window displaying a section containing
the following operation:
• Match Severity. Type of signalling (alarm/status/event) and, for the alarms, their severity (the
colour of the box, if active, reflects the colour associated to the severity of the alarm or the type
of signalling). Activating the box:
• Occurred After and Occurred Before. Date/time of the alarm.
Activating the box:
• Occurred After, the list will display only the records whose recording date is equal or after
• Occurred Before, the list will display only the records whose recording date is equal or
before that displayed next to the option.
In the box located over the bar, choosing the Coarse Granularity item, it is possible to modify
the date/time by steps of one hour, while choosing the Fine Granularity item by steps of one
second.
Activating contemporary the boxes and setting properly the date/time, it is possible to determi-
nate a time interval.
• Match Address. Logic address of the Network Element.
The logic addresses can be set by one of the following ways:
• Select the symbol or the symbols of the interested NEs, directly in the map and press
Add From Map.
The values set in this way will be inserted in the area located next to the Match Address box.
It is possible to delete from the list a single item pressing, after having highlighted it, the Re-
move push-button, or all the items contemporarily pressing Remove All.
• Open the Equipment Type menu and select the type of NE.
It is possible to set only one class of objects at a time or all the classes contemporarily selecting
• Match Message String. Description of the selection.
Activating the Case Sensitive box, there will be a distinction between upper and lower cases;
deactivating the box, instead, no distinction will be made.
NMS5LX 6.4.8 - MN.00272.E - 001 274

• Match Selected Alarm. Description (Message) field of the selected record.
To set the criterion, select a record in the Current Alarms Browser window.
ed.
Activating the box:
• Match Acknowledged, the list will display only the marked records.
• Match Unacknowledged, the list will display the not yet marked records.
The system displays, in the Current Alarms Browser window, only the records that satisfy the activated
criteria.
Each time the list is filtered, all the records are displayed, both the displayed and the hidden ones.
When the Current Alarms Browser window is closed, the possible activation of filters is automatically
cancelled.
The window contains the push-buttons:
• Save.... It saves to file the set criteria.
On the selection of the push-button, the Save Filter window opens.
Type the name you wish to assign to the file into the Selection box and press OK.
• Load.... It opens the file, where a specific previously saved set of filters is contained.
On the selection of the push-button, the Load Filter window opens.
Select the wished file into the Files list and press OK.
• Delete.... It deletes the file where a specific previously saved set of filters is contained.
On the selection of the push-button, the Delete Filter window opens.
Select the wished file into the Files list and press OK.
• Clear Filters. It cancels the activation of all the filters, except for the Match Severity, Match
Acknowledged, Match Unacknowledged criteria.


The symbol of the equipment is highlighted in the map.
To deselect the symbol, select the View > ClearHighlights command.

2. Select two different adjacent or not adjacent records
3. Select the View > Elapsed Time command.

A window with the interval expressed in days/hours/minutes/seconds opens.
NMS5LX 6.4.8 - MN.00272.E - 001 275


2. Select the alarm relevant to the wished equipment

Selecting two or more records relevant to different equipment, it is possible to open contemporarily the
specific Equipment Information windows.
3. Select the View > Equipment Info command.

The Equipment Information window opens (Fig.21) that displays the characteristics and the functional
status of the equipment.
Modality of updating of the data
The information present in the Current Alarms Browser window are dynamically updated only if the proce-
dure of automatic updating is active (pag.267).
At the opening of the Current Alarms Browser window, the procedure of automatic updating is, by de-
fault, inactive (the default setting can be modified by the Superuser).
NMS5LX 6.4.8 - MN.00272.E - 001 276

OLD ALARM HISTORY

The Old Alarm History command displays/manages the history of the alarm/status/event signallings
(alarms) previously saved to file.
• To display the alarm history present in the Old History table (pag.277)
• To copy the alarms list into a text editor (pag.279)
• To highlight in the map the symbol of an equipment (pag.281)
In the Old History table is stored the alarm history saved by the Alarm History Backup (pag.416)
command and restored by the Alarm History Restore (pag.417) command.
To display the alarm history present in the Old History table
1. Select the Fault > Old Alarm History command.

The Old History Browser window opens, where the alarms history present in the Old History table of
the equipment present in the open map is displayed (Fig.41).
If, at the opening of the window, the table is empty, it is necessary to restore from the backup file
saved before, the list of wished alarms (pag.417).
These alarms will remain available in the Old History table and in the Old History Browser window, until
a different list of alarms is restored.
Fig.41 Old History Browser window
Menu
bar (1)
Alarms
list (2)
Status
bar (3)
NMS5LX 6.4.8 - MN.00272.E - 001 277

Fig.41 notes
(1) Menu:
• File > Print/Save. It prints or save to file the alarms list.
• File > Export. It copies in a text editor the alarms list.
• View > Elapsed Time. It determinates the time intervals that separates two different alarms.
• View > HighLight Equipment On Map. It highlights in the map, the symbol of the NE which
the selected record refers to.
• View > ClearHighlights. It removes the condition of highlighted from all the symbols marked
by the HighLight Equipment On Map command.
• View > Sort Mode. It sorts the list of records.
(2) For each alarm, it is pointed out in the column:

• Severity. Type of signalling: alarm, status or event and if the signalling has been detected
or cleared; for the alarms the severity is pointed out too. The parameter is represented by
a coloured box and by a wording, in detail:
• Ack. Marking status of the record. If the field is empty, the alarm has not been marked, if
the character is present:
• S, means that the record has been marked when the alarm has been detected but not
cleared yet. In this case, if the alarm is cleared, it is possible to mark the record again.
• C, means that the record has been not marked when the alarm has been detected
and cleared.
• Set Time. Date and time of the alarm detection.
• Clear Time. Date and time of the alarm clearing.
• Object. Name of the physical or logical object which the alarm refers to. The event signallings
is not provided with this information.
troller.
(3) Field:
• xx of yy. Number of displayed records (xx) and number of total records (yy). If filters are
not active, the number of displayed records corresponds to the total records.
• Sort:... Order used to list the alarms.
NMS5LX 6.4.8 - MN.00272.E - 001 278


The Old History Browser window opens (Fig.41).
2. To print or to save to a file:

• The displayed alarms, select the File > Print/Save > Filtered command. If filters are not ac-
tive, the displayed records correspond to the records stored in the database.

wish to use.
c. Press OK.

saved.
name> directory.
c. Press Ok.
To copy the alarms list into a text editor

2. To copy into a text editor:

• A group of alarms, select the records and then the File > Export > Selected command.
• The displayed alarms, select the File > Export > Filtered command. If filters are not active,
The default text editor window opens.
For the use of the text editor program, refer to the specific documentation.


the following options:
NMS5LX 6.4.8 - MN.00272.E - 001 279

• <Severity>. Type of signalling (alarm/status/event) and, for the alarms, their severity (the col-
our of the box, if active, reflects the colour associated to the severity of the alarm or the type
• Active Alarms, the detected alarms will be displayed.
• Cleared Alarms, the detected and cleared alarms will be displayed.
Activating the box:
second.
Add From Map.
• Match Selected Alarm. Description (Message) field of the selected record.
To set the criterion, select a record in the Old History Browser window.
ed.
Activating the Match Acknowledged box, the list will display the marked record. Furthermore it
Activating the Match Unacknowledged box, the records not marked yet will be displayed.
NMS5LX 6.4.8 - MN.00272.E - 001 280

The system displays in the Old History Browser window only the record that satisfy specific criteria.
When the Old History Browser window is closed, the possible activation of the filters is automatically
cleared
• Clear Filters. It clears the activation of all the filters, except for the <Severity>, Match Ac-


The symbol of the equipment is highlighted in the map.
To deselect the symbol, select the View > ClearHighlights command.

2. To determinate the time interval that separates:
• The detection of an alarm from its clearing, select a single detected/cleared alarm and then the
View > Elapsed Time > Set->Clear Time command.
• The detection of two alarms, select two different adjacent or not adjacent records and then the
View > Elapsed Time > Time between Set command.
• The detection of the oldest alarm with the clearing of the newest alarm, select two different ad-
jacent or not adjacent detected/cleared alarms and then the View > Elapsed Time > First
Set->Last Clear command.
• The clearing of the oldest alarm with the detection of the newest alarm, select two different ad-
jacent or not adjacent detected/cleared alarms and then the View > Elapsed Time > Clear-
>Set command
A window opens with the interval expressed in days/hours/minutes/seconds.
NMS5LX 6.4.8 - MN.00272.E - 001 281

To sort the alarms list

2. Select the View > Sort Mode command.

The Sort Mode window opens.
• Set Time, the alarms will be sorted according to the detection date/time.
• * CLEAR Time, the alarms will be sorted according to the clearing date/time. The alarms not
4. Select in the Sort by area, the option:

• Ascending; the first record of the table will correspond to the newest alarm; the successive ones
will be listed in descending order.
• Descending; the first record of the table will correspond to the oldest alarm; the successive ones
will be listed in ascending order.
5. If you wish that the alarms are sorted also according to their address, activate the box Group by Ad-
dress (second sorting criterion).
6. Press Apply (it executes the sorting and closes the window) or Set (it stores the setting, but does not
execute the sorting and closes the window).
If pressed Apply, the Old History Browser window will list the records in the set order.
To display the acknowledge information of an alarm

3. Press and keep pressed the right mouse button.

The Ack Info pop-up window opens, where the acknowledge information of the alarm is displayed.
The description of the window is the same reported in Fig.39.
NMS5LX 6.4.8 - MN.00272.E - 001 282

NE ALARM HISTORY

The NE Alarm History command displays/manages the history of the alarm/event/status signallings
(alarms) relevant ONLY to the selected equipment.
The choice of the command opens the Alarm History Browser window (Fig.38).
The description of the window and the operations that can be executed are the same reported in the
par. Network Alarm History (pag.262).
Into the Alarm History Browser window to display the alarm relevant to other equipment, deactivate the
Match Address filter.
If a NE object of ALplus Node or ALCplus2 Node type is selected, the Alarm History Browser window displays
the detail of the equipment of the nodal system. This equipment is identified by the logic address:
NMS5LX 6.4.8 - MN.00272.E - 001 283

NE CURRENT ALARMS

The NE Current Alarms command displays/manages the alarm/event/status signallings (alarms) active
in the selected equipment.
The choice of the command opens the Current Alarms Browser window (Fig.40).
par. Network Current Alarms (pag.271).
Into the Current Alarms Browser window to display the alarm relevant to other equipment, deactivate the
Match Address filter.
If a NE object of ALplus Node or ALCplus2 Node type is selected, the Current Alarms Browser window dis-
plays the detail of the equipment of the nodal system. This equipment is identified by the logic address:
NMS5LX 6.4.8 - MN.00272.E - 001 284

NE HISTORY LOG

The NE History Log command displays/manages the alarm list stored on the controller of an equipment
(NE Log).
• To display the list of the NE Log of an equipment (pag.285)
• To create a NE Log (pag.286)
• To create more NE logs at the same time (pag.286)
• To display the content of a NE Log (pag.287)
• To delete a NE Log (pag.287)
• To delete all the NE logs of an equipment (pag.287)
• To delete the alarms stored in the controller of an equipment (pag.288)
The command is not available for the equipment type: ELFO, SDH N+1, FAMxc, PMP.
For more information about the NE Log go to pag.121.
To display the list of the NE Log of an equipment
1. Select one or more equipment.
2. Select the Fault > NE History Log command.

The Equipment History Log Management Main Window opens.
3. Double click, in the Selected Equipment area, the equipment for which you wish to verify the NE Log.
The area on the right displays the list of the NE Logs (Fig.42).
If the message No files available for equipment ... is displayed, no NE Log is available for the specific
equipment.
Fig.42 Equipment History Log Management Main Window
Logic address
of the NE which
the Command Logs
present in the
area below are
referred to
List of
List of the
equipment
Command Logs,
selected in
stored in the disk,
the map
relevant to a single
(1)
equipment (2)
NMS5LX 6.4.8 - MN.00272.E - 001 285

Fig.42 notes
(1) Each equipment is identified by a record that contains:

• The symbol representing the type of equipment.
• IP address of the equipment.
• Logic address of the equipment.
When the record is selected, the border of the symbol becomes red.
(2) Each NE Log is identified by a record, where the date (day-month-year) and the time (hour:min-
utes:seconds) of the file creation are contained.
When a Log is inactive, it means that it has been selected to be displayed.
When the NE Log is removed from the Selected Files List area, the record that represents it is re-
activated.
(3) Each NE Log is identified by a record that contains:

• The symbol that represents the type of the equipment.
• The IP address of the equipment.
• The logic address of the equipment.
• The date_time when the file has been created
To create a NE Log

The Equipment History Log Management Main Window opens (Fig.42).
3. Select, in the Selected Equipment area, the equipment for which you wish to create a NE Log.
4. Press the right mouse button.

A pop-up menu opens.
5. Select the command:
• Send Read/Delete File Request, to create the NE Log and delete the alarms stored in the
controller of the equipment.
• Send Read File Request, to create the NE Log, without deleting the alarms.
The created NE Log is displayed in the...history log file area.
NE Log is automatically saved by the system with the name corresponding to the date_time when it
has been created.
If the Uploaded file is empty. File is not saved message is displayed, the Log file is not created, as no
alarm is stored in the equipment controller.
To create more NE Logs at the same time

3. Select, in the Selected Equipment area, the equipment for which you wish to create a NE Log.
4. Press Read log Files from Equipment.
NMS5LX 6.4.8 - MN.00272.E - 001 286

The created NE Logs are automatically saved by the system with the name corresponding to the
date_time when they have been created.
alarm is stored in the equipment controller.
To display the content of a NE Log

3. Double click, in the Selected Equipment area, the equipment for which you wish to verify the NE Log.
In the ...history log files area, the list of the NE Logs relevant to the selected equipment will be pointed
out.
4. Double click on the NE Log for which you wish to verify the content.
The NE Log is displayed in the Selected files list area. The file, in the ...history log files area, is disabled.
5. Repeat the previous step, to insert all the wished NE Logs in the Selected files list area.
6. It is possible to remove from the Selected files list area:

• A single file selecting the icon that characterize the file and pressing the right mouse button. A
pop-up menu is displayed. Press Remove From List.
• All the files, pressing Clear selections.
7. Press Show selected files records.

The NE Logger Browser window opens, where all the alarms stored on the selected NE Logs are listed.
The elements present in the window are the same of the Alarm History Browser window (Fig.38), except
for some commands, present in the Alarm History Browser window, but not in the NE Logger Browser
window.
To delete a NE Log

3. Double click, in the Selected Equipment area, the equipment for which you wish to delete a NE Log.
In the ...history log files area, the list of the NE Log relevant to the selected equipment will be displayed.
4. Select the NE Log and press the right mouse button.

5. Select the Delete File command and confirm.
The file is deleted.
A deactivated file cannot be deleted.
To delete all the NE Logs of an equipment

NMS5LX 6.4.8 - MN.00272.E - 001 287

3. Select, in the Selected Equipment area, the equipment for which you wish to delete all the NE Logs.
4. Select the right mouse button.

5. Select the Delete All Files command and confirm.

All the NE Logs of the equipment are deleted.
To delete the alarms stored in the controller of an equipment

3. Select, in the Selected Equipment area, the equipment for which you wish to delete the alarms.
4. Select the NE Log command and press the right mouse button.
5. Select the Send Delete File Request command.
It is possible to delete the alarms stored in the controller of an equipment also during the creation of
a NE Log (pag.286).
NMS5LX 6.4.8 - MN.00272.E - 001 288

NE COMMAND LOG

The NE Command Log command displays/manages the list of the operations executed by the users,
stored on the controller of an equipment (NE Command Log).
• To display the list of the Command Log of an equipment (pag.289)
• To create a Command Log (pag.290)
• To create more Command Logs at the same time (pag.291)
• To display the content of a Command Log (pag.291)
• To delete a Command Log (pag.292)
• To delete all the Command Logs of an equipment (pag.292)
• To delete the list of the operations stored in the controller of an equipment (pag.292)
The command is not available for the equipment type: ELFO, SDH N+1 and FAMxc.
For more information about the NE Command Log go to pag.292.
To display the list of the Command Log of an equipment
2. Select the Fault > NE Command Log command.

The Equipment History Command Log Management Main window opens.
3. Double click, in the Selected Equipment area, the equipment for which you wish to verify the Command
Log.
The area on the right displays the list of the Command Logs (Fig.43).
If the message No files available for equipment ... is displayed, no Command Log is available for the
specific equipment.
Fig.43 Equipment History Command Log Management Main window
Logic address
of the equipment
which the NE logs
present in the area
below are referred to
List of
equipment List of the NE
selected in logs, stored
the map (1) in the disk,
relevant to
a single
equipment (2)
List of the selected

NE Logs for which
it is possible to
display the detail of
the signallings (3)
NMS5LX 6.4.8 - MN.00272.E - 001 289

Fig.43 notes
(1) Each equipment is identified by a record that contains:

• The symbol representing the type of equipment.
• IP address of the equipment.
• Logic address of the equipment.
When the record is selected, the border of the symbol becomes red.
(2) Each Command Log is identified by a record, where the date (day-month-year) and the time
(hour:minutes:seconds) of the file creation are contained.
To create a Command Log

The Equipment History Command Log Management Main Window opens (Fig.43).
3. Select, in the Selected Equipment area, the equipment for which you wish to create a Command Log.

• Send Read/Delete File Request, to create the Command Log and delete the list of the oper-
ations stored in the controller of the equipment.
• Send Read File Request, to create the Command Log, without deleting the list of the opera-
tions.
The Command Log Filter Win opens.
To save on Command Log:
• All the operations, press Read log Files from Equipment.
• A group of operations, set one or more parameters present in the window, according to
the criteria you wish to use to determine the group of operations to save in the Log and,
then, press Read log Files from Equipment.
The available criteria are the following ones:
• Source Address. IP address of the machine (PC or workstation) from which it has
been executed the operation.
To set the criterion type a IP address.
• Occurred date. Execution date of the operations.
To set the criterion, activate the box:
• Before and type the wished date in the boxes below. The Log will save only
the operations whose execution date is equal to or older than the set one.
• After and type the wished date in the boxes below. The Log will save only
the operations whose execution date is equal to or more recent than the
set one.
Activating the boxes at the same time and property setting the dates, it is possible
to set a time interval.
• User. Name of the user who has executed the operation.
To set the criterion type into the box the desired use name.
• Object Identifier. Name of the physical or logic object of the equipment to which
the operation refers.
To set the criterion type into the box the desired object.
The created Command Log is displayed in the...history log file area.
Command Log is automatically saved by the system with the name corresponding to the date_time
when it has been created.
operation is stored in the equipment controller.
NMS5LX 6.4.8 - MN.00272.E - 001 290

To create more Command Logs at the same time

3. Select, in the Selected Equipment area, the equipment for which you wish to create a Command Log.
4. Press Read log Files from Equipment.

The Command Log Filter Win opens.
5. To save on Command Logs:

• All the operations, press Read log Files from Equipment.
• A group of operation, set one or more parameters present in the window, according to the cri-
teria you wish to use to determine the group of operations to save in the Log and, then, press
Read log Files from Equipment.
The available criteria are the following ones:
• Source Address. IP address of the machine (PC or workstation) from which it has been
executed the operation.
To set the criterion type a IP address.
• Occurred date. Execution date of the operations.
To set the criterion, activate the box:
• Before and type the wished date in the boxes below. The Log will save only the
operations whose execution date is equal to or older than the set one.
• After and type the wished date in the boxes below. The Log will save only the op-
erations whose execution date is equal to or more recent than the set one.
Activating the boxes at the same time and property setting the dates, it is possible to set
a time interval.
To set the criterion type into the box the desired use name.
• Object Identifier. Name of the physical or logic object of the equipment to which the op-
eration refers.
To set the criterion type into the box the desired object.
The created Command Logs are automatically saved by the system with the name corresponding to the
date_time when they have been created.
operation is stored in the equipment controller.
To display the content of a Command Log

3. Double click, in the Selected Equipment area, the NE for which you wish to verify the Command Log.
In the ...history log files area, the list of the Command Logs relevant to the selected NE will be pointed
out.
4. Double click on the Command Log for which you wish to verify the content.
The Commands Log File Information window is displayed where, for each operation, is pointed out in
the column:
• Date/Time. Date and time when it has been executed the operation.
• Source Address. IP address of the machine (PC or WS) from which it has been executed the op-
eration.
• Object. Object to which the operation refers.
• Instance. Name of the equipment instance to which the operation refers.
• Value Set. Set value.
The presence of the symbol … points out that the information is not available because it is a not signif-
icant one for the type of operation to which it refers.
NMS5LX 6.4.8 - MN.00272.E - 001 291

To delete a Command Log

3. Double click, in the Selected Equipment area, the NE for which you wish to delete a Command Log.
In the ...history log files area, the list of the Command Log relevant to the selected equipment will be
displayed.
4. Select the Command Log and press the right mouse button.
5. Select the Delete File command and confirm.

The file is deleted.
To delete all the Command Logs of an equipment

3. Select, in the Selected Equipment area, the equipment for which you wish to delete all the Command
Logs.
5. Select the Delete All Files command and confirm.

All the Command Logs of the equipment are deleted.
To delete the list of the operations stored in the controller of an equipment

3. Select, in the Selected Equipment area, the equipment for which you wish to delete the list of the op-
erations.

5. Select the Send Delete File Request command.

It is possible to delete the list of the operations stored in the controller of an equipment also during the
creation of a Command Log (pag.290).
NE Command Log (more info)
NE Command Log is a file where the system records the operations executed by the SCT/LMT or NMS5UX
user stored into the controller of the selected equipment.
The Log read from equipment (Command Log) is stored on the disk of the machine and it remains available
for subsequent consultations done by the user.
The list of the Command Log and their contents can be displayed only through the Equipment History Com-
mand Log Management Main window (Fig.43).
NMS5LX 6.4.8 - MN.00272.E - 001 292

ALARM SUMMARY

The Alarm Summary command displays/manages the summary of the alarm/status/event signallings
(alarms) stored in the NMS5LX database, relevant to the equipment of the open map.
With detail it is possible:

• To display the summary of the alarm history subdivided for the severity relevant to the equip-
ment present in the map (pag.293)
• To display the alarms stored in the alarm history (pag.296)
• To reset the indication of status change (pag.297)
• To set the automatic updating of the data (pag.297)
To display the summary of the alarm history subdivided for the severity rel-
evant to the equipment present in the map
1. Select the Fault > Alarm Summary command.

The Siae Alarm Summary window opens, where the summary of the alarm history subdivided for the
severity relevant to the equipment present in the map is displayed (Fig.44).
Fig.44 Siae Alarm Summary window
Activation
status of
the filters
(1) Automatic
updating
of data (2)
Data
Indication of refresh
"Status" time (3)
change (4)
Number of
alarms
subdivided
according
type and
severity (5)
Number of
alarms
detected
but not
cleared yet (8)
Criterion used
Number of
to subdivide
alarms
the alarms (6)
detected
and cleared
Push-buttons (7)
(9)
NMS5LX 6.4.8 - MN.00272.E - 001 293

Fig.44 notes
(1) Label:
• Filters: NONE. There are not filters active.
• Filters: <applied filters>. There are indicated filters active.
It is possible to insert a description in this area (pag.295).
(2) If the box is:

• Active, it means that the window is automatically updated each N seconds. The parameter
N is displayed in the Timeout (sec) box.
In this condition the Refresh push-button is not available.
• Inactive, it means that the window is not automatically updated. To update it, it is necessary
to press Refresh.
(3) Interval (in seconds) between an automatic update of the data and the next one
The parameter is meaningful only when the Auto Refresh box is active.
(4) The presence of the asterisk next to the record points out that, from when the Siae Alarm Summary
window has been opened or from the last selection of the Clear Alert push-button, a change oc-
curred: an alarm has been detected or cleared.
(5) It is possible that, in the Siae Alarm Summary window, there are not one or more records relevant
to the type of signallings/severity levels. Their presence is subjected to the activation of filters.
When the box is deactivated, relevant to a type of signalling/severity, the Filtered record appears
in the Siae Alarm Summary window. This record displays the total alarms of the only records
present in the window. For example, if in the window there are only the Critical (Cleared 20 - Active
15) and Major (Cleared 5 - Active 3) records, the Filtered record will indicate the sum of their alarm
(Cleared 25 - Active 18).
In detail, the option:
• Cleared (Filtered record), points out the total number of detected/cleared alarms relevant
only to the records present in the window.
• Active (Filtered record), points out the total number of detected but not cleared alarms rel-
evant only to the records present in the window.
(6) Record:
• Critical. Alarms with Critical severity.
• Major. Alarms with Major severity.
• Minor. Alarms with Minor severity.
• Warning. Alarms with Warning severity.
• Status. Status signallings.
• Normal. Event signallings.
• All. All the signallings (alarms, status, events).
(7) Option:
• Cleared (Critical record). Detected/cleared alarms with Critical severity.
• Cleared (Major record). Detected/cleared alarms with Major severity.
• Cleared (Minor record). Detected/cleared alarms with Minor severity.
• Cleared (Warning record). Detected/cleared alarms with Warning severity.
• Cleared (Status record). Detected/cleared status signallings.
• Cleared (Normal record). Detected/cleared event signallings.
• Cleared (All record). Total number of detected/cleared signallings.
(8) Option:
• Active (Critical record). Detected alarms with Critical severity.
• Active (Major record). Detected alarms with Major severity.
• Active (Minor record). Detected alarms with Minor severity.
• Active (Warning record). Detected alarms with Warning severity.
• Active (Status record). Detected status signallings.
• Active (Normal record). Detected event signallings.
• Active (All record). Total number of detected signallings.
NMS5LX 6.4.8 - MN.00272.E - 001 294

(9) Push-button:
• Refresh. It updates the data.
The push-button is not available when the Auto Refresh box is active.
• Clear Alert. It resets the signallings of status change.
• Filter. It filters the alarms list.

The Siae Alarm Summary window opens (Fig.44).
2. Press Filter.
the following option:
• Match Severity. Type of signalling (alarm/status/event) and, for the alarms, their severity (the
colour of the box, if active, reflects the colour associated to the severity of the alarm or the type
The deactivation of a box causes the deletion of the relevant record from the Siae Alarm
Summary window and the displaying of the Filtered record (Fig.44).
Activating the box:
second.
Add From Map.
NMS5LX 6.4.8 - MN.00272.E - 001 295

Activating the Match Acknowledged box, the list will display the marked record. Furthermore it
Activating the Match Unacknowledged box, the records not marked yet will be displayed.
• Description. Description displayed in the Filters:... area of the Siae Alarm Summary window
(Fig.44).
To set or modify the description, type an alphanumeric string in the box (minimum 1 maximum
128 characters).
The system displays in the Siae Alarm Summary window only the record that satisfy the activated cri-
teria.
When the Siae Alarm Summary window is closed, the possible activation of the filters is automatically
cleared.

• Clear Filters. It clears the activation of all the filters, except for the Match Severity, Match Ac-
To display the alarms stored in the alarm history

2. Select the option relevant to the type/severity of signalling, for which you wish to display the relevant
list stored in the alarm history.
The Alarm History Browser window (Fig.38) opens, where only the alarms of the selected type and se-
verity are displayed.
For example, if the Active option (Minor record) is selected, the Alarm History Browser window opens,
with displayed only the active alarms with Minor severity. To display the remaining of the alarm, it is
sufficient to change the filter.
NMS5LX 6.4.8 - MN.00272.E - 001 296

To reset the indication of status change

2. Press Clear Alert.

The asterisks are removed.
To set the automatic updating of the data

2. To ACTIVATE the automatic refresh of the window, activate the Auto Refresh box.
The data are automatically refresh each N seconds, displayed in the Timeout (sec) box.
To change the parameter, type the new value in the box (numeric value between 30 and 999 seconds).
It is possible to modify the value also when the automatic refresh is active. In this case, at next refresh
after the modification of the timeout, the new value will be acquired as valid.
3. To DEACTIVATE the automatic refresh of the window, deactivate the Auto Refresh box.
NMS5LX 6.4.8 - MN.00272.E - 001 297

EVENT STATISTICS

The Event Statistics command displays the statistics of the alarm/status/event signallings (alarms) of the
equipment.
• To display the statistics of the alarms subdivided by time interval (pag.298)
• To display the statistics of the alarms subdivided by equipment (pag.299)
• To display the statistics of the alarms subdivided by alarms (pag.300)
• To filter the alarms (pag.301)
The statistics refer to the alarms occurred on all the equipment present in the network.
To display the statistics of the alarms subdivided by time interval
1. Select the Fault > Event Statistics command.

The NMS5UX Alarm Statistics window opens (Fig.45).
2. Select the Graphics > Networks Event Counters command.

An histogram graph opens.
Each histogram identifies a day. For each day, the number of detected alarms of all the equipment
present in the network, is pointed out.
By default, the last 30 days, where alarms are present, are displayed. The parameters can be configu-
red by the Superuser.
3. Double click on the histogram of a day to display the statistics of the alarms of that day in periods of
15 minutes.
Each histogram identifies a quarter of hour. For each quarter, the number of alarms, detected by all
the equipment present in the network, is displayed.
Only the 15 minute periods, where alarms are present, are displayed.
Press Up to return to the previous display.
4. Double click on the histogram of a quarter to display the statistics of the alarms of that day/quarter,
subdivided by single equipment.
Each histogram identifies an equipment. For each equipment, the logic address, between brackets, the
equipment type and the number of detected alarms are pointed out.
5. Double click on the histogram of an equipment to display the detail of the alarms detected by the equip-
ment in the specific day/quarter.
Each histogram identifies an alarm. For each alarm, the description of the alarm and the number of
time that the alarm has been detected in the specific period are pointed out.
The description of the alarm is the same reported in the Message field of the Alarm History Browser
window (Fig.38) and Current Alarms Browser window (Fig.40).
6. Press Up to return to the previous display.
NMS5LX 6.4.8 - MN.00272.E - 001 298

Fig.45 NMS5UX Alarm Statistics window
Menu bar (1) Type of visualization (2) Push-buttons (3)
Fig.45 notes
(1) Menu:
• Graphics > Network Event Counters. It displays the statistics of the alarms subdivided by
days.
• Graphics > Equipment Event Counters. It displays the statistics of the alarms subdivided by
equipment.
• Graphics > Event Frequency. It display the statistics of the alarms subdivided by alarms.
• Maintenance > Filtered Delete. It deletes the specific group of the alarms stored into the sta-
tistics database.
• Maintenance > Delete All. It deletes all alarms stored into the statistics database.
• Help > On Usage. It opens the help on-line.
(2) The wording changes depending on the displayed type of statistics.
(3) Push-button:
• Up. It returns to the immediately previous display
• Reload. It updates the data present in the window.
• Filter. It filters the list of the alarms.
When one or more filter criteria are active, an asterisk is present in the push-button.
To display the statistics of the alarms subdivided by equipment

2. Select the Graphics > Equipment Event Counters command.
Each histogram identifies an equipment. For each equipment, the logic address, between brackets, the
equipment type and the number of alarms, detected and stored in the statistics database, are pointed
out.
NMS5LX 6.4.8 - MN.00272.E - 001 299

The equipment are listed in decreasing order according to the number of detected alarms and only for
the equipment of the network that have generated alarms.
3. Double click on the histogram of an equipment to display the statistics of the relevant alarms subdivided
in days.
Each histogram identifies a day. By default, the last 30 days, where alarms are present, are displayed.
The parameters can be configured by the Superuser.
4. Double click on the histogram of a day to display the statistics of the alarms of that equipment/day
subdivided in periods of 15 minutes.
Each histogram identifies a quarter.
Only the 15 minutes periods, where alarms are present, are displayed.
5. Double click on the histogram of a quarter to display the detail of the alarms detected by the equipment
in the specific day/quarter.
Each histogram identifies an alarm. For each alarm, the description of the alarm and the number of
times that the alarm has been detected in the specific period are detected.
The description of the alarm is the same reported in the Message field of the Alarm History Browser
window (Fig.38) and Current Alarms Browser window (Fig.40).
To display the statistics of the alarms subdivided by alarm

2. Select the Graphics > Event Frequency command.

Each histogram identifies an alarm. For each alarm is pointed out:
• Logical address and, between brackets, type of equipment where the alarm has been detected
• Description of the alarm.
The description of the alarm is the same reported in the Message field of the Alarm History
Browser window (Fig.38) and Current Alarms Browser window (Fig.40).
• Number of times that the alarm has been detected and stored in the statistics database.
The alarms are listed in decreasing order according to the number of times the alarm has been detect-
ed.
3. Double click on the histogram of an equipment/alarm to display the statistics of the alarm detection
subdivided in days.
Each histogram identifies a day. By default, the last 30 days, where alarms are present, are displayed.
The parameters can be configured by the Superuser.
4. Double click on the histogram of a day to display the statistic of the detection of the subject alarm/day,
subdivided in periods of 15 minutes.
Each histogram identifies a quarter.
Only the 15 minutes periods, where alarms are present, are displayed.
To delete the alarms
This operation allows deleting ONLY the alarms stored in the statistics database and not in the general
database of NMS5LX (for this operation, refer to pag.265).
NMS5LX 6.4.8 - MN.00272.E - 001 300

2. To delete from the statistics database:

• All the alarms, select the Maintenance > Delete All command and confirm.
The records are deleted from the database.
• A group of alarms, select the Maintenance > Filtered Delete command.
The Filtered Delete window opens.
Select one or more of the boxes present in the window, according to the criteria you wish to use
to determine the group of alarms to delete.
The activation of each box expands the window, displaying a section containing the options:
• Match Date. Date/time.
From the pop-up menu, select the value:
• ==, to delete the alarms detected at the day/time pointed out by the cursor on
the right.
• >=, to delete the alarms detected in the days after the day/time pointed out by
the cursor on the right and in the day/time itself.
• <=, to delete the alarms detected in the days before the day/time pointed out by
the cursor on the right and in the day/time itself.
• <>, to delete the alarms detected in the days between the two dates/time pointed
out by the cursor on the right.
To modify the date/time pointed out by the cursor, move the indicator of the scrolling bar
or select the arrows placed next to the bar (the value is moved at steps of one quarter).
• Match Source. Logic address of the equipment.
To set the criterion press Select. Select the wished equipment from the list and press Ok.
The selected equipment is inserted in the area below the Match Source box.
It is possible to delete all the items from the list pressing Reset.
• Match Object. Physical/logical objects that compose the NE.
It is possible to set only one object class at a time or all the classes at the same time
selecting the All Objects item.
• Containing string. Description of the alarm.
Press Delete.
The records are deleted by the database.
To filter the alarms

2. Press Filter.
The Filtered Graph Creation window opens.
3. Press the push-button relevant to the statistics which you wish to apply the filters to:
• Network Event Counters, statistics of the alarms subdivided by days.
• Event Frequency, statistics of the alarms subdivided by alarms.
• Equipment Event Counters, statistics of the alarms subdivided by equipment.
4. Select one or more of the boxes present in the window, according to the criteria you wish to use to filter
the alarms.
The activation of each box expands the window displaying a section containing the options:
• Match Date. Date/time.
NMS5LX 6.4.8 - MN.00272.E - 001 301

From the pop-up menu, select the value:
• ==, to display the alarms detected at the day/time pointed out by the cursor on the right.
• >=, to display the alarms detected in the days after the day/time pointed out by the cur-
sor on the right and in the day/time itself.
• <=, to display the alarms detected in the days before the day/time pointed out by the
cursor on the right and in the day/time itself.
• <>, to display the alarms detected in the days between the two dates/time pointed out
by the cursor on the right.
To modify the date/time pointed out by the cursor, move the indicator of the scrolling bar or
select the arrows placed next to the bar (the value is moved at steps of a quarter).
• Match Source box. Logic address of the equipment.
To set the criterion press Select. Select the wished equipment from the list and press Ok.
The selected equipment is inserted in the area below the Match Source box.
It is possible to delete all the items from the list pressing Reset.
• Match Object box. Physical/logical objects that compose the NE.
It is possible to set only one object class at a time or all the classes at the same time selecting
• Containing string box. Description of the alarm.
5. Press OK.
For the selected statistics, only the records that satisfy the activated criteria are displayed.
Each time the list is filtered, all the records are considered, both displayed and hidden.
When the type of displayed statistics is changed or the NMS5UX Alarm Statistics window is closed,
the possible activation of the filters is automatically removed.
NMS5LX 6.4.8 - MN.00272.E - 001 302

TRANSACTION LOG

* The Entry or Normal user cannot delete the operations.
The Transaction Log command displays/manages the list of the operations executed by the NMS5UX us-
ers, who have modified the configuration of the network, of the supervision system and of an equipment.
• To display the list of the operations executed by the NMS5UX users (pag.303)
• To save/print the list of the operations (pag.304)
• To delete the operations (pag.305)
• To filter the list of the operations (pag.305)
As help to the description of the command, see par. Recording modality of the operations (pag.306)
To display the list of the operations executed by the NMS5UX users
1. Select the Fault > Transaction Log command.

The Transaction Browser window opens, where the list of the operations executed by the NMS5UX users
is displayed (Fig.46).
If the user profile of the user who selected the command is:
• Superuser, the list points out the operations executed by the NMS5UX users of all the existing
maps.
• Privileged, Advanced, Normal or Entry the list points out the operations executed by the
NMS5UX users of one's map.
In order to speed up the reading from database and not to display too much old records, at the opening
of the window only the operation executed in the last N days (default N=10 days, configurable by Su-
peruser) are displayed. This does not mean that the oldest records cannot be displayed, but that a filter
is automatically applied.
Fig.46 Transaction Browser window
Menu
bar (1)
List of
operations
(2)
Status
bar (3)
NMS5LX 6.4.8 - MN.00272.E - 001 303

Fig.46 notes
(1) Menu:
• File > Print/Save. It prints or saves to file the list of the operations.
• Action > Delete Records. It deletes the operations.
• Action > Refresh Info. It updates the data present in the window.
• View > Set Filter. It filters the list of operations.
(2) For each operation, the column indicate:

• Operation. Type of operation (see Tab.10).
• Time. Date/time when the operation has been executed.
• Map Name. Name of the map where the operation has been executed.
• User Name. Name of the user who executed the operation.
• Element. Network Element involved in the operation.
• Object. Name of the physical or logical object which the operation is referred to.
• Information. Alphanumeric string that specifies the nature of the operation.
The presence of the symbol - points out that the information is not available as not meaningful for
the type of operation which it is referred to.
The information present in the window corresponds to the operations executed until the command
is selected or the updating has been executed.
(3) Field:
• Date and time when the window has been opened or refreshed.
To save/print the list of operations

The Transaction Browser window opens (Fig.46).
2. To print or to save to a file:

• All the operations stored in the database, select the File > Print/Save > All records com-
mand.
• The displayed operations, select the File > Print/Save > Filtered records command. If no
filters are active, the displayed records correspond to the records stored in the database.
• A group of operations, select the records and then the File > Print/Save > Selected records
command.

wish to use.
c. Press OK.
NMS5LX 6.4.8 - MN.00272.E - 001 304

saved.
name> directory.
c. Press Ok.
To delete the operations

2. Select the operations you wish to delete
3. Select the Action > Delete records command and confirm.

To filter the list of operations

the following options:
• Match user. NMS5UX user who executed the operation.
To set the criterion, select the name of the user from the list.
• Match date. Time interval when the operation has been executed.
To set the criterion, move the indicators of the Events occurred on or ... scrolling bars to set the
wished time interval.
In the Transaction Browser window, the operations whose execution date is after that displayed
in the Events occurred on or after field and before that displayed in the Events occurred on or
before field are displayed.
Activating the Granularity boxes located next to the bars (Coarse wording), it is possible to mod-
ify the date/time by step of one hour, while deactivating the boxes (Fine wording) by steps of
one seconds.
• Match operation. Category or single operation.
• Select the wished category in the Categories list.
In the Operations list, the operations associated to the category are displayed.
• Select the wished operation.
If no operation is selected in the Transaction Browser window, the records relevant to all the
operations of the category will be displayed.
The categories and the relevant operations are described in Tab.10.
• Select the type of NE in the Element area.
• Select the wished object in the Objects area.
NMS5LX 6.4.8 - MN.00272.E - 001 305

If no object is selected in the Transaction Browser window the records relevant to all the objects
of the NE will be displayed
Not all the Network Elements have a list of objects.

• Match Field String. Alphanumeric string: in the Transaction Browser window all the records con-
taining the set wording are displayed, in the Element, Object or Information field.
• Select the option relevant to the field of the Transaction Browser window where you wish
the filter is applied: Element, Object or Information.
• Type the string of characters in the text field.
• Pressing Get Selected Transaction, in the text field the value present in the field of the
record highlighted in the Transaction Browser window will be displayed (Element, Object
or Information).
• Activating the Exact Match box, only the records containing in the field exactly the set
wording will be considered; deactivating the box the operations that contain in the field
a value, where the set wording is contained too, will be displayed.
• Match map. Map which the NMS5UX user who executed the operation is associated to.
To set the criterion, select the name of the map from the list.
The filter is available only by the Superuser.
The system displays, in the Transaction Browser window, only the records that satisfy some activated
criteria.
Each time that the list is filtered, all the records are considered, both the displayed and the hidden one.
The window contains also the Clear (it clears the activation of the filters and displays the complete list),
Cancel (it closes the window and does not execute the operation) and Help (it opens the on-line man-
ual) push-buttons.
When the Transaction Browser window closes, the possible activation of filters is automatically cleared.
Recording modality of the operations
The list of the operations executed by the NMS5UX users records all the operations that have involved any
modification of the network configuration (for example, addition of a NE), of the configuration of the su-
pervision system (for example, addition of a user) or of the configuration of a NE (for example, change of
a parameter).
The detail of the operation is reported in Tab.10.
The operations are stored in the database of NMS5LX (Transaction Log table).
They remain stored for a certain number of days (which can be configured by the Superuser - by default
90 days), after which they are automatically deleted.
Also, it is possible to configure the maximum number of records in the Transaction Log table (value that
can be set by the Superuser) that can be stored.
During the day, all the operations are stored in the table (even if their number exceeds the maximum value
of records). At midnight, the number of record is checked; if this exceeds the maximum set number, the
system will delete the oldest records.
When the maximum number of records in the table is exceeded, the message Transaction Log occupation
exceeded 100% is periodically displayed warning about the critical situation. The display of the message
and the frequency with which it is displayed can be configured by the Superuser.
In any moment, it is possible:
• To display the occupation status of the table Transaction Log in the platform status bar (see
pag.45)
• To manually delete the operations (pag.305). It is suggested to periodically delete and/or store
to file the less meaningful records, so to avoid the saturation of the table.
NMS5LX 6.4.8 - MN.00272.E - 001 306

Tab.10 Operations (Transaction Log)
Category Operation Description
Access Access Not Authorized Failed attempt of access to the system (wrong password)
(operation of access to
NMS5LX) Login Login of an user to the system
Logout Logout of an user from the system
NMS - Commands Connect Eq Connection of one or more NEs

(operations relevant to the
connections to NE) Disconnect Eq Disconnection of one or more NEs
NMS - Edit Add Element Creation of an equipment

Delete Element Deletion of an equipment
map)
Modify Element Modification of the characteristics of an equipment
Network Severity Change Modification of the severity of the alarms for as type of NE
NMS - Eq. Manager Backup Config Saving of the current configuration of an equipment in its
(operations relevant to the backup configuration
configuration of the NE)
Cc Operation Operation executed within CrossConnect Manager
Config Download Transfer of a configuration created before into an equipment
Create Object Creation of an object within an equipment

Delete Object Deletion of an object within an equipment
Equipment Severity It modifies the sending status of the alarms/trap for an equip-
Change ment
Periph Download Download of software of a peripheral unit of NE
Reset Eq. Controller Reset of the main controller of an equipment
Set Attributes Modification of the operating parameters of an equipment
Software Download Download of the equipment software
Special Action Special operation executed on an equipment
NMS - Log Database Backup Saving to disk of the system database

Delete Alr History Deletion of one or more records from the Alarm History Brows-
NMS5LX database)
er window
Restore Alr History Restore from disk of a file of Alarm History

Restore Perf Restore from disk of a file of Performance Monitoring database
Save Alr History Saving to disk of the Alarm History database
Save Perf Saving to disk of the Performance Monitoring
NMS - User Create User Creation of a NMS5UX user

Delete User Deletion of a NMS5UX user
NMS5UX users)
Modify User Modification of the characteristics of a NMS5UX user
NMS5LX 6.4.8 - MN.00272.E - 001 307

Category Operation Description
RM - Edit RM - Add Equipment Creation of an equipment in a Ring

(operations relevant to a
Ring configuration) RM - Add Link Creation of a Link in a Ring
RM - Add Path Creation of a Path in a Ring
RM - Delete Equipment Deletion of an equipment in a Ring
RM - Delete Link Deletion of a Link in a Ring
RM - Delete Path Deletion of a Path in a Ring
RM - Modify Equipment Modification of the characteristics of an equipment in a Ring
RM - Modify Link Modification of the characteristics of a Link in a Ring
RM - Modify Path Modification of the characteristics of a Path in a Ring

RM - Schedule Path Scheduling of a Path in a Ring
RM Log RM - Delete Alr History Deletion of one or more records from the RM - Alarm History
(operations relevant to the window of a Ring
Ring Manager database)
RM Special RM - Path alignment Alignment of a Path in a Ring

Path and NE) RM - Set attributes Modification of the characteristics of an equipment in a Ring
VM - Edit VM - Add Equipment Creation of an equipment in a VLAN Map

(operations relevant to a
VLAN Map configuration) VM - Add Link Creation of a Link in a VLAN Map
VM - Add VLAN Creation of a VLAN path in a VLAN Map
VM - Delete Equipment Deletion of an equipment in a VLAN Map
VM - Delete Link Deletion of a Link in a VLAN Map
VM - Delete VLAN Deletion of a VLAN path in a VLAN Map
VM - Modify Equipment Modification of the characteristics of an equipment in a VLAN

Map
VM - Modify Link Modification of the characteristics of a Link in a VLAN Map
VM - Modify VLAN Modification of the characteristics of a VLAN path in a VLAN

Map
VM Log VM - Delete Alr History Deletion of one or more records from the VM - Alarm History
(operations relevant to the window of a VLAN Map
VLAN Manager database)
VM Special VM - Path alignment Alignment of a VLAN path in a VLAN Map
VM - Set attributes Modification of the characteristics of an equipment in a VLAN
VLAN path and NE)
Map
NMS5LX 6.4.8 - MN.00272.E - 001 308

TOOLS
Tools menu contains the following commands:
• Alarm Notification via e-mail (pag.310). It displays/manages the operators enabled to the
reception of the alarm notification via e-mail.
• Command Executor (pag.316). It executes series of SNMP commands stored on file.
• NE Monitoring (pag.319). It executes, for the equipment, the periodic monitoring of parame-
ters.
• Auto Discovery (pag.327). It manages the Auto Discovery functionality for the detection of the
equipment present in the network and not managed yet by the supervision system; the auto-
matic creation and the connection of the discovered NE objects.
• Rmon (pag.336). It displays/manages, for the equipment, the RMON standard (groups: Stati-
stics, History and Alarm).
• XML Export (pag.352). It manages the export of the configuration data of the equipment in
XML format.
NMS5LX 6.4.8 - MN.00272.E - 001 309

ALARM NOTIFICATION VIA E-MAIL
Depending on specific user profile, follow the specific description:
• Entry, Normal, Advanced, Privileged (pag.314)
Alarm Notification via e-mail - Superuser

The Alarm Notification via e-mail command displays/manages the operators enabled to the reception
of the alarm notification via e-mail.
With detail for the Superuser, it is possible:
• To display the list of all the operators enabled to the reception of the alarm notification via e-
mail (pag.310)
• To add an operator (pag.311)
• To modify the characteristics of the operators (pag.312)
• To delete an operator (pag.313)
• To activate/deactivate an operator (pag.313)
• To acknowledge an operator and re-enable him to receive e-mail (pag.313)
• To create a filter relevant to the type of alarms whose detection must be notified to the operator
via e-mail (pag.313)
For more information on the functionality of alarm notification via e-mail go to pag.315.
To display the list of all the operators enabled to the reception of the alarm notifica-
tion via e-mail
1. Select the Tools > Alarm Notification via e-mail command.

The Alarm notification - Operator Management window opens, where the list of all the operators ena-
bled to the reception of the alarm notification via e-mail is displayed (Fig.47).
Fig.47 Alarm notification - Operator Management window
Menu
bar (1)
Operators
list (2)
Push-buttons
bar (3)
NMS5LX 6.4.8 - MN.00272.E - 001 310

Fig.47 notes
(1) Menu:
• Edit > Exit. It closes the window.
• Edit > Filters. It creates a filter relevant to the type of alarms whose detection must be no-
tified to the operator via e-mail.
• Edit > Refresh. It updates the information contained in the window.
• Operator > Create. It adds an operator.
• Operator > Modify. It modifies the characteristics of an operator.
• Operator > Delete. It deletes an operator.
• Alert > Clear. It acknowledges an operator, in such a way that the system stores the infor-
mation that the operator has read the e-mail and reactivates him to receive e-mail.
(2) For each operator, is reported in the column:

• Operator Name. Name of the operator.
• Status. Status of the operator.
• Active. The operator is active: he receives the alarm notifications via e-mail.
• Not Active. The operator is not active: he does not receive the alarm notifications via
e-mail.
• Alert. Acknowledge status of the operator.
• Active. The operator has received an e-mail and has not acknowledged yet its recep-
tion.
• Not Active. The operator has not received an e-mail.
• Email. E-mail address which the alarm notifications are sent to.
(3) Push-button:
• Exit. It closes the window.
• Refresh. It adds the information contained in the window.
• Clear Alert. It acknowledges an operator, in such a way that the system stores the infor-
mation that the operator has read the e-mail and reactivates him to receive e-mail.
To add an operator

The Alarm notification - Operator Management window opens (Fig.47).
2. Select the Operator > Create command.
The New operator insert window opens.
3. Type, in the Name box, the name you wish to assign to the operator (alphanumeric string of maximum
30 characters).
It is not possible to assign the same name to two different operators. Moreover, after the creation
of the operator, the name cannot be modified.
4. Select the Active box, according to the status you wish to assign to the operator:
• Active box ( ). Active operator: he receives the alarm notifications via e-mail.
• Inactive box. Inactive operator: he does not receive the alarm notifications via e-mail.
5. Type, in the Password box, the access code relevant to the new operator (alphanumeric string of min-
imum 6 and maximum 21 characters).
For safety reason, an asterisk (*) is displayed for each typed character.
The name/password of the operator will be required by the system to the NMS5UX user with privi-
leged, advanced, normal or entry profile who selects the Alarm Notification via e-mail command.
The correct setting of the parameters will allow these NMS5UX users acknowledging the possible re-
ception of e-mails by the specific operator and re-enable him to the e-mail reception.
6. Set the time interval during which the operator, if enabled, must receive the alarm notification via e-
mail. Set one or more of the following parameters according to the criteria you wish to use:
NMS5LX 6.4.8 - MN.00272.E - 001 311

• In the Date area, select the option:
• Disabled. The date criterion is disabled.
• From. The operator will be enabled to receive e-mails from the day/month/year pointed
out in the relevant field in the window on the right.
• Until. The operator will be enabled to receive e-mails until the day/month/year pointed
out in the relevant field in the window on the right.
• From-To. The operator will be enabled to receive e-mails from and until the day/month/
year pointed out in the relevant field in the window on the right.
• In the Hour area, select the option:
• Disabled. The criterion is disabled.
• From. The operator will be enabled to receive e-mails from the hour/minute pointed out
in the relevant fields on the right.
• Until. The operator will be enabled to receive e-mails until the hour/minute pointed out
in the relevant fields on the right.
• From-To. The operator will be enabled to receive e-mails from and until the hour/minute
pointed out in the relevant fields on the right.
• In the Days of week area, activate the boxes relevant to the days of the week for which you wish
the operator receives e-mails.
The Festivity box refers to all the days of the year corresponding to the festivity days in one’s
country. Parameter configurable by Superuser.
7. Set a possible filter relevant to the type of alarm, whose detection must be notified to the operator e-
mail:
a. Press Select Filter.

The Select Filter window opens.
b. Select, in the Files list, the name of the file you wish to retrieve.
The list points out the files present in the predefined directory (pointed out in the Selection box).
Modify the path, if necessary.
c. Press OK.
If you wish to create a new filter, press Filter. The Filter window opens. The modalities of filter creation
are the same described at pag.313 from step 3.
8. Type the e-mail address of the operator in the EMail box.
9. In the Secondary Operator area, set the data for the reception of the e-mail by a second operator if the
main operator does not acknowledge the reception of the mail:
• Type, in the Notification delay box, the time interval (expressed in minutes) elapsed which, if
the main operator has not acknowledge the reception of the mail, this one is forwarded also to
the second operator.
• Type, in the Email box, the e-mail address of the second operator.
10.Press Ok.
To modify the characteristics of the operators

2. Act in one of the following ways:

• Select the operator you wish to modify and then the Operator > Modify command.
• Double click on the record relevant to the operator.
The Operator Modify window opens, where the characteristics of the operator are displayed.
3. Make the wished changes.

The modality to set the parameters are the same described at pag.311.
It is not possible to modify the name of the operator.
4. Press Ok.
NMS5LX 6.4.8 - MN.00272.E - 001 312

To delete an operator

2. Select the operator you wish to delete.
3. Select the Operator > Delete command.

The Operator delete window opens, where the characteristics of the operator are displayed.
4. Press Ok.
The operator is removed from the list.
To activate/deactivate an operator

2. Select the wished operator.
3. Select the Operator > Modify command.

The Operator modify window opens.
4. To ACTIVATE the operator to the reception of the alarm notifications via, activate the Active box ( ).
To DEACTIVATE the operator to the reception of the alarm notifications via, deactivate the Active box.
5. Press Ok.
The new status of the operator is displayed in the Status column.
To acknowledge an operator and re-enable him to receive e-mail

2. Select the operator you wish to acknowledge.
3. Select the Alert > Clear command or the Clear Alert.

The operator is acknowledged and re-enabled to receive e-mail.
To create a filter relevant to the type of alarms whose detection must be notified to
the operator via e-mail

2. Select the Edit > Filters command.

The Filter window opens.
3. Type the name of the new filter in the Filter Name box.
NMS5LX 6.4.8 - MN.00272.E - 001 313

4. Set one or more of the following parameters according to the filter criteria you wish to use:
• Severity of the alarm. In the Severity area, select the option:
• All alarms. The detection of all the alarms will be notified to the operator.
• Minor Major Critical. The detection of the alarms with Minor, Major or Critical severity will
be notified to the operator.
• Major Critical. The detection of the alarms with Major and Critical severity only will be
notified to the operator.
• Critical. The detection of the alarms with Critical severity only will be notified to the op-
erator.
• Type of equipment. In the Equipment Type area, activate the Disabled box and select the type
or the types of equipment for which you DO NOT wish that the alarm detection is communicated
to the operator.
• Equipment of a map. In the Map area, activate the Disabled box and select the map/maps. The
detection of the alarms of all the selected equipment present in the maps WILL NOT be notified
to the operator.
• Logic address of the equipment. In the Logical address area, activate the Disabled box and set
the logical address of the NEs whose alarm detection WILL NOT be notified to the operator.
To set a logical address, type the address into the text field and press Add Address. The value
is inserted in the area above.
It is possible to delete a single item from the list pressing, after having highlighted it, the Del
Address push-button.
5. Press Save to save the set criteria into a file.

When the push-button is selected, the SelectFilter window opens.
Type the name you wish to assign to the file in the Insert name file box.
The system suggests the default directory. Modify the path, if necessary. Press OK.
6. Press OK.
In the window there are also the push-buttons:
• Load.... It opens the file containing a previously saved specific filter setting.
• Delete.... It delete the file containing a previously saved specific filter setting.
Alarm Notification via e-mail - Entry, Normal, Advanced, Privileged

User profile Entry, Normal, Advanced, Privileged
The Alarm Notification via e-mail command displays/manages the operators enabled to the reception
of the alarm notification via e-mail.
With detail for the user with entry, normal, advanced and privileged profile, it is possible:
• To acknowledge an operator and re-enable him to receive e-mail (pag.315)
For more information on the functionality of alarm notification via e-mail go to pag.315.
NMS5LX 6.4.8 - MN.00272.E - 001 314

To acknowledge an operator and re-enable him to receive e-mail
The operation can be executed by the NMS5UX user only if this knows the name and the password of
the operator.

The Alert Clear window opens.
2. Type the name of the operator you wish to acknowledge in the Operator field.
3. Type the access code of the operator you wish to acknowledge in the Password field.
4. Press Ok.
If the entered data are not correct, the message Alert has been acknowledged and reactivated is dis-
played, pointing out that the operator has been acknowledged and re-enabled to receive e-mail.
Alarm Notification via e-mail functionality
The NMS5LX system manages the sending of e-mail after the detection of an alarm of any equipment
present in the network.
The sending of the e-mails is subordinated to the definition of the operators who must receive the e-mails
and to the setting of the sending criteria: enabling for the reception of the e-mails, type of equipment/
alarm, period when the operator is enabled to the reception of the e-mails, etc.
When an operator is enabled, at the first detection of an alarm that corresponds to the sending criteria set
for that operator, he receives an e-mail pointing out:
Equipment type Logical address
Alarm description
No more e-mail will be sent to this operator, even if new alarms raise, until when the operator himself (or
the NMS5UX Superuser) does not communicate to the system to have received the e-mail (acknowledge
of the operation) and re-enables the operator himself to receive new e-mails.
An operator can be created/modified/deleted and acknowledged by the NMS5UX Superuser (see pag.310).
The NMS5UX entry, normal, advanced or privileged user can only, knowing the name and the password of
an operator, acknowledge him in such a way that the system memorizes that the operator has read the e-
mail and re-enables him to receive e-mails (pag.314).
NMS5LX 6.4.8 - MN.00272.E - 001 315

COMMAND EXECUTOR

The Command Executor command executes series of SNMP commands stored on file.
• To execute series of SNMP commands stored on file (pag.316)
• To display the content of a file of SNMP commands (pag.317)
• To display the file of scheduled SNMP commands (pag.318)
If you select an equipment in the map and then the considered command, it is possible that the system
displays the message No Command available for the selected equipment. This means that one’s supervi-
sion system, for the type of selected equipment, is not provided with files containing sequences of SNMP
commands. SIAE MICROELETTRONICA provides, on demand, files containing specific sequences of SNMP
commands.
To execute series of SNMP commands stored on file
1. Select the Tools > Command Executor command.

2. If the wished file is not in the directory specified in the Directory box, type the new path in the box or
use the Change Directory push-button.
3. Select, in the Files area, the wished command file.

4. Set the possible parameters, displayed in the and Command File Description area, on the choice of the
file.
The list of parameters changes according to the selected file. Some file do not need the setting of the
parameters.

• Immediate, if you wish that the sequence of SNMP commands present in the file is immediately
executed.
• Scheduled, if you wish that the sequence of SNMP commands present in the file is executed lat-
er.
On the choice of the push-button, the boxes for the setting of the data (Day, Month, Year) and
of the time (Hour, Min), where you wish to execute the sequence of the commands, are dis-
played.
6. Press Start Command.
If, in the previous step, the activated box is:
• Immediate, in the Message area, the progress of the operations is displayed.
It is possible to stop the procedure pressing OK, present in the Command Executor window dis-
played at the activation of the operation.
• Scheduled, a message is displayed informing that the file has been scheduled and will be auto-
matically started at the set date/time.
NMS5LX 6.4.8 - MN.00272.E - 001 316

Fig.48 SNMP Command Executor window
Menu
bar (1)
Path
where files
are stored
List of
available
files
Parameters
to set for the
execution of
the SNMP
commands
relevant to
the file selected
in the FILES
area
Operations
executed
during the
execution of
the selected
file (2)
Fig.48 notes
(1) Menu:
• Edit > View Command File. It displays the content of a file of SNMP commands.
(2) To delete the content of the area:

• Move the pointer in the Messages area and press the right mouse button.
A context menu opens.
• Select the Clear command.
To display the content of a file of SNMP commands

2. If the wished file is not in the directory specified in the Directory box, type the new path in the box or
use the Change Directory push-button.
3. Select, in the Files area, the wished command file.
4. Select the Edit > View Command File command.

The View File - … window opens where the list of the SNMP commands is displayed.
NMS5LX 6.4.8 - MN.00272.E - 001 317

To display the files of scheduled SNMP commands

2. Press View Scheduled.

The View Scheduled Command window opens, where the scheduled files are listed.
In detail, for each file, it is indicated in the field:
• File. Name of the file.
• Par 1...Par 5. Possible values set for the parameters required for the execution of the file.
• Status. Status of the operation:
• Waiting. The file has not been executed yet.
It is possible that, in the Sched Time field, there is a scheduled date/time previous to the
current one. This means that the NE, when the operation was scheduled, was not in the
right condition for the execution of the file (for example, the NE was disconnected or un-
reachable). In this case, the system attempts to re-execute the file at regular intervals.
• Running. The execution of the file is in progress.
• Completed. The sequence of SNMP commands present in the file has been executed suc-
cessfully.
• Sched Time. Date (day-month-year) and time (hour:minutes:seconds) for when the execution
of the file has been scheduled.
• Start Time. Date (day-month-year) and time (hour:minutes:seconds) when the execution of the
sequence is started.
• Stop Time. Possible values set for the parameters required for the execution of the file.
3. To delete a file, select the relevant record and then press Delete Command.
The file is deleted from the list
4. To display the progress of the executed operation by a file, select the relevant record and then press
View Detailed Information.
The View File - … window opens displaying the list of the displayed operation.
5. To update the information present in the window, press Refresh.

The date/time displayed in the status bar of the window opens.
NMS5LX 6.4.8 - MN.00272.E - 001 318

NE MONITORING

The NE Monitoring command allows assigning a set of parameters to monitor periodically to an equip-
ment. The “equipment-parameters to monitor” is defined measure.
• To display the list of the measures (pag.319)
• To assign the parameters to monitor to an equipment (create a measure) (pag.320)
• To display the characteristics of a measure (pag.321)
• To delete a measure (pag.321)
• To activate a measure (pag.321)
• To deactivate a measure (pag.321)
• To display the results of a measure (pag.322)
• To save the results of a measure (pag.322)
• To display the results of a measure stored into a file (pag.323)
• To save the results of a measure stored into a file (pag.323)
• To delete a file (pag.324)
For more info about the NE Monitoring functionality go to pag.326
To display the list of the measures
1. If you wish to display:

• Only the measures relevant to a given equipment select the wished equipment in the LX Map
Manager window.
• All the measures relevant to all the equipment start the procedure from step 2.
2. Select the Tools > NE Monitoring command.

The NE Monitoring window opens (Fig.49).
If an equipment has been selected before opening the window, the window lists only the measures rel-
evant to the selected equipment.
Otherwise, the window lists all the measures executed by the users.
Fig.49 NE Monitoring window
Menu
bar (1)
List of
the set
measures
(2)
Status
bar (3)
NMS5LX 6.4.8 - MN.00272.E - 001 319

Fig.49 notes
(1) Menu:
• File > Load Graphics. It displays, in graph format, the results of a measure saved to file.
• File > Load Exported File. It displays, in table format, the results of a measure saved to file.
• File > Delete File. It deletes the files where the results of the measures are stored.
• Options > Add Measure. It assigns the parameters to monitor to an equipment (creation of
a measure).
• Options > Delete Measure. It deletes a measure.
• Options > Start Measure. It activates a measure.
• Options > Stop Measure. It deactivates a measure.
• Options > Measure Properties. It displays the measure properties.
• Options > View Graphics. It displays, in graph format, the results of a measure.
• Options > View Exported File. It displays, in table format, the results of a measure.
(2) For each group of parameters, are pointed out:

• Measure. Name of the measure.
• NE Logical Address. Logical address of the NEs relevant to the measure.
• NE IP-Address. IP address of the NEs relevant to the measure.
• Status. Status of the measure:
• Started. The measure is active.
• Stopped. The measure is inactive.
• Interrupted. The measure is interrupted.
The Messages area displays a message specifying the cause of the interruption.
• Message. Self-explanation message specifying possible errors.
(3) If, before opening the NE Monitoring window, an equipment has been selected, the logical address
of the selected equipment is displayed in the status bar of the window.
If the check-box is active, the window will list only the measures relevant to the selected equipment.
If the check-box is inactive, the window will list all the measures defined by the user.
To assign the parameters to monitor to an equipment (create a measure)
1. It is possible to set the equipment which you wish to assign the parameters to monitor to, selecting it
in the LX Map Manager window.
Otherwise, it will be possible to set the equipment during the procedure of measure creation.

3. Select the Options > Add Measure command.

The Add Measure window opens.
4. Set the equipment, which you wish to assign the parameters to monitor to, in one of the following ways:
• Select the NE Logical Address option and type the logical address of the wished NE in the box
below.
• Select the NE IP-Address option and type the IP address of the wished NE in the box below.
If, at step 1, a specific NE has been selected in the box, the IP address of this equipment is automati-
cally pointed out.
5. Type, in the Timeout box, the time interval, expressed in seconds, between a reading of the value of
each parameter and the next one.
6. Select, in the Measure Type area, the wished group of parameters.

The user can select predefined groups of parameters. The SIAE MICROELETTRONICA provides, on
demand, files with specific groups of parameters.
7. Press Ok.
The measure is added to the list.
NMS5LX 6.4.8 - MN.00272.E - 001 320

To display the characteristics of a measure

• Only the measures relevant to a given equipment, select the wished equipment in the LX Map
Manager window.
• All the measures relevant to all the equipment, start the procedure from step 2.

3. Select the measure you wish to display the characteristics.
4. Select the Options > Measure Properties command.

The Measure Properties window opens pointing out in the:
• <First box>. The logical address of the NE which the set of parameters has been assigned to.
• Timeout. Time range, expressed in seconds, between two consecutive reading of the same pa-
rameter.
• Measure Type. Group of parameters.
To delete a measure

Manager window.
• All the measures relevant to all the equipment, start the procedure from step 2.

3. Select the measure, in status Stopped or Interrupted, you wish to delete.
4. Select the Options > Delete Measure command.

The measure is deleted from the list.
To activate a measure

Manager window.
• All the measures relevant to all the equipment, starts the procedure from step 2.

3. Select the measure, in status Stopped or Interrupted, you wish to activate.
4. Select the Options > Start Measure command.

The measure is activated.
To deactivate a measure

Manager window.
NMS5LX 6.4.8 - MN.00272.E - 001 321

3. Select the measure, in status Stopped or Interrupted, you wish to deactivate.
4. Select the Options > Stop Measure command.

The measure is deactivated.
To display the results of a measure

Manager window.

3. Select the measure for which you wish to display the results.
4. To display the result in format:

• Graphic, select the Options > View Graphics command.
The <name of parameters group> - <NE logical address> window opens. Fig.50 shows an ex-
ample.
• Table, select the Options > View Exported File command.
The Preview:... window opens. Fig.51 shows an example.
To save the results of a measure
1. To display:
Manager window.

3. Select the measure for which you wish to save the results.
4. To save the result in graphic format:
a. Select the Options > View Graphics command.

The <name of parameters group> - <NE logical address> window opens. Fig.50 shows an ex-
ample.
b. Select the File > Save as command.
The Save as window opens.
c. Type the file name into the Selection box.
The system proposes as path the default directory. Change the path, if necessary.
d. Press OK.
5. To save the result in table format:

a. Select the Options > View Exported File command.
The Preview:... window opens. Fig.51 shows an example.
b. Select the File > Save as command.
c. Type the file name into the Selection box.
d. Press OK.
NMS5LX 6.4.8 - MN.00272.E - 001 322

To display the results of a measure stored into a file

2. To display the results in format:

• Graphic, select the File > Load Graphics command.
• Table, select the File > Load Exported File command.
The Load...window opens.
3. Select the wished file in the Files area.

The format of the name of the file is the following: <name of the parameters group>-<NE logical ad-
dress>-<yearmonthday>_<hourminuteseconds>.csv
4. Press OK.
5. If at step 2 has been selected the command:

• File > Load Graphics.
The <name of parameters group> - <NE logical address> window opens.
• File > Load Exported File.
The Preview:... window opens.
To save the results of a measure stored into a file

2. To display the results in format:
• Graphic, select the File > Load Graphics command.
• Table, select the File > Load Exported File command.
The Load...window opens.

4. Press OK.
5. If at step 2 has been selected the command:

• File > Load Graphics.
The <name of parameters group> - <NE logical address> window opens.
• File > Load Exported File.
The Preview:... window opens.
6. Select the File > Save as command.
7. Type the file name into the Selection box.

8. Press OK.
NMS5LX 6.4.8 - MN.00272.E - 001 323

To delete a file

2. Select the File > Delete File command.

The Delete File window opens.
4. Press OK.
The file is deleted from the disk of the machine.
Fig.50 Graphic display of the data (NE Monitoring)
Menu
bar (1)
Display of
the result
in graphic
format (2)
Monitored
parameter
Parameter
value
Parameters
present in the
specific
group of
measures (3)
NMS5LX 6.4.8 - MN.00272.E - 001 324

Fig.50 notes
(1) Menu:
• File > Save as. It saves the results of the measure to a file which the user can assign the
wished name and path to.
• View > Zoom Minutes >... It displays the results subdivided by intervals of 5, 15 or 30 min.
• View > Zoom Hours >... It displays the results subdivided by intervals of 1, 3, 6 or 12 hours.
• View > Zoom Days >... It displays the results subdivided by intervals of 1, 2, 5, 15 or 30 days.
• View > Zoom 100%. It displays the results subdivided by the time interval stored in the file
until the selection of the command.
Into the View menu the asterisk next to a value points out the current setting.
(2) For each parameter selected in the area below, a graph is displayed.
(3) Each value points out a different monitored parameter.

To display the results relevant to a parameter, activate the relevant check-box.
It is possible to activate the display of more parameters at the same time.
Fig.51 Table display of the data (NE Monitoring)
Menu
bar (1)
Display of
the result in
table format
Date/time when
the parameter
value has
been recorded
Monitored
parameters
present in the
specific group
of measures
Fig.51 notes
(1) Menu:
• File > Save as. It saves the results of the measure to a file which the user can assign the
wished name and path to.
NMS5LX 6.4.8 - MN.00272.E - 001 325

NE Monitoring functionality
The NE Monitoring functionality allows assigning to an equipment a group of parameters to monitor.
The “equipment-parameters to monitor” is defined measure.
For a single equipment, it is possible to define more measures.
The user can assign to an equipment only PREDEFINED groups of parameters. SIAE MICROELETTRO-
NICA provides, on demand, files with specific groups of parameters.
After having created the measure (pag.320), it is necessary to start it (activation of the monitoring of the
parameters - pag.321). Periodically, the system will read the parameters and will record the results until
when the measure is not interrupted (pag.321).
At the start of a measure, a file is automatically created where are recorded the results of the measure
itself. At next start, a new file will be automatically created.
The system stores the file in a predefined directory (default /opt/nms5ux/tools/nms5NeMonitoring/data)

and assigns a name formed by the following parameters <name of the parameters group>-<NE logical
address>-<yearmonthday>_<hourminuteseconds>.csv.
For each measure, a maximum of N files are kept in memory (default N=10, configurable by Superuser).
The system allows, moreover, the contemporary start of N files (default N=10, configurable by Superuser).
The results of the measures can be displayed in graphic or table format (pag.322/pag.323).
Moreover, it is possible to save the results of the measures to a file which the user can assign the wished
name and path (pag.322/pag.323).
NMS5LX 6.4.8 - MN.00272.E - 001 326

AUTO DISCOVERY

User profile Privileged, Superuser
The command Auto Discovery manages the Auto Discovery functionality for the detection of the equip-
ment present in the network and not managed yet by the supervision system, the automatic creation and
connection of the discovered NE objects.
• To verify the status and the configuration of Auto Discovery (Network Scan and/or NE Wake Up
modality) (pag.327)
• To set the execution parameters and activate the Network Scan modality (pag.329)
• To deactivate the Network Scan modality (pag.331)
• To set the execution parameters and activate the NE Wake Up modality (pag.331)
• To deactivate the NE Wake Up modality (pag.332)
• To save a given Auto Discovery configuration to file (pag.332)

• To retrieve a given Auto Discovery configuration from file (pag.332)
• To display the list of the equipment detected by Auto Discovery (Auto Discovery table) (pag.332)
• To search an equipment in the Auto Discovery table (pag.334)
• To delete one or more equipment from the Auto Discovery table (pag.334)
• To create manually the object of an equipment present in the Auto Discovery table (pag.335)
For more info about the Auto Discovery functionality go to pag.97.
To verify the status and the configuration of Auto Discovery (Network Scan
and/or NE Wake Up modality)
1. Select the Tools > Auto Discovery command.

The Network Discovery Manager window opens.
2. Select the Manager > Scan Configuration command.

The Network Discovery Manager window is replaced by the Scan Configuration window, where is point-
ed out the activation status of the two modalities available for the automatic detection of the equipment
(Network Scan and NE Wake UP) and the configuration of the parameters used by the two modalities,
(Fig.52).
NMS5LX 6.4.8 - MN.00272.E - 001 327

Fig.52 Scan Configuration window
Menu bar
(1)
Activation
status of
NE Wake Up
mode (2)
Activation status
and configuration
parameters of
Network Scan
mode (3)
Configuration
parameters
of the Network
Scan and NE
Wake Up modes
(4)
Immediate
apply status
of the new
configuration
(5) Push-buttons
(6)
Fig.52 notes
(1) Menu:
• File > Close. It close the window.
• Manager > Scan Configuration. It displays the Scan Configuration window.
Command not meaningful for the considered window.
• Manager > Network Element Captured. It displays the Network Element Captured window.
(2) If the check-box is:

• Active, the NE Wake Up modality is active.
• Inactive, the NE Wake Up modality is inactive.
(3) Parameter/area:
• Range IP Addresses and Specific IP Addresses. Respectively groups of IP addresses and sin-
gle IP addresses cyclically scanned by the Network Scan modality.
The presence or not of values in the two areas causes even the activation or not of the Net-
work Scan modality. In detail, the Network Scan modality is:
• Active, when at least one value is present in the Range IP Addresses or Specific IP
Addresses areas
NMS5LX 6.4.8 - MN.00272.E - 001 328

• Inactive, when the Range IP Addresses e Specific IP Addresses areas are empty.
• Scan Repetition. Execution modality of the cyclic scanning:
• One Time At Day. The scanning is executed once at a day at the time pointed out in
the Start Time box.
• Continuous. The scanning is cyclically executed each hours:minutes pointed out in the
Timeout Between Scan Cycle box.
The Start Time and Timeout Between Scan Cycle boxes are displayed alternatively depend-
ing on the value set for the Scan Repetition parameter
• IP Managed Simultaneously. Number of IP addresses scanned at the same time.
• Timeout Between Simultaneous IP. Time range (in seconds) between a simultaneous scan-
ning of a group of IP addresses and the next one.
(4) Parameter:
• Action When Found. Type of action NMS5LX must execute at the detection of a new equip-
ment:
• Manage. The system automatically inserts the equipment in the Auto Discovery table,
creates the relevant NE symbol in the map and connects it.
• Create Only. The system automatically inserts the equipment in the Auto Discovery
table and creates the relevant NE symbol in the map.
• Log Only. The system automatically inserts the equipment in the Auto Discovery ta-
ble.
• Selected Map. Map where the equipment symbol must possibly be created.
• Selected Container. Name of the container where you wish to create the possible NE object.
Remember that the NE object is not created directly in the container but in the path <con-
tainer set by the user> / <year> / <year/month> / <day/month/year when the object is
created>
(5) If the option is:

• Active, when the Save as Active Conf push-button is selected, the current configuration
will be transmitted and immediately carried out by the daemon managing the operations of
detection of new equipment.
• Inactive, when the Save as Active Conf push-button is selected, the current configuration
will be stored and carried out by the daemon at the end of the current scanning.
(6) Push-button:
• Save as Active Conf. Saves the current setting of the execution parameters of Auto Dis-
covery as new active configuration.
• Save As. Saves the current setting of the execution parameters of Auto Discovery to a file.
• Load Active Conf. Updates the data present in the window loading those stored as current
configuration.
• Load. Opens the file containing a specific setting of the execution parameters of Auto Dis-
covery previously saved.
To set the execution parameters and activate the Network Scan modality


The Network Discovery Manager window is replaced by the Scan Configuration window (Fig.52).
3. Set the IP addresses you wish to periodically scan.
A group of IP addresses can be set in the following way:
a. Type, in the First IP and Last IP boxes, the IP addresses determining the range of values which
will be scanned each cycle.
NMS5LX 6.4.8 - MN.00272.E - 001 329

The range of values is displayed in the Range IP Addresses area.
b. Press Add.
c. Repeat the steps a. and b. to insert all the wished ranges of addresses.
It is possible to delete, from the Range IP Addresses area, a single item pressing the Delete push-
button after having selected the item, or all the items at the same time pressing Delete All.
It is possible to set a single IP address in the following way:
a. Type the IP address which will be scanned each cycle into the IP box.
The value is displayed in the Specific IP Addresses area.
b. Press Add.
c. Repeat the steps a. and b. to insert more IP addresses.
It is possible to delete, from the Specific IP Addresses area, a single item pressing the Delete push-
button after having selected the item, or all the items at the same time pressing Delete All.
4. Set the execution modality of the cyclic scanning.
It is possible to set the scanning takes place once at a day in the following way:
a. Set the value One Time At Day in the Scan Repetition box.
b. Set the hours:minutes, within 24 hours, when you wish the Auto Discovery scanning takes place
in the Start Time box.
It is possible to set the scanning takes place continuously in the following way:
a. Set the value Continuous in the Scan Repetition box.

b. Set the interval (expressed as hours:minutes) between two successive scan operations in the
Timeout Between Scan Cycle box.
5. Type the number of IP addresses (numeric value between 1 and 100) you wish to scan at the same
time in the IP Managed Simultaneously.
6. Type the interval (expressed in seconds) between the simultaneous scanning of a group of IP addresses
and the next one in the Timeout Between Simultaneous IP box.
7. Set, in the Action When Found box, the type of action NMS5LX must execute at the detection of a new
equipment:
• Manage. The system automatically inserts the equipment in the Auto Discovery table, creates
the relevant NE symbol in the map and connects it.
• Create Only. The system automatically inserts the equipment in the Auto Discovery table and
creates the relevant NE symbol in the map.
• Log Only. The system automatically inserts the equipment in the Auto Discovery table.
8. Set, in the Selected Map box, the map where the equipment symbol must be possibly created:
a. Press ...
The Select a Map window opens.
b. Select the map from the list.
c. Press Ok.
9. Type, in the Selected Container box, the name of the container where you wish to create the possible
NE object.
If the container is not present in the set map, when the NE object is created, even the container will
be automatically created.
Remember that the NE object is not created directly in the container but in the path <container set by
the user> / <year> / <year/month> / <day/month/year when the object is created>
10.If you wish the Network Scan modality is activated:
• Immediately, activate the Apply Configuration Immediately option and press Save as Active
Conf.
• At the end of the scanning process in progress, press Save as Active Conf.
The parameters Action When Found, Selected Map and Selected Container are in common with the
NE Wake UP modality. A change to them affects even the execution of this modality.
NMS5LX 6.4.8 - MN.00272.E - 001 330

To deactivate the Network Scan modality


3. Remove all the values present in the Range IP Addresses and Specific IP Addresses areas.
It is possible to delete, from every area, a single item pressing the Delete push-button after having
selected the item, or all the items at the same time pressing Delete All.
4. If you wish the Network Scan modality is deactivated:
Conf.
To set the execution parameters and activate the NE Wake Up modality

3. Activate the Manage Wake-up Trap option.

4. Set, in the Action When Found box, the type of action NMS5LX must execute at the detection of a new
equipment:
• Manage. The system automatically inserts the equipment in the Auto Discovery table, creates
the relevant NE symbol in the map and connects it.
• Create Only. The system automatically inserts the equipment in the Auto Discovery table and
creates the relevant NE symbol in the map.
• Log Only. The system automatically inserts the equipment in the Auto Discovery table.
5. Set, in the Selected Map box, the map where the equipment symbol must be possibly created:
a. Press ...
The Select a Map window opens.
b. Select the map from the list.
c. Press Ok.
6. Type, in the Selected Container box, the name of the container where you wish to create the possible
NE object.
If the container is not present in the set map, when the NE object is created, even the container will
be automatically created.
Remember that the NE object is not created directly in the container but in the path <container set by
the user> / <year> / <year/month> / <day/month/year when the object is created>
7. If you wish the Network Scan modality is activated:

Conf.
The parameters Action When Found, Selected Map and Selected Container are in common with the
Network Scan modality. A change to them affects even the execution of this modality.
NMS5LX 6.4.8 - MN.00272.E - 001 331

To deactivate the NE Wake Up modality


3. Deactivate the Manage Wake-up Trap option.
4. If you wish the Network Scan modality is activated:

Conf.
To save a given Auto Discovery configuration to file


3. Set or modify the execution parameters and the operating status of Network Scan and NE Wake Up
modalities as depicted at pag.329 and pag.331.
4. Press Save As.

The filesb_popup window opens.
5. Set the path and type, in the Selection box, the name of the file (with .cfg extension) where you wish
to save the Auto Discovery configuration.
6. Press Ok.
To retrieve a given Auto Discovery configuration from file


3. Press Load.
The filesb_popup window opens.
4. Select the file (with .cfg extension) where the wished Auto Discovery configuration is stored.
5. Press Ok.
In the Scan Configuration window, the configuration stored in the file is displayed.
To display the list of the equipment detected by Auto Discovery (Auto Dis-
covery table)

2. Select the Manager > Network Element Captured command.

The Network Discovery Manager window is replaced by the Network Element Captured window where
the list of the equipment detected by Auto Discovery (Network Scan and/or Wake Up modality) is point-
ed out (Fig.53).
NMS5LX 6.4.8 - MN.00272.E - 001 332

Fig.53 Network Element Captured window
Menu bar
(1)
Push-
List of the buttons
equipment (4)
detected by
Auto Discovery
(2)
Characteristics
of the selected
equipment (3)
Fig.53 notes
(1) Menu:
• File > Close. It close the window.
• Manager > Scan Configuration. It displays the Scan Configuration window.
• Manager > Network Element Captured. It displays the Network Element Captured window.
Command not meaningful for the considered window.
(2) For every equipment, is pointed out in the column:

• ID. Progressive index on insertion in the table.
• IP Address. IP address (SNMP agent) of the equipment.
• Customer ID. Logic address of the equipment.
• Action. Action which has been automatically executed by Auto Discovery at the detection of
the new equipment besides the registration of it in the Auto Discovery table:
• None. No action has been executed.
• Create. The corresponding NE object has been created.
• Create and Connect. The corresponding NE object has been created and connected.
• Change Type Info. No other action has been executed. Auto Discovery notifies that
the considered equipment is already managed by NMS5LX but with a type different
from that detected in the network for the specific IP Address. The new type assumed
by the equipment is that pointed out in the Type column.
Example. Suppose that an EL series equipment with address 172.22.13.6 is managed
by NMS5LX. At a given moment, the EL equipment in the network is replaced by an
ALplus equipment. The address 172.22.13.6 is assigned to the new equipment.
If the user activates the Network Scan and/or NE Wake Up modality and defines that
the address 172.22.13.6 is included in the scanned IP addresses, on the detection of
the 172.22.13.6 address a notify of type change is inserted in the Auto Discovery ta-
ble.
NMS5LX 6.4.8 - MN.00272.E - 001 333

• Status. Status of the action:
• In Progress. An action is in progress.
• Done. No action is in progress.
The update of the Auto Discovery table is dynamic. This means that the detection of a new equip-
ment is immediately pointed out in the window, if this is open.
(3) If an equipment, for which the action of creation/connection of the symbol (column Action, value
Create or Create and Connect) has been executed, the system points out in the filed:
• NSAP. NSAP address (GOSIP) of the equipment.
Value available and meaningful only for equipment inserted in an OSI network.
• Create Date. Date/time when the corresponding NE object has been created.
• Connection Date. Date/time when the corresponding NE object has been connected.
Value available and meaningful only for created and connected NE objects (column Action,
value Create and Connect).
• Map. Map where the corresponding NE object has been created.
• Path. Path (containers) where the corresponding NE object has been created.
(4) Push-button:
• Find. Searches one or more equipment in the list.
• Reload. Updates the data present in the window.
• Delete. Deletes the selected equipment.
Create. Creates the NE object of an equipment for which no action has been executed yet (column
Action, value Done).
To search an equipment in the Auto Discovery table

The Network Discovery Manager window is replaced by the Network Element Captured window (Fig.53).
3. Type, in the text field next to the Find push-button, an alphanumeric string (case sensitive) corre-
sponding to the value or to part of the value present in the ID, IP Address, Customer ID, Type, Action
or Status column relevant to the equipment you wish to search.
4. Press Find.
The list highlights the first line matching the set searching criterion.
If the list contains more equipment matching the search criterion, the Find push-button is replaced by
the Next push-button.
5. Press Next to display the next equipment.
To delete one or more equipment from the Auto Discovery table


3. Select the equipment you wish to delete.
4. Press Delete.
The equipment are removed from the list.
NMS5LX 6.4.8 - MN.00272.E - 001 334

To create manually the object of an equipment present in the Auto Discovery
table
Operation available only for equipment detected by Auto Discovery for which no action has been exe-
cuted yet (column Action, value Done - see Fig.53).


3. Select the equipment for which you wish to create the relevant NE object.
4. Press Create.
During the operation, the Status column points out the wording In progress.
At the end of the operation, the Action column points out the wording Create.
The NE object is created in the following path:
<map set by the user*> / <container set by the user*> / <year> / <year/month> / <day/
month/year when the object is created>
* Map/container currently set for the Auto Discovery functionality (see Fig.52).
NMS5LX 6.4.8 - MN.00272.E - 001 335

RMON

The Rmon command manages, for the equipment, the RMON standard (groups: Statistics, History and
Alarm).
Statistics group
• To verify the statistics of an Ethernet port of an equipment (RMON statistics) (pag.336)
• To activate an Ethernet port for the count of the RMON statistics (pag.338)
• To deactivate an Ethernet port from the count of the RMON statistics (pag.339)
• To capture the RMON statistics of an Ethernet port in a specific instant (pag.339)
• To save the RMON statistics of an Ethernet port captured in a specific instant to file (pag.340)
History group
• To display the history of the RMON statistics of an Ethernet port (pag.341)
• To activate an Ethernet port for the count of the history of the RMON statistics (pag.344)
• To deactivate an Ethernet port from the count of the history of the RMON statistics (pag.344)
• To save the history of the RMON statistics of an Ethernet port (pag.345)
Alarms group
• To verify the enabling and the criteria for the activation/deactivation of alarms relevant to a
counter (RMON statistics) (pag.345)
• To enable and define the criteria for the activation/deactivation of an alarm relevant to a counter
(RMON statistics) (pag.345)
• To disable an alarm relevant to a counter (RMON statistics) (pag.346)
The operations are available only for equipment in connected status (which LCT/WEB LCT is NOT con-
nected to in Configuration modality) where the equipment software supports the RMON standard.
For more info on the implementation of the RMON standard in the equipment managed by NMS5LX go
to pag.347.
To verify the statistics of an Ethernet port of an equipment (RMON statistics)

• Select an equipment in the map and, then, the command Tools > Rmon > NMS5LX Statistics.
The Rmon Statistics Viewer window opens. In the Network Elements area, only the selected
equipment is present.
• Select the Tools > Rmon > NMS5LX Statistics command.
The Rmon Statistics Viewer window opens. The Network Elements area displays all the equip-
ment present in the map and supporting the RMON standard.
In any moment, it is possible to insert one or more equipment in the Network Elements area selecting
the relevant symbols in the map and pressing Add From Map or to delete all the equipment in the list
pressing Clear All.
For all the NE objects of ALplus Node and ALCplus2 Node type, the Network Elements area points out
the detail of the equipment of the nodal system. This equipment is identified by the logic address:
Fig.54 shows an example of Rmon Statistics Viewer window.
NMS5LX 6.4.8 - MN.00272.E - 001 336

2. In the Network Elements area, select the equipment that manages the wished Ethernet ports.
The Interface Definition... area defines the ports currently active for the count of the RMON statistics.
If the wished port is not active, it can be activated (see pag.338)
3. In the Interface Definition... area, select the port which you wish to verify the counters for.
For each counter, the relevant value is reported in the Value column.
The description of the counters changes according to the type of selected equipment (see pag.350).
In order to refresh the data press Refresh or activate the Auto Refresh box (the data are automatically
update every second).
Fig.54 Rmon Statistics Viewer window
Menu
bar (1)
List of
NEs (2)
LAN ports
of the selected
equipment
currently
active for
the count of
the RMON
statistics (3)
Alarms enabled
for the
selected port
(4)
Values of the
counters
relevant to
the selected
LAN port
(5)
Data
refresh
mode (6)
Fig.54 notes
(1) Menu:
• Help > About Application. It opens the manual.
(2) For each equipment, the relevant logic address is pointed out.
It is possible to insert one or more equipment selecting the relevant symbols in the map and press-
ing Add From Map or to delete all the equipment in the list pressing Clear All.
For the NE objects of ALplus Node and ALCplus2 Node type in the list, the detail of the equipment
of the nodal system is pointed out. This equipment is identified by the logic address:
NMS5LX 6.4.8 - MN.00272.E - 001 337

(3) The number/type of Ethernet ports changes depending on the equipment type.
For each port, is pointed out in the column:
• Index. Value identifying univocally the port in the table of the RMON statistics of the data-
base.
• Interface. Name of the Ethernet port.
• Owner. User who has activated the port. User means the user used for the connection to the
equipment, then nms5ux user.
(4) For each alarm, is pointed out in the column:

• Index. Value identifying univocally the table in the RMON alarms in the database.
• Variable. Counter to monitor which the alarms refers to.
• Type. Modality used to compare the counter value with the threshold:
• Absolute. The value reported in the last instant of sampling of the selected counter is
directly compared with the set (raising and falling) thresholds.
• Delta. The value compared with the set (raising and falling) thresholds is the differ-
ence between the counter value at the beginning of the interval and the value at the
end of the interval.
• Interval (s.). Interval in seconds after which the data are compared with the thresholds.
• Rising. Rising threshold used for the comparison of the values with the selected counter.
• Falling. Falling threshold used for the comparison of the values with the selected counter.
• Owner. User who has enabled the alarm. User means the user used for the connection to the
(5) For each counter, the relevant value is pointed out in the Value column. The wording n/a points out
that the value is not available.
The description of the counter changes depending on the type of selected equipment (see pag.350).
(6) In order to refresh the data press Refresh or activate the Auto Refresh box (the data are automat-
ically update every second).
To activate an Ethernet port for the count of the RMON statistics

3. In the Interface Definition... area press the right mouse button and select Add.
The Nms5ux Statistics Enable window opens.
4. Select the Ethernet port you wish to activate in the Interface box.
5. Press Add.
The port is added to the Interface Definition... area.
If the selected port is already active, the message Unable to Perform Operation. Selected Port Already
Used is displayed.
The port will remain active until the user will deactivate it (see pag.339).
NMS5LX 6.4.8 - MN.00272.E - 001 338

To deactivate an Ethernet port from the count of the RMON statistics

3. In the Interface Definition... area, select the port you wish to activate.
5. Select the Delete command and confirm.
To capture the RMON statistics of an Ethernet port in a specific instant

3. In the Interface Definition... area, select the wished port.

5. Select the Capture command.

The Captured Statistics window, depicted in Fig.55, opens.
6. Set, in the Interval (1-60min) box, the time interval (number between 1 and 60 minutes) at the end
of which the values of the counters must be displayed in the Captured Statistics window.
7. Press Start.
The status of the capture operation changes from Ready to Running.
To stop the operation press Stop.
Once elapsed the set time interval, the status of the capture operation changes from Running to Com-
plete and the Captured Statistics window displays the values of the counters in the instant when the
time interval is elapsed.
NMS5LX 6.4.8 - MN.00272.E - 001 339

Fig.55 Captured Statistics window
Equipment
logical adddress
Ethernet
port
Status of
the captured
operation (1)
Counters
values
(2)
Fig.55 notes
(1) Wording:
• Ready. Operation not in progress.
• Running. Operation in progress.
• Complete. Capture operation complete.
• Aborted. Operation stopped by the user.
(2) The description of the counters changes depending on the type of selected NE (see pag.350).
To save the RMON statistics of an Ethernet port captured in a specific instant

to file
1. Capture the RMON statistics of an Ethernet port in a specific instant (see pag.339).
2. In the Captured Statistics window, press .
The SelectExportFile window opens.
3. Set the path and type, in the Selection box, the name of the file (with extension .txt) where you wish
to save the information.
4. Press Ok.
The file is saved in text format and can be opened by any text editor.
NMS5LX 6.4.8 - MN.00272.E - 001 340

To display the history of the RMON statistics of an Ethernet port

• Select an equipment in the map and, then, the command Tools > Rmon > NMS5LX History
View.
The Rmon History View window opens. In the Addresses area, only the selected equipment is
present.
• Select the Tools > Rmon > NMS5LX History View command.
The Rmon History View window opens. The Addresses area displays all the equipment present
in the map and supporting the RMON standard.
Fig.56 shows an example of Rmon History Viewer window.
2. In the Addresses area, select the equipment that manages the wished Ethernet ports.
The area below defines the ports currently active for the count of the history of the RMON statistics.
3. Select the port, press the right mouse button and select Graph.
The graph of the statistics history is displayed.
By default, the starting display mode is the following:
• Packets box. Counters displayed in the graph: Packets. The graph displays the counters whose
measure unit is the packet: Packets, Multicasts, Broadcasts, CRC Errors, Undersize, Oversize,
Fragments, Collision, Jabber, Drop Events.
To hide a counter, deactivate the relevant box in the Graph Summary area. To display it again
in the graph, re-activate the relevant box.
Each counter is identified by a color corresponding to the color of the relevant bar (or line) in
the graph.
To modify the counters represented in the graph set, in the Packets box, the Utilization option
(percentile estimate of the real bandwidth used) or Octets (total number of octets).
The description of the counters change depending on the type of selected equipment (see
pag.350).
• Grap Type box. Type of graph: Histogram. Each bar within the observation period has a color
corresponding to the color of the relevant counter pointed out in the Graph Summary area.
To modify the type of graph set, in the Graph Type box, the Line option: the values are repre-
sented by lines; even in this case, the color of the lines represents the counter which the line
itself refers to.
• Data type box. Value of the represented counter: Mean of the values sampled within the time
interval represented on abscissa axis (Average option).
To modify the parameter set, in the Graph Type box, the Measured option (value represented
on the abscissa axis at the last sampling of the time interval) or Maximum (maximum value,
represented on the abscissa axis, sampled within the pointed out time interval).
• Abscissa axis. Time interval: Days (date format month/day/year). The graph displays the last
30 days. If the port is enabled by less than 30 days, only the available days are displayed. The
parameter can be configured by the Superuser.
A double click on the area representing one day in the graph displays the statistics of the
counters of the selected day, subdivided in 1-hour period. Pressing the central mouse button,
you return to the previous view.
A double click on the area representing one hour in the graph displays the statistics of the
counters of the selected day/hour, subdivided in 1-minute period. Pressing the central mouse
button, you return to the previous view.
The display of the message No data available points out that no information is available for the
selected time interval.
• Ordinate axis. Measure unit of the counter: number of packets.
The measure unit changes depending on the type of parameters represented in the graph (see
setting of the Packets box in figure).
NMS5LX 6.4.8 - MN.00272.E - 001 341

Fig.56 Rmon History View window
Index value of the Statistics Graphic representation Use the bar to

Menu LAN port which the display of the history display the
bar (1) graph below refers to mode (2) statistics (3) whole graph
List of the
NEs (4)
Values of the
counters
relevant to
the selected
LAN port
(5)
LAN ports,
of the current
equipment,
currently active
for the count of
the history
of the
RMON
statistics (6)
Fig.56 notes
(1) Menu:
• Help > About Application. It opens the manual.
NMS5LX 6.4.8 - MN.00272.E - 001 342

(2) The first box points out the counters represented in the graph:
• Packets. The graph displays the values of the following parameters (if enabled in the Graph
Summary area): Packets, Multicasts, Broadcasts, CRC Errors, Undersize, Oversize, Frag-
ments, Collision, Jabber, Drop Events.
• Utilization. The graph displays the value of the Utilization parameter only.
• Octets. The graph displays the value of the Octets parameter only.
The Graph Type box points out the type of graph:
• Histogram. Histogram graph.
• Line. Line graph.
The Data type box points out the value of the displayed counter:
• Measured. Value, at the last sampling instant of the time interval, represented on the ab-
scissa axis.
• Average. Mean of the values sampled within the time interval represented on the abscissa
axis.
• Maximum. Maximum value, sampled within the displayed time interval, represented on the
abscissa axis.
(3) The graph can be represented by histograms or by lines (setting of the Graph Type parameter).
The graph does not represent all the counters at the same time. They have been subdivided de-
pending on their own measure unit (setting of the Packets parameter).
To hide a counter, deactivate the relevant box in the Graph Summary area. To display it again in
the graph, re-activate the relevant box.
Each counter is identified by a color corresponding to the color of the relevant bar (or line) in the
graph.
At the first display of the data relevant to a window, the last 30 last days are represented. If the
port is enabled from less than 30 days, only the available days are displayed. The parameter can
be configured by the Superuser.
A double click on the area representing one day in the graph displays the statistics of the counters
of the selected day, subdivided in 1-hour period. Pressing the central mouse button, you return to
the previous view.
A double click on the area representing one hour in the graph displays the statistics of the counters
of the selected day/hour, subdivided in 1-minute period. Pressing the central mouse button, you
return to the previous view.
It is possible to display, into a dynamic window, the detail of the counters relevant to the time in-
terval where the pointer is placed, keeping pressed the right mouse button.
(4) For each equipment, the relevant logic address is displayed.

It is possible to insert in the list one or more equipment selecting the relevant symbols in the map
and pressing Add From Map or deleting all the equipment in the list pressing Clear All.
For the NE objects of ALplus Node and ALCplus2 Node type in the list, the detail of the equipment
of the nodal system is pointed out. This equipment is identified by the logic address:
(5) For each counter, is pointed out in the column:

• Variables. In order:
• A box whose activation points out that the counter is currently displayed in the graph,
while its deactivation points out that the counter is not represented in the graph.
What just said is subjected to the setting of the type of parameters represented in
the graph (see setting of the Packets box in figure).
• Counter name. The color of the wording points out the color of the bar (or line) which
represents the counter inside the graph.
The description of the counter changes depending on the type of selected equipment
(see pag.350).
• Min. Minimum value sampled in the time interval currently pointed out in the graph.
• Max. Maximum value sampled in the time interval currently pointed out in the graph.
The wording n/a points out that the value is not available.
NMS5LX 6.4.8 - MN.00272.E - 001 343

(6) The number/type of Ethernet ports changes depending on the equipment type.
For each port, is pointed out in the column:
• Index. Value identifying univocally the port in the table of the history of the RMON statistics
of the database.
• Port. Name of the Ethernet port.
• Interval. Sampling interval used to collect the data of the statistics history. Value set to 60
seconds.
• Samples. Total number of samples to collect. The equipment stores these data in a rotation
buffer, where the new information in input overwrites the old one. Value set to 240 sam-
plings, which allow storing 4 hours in the equipment.
• Owner. User who has activated the port. User means the user used for the connection to the
• Status. Status of the entry in the table of the history of the RMON statistics of the database.
To activate an Ethernet port for the count of the history of the RMON statis-
tics

View.
present.
3. In the area where the ports are listed, press the right mouse button and select Add Rmon.
The New Control Entry window opens.
4. Select, in the Port box, the Ethernet port you wish to activate.
The remnant parameters present in the window cannot be modified. For their description, refer to
Fig.56.
5. Press Apply.
The port is added to the list.
The port will remain active until the user will not deactivate it (see pag.344).
To deactivate an Ethernet port from the count of the history of the RMON sta-
tistics

View.
present.
NMS5LX 6.4.8 - MN.00272.E - 001 344

3. Select the port you wish to deactivate.

5. Select the Disable Rmon command and confirm.
To save the history of the RMON statistics of an Ethernet port
1. Select the Tools > Rmon > NMS5LX History View command.
The Rmon History View window opens (Fig.56).
2. Display the data you wish to save to file (see pag.341).
3. Press .
The SelectExportFile window opens.
4. Set the path and type, in the Selection box, the name of the file (with .csv extension) where you wish
to save the information.
5. Press Ok.
The data displayed in the window are saved to file.
To verify the enabling and the criteria for the activation/deactivation of

alarms relevant to a counter (RMON statistics)

2. In the Network Elements area, select the equipment which manages the wished Ethernet ports.
In the Interface Definition... area, the ports currently active for the count of the RMON statistics are
displayed.
If the wished port is not active, it is possible to activate it (see pag.338)
In the Alarm Definition... area, the alarms currently enabled for the selected port are displayed. Fig.54
shows an example.
To enable and define the criteria for the activation/deactivation of an alarm

relevant to a counter (RMON statistics)
More alarms can be defined for the same counter. Each alarm will be identified by a different value of
Index (Fig.54).

NMS5LX 6.4.8 - MN.00272.E - 001 345

displayed.
If the wished port is not active, it is possible to activate it (see pag.338)
4. In the Alarm Definition... area, press the right mouse button.

5. Select the Add command.

The Alarm Statistics Creation window opens.
6. Set, in the Statistics Value box, the counter to monitor and which you wish to associate the alarm to.
7. Set, in the Measure Type box, the mode to compare the counter value with the threshold:
• Absolute Value. The value reported in the last sampling instant of the selected counter will be
directly compared with the set (rising and falling) thresholds.
• Delta Value. The value compared with the set (rising and falling) threshold will be the difference
between the counter value at the beginning of the interval and the value at the end of the in-
terval.
8. Set, in the Startup box, the alarm activation mode used for the first comparison between the counter
value and the thresholds set after that the alarm has been enabled by the user: Rising, Falling and Ris-
ing or Falling.
The description of the values available for this parameter and its interaction with the parameters Alarm
Rising Threshold and Alarm Falling Threshold is reported at pag.349.
9. Set, in the Alarm Interval (minutes) box, the interval (in minutes) after which the data are compared
with the thresholds.
10.Set, in the Alarm Rising Threshold box, the rising threshold used for the comparison of the counter val-
ues with the selected counter: when the value of the compared counter is greater than or equal to this
threshold and the value of the previous comparison is lower, an alarm is generated.
For the first comparison, after that the alarm has been enabled by the user, the alarm activation is
affected by the setting of the Startup parameter. The description of the interaction among the param-
eters Startup, Alarm Rising Threshold and Alarm Falling Threshold is reported at pag.349.
11.Set, in the Alarm Falling Threshold box, the lower threshold used for the comparison of the values of
the selected counter: when the value of the compared counter is lower than or equal to this threshold
and the value of the previous comparison is greater, an alarm is generated.
For the first comparison, after that the alarm has been enabled by the user, the alarm activation is
affected by the setting of the Startup parameter. The description of the interaction among the param-
eters Startup, Alarm Rising Threshold and Alarm Falling Threshold is reported at pag.349.
12.Press Ok.
The alarm is added to the Alarm Definition... area.
The Alarm Statistics Creation window remains open. To close it, press Cancel.
The alarm will remain enabled until when it is not deactivated by the user (see pag.346).
To disable an alarm relevant to a counter (RMON statistics)

NMS5LX 6.4.8 - MN.00272.E - 001 346

displayed.
4. In the Alarm Definition... area, select the alarm you wish to disable.

6. Select the Delete command and confirm.

The alarm is removed from the list.
Implementation of the RMON standard in the equipment managed by

NMS5LX
RMON Standard
RMON (Remote Monitoring) is a standard whose function is providing a set of services of statistics count,
monitoring and alarm report with reference to the activity of a LAN network.
These services can be accessed through the SNMP protocol and defined in terms of MIB (Management In-
formation Base) group described in the document RFC2819 - Remote Network Monitoring Management In-
formation Base, which must be read for any further detail.
Outline on the operation of RMON standard
The RMON standard is based on two components: an agent (RMON probe) and a client (remote manage-
ment station).
The agent saves the data within its own RMON tables present on the network devices (equipment, routers,
etc.). The RMON probes can see only the traffic flowing through themselves and therefore are located on
each (internal/external) port of the Ethernet switch of the device to monitor.
The remote management station communicates with the RMON agent using the SNMP protocol to obtain
and correlate the RMON data. Generally, the station is equipped with an interface (graphic or textual) which
allows the display and the analysis of the collected RMON data.
Implementation of the RMON standard in the equipment managed by NMS5LX
The Rmon functionality available in NMS5LX allows monitoring the status of the Ethernet interface present
on the equipment in compliance with the RMON standard.
With reference to what depicted in the previous paragraph, the Rmon functionality acts as client which,
through the commands present in the NMS5LX graphic interface, allows the analysis and the management
of the data collected by the probes present on each (internal/external) port of the Ethernet switch of the
equipment.
The probes collect the statistic data, which are stored in the RMON table of the equipment. In any moment,
it is possible to activate (and deactivate) an Ethernet port for the storing of these data by NMS5LX.
Currently, the equipment managed by the NMS5LX system implement the following RMON MIB groups and,
as a consequence, the Rmon functionality offers, through the graphic interface, the following functionality:
• Statistics measured by the RMON probes for each monitored Ethernet port (RMON MIB group:
Statistics).
NMS5LX 6.4.8 - MN.00272.E - 001 347

• History of the statistics for each monitored Ethernet port (RMON MIB group: History).
• Management of the alarms associated to the counters of the RMON statistics (RMON MIB group:
Alarm).
Here below a brief description is reported for each group/functionality.
Statistics (Statistics group)
The Rmon functionality can display to the user some statistic information (counters), which allows evalu-
ating the traffic development in input and in output for each single port of the Ethernet switch of the equip-
ment (see pag.336).
To display the counters of a port, it is necessary to activate the port (see pag.338). This port will remain
active until when the user does not deactivate it (see pag.339).
Moreover it is possible to capture the values of the counters at the end of a time interval set by the user
(see pag.339) and then to save them to file (see pag.340).
The description of the counters changes depending on the type of selected equipment (see pag.350).
When a port is active, the data are displayed in the relevant window (see Fig.54) only when the selected
equipment is in connected status and the local management program is not connected in Configuration
modality to the equipment.
The update of the data can be carried out automatically (activating the Auto Refresh option) or manually
(pressing the Refresh push-button).
History of the statistics (History group)
The Rmon functionality can present the time development (history) of the statistics relevant to the
counters in input/output at level of single port of the Ethernet switch of the equipment (see pag.341).
At equipment level, the statistics history stores the value of the counters of the Ethernet counter each 60
seconds (sampling interval). The equipment stores these data into a rotation buffer where, when full, the
new information overwrites the old ones (value set to 240 samples which allow storing 4 hours in the equip-
ment).
In order to store in the NMS5LX database and display the statistics history of a port, it is necessary to
activate the port (see pag.344). This port will remain active until when the user does not deactivate it (see
pag.344).
At the activation of the port, the supervision system starts storing the data relevant to the statistics and
makes them available to the user, in form of graph (histogram or line), subdivided by single Ethernet port
of each single equipment.
For each port, it is possible to display, at the same, time, the counters having the same measure unit
(packets: Packets, Multicasts, Broadcasts, CRC Errors, Undersize, Oversize, Fragments, Collision, Jabber,
Drop Events; Octets: Octets; Usage percentage: Utilization).
The user can choose the type of value of the represented counter: Average (mean of the values sampled
within a time interval), Measured (value at the last sampling of a time interval) or Maximum (maximum
value sample within a time interval).
The values of the counters are represented grouped by time intervals (minutes, hour, days). In the graph,
the last 30 days from the activation of the port can be displayed.
In any moment, it is possible to save the data to file (see pag.345).
The description of the counters changes depending on the type of selected equipment (see pag.350).
When a port is active, the data are displayed in the relevant window (see Fig.56) only when the selected
equipment is in connected status and the local management program is not connected in Configuration
modality to the equipment.
NMS5LX 6.4.8 - MN.00272.E - 001 348

Management of the RMON alarms (group: Alarm)
By means of the Rmon functionality, one or more alarms can be associated to each counter, of each single
port of the Ethernet switch of an equipment.
The activation of the alarm is caused by the exceeding of a (rising or falling) threshold of absolute values
or at relative differences.
In detail, at the definition of the alarm by the user (see pag.345), statistic samples of the counters are
periodically collected from the RMON probe.
These samples are compared with some previously set thresholds. If the monitored counter exceeds a
threshold, an alarm is generated and pointed out in the current alarm table and in the alarm history of
NMS5LX.
The description of the alarm in the list of the current alarms and in the alarm history is RMON Alarm <in-
dex>, where <index> is the value which univocally points out the alarm in the RMON alarm table of the
database (Fig.54).
In order to limit the generation of alarms, an hysteresis mechanisms is implemented which generates an
alarm each time a threshold is exceeded in the proper direction and does not generate other alarms until
when the opposite threshold is exceeded as described in Fig.57.
Fig.57 RMON alarms management
Allarme Valore del contatore

Valore del (trap SNMP) confrontato
contatore (3) con le soglie (2)
Rising
Threshold Andamento
del valore
del contatore
Falling nel tempo
Threshold
Intervallo di Tempo
campionamento
(1)
Fig.57 notes
(1) The sampling intervals are not synchronized with the instant when the alarm is defined by the user,
but refer to the time of the solar day (00.00, 01.00, 02.00, etc).
For example, if an alarm is defined at 11.40 and the sampling interval defined by the user is 30
minutes, the first usable sampling interval of the counter will be 12.00...12.30.
(2) At the expiry of a sampling interval, depending on the type of mode set by the user for the com-
parison with the thresholds, as value of the counter is taken:
• The value assumed by the counter at the end of the sampling interval (comparison method
Absolute).
• The difference between the value of the counter at the end of the sampling interval and the
value of the counter at the beginning of the sampling interval (comparison method Delta).
For the equipment managed by NMS5LX, when the user enables an alarm, the system starts the activities
to monitor the sampled value with respect to the thresholds. The result of this activity will be, possibly, the
activation or the deactivation of the associated alarm according to the following modalities.
If the threshold AlarmRisingThreshold is set to a value greater than the threshold AlarmFallingThreshold),
the alarm is activated if the sampled value is greater than or equal to the threshold AlarmRisingThreshold.
The alarm is deactivated when the sampled value becomes lower than or equal to the threshold AlarmFal-
lingThreshold.
For the first comparison at the end of the first usable sampling interval, after that the alarm has been en-
abled by the user, the activation of the alarm is affected by the setting of the Startup parameter. In detail,
if the parameter Startup is set to the value:
NMS5LX 6.4.8 - MN.00272.E - 001 349

• Rising or Rising or Falling and the value of the compared value is greater than or equal to the
Rising threshold, the alarm is generated.
• Falling and the value of the compared value is greater than or equal to the Rising threshold, the
alarm is not generated.
What just described is valid only for the first comparison after the enabling of the alarm. For the next com-
parison, the rule described above applies.
Example. Suppose that, for a given alarm, we have set the parameter AlarmRisingThreshold=100 and the
parameter AlarmFallingThreshold=50. If the Startup parameter has the value:
• Rising. At the expiry of the first usable sampling interval, the sampled value is 120: the alarm
is immediately activated.
• Falling. At the expiry of the first usable sampling interval, the sampled value is 120: the alarm
is not activated.
At the end of the next interval, the constraint has not meaning anymore; therefore, if in that
moment the value is greater than the threshold Rising yet, the alarm is immediately generated.
• Rising or Falling. At the expiry of the first usable sampling interval, the sampled value is 120:
the alarm is immediately activated.
If the threshold AlarmRisingThreshold is set to a value lower than the threshold AlarmFallingThreshold,
the alarm is activated if the sampled value is lower than or equal to the threshold AlarmRisingThreshold.
The alarm is deactivated when the sampled value becomes greater than or equal to the threshold Alarm-
FallingThreshold.
For the first comparison at the end of the first usable sampling interval, after that the alarm has been en-
abled by the user, the activation of the alarm is affected by the setting of the parameter Startup. In detail,
if the parameter Startup is set to the value:
• Rising or Rising or Falling and the value of the compared counter is lower than or equal to the
threshold Rising, the alarm is generated.
• Falling and the value of the compared counter is greater than or equal to the threshold Falling
the alarm is not generated.
What just said is valid only for the first comparison after the enabling of the alarm. For the next compari-
sons, the general rule described above applies.
Example. Suppose that, for an alarm, we have set the parameter AlarmRisingThreshold=150 and the pa-
rameter AlarmFallingThreshold=200. If the parameter Startup has value:
• Rising. At the expiry of the first usable sampling interval, the sampled value is 120: the alarm
is immediately activated.
• Falling. At the end of the first usable sampling interval, the sampled value is 120: the alarm is
not activated.
At the end of the expiry of the next interval, the constraint has not meaning anymore; therefore,
if in that moment the value is lower than the threshold Rising yet, the alarm is immediately gen-
erated.
• Rising or Falling. At the end of the expiry of the first usable sampling interval, the sampled value
is 120: the alarm is immediately activated.
Keeping in mind what described in this chapter, consider however that the operating logic of the alarms
on the equipment managed by NMS5LX foresees that the alarms (SNMP traps) are generated only on the
alarm transitions, that is from Off to On and, then, from On to Off, and that the initial status of the alarms
is however Off.
Therefore, the exceeding of a threshold AlarmFallingThreshold will have, as consequence, the generation
of an alarm only if the event takes place after a transition on the corresponding threshold AlarmRisingTh-
reshold or the combination of the values of the thresholds is such that the exceeding of the threshold
AlarmFallingThreshold corresponds to the activation of the alarm.
Ethernet counters (RMON)
The description of the counters changes according to the type of selected equipment.
NMS5LX 6.4.8 - MN.00272.E - 001 350

This description is the same reported for the counters of the packets/bytes in input/output from an Ether-
net port (LAN Statistics) contained in the user manual of the Manager application relevant to each single
equipment type.
The only difference is the name of the counter which, in some cases, change from the RMON counters with
respect to the LAN Statistics counters.
Tab.11 reports the correspondence of the names for the Ethernet RMON counters - Statistics counters.
Tab.12 reports the correspondence of the names for the Ethernet RMON counters - History counters.
The counter Utilization is meaningful only as RMON (History) counter and has the following description:
the best estimate of the mean physical layer network utilization on this interface during this sampling in-
terval, in hundredths of a percent.
Tab.11 Ethernet counters denomination (RMON - Statistics)
Ethernet counters denomination Ethernet counters denomination

RMON - Statistics LAN Statistics
Octects Total Bytes Received
Packets Total Frames Received
Multicasts Multicast Frames Received
Broadcasts Broadcast Frames Received
CRC Errors CRC Align Errors
Undersize Undersize Frames
Oversize Oversize Frames
Fragments Fragments
Collision Collision
Jabber Jabber
Drop Events Dropped Frames
Pkts 64 Octets Frames 64 Octects (Sent+Received)
Pkts 65 to 127 Octets Frames 65-127 Octects (Sent+Received)
Pkts 1024 to 1518 Octets Frames 1024... (Sent+Received)
Tab.12 Ethernet counters denomination (RMON - History)
Ethernet counters denomination Ethernet counters denomination

RMON - History LAN Statistics
Packets Total Frames Received
Multicasts Multicast Frames Received
Broadcasts Broadcast Frames Received
CRC Errors CRC Align Errors
Undersize Undersize Frames
Oversize Oversize Frames
Fragments Fragments
Collision Collision
Jabber Jabber
Drop Events Dropped Frames
Octects Total Bytes Received
Utilization -
NMS5LX 6.4.8 - MN.00272.E - 001 351

XML EXPORT

The command XML Export manages the export of the configuration data of equipment in XML format
(function XML Export).
Manual saving of data (single creation of a XML file)

• To save the complete equipment configuration into a XML file (pag.352)
Periodical saving of data (definition of cronjobs which automatically creates the XML files)
• To display the active cronjobs (pag.354)
• To create a cronjob (pag.355)
• To delete one or more cronjob (pag.355)
Management of XML, Log and HTML files
• To display the list of the XML files present in a given directory (pag.356)
• To display the list of the Log files relevant to the creation of XML files (pag.357)
• To display the list of the HTML files obtained from the conversion of the XML files (pag.357)
• To convert a XML file to a HTML file (pag.357)
• To display the content of a XML, Log or HTML file (pag.358)
• To delete one or more XML, Log or HTML files (pag.360)
• To send email with attached one or more XML, Log or HTML files (pag.360)
The function XML Export is optional and available only for equipment of type ALFO and series ALS (AL,
ALC, ALS, ALS-C, ALplus, ALCplus, ALplus2, ALCplus2).
For more information about the function XML Export go to pag.361.
To save the complete equipment configuration into a XML file
1. Select the command Tools > XML Export > XML Export Mgmt.
The XML Configuration Data Export window is displayed.
2. Select the command Action > Load Equipment.

The XML Configuration Data Export window displays all the equipment, managed by NMS5LX, which
support the function XML Export.
Fig.58 reports an example.
3. Define the equipment which the saving of the configuration is required for:
• All the equipment (which support the function XML Export) managed by NMS5LX, select the
command Action > Export > All Network.
• The equipment selected in the window XML Configuration Data Export:
• Select the equipment.
A maximum of 100 equipment can be selected.
• Select the command Action > Export > Selected NE.
• A group of equipment:
• Select the command View > Set Filter.
The Selected Filter window is displayed.
Select the boxes relevant to the criteria you wish to use to display a specific group of NEs
in the XML Configuration Data Export window:
NMS5LX 6.4.8 - MN.00272.E - 001 352

To set the criterion, type the NE address into the text box.
The jolly character asterisk can be used.
• Match Physical Address. IP address of the equipment.
To set the criterion, type the IP address of the NE in the text boxes.
• Match Equipment Type. Equipment type.
To set the criterion, select the option relevant to the NE type.
• Match Status. Status of the connection between the NE and NMS5LX.
• Press OK.
The XML Configuration Data Export window displays only the records which match the
activated criteria.
• Select the command Action > Export > Filtered.
The Files_popup window is displayed.
4. Type, in the Selection box, the name of the xml file where the data must be exported.
The system suggests, as path, the default directory. Change the path, if necessary.
5. Press Ok.
The XML file saves the complete configuration only of the equipment in connected status.
In the file, this equipment is listed in alphabetical order with respect to the equipment type and, within
the equipment type, with respect to the logical address of the NE.
Fig.58 XML Configuration Data Export window
Menu
bar (1)
Equipment
list (2)
Status
bar (3)
Fig.58 notes
(1) Menu:
• Action > Load Equipment. It displays all the equipment supporting the function XML Export.
• Action > Export > All Network. It saves into a single file (in XML format) the complete con-
figuration of all the equipment in connected status, managed by the system and supporting
the function XML Export.
• Action > Export > Selected NE. It saves into a single file (in XML format) the complete con-
figuration of all the equipment in connected status, selected from a list.
• Action > Export > Filtered. It saves into a single file (in XML format) the complete configu-
ration of all the equipment in connected status, present in the filtered list.
• Action > Schedule Backup. It displays the currently active cronjobs.
• Help > About Application. Version of the module for the management of the considered func-
tion.
(2) For each equipment, it is pointed out in the column:

• IP/Ph Address. IP address of the NE.
NMS5LX 6.4.8 - MN.00272.E - 001 353

• Status. Status of the connection between the NE and the supervision system.
The equipment supporting the function XML Export is equipment of ALFO type and equipment
of ALS series (AL, ALC, ALS, ALS-C, ALplus, ALCplus, ALplus2, ALCplus2).
For the NE ALplus Node and ALCplus2 Node objects in list, the detail of the equipment of the nodal
system is pointed out. This equipment is identified by the logical address:
(3) The status bar points out:

• The number of displayed records (Elements:).
• The number of selected records (Selected:).
• The activation of one or more filters (Filter: active).
To display the active cronjobs (XML Export)
2. Select the command Action > Schedule Backup.

The Scheduled Cron Jobs window is displayed showing the currently active cronjobs.
More information about the cronjobs are reported at pag.361.
Fig.59 Scheduled Cron Jobs window
Menu
bar (1)
Crojob
list (2)
Fig.59 notes
(1) Menu:
• Actions > Add > Daily. It creates a cronjob with daily frequency.
• Actions > Add > Weekly. It creates a cronjob with weekly frequency.
• Actions > Add > Monthly. It creates a cronjob with monthly frequency.
• Actions > Delete. It deletes one or more cronjobs.
• Actions > Quit. It closes the window.
(2) For each cronjob, it is pointed out in the column:

• Time. Hour (0÷23) : minute (0÷59) when the cronjob must be executed.
• Date. Day of the month when the cronjob must be executed. Wording:
• Every. Every day (identifies a daily cronjob).
• None. Not meaningful (identifies a weekly cronjob).
• 1÷31. Day of the month (identifies a monthly cronjob).
NMS5LX 6.4.8 - MN.00272.E - 001 354

• Day. Day of the week when the cronjob must be executed. Wording:
• Every. Every day (identifies a daily cronjob).
• Mon, Tue, Wed, Thu, Fri, Sat, Sun. Day of the week (identifies a monthly cronjob).
• None. Not meaningful (identifies a monthly cronjob).
• Command. Command line for the execution of the cronjob, path where the XML file and the
type of cronjob (#Differential Backup, #Incremental Backup, #Full Backup) must be saved.
To create a cronjob (XML Export)

The Scheduled Cron Jobs window is displayed (Fig.59).
3. To create a cronjob which is executed with frequency:

• Daily, select the command Actions > Add > Daily.
The Add daily job window is displayed.
• Weekly, select the command Actions > Add > Weekly.
The Add weekly job window is displayed.
Set, in the Day of the week box, the day of the week when you wish the XML file is saved.
• Monthly, select the command Actions > Add > Monthly.
The Add monthly job window is displayed.
Set, in Day of the month (1-31) box, the day of the month when you wish the XML file is saved.
4. Set, in the Time (hh:mm) box, the hour when you wish the cronjob is executed using the following
format hour (0-23) : minute (0-59).
5. Set, in the Export type box, the saving type you wish to execute:
• Full Backup. At each saving, the system generates a single XML file which contains the complete
configuration of all the equipment (supporting the function XML Export) which, at the moment
of the saving, is in connected status (see pag.362).
• Differential Backup. A XML file is generated for each equipment (supporting the function XML
Export) which, at the moment of the saving, is in connected status (see pag.362).
• Incremental Backup. A single XML file is generated with all the equipment (supporting the func-
tion XML Export) which, at the moment of the saving, is in connected status (see pag.362).
6. The Export Directory box points out the default directory for the saving of the file.
To modify the path, type the new value or press (the Directory Selection window is opened) and
select the new directory.
7. Press OK.
The cronjob is inserted within a list.
More information about the cronjobs and the files created automatically are reported at pag.361.
To delete one or more cronjobs (XML Export)

The Scheduled Cron Jobs window is displayed (Fig.59).
3. Select the cronjobs to delete.
4. Select the command Actions > Delete and confirm.

The selected records are removed from the list.
NMS5LX 6.4.8 - MN.00272.E - 001 355

To display the list of the XML files present in a given directory
1. Select the command Tools > XML Export > XML File Mgmt.
The NMS5UX Data Export File Manager window is displayed.
2. Select the command File > List XML Files.

The Directory Selection window is displayed.
The Selection box points out the default directory.
3. Change the path, if necessary.
4. Press OK.
The NMS5UX Data Export File Manager window is renamed into XML Files where are currently displayed
all the files with extension xml present in the selected directory and into the relevant subdirectories, if
present.
Fig.60 reports an example.
Fig.60 XML Files window
Menu
bar (1)
Files
list (2)
Fig.60 notes
(1) Menu:
• File > List Log Files. It displays the list of the Log files relevant to the creation of XML files.
• File > List XML Files. It displays the list of the XML files present in a given directory.
• File > List HTML Files. It displays the list of the HTML files obtained from the conversion of
XML files.
• File > Open... It displays the content of a file (.log, .xml or .html).
• File > Open. It displays the content of the selected file.
• File > Delete. It deletes the selected files.
• File > Convert to HTML. It converts the selected XML file to a HTML file.
• File > Send email. It sends an email with the selected files in attachment.
• Help > About Application. Version of the module for the management of the considered func-
tion.
(2) For every file, are pointed out:

• Date. Date of the file creation, in the following format:
<day of the week> <month> <day of the month> <hour:minute:second> <year>
• File Name. Position and name of the file.
NMS5LX 6.4.8 - MN.00272.E - 001 356

To display the list of the Log files relevant to the creation of XML files
2. Select the command File > List Log Files.

The NMS5UX Data Export File Manager window is renamed into Log Files where are displayed all the
files with log extension present in the default directory where the log files are automatically saved.
The description of the Log Files window is the same reported in Fig.60 except for the command File >
Convert to HTML which is not meaningful and available in the considered context.
More information about the Log files are reported at pag.361.
To display the list of HTML files obtained from the conversion of XML files
2. Select the command File > List HTML Files.
3. Change the path if necessary.
4. Press OK.
The NMS5UX Data Export File Manager window is renamed into HTML Files where are displayed all the
files with html extension present in the selected directory and in the relevant subdirectories, if present.
The description of the HTML Files window is the same reported in Fig.60 except for the command File
> Convert to HTML which is not meaningful and available in the considered context.
To convert a XML file into a HTML file
2. Select the command File > List XML Files.

3. Change the path if necessary.
4. Press OK.
The NMS5UX Data Export File Manager window is renamed into XML Files where are displayed all the
files with xml extension present in the selected directory and in the relevant subdirectories, if present
(Fig.60).
5. Select the xml files you wish to convert.
6. Select the command File > Convert to HTML.

The XML to HTML Conversion window is displayed.
The XML File(s) area points out the selected files which will be converted.
7. Set, in the Stylesheet File box, the path/name of the file you wish to use as style sheet for the conver-
sion (file XSL - eXtensible Stylesheet Language).
NMS5LX 6.4.8 - MN.00272.E - 001 357

It is possible to type the path and the name of the file or press (the Directory Selection window is
opened) and select the file among those available.
8. The Export Directory box points out the default directory for the saving of the converted files.
To change the path, type the new value or press (the Directory Selection window is opened) and
select the new directory.
9. Press Convert!.
For each XML file, a html file is created in the set directory with the same name of the source file. For
example, the file ALplus2_205.xml is converted into the file ALplus2_205.html.
To display the content of a XML, Log or HTML file
2. Execute one of the following operations:

• Select the command:
• File > List Log Files to display the list of the Log files (see pag.357).
• File > List XML Files to display the list of the XML files (see pag.356).
• File > List HTML Files to display the list of the HTML files (see pag.357).
The ... Files window is displayed.
Select the wished file and then the command File > Open.
• Select the command File > Open...
The Files_popup window is displayed.
Select the wished file (.log, .xml or .html) in the Files list and press OK.
The content of the file is displayed.

Fig.61 shows an example of Log file.
Fig.62 shows an example of XML file.
Fig.63 shows an example of HTML file.
Fig.61 Display of the content of a file .log
NMS5LX 6.4.8 - MN.00272.E - 001 358

Fig.62 Display of the content of a file .xlm
Fig.63 Display of the content of a file .html
NMS5LX 6.4.8 - MN.00272.E - 001 359

To delete one or more XML, Log or HTML files

• Select the command:
3. Select the wished files.
4. Select the command File > Delete and confirm.

The selected files are removed from the list and from the system disk.
To send email with one or more XML, Log or HTML in attachment
In order to send the files, it is necessary that the system administrator has properly configured the mail
server.

3. Select the wished files you wish to attach to the email.
4. Select the command File > Send email.

The Send Mail window is displayed.
The File(s) to Send area displays the files selected in the previous step.
It is possible to delete all the files pressing Clear Files List.
5. Set the email address of the destination in the Destination box.

6. Set the object of the email in the Subject box.
7. Write the text of the email in the Message box.
8. Set the modality to send the files activating/deactivating the options Use tarball file and/or Use gzip
Compression according to what pointed out here below.
Use Use gzip

Modality to send the files
tarball file Compression
Inactive Inactive A mail is sent for each file present in the area File(s) to Send. Each
file keeps its original format (.log, .xml or .html)
Active Inactive A single mail is sent with attached a file of type tarball (.tar) which
contains all the files present in the area File(s) to Send
Inactive Active A mail is sent for each file present in the area File(s) to Send. Each
file is compressed with method gzip (.gz)
Active Active A single mail is sent with attached a file of type tarball compressed
with method gzip (.gz)
9. Press Send.
NMS5LX 6.4.8 - MN.00272.E - 001 360

Function XML Export (more information)
The function XML Export allows saving the complete configuration of the equipment managed by NMS5LX
into a file in XML (eXtensible Markup Language) format.
Equipment supporting the function XML Export
The types of equipment this function are:

• ALFO
• ALS series equipment (AL, ALC, ALS, ALS-C, ALplus, ALCplus, ALplus2, ALCplus2)
Data saved in XML file
In the XML file is saved the complete equipment configuration which consists in the following data:
• Logical address
• IP address (LAN and PPP ports) and Routing Table
• Equipment configuration:
• General parameters: radio protection, IDU type, etc.
• Radio parameters.
• Switch Ethernet parameters.
• Parameters of Tributaries (E1, STM1, LAN)
• Cross connections
• User Input
• User Output
• Version of the equipment sw/fw modules and of the WEB LCT software (only for the equipment
supporting it)
• Hardware configuration (Part Number, Serial Number and Hw edition of the equipment units).
Modality of creation of XML files
The saving of the equipment data into a XML file can be manually executed by the user (creation of a single
XML file) or automatically by the system (creation of periodical XML files through the definition of cronjobs).
Manual saving
In this modality, the user can save in a single XML file:

• The complete configuration of all the equipment managed by NMS5LX, which support the func-
tion XML Export and which are in connected status at the moment of the creation of the file.
• The complete configuration of a group of equipment which are in connected status at the mo-
ment of the creation of the file.
• The complete configuration of a single equipment in connected status.
The saving can be executed in any moment.

For this purpose, a wished name and path can be assigned.
If the XML file contains the data of more equipment, these will be listed in the file in alphabetical order with
respect to the equipment type and, within the equipment type, with respect to the logical address of the
NE.
Automatic saving
The function XML Export manages the periodic saving in XML format of the configuration of all the equip-
ment managed by the NMS5LX system and which support the function XML Export.
The periodic saving is managed and automatically executed by the supervision system.
NMS5LX 6.4.8 - MN.00272.E - 001 361

The only operation required to the user is to define the modality used to execute the periodic saving
through the creation of a cronjob.
Cronjob
The cronjobs are commands executed by a crontab, that is a system command which allows scheduling
the operations to repeat in time.
For the function XML Export, the parameters for the creation of a cronjob are:
• Frequency with which the cronjob must be executed:
• Daily. The user must define the time within the 24 hours when the cronjob must be ex-
ecuted.
For example, if the value 23:45 is set as time, the cronjob will be executed everyday at
23:45.
• Weekly. The user must define the day of the week (monday, tuesday, etc) and the time
when the cronjob must be executed.
For example, if the value Sun is set for the day and 4:22 is set for the time, the cronjob
will be executed every sunday at 4:22.
• Monthly. The user must define the day of the month (1, 2, etc) and the time when the
cronjob must be executed.
For example, if the value 1 is set for the day and 4:42 is set for the time, the cronjob will
be executed every sunday at 4:42 of the first day of every month.
• Type of saving you wish to execute:
• Full Backup. At each saving a single XML file is generated containing the complete con-
figuration of all the equipment.
At each saving the new file will overwrite the previous one.
• Differential Backup. A XML file is generated for every equipment (supporting the func-
tion XML Export) which is connected status at the moment of the saving.
For each equipment, the complete equipment configuration is saved in the first file gen-
erated after the creation of the relevant cronjob.
At every next saving, the system will check if the equipment configuration is changed
with respect to the previous one. If this:
• Is changed, a new file is generated which will overwrite the previous one. In the
new file, the differences (changes, deletions, additions) with respect to the previ-
ous configuration will be marked by the field Status*.
• Is not changed, the file is not generated; the previous file remains valid and avail-
able.
• Incremental Backup. A single XML file is generated with all the equipment (supporting
the function XML Export) which is in connected status at the moment of the saving.
The complete equipment configuration is saved in the first file generated after the crea-
tion of the relevant cronjob.
At every next saving, the system will check if the equipment configuration is changed
with respect to the previous one. If this:
• Is changed, a new file is generated which will overwrite the previous one. In the
new file, the differences (changes, deletions, additions) with respect to the previ-
ous configuration will be marked by the field Status*.
• Is not changed, the file is not generated; the previous file remains valid and avail-
able.
For the XML containing the data of more equipment, the data will be listed in the file in alpha-
betical order with respect to the equipment type and, within the equipment type, with respect
to the logical address of the NE.
* In files of type Differential Backup and Incremental Backup, the differences will be highlighted
by the Status field which, depending on the type of executed change, will assume the value:
• Modified. Change of configuration
• Not present. Deletion of a NE
• Present. Addition of a NE
• Path where the files must be saved.
NMS5LX 6.4.8 - MN.00272.E - 001 362

The system proposes a default path. It is suggested to set a different path for each type of sav-
ing. Moreover, even for the same type of saving, it is suggested to create a new directory for
every new cronjob.
Once the cronjob is defined, it will start saving the files. To stop the operation, it is necessary to delete the
cronjob.
Saving the XML files generated by cronjobs
All the XML files automatically generated by cronjobs are saved in the directory set by the user for the
relevant cronjob. Default: /opt/nms5ux/tools/nmsConfigDataExport/Backup.
The file is automatically assigned a name which, depending on the type of saving set for the relevant cron-
job, has the following format:
• Type Full Backup. The name FullBackup.xml is assigned to every generated file.
• Type Differential Backup. The name format is: NMS5_<hostname>_<ID NE>.xml
• Type Incremental Backup.
For the first generated file, after the creation of the relevant cronjob, the name format is:
NMS5_<hostname>_Full_<date>_<time>.xml
For the files generated later, after the detection of changes in the equipment configuration, the
name format is: NMS5_<hostname>_Incr_<date>_<time>.xml
where <hostname> points out the name of the server where NMS5LX is running.
<date> and <time> correspond to the moment when the XML file has been saved and are pointed out in
the following format: YYMMDD_HHMM (for example 20100509_1310 means 9 may 2010 time 13:10).
Log File
When a XML file is created (manually or automatically), the relevant log file is automatically created where
are stored the actions executed by the user or by the cronjob.
The log file are saved in the directory /opt/nms5ux/tools/nmsConfigDataExport/log.
A name with the following format is assigned to the log file:

nmsConfigDataExport_<day>_<month>_<year>_<time>_<minute>_<second>.log
Where date and time correspond to the moment when the relevant XML file has been generated.
Management of XML files
The function XML Export is provided with a series of commands for the management of XML files which
allow to:
• Display the list of the XML file present in a given directory.

• Display the list of the Log files relevant to the creation of XML files
• Convert a XML file into a file in HTML format.
• Display the list of the HTML files obtained from the conversion of XML files.
• Display the content of a file (.log, .xml or .html).
• Delete one or more files (.log, .xml or .html).
• Send an email with one or more files attached (.log, .xml or .html)
NMS5LX 6.4.8 - MN.00272.E - 001 363

OPTIONS
The Options menu contains the following commands:
• Network Severity Code (pag.365). It displays/manages the network severity level associated
to the alarms of an equipment type.
• Equipment Severity Code (pag.367). It displays/manages the alarm status, the sending sta-
tus of the traps and the local severity level of the alarms of an equipment.
• NMS5LX System Users (pag.370). It displays/manages the NMS5UX users.
• NMS5LX Logged Users (pag.376). It displays the list of the NMS5UX users connected to the
supervision system and the list of active application (browser, manager, etc.).
• LCT Equipment Users (pag.382). It manages/displays the LCT users list of an equipment.
• LCT Logged Users (pag.385). It displays the list of the users (LCT and NMS5UX) connected to
an equipment. It forces the disconnection (logout) of one or more users.
• Remote Element Table (pag.387). It manages/displays the remote equipment list of an equip-
ment.
• NE Sw/Fw Download (pag.396). It updates the software of one or more equipment.
• Scheduled Sw Dwl Status (pag.400). It displays the list of the equipment scheduled for the
software updating.
• NE Sw/Fw Release (pag.406). It displays the software version of an equipment.
• FAMxc-NE Sw/Fw Download (pag.409). It updates the software of one or more FAMxc.
• FAMxc-Scheduled Sw Dwl Status (pag.411). It displays the list of the FAMxc scheduled for
the software updating.
• FAMxc-NE Sw/Fw Release (pag.413). It displays the software version of a FAMxc.
NMS5LX 6.4.8 - MN.00272.E - 001 364

NETWORK SEVERITY CODE

The Network Severity Code command displays/manages the network severity level associated to the
alarms of an equipment type.
• To verify the network severity of the alarms relevant to a specific equipment type (pag.365)
• To modify the network severity of the alarms relevant to a specific equipment type (pag.366)
For more info about the network severity level go to pag.116.
To verify the network severity of the alarms relevant to a specific equipment

type
1. Select the Options > Network Severity Code command.

The Siae Events Manager window opens.
2. Select the type of equipment in the Equipment area.

The area below displays the detail of the alarms and the relevant severity as described in Fig.64.
The alarms of the user inputs, which have a different severity management (see pag.116), are not
present in the list.
Fig.64 Siae Events Manager window
Menu
bar (1)
Type of NEs
managed by
NMS5LX
system
Alarms that
characterize
the type of
selected NE
(2)
Fig.64 notes
(1) Menu:
• Action > Apply Changes. It confirms the modification to the level of alarm severity.
NMS5LX 6.4.8 - MN.00272.E - 001 365

(2) For each alarm, the following columns point out:

• Object. Name of the logic group which the alarm belongs to.
The asterisk (*) points out that the severity level of the alarm has been modified and not
definitive yet.
• Event Name. Name of the alarm.
• Severity. Severity level currently associated to the alarm.
• Default. Default severity level associated to the alarm.
• New. Severity level selected during the modification of the value.
To modify the network severity of the alarms relevant to a specific equip-

ment type
The modification of the severity level associated to an alarm is COMMON to all the NEs of the same type.
1. Select the Options > Network Severity Code command.

The Siae Events Manager window opens (Fig.64).
2. Select the type of equipment in the Equipment area.
3. In the area below, double click on the alarm.

The Modify Event window opens. Box:
• Category. Type of NE.
• Trap ID. Identifying code of the trap associated to the alarm.
• Event Name. Name of the alarm.
• Severity. Severity level of the alarm.
4. Select the Severity box and choose the new severity level from the list.
The value of the Category, Trap ID and Event Name parameters cannot be modified.
Pressing Default, the current setting is restored.
5. Press OK.
The new severity level is pointed out in the New column of the Siae Events Manager window.
6. Select the Action > Apply Changes command.

The new value is removed from the New column and displayed in the Severity column.
The network severity level is not communicated to the NE as the new setting influences only the alarm
indication in the NMS5LX supervision system.
NMS5LX 6.4.8 - MN.00272.E - 001 366

EQUIPMENT SEVERITY CODE

The Equipment Severity Code command displays/manages the alarm status, the sending status of the
traps and the local severity level of the alarms of an equipment.
• To verify the alarms characteristics (status, sending status of the trap, local severity) of an
equipment (pag.367)
• To enable/disable the alarms and to send of the traps and/or to modify the local severity of the
alarms of an equipment (pag.368)
The command is available only if a single equipment in connected status has been selected, except for
the ELFO, SDH N+1, FAMxc, ALplus Node and ALCplus2 Node.
(pag.48/pag.49).
For more info about the:

• Enabling/disabling of the alarms go to pag.118.
• Alarm severity go to pag.116.
To verify the alarms characteristics (status, sending status of the trap, local
severity) of an equipment
2. Select the Options > Equipment Severity Code command.

The Equipment Severity Code window opens, where the list of the alarms relevant the selected equip-
ment is displayed.
For each alarm, the status (enabled/disabled), the sending status of the relevant trap from the NE to
the NMS5LX system and the local severity level are specified (Fig.65).
The alarms of the user inputs, which have a different severity management (see pag.116), are not
present in the list.
Fig.65 Equipment Severity Code window
Menu
bar (1)
The selected
push-button
points out the
criteria used
to list the
alarms (2)
List of
alarms
(3)
Status
bar (4)
NMS5LX 6.4.8 - MN.00272.E - 001 367

Fig.65 notes
(1) Menu:
• Action > View/Modify Severity. It displays and modifies the enabling status of alarm/trap
sending and/or the severity level associated to the selected alarm.
• View > Filter. It filters the list according to specific criteria.
(2) Option:
• Description, sorts the list according to the name of the alarm.
• Object, sorts the list according to the object which the alarm is associated to.
• Status, sorts the list according to the status of the alarms and of the traps.
(3) For each alarm, the column reports:

• Object. Name of the object (that represents one or more physical or logical parts of the NE)
which the alarm is associated to.
• Status. Status of the alarm and of the trap sending by the NE to the system:
• Enabled. The alarm and the sending of trap is enabled.
• Trap Disabled. The sending of trap is disabled.
• Alarm Disabled. The alarm is disabled.
The information present in the window corresponds to the status of the alarm in the moment when
the command or the refresh is executed.
(4) Field:
• xx of yy. Number of displayed records (xx) and number of total records (yy). If they are not
active filters, the number of displayed records corresponds to the total number of records.
• Customer Id. Logic address of the selected NE.
To enable/disable the alarms and to send of the traps and/or to modify the
local severity of the alarms of an equipment

The Equipment Severity Code window opens (Fig.65).
3. Double click on the wished alarm or select the alarm and then the Action > View/Modify Severity
command.
The View/Modify Severity Code window opens, where it is pointed out in the box/area:
• Status. Status of the alarm and of the trap sending by the NE to the system. If active the option:
• Enabled, the alarm and the sending of trap is enabled.
• Trap Disabled, the sending of trap is disabled.
• Alarm Disabled, the alarm is disabled.
• Severity. Severity level associated to the alarm.
The label (NMS5LX default) points out the default setting associated to that alarm by the super-
vision system.
NMS5LX 6.4.8 - MN.00272.E - 001 368

4. To modify the enabling status of alarm/trap sending and/or the severity level, select the push-button
relevant to the wished value respectively in the Status and/or Severity area.
If the Alarm Disabled option is selected (Status area) the severity level associated to the alarm can-
not be modified.
5. Press Modify.
The possible modification of the enabling status of alarm/trap sending is pointed out in the Equipment
Severity Code window.

The Equipment Severity Code window opens (Fig.65).
3. Select the View > Filter command.

The activation of each box expands the window displaying a section that contains the options:
• Match Object. Objects which the alarm belongs to.
To set the filter, select the wished object.
• Match Status. Sending status of the trap/alarms. Activating the control box:
• Enabled, the enabled alarms whose trap sending is enabled will be displayed.
• Trap Disabled, the enabled alarms whose trap sending is disabled will be displayed.
• Alarm Disabled, the disabled alarms will be displayed.
It is possible to activate more control boxes at the same time.
The system displays in the Equipment Severity Code window only the records that satisfy the activated
criteria.
In the window, there are also the Clear (it clears the activation of the filters and displays the activation
of the filters and displays the complete list), Cancel (it closes the window and does not execute the
operation) and Help (it opens the on-line manual) push-button.
When the Equipment Severity Code window is closed, the possible activation of the filters is auto-
matically cleared.
NMS5LX 6.4.8 - MN.00272.E - 001 369

NMS5LX SYSTEM USERS
Depending on specific user profile, follow the specific description:
• Entry, Normal, Advanced, Privileged (pag.374)
NMS5LX System Users - Superuser

The NMS5LX System Users command displays/manages the NMS5UX users.

With details for the Superuser it is possible:
• To display the list of the NMS5UX users present in all the existing maps (pag.370)
• To create a new map (pag.371)
• To add a NMS5UX user (pag.371)
• To modify the characteristics of the NMS5UX users (pag.372)
• To delete a NMS5UX user (pag.372)
Only if, for one’s system, the function Manual login to the LX Map Manager window (pag.61) is active,
use the procedure depicted at pag.373 for the creation of a NMS5UX user.
To display the list of the NMS5UX users present in all the existing maps
1. Select the Options > NMS5LX System Users command.

The User Management window opens, where the list of the NMS5UX users present in all the existing
Fig.66 User Management window (Superuser)
Menu
bar (1)
List of
users (2)
Fig.66 notes
(1) Menu:
• Edit > Create Map. It creates a new map.
• Users > Create. It creates a new NMS5UX user.
• Users > Modify. It modifies the characteristics of a NMS5UX user.
NMS5LX 6.4.8 - MN.00272.E - 001 370

• Users > Delete. It deletes a NMS5UX user.
(2) For each user, it is displayed in the column:

• Name. Username of the NMS5UX user.
• Level. Profile of the NMS5UX user: Superuser, Privileged, Advanced, Normal, Entry (pag.57)
• Map name. Name of the map where the NMS5UX user is present.
• User. Linux user whom the NMS5UX user is associated to.
• Expiration time. Expiry date/time of the NMS5UX user (account).
The Not expired wording points out that no expiry date is associated to the user.
• Int. Enabling of the user to use the RAN (Remote Access NMS5UX) application. In detail, if
the symbol * (asterisk) is:
• Present, the user is enabled.
• Absent, the user is not enabled.
• Ring/VLAN. Enabling of the user to open the Ring Manager window (pag.50) and/or VLAN
Manager Map window (pag.51). In detail, if the symbol * (asterisk) is:
• Server. Name of the machine where the NMS5LX system, used by the user, is installed.
To create a new map

The User Management window opens (Fig.66).
2. Select the Edit > Create Map command.
The Create new map window opens.
3. Type in the Map Name box the name of the new map (alphanumeric string of minimum 1 and maximum
20 characters).
4. Press OK.
To add a NMS5UX user

2. Select the Users > Create command.

The Insert new users window opens.
3. Select, in the Operation System Users list, the Linux user whom you wish to associate the new NMS5UX
user.
For each Linux user, it is possible to associate only one NMS5UX user.
The list displays only the Linux users whom no NMS5UX user has been associated yet.
4. The name of the selected Linux user is automatically set in the Login box.
The value cannot be modified.
5. From the Level list, select the push-button relevant to the profile you wish to associate to the new user.
The Superuser option is not available, as it is not possible to create a second user with this profile.
NMS5LX 6.4.8 - MN.00272.E - 001 371

6. Activate the box:
• Internet, if you wish that the new user is acknowledged also by the RAN application.
• Ring/VLAN, if you wish that the new user is acknowledged also by the application:
• Ring Manager and allows then the opening of Ring Manager window (pag.50).
• VLAN Manager and allows then the opening of VLAN Manager Map window (pag.51).
For more information about the application refer to the specific documentation.
7. Define an expiry date for the NMS5UX user (account) in the Expiration data boxes.
A default date is automatically displayed; it is possible to modify it typing the day (Day box), the month
(Month box) and the year (Year box) or it is possible not to associate any date activating the Life time
check box.
The default setting can be modified by the Superuser.
8. Select from the Map list, the map which you wish to associate the user to.
All the available maps are listed.
The name of the selected map is displayed in the Map associate box.
If the user you are creating has Advanced or Privileged profile, it is possible to create a new map. To
execute the operation, it is sufficient to type in the Map associate text field the name of the map (al-
phanumeric string of minimum 1 and maximum 20 characters)
9. Press OK.
The user is added to the list of the User Management window.
The limit of users who can be created is determined by one's codeword.
To modify the characteristics of the NMS5UX users

2. Select the user.

3. Select the Users > Modify command.
The Modify users window opens where the user characteristics are displayed.
4. Make the wished changes.

The modalities for the parameters setting are the same described in the procedure for the creation of
an user.
If the Superuser is selected, the profile cannot be modified.
5. Press OK.
To delete a NMS5UX user

2. Select the user.
The Superuser cannot be deleted.
3. Select the Users > Delete command.

The Deleted users window opens where the user characteristics are displayed.
4. Press OK.
The user is deleted from the list: he cannot use the NMS5LX system anymore.
NMS5LX 6.4.8 - MN.00272.E - 001 372

To add a NMS5UX user (manual login to the LX Map Manager window - active)
The following procedure must be used when the function Manual login to the LX Map Manager window
(pag.61) is active.
In fact, in this condition during the creation of the user, it is possible to assign to the NMS5UX user a name
different with respect to the relevant Linux user.
Moreover, it is necessary to define the password because the password of the Linux user is not automati-
cally assigned to the NMS5UX user.

2. Select the Users > Create command.

The Insert new users window opens.
3. Select, in the Operation System Users list, the Linux user whom you wish to associate the new NMS5UX
user.
For each Linux user, it is possible to associate only one NMS5UX user.
The list displays only the Linux users whom no NMS5UX user has been associated yet.
4. Type, in the Login box, the name of the new user.

The name of the Linux user, selected in the previous step, is automatically displayed; it is possible to
modify it typing in the box an alphanumeric string of minimum 1 and maximum 20 characters.
5. From the Level list, select the push-button relevant to the profile you wish to associate to the new user.
The Superuser option is not available, as it is not possible to create a second user with this profile.
6. Activate the box:
• Internet, if you wish that the new user is acknowledged also by the RAN application.
• Ring/VLAN, if you wish that the new user is acknowledged also by the application:
• Ring Manager and then allows the opening of the Ring Manager window (pag.50).
• VLAN Manager and then allows the opening of the VLAN Manager Map window (pag.51).
For more information about the application refer to the specific documentation.
7. Define an expiry date for the NMS5UX user (account) in the Expiration data boxes.
A default date is automatically displayed; it is possible to modify it typing the day (Day box), the month
(Month box) and the year (Year box) or it is possible not to associate any date activating the Life time
check box.
The default setting can be modified by the Superuser.
8. In the Write box (Password area) type the access code you wish to assign to the new user (alphanu-
meric string of minimum 6 and maximum 21 characters).
9. In the Rewrite box, type again the access code

For safety reason, in both the text fields an asterisk (*) is displayed for each typed character.
10.Select from the Map list, the map which you wish to associate the user to.
All the available maps are listed.
The name of the selected map is displayed in the Map associate box.
If the user you are creating has Advanced or Privileged profile, it is possible to create a new map.
To execute the operation, it is sufficient to type in the Map associate text field the name of the map
(alphanumeric string of minimum 1 and maximum 20 characters)
11.Press OK.
The user is added to the list of the User Management window.
The limit of users who can be created is determined by one's codeword.
NMS5LX 6.4.8 - MN.00272.E - 001 373

NMS5LX System Users - Entry, Normal, Advanced, Privileged user

User profile Entry, Normal, Advanced, Privileged
The NMS5LX System Users command displays/manages the NMS5UX users.

With details for the user with entry, normal, advanced and privileged profile it is possible:
• To display the characteristics of the user who opened the map (pag.374)
The following operation is available only if for one’s system the function of Manual login to the LX Map
Manager window (pag.61) is active.
In this condition, the password can be changed because the password of the Linux user is not automatically
assigned to the NMS5UX user.
• To modify the password associated to one’s NMS5UX users (pag.375)
To display the characteristics of the user who opened the map

The User Management window opens, where the characteristics of the user who opened the map is dis-
played (Fig.67).
Fig.67 User Management window (Entry, Normal, Advanced, Privileged)
Menu
bar (1)
User
characteristics
(2)
Fig.67 notes
(1) Menu:
• Users > Modify. It modifies the password of the NMS5UX user.
(2) Column:
• Name. Username of the NMS5UX user.
• Level. Profile of the NMS5UX user: Privileged, Advanced, Normal, Entry (pag.57)
• Map name. Name of the map.
• User. Linux user whom the NMS5UX user is associated to.
• Expiration time. Expiry date/time of the NMS5UX user (account).
The Not expired label points out that no expiry date is associated to the user.
• Int. Enabling of the user to use the RAN (Remote Access NMS5UX) application. In detail, if
the symbol * (asterisk) is:
NMS5LX 6.4.8 - MN.00272.E - 001 374

• Ring/VLAN. Enabling of the user to open the Ring Manager window (pag.50) and/or VLAN
Manager Map window (pag.51). In detail, if the symbol * (asterisk) is:
• Server. Name of the machine where the NMS5LX system, used by the user, is installed.
To modify the password associated to one's NMS5UX user
Operation available only if for one’s system the function Manual login to the LX Map Manager window
(pag.61) is active.

2. Select the record relevant to one's user.
3. Select the Users > Modify command.

The Modify users window opens.
4. In the Write box (Password area) type the new access code (alphanumeric string of minimum 6 and
maximum 21 characters).
5. In the Rewrite box, type again the access code.

For safety reason, in both the text fields an asterisk (*) is displayed for each typed character.
6. Press OK.
NMS5LX 6.4.8 - MN.00272.E - 001 375

NMS5LX LOGGED USERS

User profile Entry*, Normal*, Advanced*, Privileged*, Superuser
* The Entry, Normal, Advanced or Privileged user cannot force the user logout or the application closure.
The NMS5LX Logged Users command displays the list of the NMS5UX users connected to the supervision
system and the list of active application (browser, manager, etc.).
• To display the list of the NMS5UX users who have a map open (pag.376)
• To require the disconnection (logout) of a NMS5UX user (pag.377)
• To force the disconnection (logout) of a NMS5UX user (pag.378)
• To send a message to one or all the NMS5UX users (pag.378)
• To filter the NMS5UX users list (pag.378)
• To display the list of the active NMS5LX application (pag.379)
• To require the closure of a NMS5LX application (pag.380)
• To force the closure of a NMS5LX application (pag.380)
• To filter the NMS5LX applications list (pag.381)
To display the list of the NMS5UX users who have a map open
1. Select the Options > NMS5LX Logged Users command.

The Nms5lx: Logged Users window opens.
2. Select the View Logged Users option.
The window displays the user having a map open (Fig.68).
Fig.68 Nms5lx Logged Users window (users list)
Menu
bar (1)
The selected
option points
out the type
of the data
displayed in
the table (2)
List of the
users (3)
Number of
displayed records
with respect to
the total number
Fig.68 notes
(1) Menu:
• Action > Request Logout. It requires the disconnection of the selected user.
NMS5LX 6.4.8 - MN.00272.E - 001 376

• Action > Force Logout. It forces the disconnection of the selected user in Running status.
• Action > Send Message. It sends a message to the selected user or to all the users in Running
status.
• Action > Request Exit. Not available/meaning when the user list is displayed.
• Action > Forced Exit. Not available/meaning when the user list is displayed.
• Action > Refresh Info. It updates the information displayed in the window.
(2) The list (users and applications) are not displayed contemporarily in the window. They are displayed
alternatively according to the selected option:
• View Logged Users. In the windows there is the users list.
• View Running Application. In the windows there is the applications list.
(3) For each user the column displays:

• Time. Date and time when the user has connected to the system (opening of the LX Map
Manager window).
• User Name. Name of the user.
• Map. Name of the map used by the user.
• Permission. Type of access to the map: Read Only, Read/Write.
• Terminal. Address of the terminal where the NMS5LX interface, used by the user, is running.
• Server. Name of the machine where the NMS5LX system is installed.
• Status. Status of the user. In detail, the wording:
• Running. The user has been registered by the NMS5LX system (normal operating sta-
tus of the user).
• Out of NMS5UX. The user has opened the TMNMenu or Login window, but he has not
executed the login yet for the access to NMS5LX (transient status of the user).
For the users in Running status, the information present in the table are dynamically updat-
ed. For the users in Out of NMS5UX status it is necessary to require the updating pressing
Refresh Info.
To require the disconnection (logout) of a NMS5UX user


The window displays the connected users (Fig.68).
3. Select the user you wish to disconnect.
4. Select the Action > Request Logout command.

In the map opened by the selected user (user B), a confirmation window opens where it is indicated
that the user … (user A) has required his disconnection.
In the confirmation window, there are the OK and Cancel push-buttons.
If the user B, within 30 seconds from the closure of the window, press:
• OK, agrees the request. The screen of the user A displays a message which informs that the
user B has been disconnected.
• Cancel, it does not agree the request. The screen of the user A displays a message which in-
forms that the user B has not agreed to his disconnection from the system.
If the user B, within 30 seconds from the opening of the window, does not press any of the two push-
buttons, the system, according to the operating level of the user which sent the request (user A), acts
as follows:
• Operating level of the user A equal of higher than that of the user B.
The user is automatically disconnected.
• Operating level of the user A lower that of the user B.
NMS5LX 6.4.8 - MN.00272.E - 001 377

The user is not disconnected.
In both cases, the screen of the user A displays a message that points out the result of the operation.
If the result of the operation is the disconnection of the selected user (user B), this involves the removal
of the user from the list and the automatic closure of the relevant map (closure of the NMS5LX graphic
interface).
To force the disconnection (logout) of a NMS5UX user
The operation can be executed only by Superuser.


4. Select the command Action > Forced Logout.

The user is removed from the list and the relevant map is automatically closed (closure of the NMS5LX
graphic interface).
To send a message to one or all the NMS5UX users


3. Select the user you wish to send a message to.
4. Select the Action > Send Message command.

The Send Broadcast Message window opens.

• Selected Users, to send the message only to the selected user.
• Broadcast, to send a message to all the users present in the list.
6. Type the message in the available text area (alphanumeric string of maximum 150 characters).
7. Press Send Message.

The video of the users, whom the message has been sent to, displays the window with the following
text Message from <user>: <text of the message>.
To filter the NMS5UX users list



The Running Process Filter window opens.
NMS5LX 6.4.8 - MN.00272.E - 001 378

• User Name. NMS5UX user.
To set the filter, select the name of the wished user.
• Map Name. Map which the NMS5UX user is associated to.
To set the filter, select the wished map.
4. Press OK (executes the command and closes the window) or Apply (executes the command and does
not close the window).
The system displays in the Nms5lx: Logged Users window only the records that satisfy the activated
criteria.
In the window there are also the Clear (it clears the activation of the filters and displays the complete
list) and Cancel (it closes the window and does not executes the operation) push-buttons.
When the Nms5lx: Logged Users window is closed, the possible activation of filters is automatically
cleared.
To display the list of the active NMS5LX applications

2. Select the View Running Application option.
The window displays the NMS5LX system applications (manager, browser, etc.) active when the com-
mand is selected (Fig.69).
Fig.69 Nms5lx Logged Users window (applications list)
Menu
bar (1)
The selected
option points
out the type
of the data
displayed in
the table (2)
List of the
application (3)
Number of
displayed records
with respect to
the total number
Fig.69 notes
(1) Menu:
• Action > Request Logout. Not available/meaningful when the application list is selected.
• Action > Force Logout. Not available/meaningful when the application list is selected.
• Action > Send Message. Not available/meaningful when the application list is selected.
• Action > Request Exit. It requires the closure of the selected application.
• Action > Forced Exit. It forces the closure of the selected application.
• Action > Refresh Info. It updates the information displayed in the window.
NMS5LX 6.4.8 - MN.00272.E - 001 379

(2) The list (users and applications) are not displayed contemporarily in the window. They are displayed
alternatively according to the selected option:
• View Logged Users. In the windows there is the users list.
• View Running Application. In the windows there is the applications list.
(3) For each application the column displays:

• Application Name. Name of the running application.
• Logical Addr. Logic and physical address of the equipment, which the relevant equipment
window has been opened for (information valid only for the Manager application).
• User Name. Name of the NMS5UX user who are using the operation.
• Map Name. Name of the map that the user is using.
• Terminal. Address of the terminal where the NMS5LX interface used by the user is running.
• Server. Name of the machine where the NMS5LX system is installed.
The information present in the table corresponds to the applications running when the command is
selected or the refresh is executed.
To require the closure of an NMS5LX application


The window displays the open applications (Fig.69).
3. Select the application you wish to close.
4. Select the Action > Request Exit command.

In the map where the application is opened (user B), a confirmation window opens where it is indicated
that the user … (user A) has required the closure of the application yyy.
In the confirmation window, there are the OK and Cancel push-buttons.
If the user B, within 30 seconds from the opening of the window, press the push-button:
• OK, agrees to close the application. The screen of the user A displays a message which informs
that the application of the user B has been closed.
• Cancel, it does not agree to close the application. The screen of the user A displays a message
which informs that the user B has not agreed to close the application.
If the user B, within 30 sec. from the opening of the window, does not press any of the two buttons,
the system, according to the operating level of the user which sent the request (user A), acts as follows:
• Operating level of the user A equal of higher than that of the user B.
The application is automatically closed.
• Operating level of the user A lower that of the user B.
The application is not automatically closed.
In both cases, the screen of the user A displays a message that points out the result of the operation.
To force the closure of an NMS5LX application
The operation can be executed only by Superuser.

NMS5LX 6.4.8 - MN.00272.E - 001 380

3. Select the application you wish to close.
4. Select the Action > Forced Exit command.

The application is deleted from the list.
To filter the NMS5LX applications list



The Running Process Filter window opens.
• Application Name. Group or single application.
To set the filter:
• In the Application Group area, select the wished group.
In the Application Name area the application associated to the group are listed.
• Select the wished application.
If no application is selected in the Nms5lx: Logged Users window, the records relevant
to all the applications in the group will be displayed.
The groups where the applications are grouped are:
• Application, browser (for example, Alarm history, Current Alarm, etc.) and various appli-
cations (for example Software Download, etc.).
• Manager, equipment Manager applications.
• User Name. NMS5UX user.
To set the filter, select the name of the wished user.
• Map Name. Map which the NMS5UX user is associated to.
To set the filter, select the wished map.
The system displays in the Nms5lx: Logged Users window only the records that satisfy the activated
criteria.
In the window there are also the Clear (it clears the activation of the filters and displays the complete
list) and Cancel (it closes the window and does not executes the operation) push-buttons.
When the Nms5lx: Logged Users window is closed, the possible activation of filters is automatically
cleared.
NMS5LX 6.4.8 - MN.00272.E - 001 381

LCT EQUIPMENT USERS

The LCT Equipment Users command manages/displays the LCT users list of an equipment.
• To display the LCT users list of an equipment (pag.382)
• To add a new LCT user (pag.383)
• To modify the characteristics of the LCT users (pag.384)
• To delete a LCT user (pag.384)
The command is available only if it has been selected a single equipment in connected status, except
for the ELFO, SDH N+1, FAMxc, ALFO, ALplus Node and ALCplus2 Node.
(pag.48/pag.49).
For more information about the users list go to pag.384.
To display the LCT users list of an equipment

2. Select the Options > LCT Equipment Users command.
The LCT User Manager window opens, where the LCT user list of the equipment is displayed (Fig.70).
Fig.70 LCT User Manager window
List of LCT
users (1)
Push-buttons
bar (2)
Type and
logical
address
of the
selected NE
Fig.70 notes
(1) For each user, it is reported in the column:

• User Name. Name of the LCT user.
• Profile. Profile of the LCT user:
• Read only. This user can check the parameters but it can not forward commands or
execute changing to the equipment configuration.
NMS5LX 6.4.8 - MN.00272.E - 001 382

• Read and Write. This user can check the parameters and execute maintenance oper-
ations (MAN OP).
• Station Operator. This user can as check the parameters as send commands or exe-
cute changes to the equipment configuration except for the following operations:
modifying the remote equipment list, the user list, aligning the date/time of the
equipment, force the login and the logout of an user and all those operations available
only to the System user (or NMS5UX).
The System and NMS5UX users are not pointed out into the LCT User Manager window.
• Timeout. Status of the Timeout option. Wording:
• No timeout. The option is disabled: the user is not automatically disconnected after a
given period of time.
• <number>. The option is enabled: the user, if the program does not execute opera-
tion, is disconnected after the indicated period of time.
(2) Push-button:
• Add User. It adds a LCT user.
• Modify User. It modifies the characteristics of the selected LCT user.
• Remove User. It deletes a LCT user.
• Refresh. It updates the information contained in the window.
• Close. It closes the window.
To add a new LCT user
It is possible to define in each list a maximum of 4 users for each profile (totally maximum 12 users).

3. Press Add User.
The User Management window opens.
4. Type in the User box the name of the user (alphanumeric string of minimum 1 and maximum 8 char-
acters).
It is not possible to assign the same name to two different users present in the same list. Further-
more, the name of the user, once assigned, cannot be modified later.
5. Type in the Password box the access code of the user (alphanumeric string of minimum 1 and maximum
8 characters).
6. Type again in the Confirm Password box the access code of the user.
7. In the Timeout area select the option:

• Timeout if you wish that the user, if he does not execute any operation, is disconnected after
the period of time set in the box Sec.
To modify the period of time, activate the Sec. box and type a value between 1 second and
43200 seconds (12h).
• No timeout if you wish that the user is not automatically disconnected after a given period of
time.
8. In the Profile area, select the option relevant to the profile you wish to assign to the user:
• Read only. This user can check the parameters but it can not forward commands or execute
changing to the equipment configuration.
• Read and Write. This user can check the parameters and execute maintenance operations (MAN
OP).
• Station Operator. This user can as check the parameters as send commands or execute changes
to the equipment configuration except for the following operations: modifying the remote equip-
ment list, the user list, aligning the date/time of the equipment, force the login and the logout
of an user and all those operations available only to the System user (or NMS5UX).
9. Press Add.
NMS5LX 6.4.8 - MN.00272.E - 001 383

To modify the characteristics of the LCT users

3. Select the user you wish to modify.
4. Press Modify User.

The User Management window opens.
5. Apply the wished changes.

The setting modality of the parameters are the same pointed out for the adding of a new user
(pag.383).
It is not possible to modify the name of the user.
6. Press Modify.
To delete a LCT user

3. Select the user you wish to delete.

4. Press Remove User and confirm.
User list (more info)
The users list is a list of users that can be connected and ask for the login to the equipment.
If a user is not present into the users list memorized into the controller on an equipment, such an user will
not be able to connect and/or to execute the login of that equipment.
With the exception of the System and NMS5UX users, all the other users of the users list relevant to an
equipment have to be set by the NMS5LX system (see pag.383), the SCT/LMT or WEB LCT applications.
Each equipment (managed by the WEB LCT or SCT/LMT), is equipped with two predefined users:
• SYSTEM. User of the WEB LCT or SCT/LMT application with the following features:
• User name > System (unchangeable parameter).
• Timeout* > No Timeout (changeable parameter).
• Profile > System (unchangeable parameter)
• Password > Siaemicr (default) (changeable parameter)
The System user is single one for every equipment and he can not be deleted.
• NMS5UX. User of the NMS5LX system, with the following features:
• User name > NMS5UX (unchangeable parameter).
• Timeout* > No Timeout (changeable parameter).
• Profile > System (unchangeable parameter)
• Password > Predefined (changeable parameter)
The NMS5UX user can not be deleted.
The password and the timeout of the predefined users can be changed only with the local management
programs (SCT/LMT, WEB LCT).
* Timeout. Time period when, if the program does not execute operations, its connection is automatically
stopped. The program manages a polling process to verify the presence of the LCT-equipment connection.
If the equipment does not answer to the polling for the set period (timeout), the user is disconnected and,
as consequence, also the equipment is disconnected.
NMS5LX 6.4.8 - MN.00272.E - 001 384

LCT LOGGED USERS

* The Entry or Normal user cannot force the user logout.
The LCT Logged Users command displays the list of the users (LCT and NMS5UX) connected to an equip-
ment.
• To display the list of the users (LCT and NMS5UX) connected to an equipment (pag.385)
• To force the disconnection (logout) of one user (pag.386)
for the ELFO, SDH N+1, FAMxc, ALplus Node and ALCplus2 Node.
For the NEs of ALplus Node or ALCplus2 Node type, the command is present in the nodal window (pag.48/
pag.49).
For more info about the users (LCT and NMS5UX) go to pag.386
To display the list of the users (LCT and NMS5UX) connected to an equip-
ment

2. Select the Options > LCT Logged Users command.
The Logged Users window opens, where the list of the users (LCT and NMS5UX) connected to the NE
when the command is selected is displayed (Fig.71).
Fig.71 Logged Users window
Menu
bar (1)
List of LCT
users (2)
Type and logical

address of
the selected NE
Fig.71 notes
(1) For each user, it is reported in the column:

• User Name. Name of the user.
The NMS5UX wording identifies the user of the NMS5LX system or a remote user (different
from LCT or NMS5UX user) who has the possibility to be connected to the equipment (Per-
manent Login). The other ones identify the LCT users.
NMS5LX 6.4.8 - MN.00272.E - 001 385

• Profile. User profile.
For the NMS5UX user, the relevant profile used in the NMS5LX interface is not displayed
(Level parameter), but the profile with which the user is acknowledged by the controller of
the equipment and by the SCT or WEB LCT program: System profile.
• Ip Address. IP address of the machine where the SCT/LMT or WEB LCT program is running
or the NMS5LX interface used by the user.
The information present in the table corresponds to the characteristics of the users connected to
the equipment when the command is selected or the refresh is executed.
(2) Menu:
• Action > Force Logout. It forces the disconnection of the selected user.
To force the disconnection (logout) of a LCT user
If the logout of a NMS5UX user is forced, the supervision system provides to automatically restore the
connection of the user.
It is possible to force the disconnection of an user even by means of the commands present in the equip-
ment window.
2. Select the Options > LCT Logged Users command.

The Logged Users window opens (Fig.71).
4. Select the Action > Forced Logout command and confirm.

LCT and NMS5UX users (more info)
LCT user
User connected to the equipment via the SCT/LMT or WEB LCT management program.
NMS5UX user
User connected to the equipment via NMS5LX system (see pag.52).
All the NMS5UX users who connect to an equipment, independently from their username/profile by which
are known by the supervision system, are seen by the equipment controller as users with username
NMS5UX and profile System.
NMS5LX 6.4.8 - MN.00272.E - 001 386

REMOTE ELEMENT TABLE

The Remote Element Table command manages/displays the remote equipment list of an equipment.
• To display the remote equipment list of an equipment (pag.387)
• To add a station to the remote equipment list (pag.388)
• To rename a station of the remote equipment list (pag.389)
• To delete a station from the remote equipment list (pag.389)
• To add an equipment to the remote equipment list (pag.389)
• To add more equipment at the same type to the remote equipment list (pag.390)
• To modify the characteristics of an equipment of the remote equipment list (pag.391)
• To delete an equipment from the remote equipment list (pag.392)
• To move an equipment within the remote equipment list (pag.392)
• To save to a file the remote equipment list (pag.393)
• To restore from file the remote equipment list (pag.393)
for the ELFO, SDH N+1, FAMxc, ALplus Node and ALCplus2 Node.
pag.49).
The ALFO equipment automatically generates the remote equipment list inserting all the equipment be-
longing to the same radio link. Then, for this equipment, the remote equipment list can be displayed but
not modified.
For more information about the remote equipment list go to pag.393.
To display the remote equipment list of an equipment
2. Select the Options > Remote Element Table command.

The Remote Element Table window opens, where the remote equipment list stored in the equipment
controller of the selected equipment is displayed (Fig.72).
Fig.72 Remote Element Table window
Menu
bar (1)
Station (2)
Equipment
belonging
to the
station (3)
NMS5LX 6.4.8 - MN.00272.E - 001 387

Fig.72 notes
(1) Menu:
• File > Load from file. It restores the remote equipment list from file.
• File > Save to file. It saves the remote equipment list to file.
• Edit > Add > Station. It adds a station.
• Edit > Add > Single Element. It adds an equipment.
• Edit > Add > Multiple Element. It adds more equipment at the same time.
• Edit > Remove > Station. It deletes the station.
• Edit > Remove > Element. It deletes an equipment.
• Edit > Modify > Station. It modifies the name of the station.
• Edit > Modify > Element. It modifies the characteristics of an equipment.
• Edit > Exchange > Before. It moves an equipment over the previous one.
• Edit > Exchange > After. It moves an equipment under the next one.
• Edit > Move to station. It moves an equipment from a station to another one.
(2) For each station, the Station/... column reports the name of the station.
No particular meaning is given to the station; it is simply introduced to help the user in the locali-
zation of the equipment.
(3) For each equipment, it is reported in the column:

• .../Equipment. Name of the equipment.
The program automatically assigns the equipment name during the creation of the NE itself.
The name of the equipment, present in the remote equipment list, is not displayed in the
map below the relevant symbol. In the map the equipment name, assigned by the user dur-
ing the creation of the symbol, is pointed out.
• IP Address. IP address (SNMP agent) of the equipment.
• Element Type. Type of equipment:
• Managed by SCT. Equipment managed by the SCT/LMT or WEB LCT program.
• Remote link. Equipment managed by the SCT/LMT or WEB LCT program that consti-
tutes the equipment placed on the other end of the radio connection with respect to
the local equipment (equipment which the user has required the connection to).
• Element Manager. Element Manager of the equipment (IP address of the machine
where the NMS5LX system resides).
• Not Managed. Element not managed by SCT/LMT or WEB LCT. This option can be used
to insert into the remote equipment list some information.
• Node X. Equipment belonging to the ALplus or ALCplus2 local node.
With ALplus local node we mean a set of minimum 2 and maximum 3 equipment (AL-
plus - Nodal Matrix) interconnected by nodal bus, where the considered equipment is
an element. In this case the value X can correspond to A, B or C and points out the
subset.
With ALCplus2 local node we mean a set of minimum 2 and maximum 8 equipment
(ALCplus2) interconnected by a Nodal Bus (TDM traffic) and/or by LAN (Ethernet traf-
fic), where the considered equipment is an element. In this case the value X can cor-
respond to a number between 1 and 8 and points out the subset.
• Gosip Address. Parameter not managed.
To add a station to the remote equipment list
It is possible to insert a maximum of 30 stations in the list.

The Remote Element Table window opens (Fig.72).
3. Select the Edit > Add > Station command.

The Add New Station window opens.
NMS5LX 6.4.8 - MN.00272.E - 001 388

4. Type, in the text field, the name you wish to assign to the station (alphanumeric string of minimum 1
and maximum 11 characters).
It is not possible to assign the same name to two different stations. Moreover, a number or a blank
cannot be used as first character of the name.
5. Press Ok.
The new station is added at the bottom of the list of already existing station.
6. Press Apply and then confirm.

The list is stored in the controller of the equipment.
To rename a station of the remote equipment list

3. Select the station you wish to rename.
4. Select the Edit > Modify > Station command.

The Modify Station window opens.
5. Type, in the text field, the new name (alphanumeric string of minimum 1 and maximum 11 characters).
It is not possible to assign the same name to two different stations. Moreover, a number or a blank
cannot be used as first character of the name.
6. Press Ok.
The name of the station is modified.

The list is stored in the controller of the equipment
To delete a station from the remote equipment list

3. Select the station you wish to delete.

The deletion of the station causes also the deletion of all the equipment associated to it.
4. Select the Edit > Remove > Station command and confirm.
The station is deleted.

To add an equipment to the remote equipment list
A maximum of 100 equipment can be inserted in the list.

3. Select the station which you wish to associate the equipment to.
NMS5LX 6.4.8 - MN.00272.E - 001 389

An equipment can be associated only to a single station.
4. Select the Edit > Add > Single Element command.

The Add Single Element window opens.
The Apply to station field points out the station which the new equipment will be associated to.
5. Type, in the IP address box, the IP address of the equipment.
It is not possible to create in the same list (even if in different stations) two equipment with the
same IP Address.
6. In the Element Type area, select the option relevant to the type of element you wish to insert:
• Remote link. Equipment managed by the SCT/LMT or WEB LCT program that constitutes the
equipment placed on the other end of the radio connection with respect to the local equipment
(equipment which the user has required the connection to).
• Element Manager/Remote Node. This option has a several meanings according to the type of
equipment you wish to insert:
• ALplus equipment (Nodal Matrix) belonging to a remote ALplus node.
In this case, it will not be necessary to insert in the remote equipment list all the element
of the remote node but, inserting only one element and identifying it with the Remote
Node type, the connection with all the elements of the remote node will be activated at
the connection with the considered equipment. An example is reported to pag.394.
• ALCplus2 equipment belonging to a remote ALCplus2 node.
• All the types of equipment, except for the above mentioned one.
Element Manager of the equipment (IP address of the machine where the NMS5LX sys-
tem resides).
• Not Managed. Element not managed by the SCT/LMT or WEB LCT program. This option can be
used to insert into the remote equipment list some information.
7. Press OK.
Under the selected station, a record named Equipment <progressive number> is displayed, with the
characteristics of the new equipment.

To add more equipment at the same time to the remote equipment list
A maximum of 100 equipment can be inserted in the list.

3. Select the station which you wish to associate the equipment to.
An equipment can be associated only to a single station.
4. Select the Edit > Add > Multiple Element command.

The Add Multiple Element window opens.
The Apply to station field displays the station which the new equipment will be associated to.
Under the field, all the equipment managed by NMS5LX are listed. For each equipment, the IP address
and the logic address are listed in the order.
The list can be filtered:
a. Selecting the Filter… push-button
The Load Equipment window opens.
b. Select one or more boxes, according to the criteria you wish to use.
The activation of each box expands the window displaying a section containing the options:
NMS5LX 6.4.8 - MN.00272.E - 001 390

• Match Logical Address box. Logic address of the NE.
• Match IP Address box. IP address of the NE.
To set the criteria, type the IP Address of the NE in the text field.
• Match connection status box. Status of the connection between the NE and NMS5LX.
To set the criterion, select the push-button relevant to the wished status.
• Match equipment type box. Equipment type.
To set the criterion, select the push-button relevant to the type of wished equipment.
c. Press OK (executes the command and closes the window) or Apply (executes the command and
The table displays only the records that satisfy the activated criteria.
In the window there are also the Clear (it clears the activation of the filters and displays the
complete list) and Cancel (it closes the window and does not executes the operation) buttons.
5. Select the equipment you wish to add to the remote equipment list.
6. In the Element Type area, select the option relevant to the type of elements you wish to insert:
tem resides).
Under the selected station, a record named Equipment <progressive number> is displayed, for each
new equipment.

To modify the characteristics of an equipment of the remote equipment list

3. Select the equipment you wish to modify.
4. Select the Edit > Modify > Element command.

The Modify Element window opens.
The Apply to station field displays the station where the equipment is present.
5. To modify the IP address, type the new value in the IP Address box.
It is not possible to assign to the equipment an IP Address already present in the list.
NMS5LX 6.4.8 - MN.00272.E - 001 391

6. To change the element type, select the desired option into the Element Type area:
tem resides).
7. Press OK.
The characteristics of the equipment are modified according to the new setting.
To delete an equipment from the remote equipment list

3. Select the equipment you wish to delete.
4. Select the Edit > Remove > Element command and confirm.
The equipment is deleted.

To move an equipment within the remote equipment list

3. Select the equipment you wish to move.
4. To move an equipment from a station to the other:

a. Select the Edit > Move to station command.
The Move to station window opens.
b. Select the station where you wish to move the equipment.
c. Press Ok.
The equipment is moved to the selected station.
5. To move an equipment among the list of equipment of a station:
NMS5LX 6.4.8 - MN.00272.E - 001 392

• Press the Edit > Exchange > Before command, to move the equipment over the previous
equipment.
• Press the Edit > Exchange > After command, to move the equipment under the next equip-
ment.

To save to a file the remote equipment list

3. Set or modify the remote equipment list.
4. Press File > Save To File.

The Save to file window opens.
5. Type the name of the file in the proper box (with extension .rel) and set the path where you wish to
save the file.
6. Press OK.
To restore from file the remote equipment list

3. Select the File > Load from File command.

The Load from file window opens.
4. Select the file (with extension .rel) where the wished remote equipment list is stored.
5. Press OK.
In the Remote Element Table window, the remote equipment list is displayed.
Remote equipment list (more info)
Each equipment has a remote equipment list stored in its own controller.
With remote equipment list we mean a list containing all the network remote equipment which you wish
to connect to.
When the user requires the connection to any equipment present in the network (local equipment), the
local management program:
• SCT/LMT reads, at the connection of this equipment, its remote equipment list and automatically
sends the connection command to all the equipment present in the list.
• WEB LCT reads, at the connection of this equipment, its remote equipment list and automatically
sends the connection command to the equipment of type Remote Link, present in the remote
equipment list of the local equipment.
For a better vision of the equipment during the setting of the list, it is possible to subdivide the equipment
into stations. The station does not have any particular meaning; it has been simply introduced to help the
user during the localization of the equipment.
Into each remote equipment list, it is possible to create a maximum of 100 equipment and 30 station.
Besides the remote equipment to be connected, the user can insert into the remote equipment list also the
following information:
• IP address of the machine where the NMS5LX system resides.
NMS5LX 6.4.8 - MN.00272.E - 001 393

Example of definition of a remote ALplus node in the remote equipment list
Suppose to have a network made by two ALplus nodes both of them composed by 3 ALplus equipment
(Nodal Matrix) as depicted in Fig.73.
Fig.73 - Definition of a remote ALplus node in the remote equipment list (example 1)
Equipment 1 Equipment 4
172.18.10.1 172.18.10.4
Equipment 2 Nodal BUS Equipment 3 Equipment 5 Nodal Bus Equipment 6

172.18.10.2 172.18.10.3 172.18.10.5 172.18.10.6
By means of the SCT application the ALplus nodes have been defined: assignment of the station, name of
the node, IP addresses and subset (A, B, C) ad depicted in Fig.74.
To do this, it is sufficient to activate the login with an equipment of the ALplus node and, by means of
the SCT application, to define the characteristics of the equipment composing the node. The program will
automatically configure the characteristics of the ALplus node even in the other two equipment (station,
Equipment ID, Remote Element Table).
Fig.74 - Definition of a remote ALplus node in the remote equipment list (example 2)
Station Name: Milan Station Name: Rome
Node Name: Milan Node Name: Rome
IP: 172.18.10.1 IP: 172.18.10.4
Equip ID: Milan.A Equip ID: Rome.A
Equipment 2 Equipment 3 Equipment 5 Equipment 6

Nodal Nodal
Station Name: Milan Bus Station Name: Milan Station Name: Rome Bus Station Name: Rome
Node Name: Milan Node Name: Milan Node Name: Rome Node Name: Rome
IP: 172.18.10.2 IP: 172.18.10.3 IP: 172.18.10.5 IP: 172.18.10.6
Equip ID: Milan.B Equip ID: Milan.C Equip ID: Rome.B Equip ID: Rome.C
Now, suppose you wish to manage locally, by means of SCT, all the network equipment connecting to
Equipment 1. To do this, the remote equipment list of the Equipment 1 must be configured in the following
way:
1. Create the stations Milan and Rome (pag.388).
2. Create under the station Milan an equipment of the node Milan, for example Equipment 2 assigning to
it as Element Type > Managed by SCT (pag.389).
3. Create under the station Rome an equipment of the node Rome, for example Equipment 4 assigning to
it as Element Type > Element Managed/Remote Node.
4. Save the remote equipment list into the controller of Equipment 1.
At the activation of the connection with Equipment 1, the program will automatically activate the connec-
tion with:
• Equipment 1, Equipment 2 and Equipment 3 in Connected/Login modality.
• Equipment 4, Equipment 5 and Equipment 6 in Connected/Monitor modality.
NMS5LX 6.4.8 - MN.00272.E - 001 394

Example of definition of a remote ALCplus2 node in the remote equipment
list
Suppose to have a network made by two ALCplus2 nodes both of them composed by 3 ALCplus2 equipment
as depicted in Fig.75.
Fig.75 - Definition of a remote ALCplus2 node in the remote equipment list (example 1)
172.18.10.1 172.18.10.4
Nodal Bus/ Nodal Bus/

Equipment 2 LAN Equipment 3 Equipment 5 LAN Equipment 6
172.18.10.2 172.18.10.3 172.18.10.5 172.18.10.6
By means of the SCT application the ALCplus2 nodes have been defined: assignment of the station, name
of the node, IP addresses and subset (1, 2, 3) ad depicted in Fig.76.
To do this, it is sufficient to activate the login with an equipment of the ALCplus2 node and, by means
of the SCT application, to define the characteristics of the equipment composing the node. The program
will automatically configure the characteristics of the ALCplus2 node even in the other two equipment (sta-
tion, Equipment ID, Remote Element Table, etc.).
Fig.76 - Definition of a remote ALCplus2 node in the remote equipment list (example 2)
Station Name: Milan Station Name: Rome
Node Name: Milan Node Name: Rome
IP: 172.18.10.1 IP: 172.18.10.4
Equip ID: Milan.1 Equip ID: Rome.1
Equipment 2 Nodal Bus/ Equipment 3 Equipment 5 Nodal Bus/ Equipment 6

Station Name: Milan LAN Station Name: Milan Station Name: Rome LAN Station Name: Rome
Node Name: Milan Node Name: Milan Node Name: Rome Node Name: Rome
IP: 172.18.10.2 IP: 172.18.10.3 IP: 172.18.10.5 IP: 172.18.10.6
Equip ID: Milan.2 Equip ID: Milan.3 Equip ID: Rome.2 Equip ID: Rome.3
Now, suppose you wish to manage locally, by means of SCT, all the network equipment connecting to
Equipment 1. To do this, the remote equipment list of the Equipment 1 must be configured in the following
way:
1. Create the stations Milan and Rome (pag.388).
2. Create under the station Milan an equipment of the node Milan, for example Equipment 2 assigning to
it as Element Type > Managed by SCT (pag.389).
3. Create under the station Rome an equipment of the node Rome, for example Equipment 4 assigning to
it as Element Type > Element Managed/Remote Node.
4. Save the remote equipment list into the controller of Equipment 1.
At the activation of the connection with Equipment 1, the program will automatically activate the connec-
tion with:
• Equipment 1, Equipment 2 and Equipment 3 in Connected/Login modality.
• Equipment 4, Equipment 5 and Equipment 6 in Connected/Monitor modality.
NMS5LX 6.4.8 - MN.00272.E - 001 395

NE SW/FW DOWNLOAD

The NE Sw/Fw Download command updates the software of one or more equipment.

• To update the WEB LCT application (pag.398)
The command is available only if it has been selected one or more equipment of the same type, except
for the ELFO, SDH N+1 and FAMxc.
For more information about the update of the:

• Equipment software go to pag.399.
• WEB LCT application go to pag.399.
2. Select the Options > NE Sw/Fw Download command.

4. Set the type of download you wish to execute. Select the option:
• Only different or not present, to update the software of peripheral units (FPGA file and/or oper-
ating code).
Only for equipment of type AGS10, if the download is executed to the Network Processor and not
to the main controller, this box has name N.P. Bench Switch?

for Download area.
7. Press Start Dwl.

NMS5LX 6.4.8 - MN.00272.E - 001 396

cific type of NE.
is closed.
Fig.77 Software Download window
Parameters to
set for the
updating of
the equipment
software
NEs selected
in the map
for which the
updating of
the equipment
software
with be
Push-buttons executed (2)
bar (1)
Fig.77 notes
(1) Push-button:
• Start Dwl. It starts the software updating.
• Cancel. It closes the window.
• Scheduling. It displays the list of the NEs scheduled for the updating of the software
(Fig.78).
• Help. It opens the on-line manual
(2) For each equipment, there are, in order:

• Logic address.
• IP address.
• Type of NE
• Status of the NE when the command has been selected:
• Con. The NE is in connected status.
NMS5LX 6.4.8 - MN.00272.E - 001 397

• Dis. The NE is in disconnected status.
• Nev_Con. The NE is in disconnected status (never been connected).
• Unrea. The NE is in unreachable status.
• Mant. The NE is in maintenance status (operation in progress).
• Lom_Mon. The LCT program is connected to the NE in Monitoring modality.
• Lom_Conf. The LCT program is connected to the NE in Configuring modality.
• SwDl. The download of the software is in progress.
Double click on one NE: the RelSw window (Fig.80) opens, where the version of the software
present in the memory benches of the NE is displayed.
• <node name>.Y, where Y can assume a value between 1 and 8 (ALCplus2 Node object).
To update the WEB LCT application
The operation will be successful and is meaningful only if one or more equipment, supporting the WEB
LCT application, is selected.
2. Select the Options > NE Sw/Fw Download command.

4. Select the Only different or not present option.

for Download area.
6. Press Start Dwl.

dress and the type of NE which is updating the WEB LCT, and the status of the operation (Wait-
If the operation is successful, opening the RelSw window (Fig.80) in the Unit release bench list
relevant to the updated memory bench, the WebServerLCT option will point out the new version
of WEB LCT.
is closed.
NMS5LX 6.4.8 - MN.00272.E - 001 398

Equipment software (more info)
With equipment software we mean the set of all the software necessary for the management of the whole
NE (software of the main controller and software of the peripheral units).
The equipment software is present in the main controller that have two memory benches (bench), one
working and the other in stand-by.
Each bench can house a version (also different) of equipment software.
It is possible to update the software of only one memory bench at a time. The NMS5LX automatically up-
dates the software of the memory bench not on progress or not present.
The updating of the software can be immediately executed (only if a single NE is selected) or can be sched-
uled for a given date/time (suggested option).
In the first case, the operation is executed in real time. In the second case, it is scheduled and the system
will execute the updating at the date/time scheduled by the user.
In both cases, the execution of the download for each selected NE is subjected to the following conditions:
• The NE must be in connected status.
• The local management program in Configuration modality must not be connected to the NE.
• No other operation must be running.
If the updating of the software is immediately executed and the NE is not in one of the above mentioned
conditions, the operation is not executed.
Even if the updating is scheduled and in the moment (date/time) when it was schedule the NE is not in one
of the above mentioned conditions, the operation is not executed, but in this case the system, at regular
intervals, will verify the condition of the NE until:
• The NE is in the correct condition and then the download is executed.
• The NE is removed from the list of NEs scheduled for the download.
The files, for the software updating, are identified by the extension .dwl and by a name composed by 8
characters. In details:
• 1º character identifies the technology (S=SDH, P=PDH, M=PMP/IPBOX, K=CommServer).
• 2º character identifies the type of equipment (R=Radio, M=Multiplex, ComS=CommServer).
• 3º ... 6º character identify the product number.
• 7º, 8º character identify the most meaningful digits of the version.
WEB LCT application (more info)
The WEB LCT application allows an user connecting to an equipment via his own machine (pc, workstation,
etc.) using the operating system and the Web browser at his disposal.
WEB LCT is an application resident in the equipment controller.
The update of WEB LCT, as for the equipment software, can be executed immediately or scheduled for a
given date/time.
The update modality is the same described for the equipment software.
The files, for the WEB LCT updating, are identified by the extension .dwl.
NMS5LX 6.4.8 - MN.00272.E - 001 399

SCHEDULED SW DWL STATUS

The Scheduled Sw Dwl Status command displays the list of the equipment scheduled for the software
updating.
WIth details it is possible:
• To display the list of the equipment scheduled for the software updating (pag.400)
• To delete one or more equipment from the list (pag.402)
• To stop the updating of the software (pag.402)
• To save the list of the scheduled equipment (pag.402)
• To re-execute the software update (pag.403).
• To switch the memory bench (pag.403).
• To filter/sort the list of the scheduled equipment (pag.404).
For more information about the update of the equipment software go to pag.399.
To display the list of the equipment scheduled for the software updating
1. Select the Options > Scheduled Sw Dwl Status command.

The Scheduling Download window opens, where the list of the equipment scheduled for the software
updating and/or the switching of the memory benches of the controller are displayed (Fig.78).
Fig.78 Scheduling download window
Menu List of the NEs sheduled for the

bar (1) updating of the equipment software (2)
Fig.78 notes
(1) Menu:
• File > Deleted All. It deletes all the NEs present in the list except for those for which the
updating of the software is in progress.
• File > Deleted Select. It deletes the selected NEs except for those for which the updating of
the software is in progress.
• File > Deleted Completed. It deletes the NEs for which the download procedure has been
already executed.
• File > Export. It saves the list of the scheduled equipment.
• File > Abort. It stops the procedure for the updating of the software.
NMS5LX 6.4.8 - MN.00272.E - 001 400

• Sort. It displays the list of criteria used to sort the list of NEs.
The sign next to the option points out the criterion currently used.
• Filter > Filter. It filters the list of the equipment.
• Command > Bench Switch. It executes the switching of the memory benches of the equip-
ment for which the sw update has been correctly executed (equipment in status Completed).
• Command > Retry interrupted. It re-executes the software update for those equipment
which the update operation is failed for (equipment in status Interrupted).
• Command > Refresh. It updates the data displayed in the window.
• Help > Index. It opens the manual.
(2) For each NE, it is reported in the column:

• Equipment. Logic address of the NE.
• Scheduling Time. Date (day/month/year) and time (hour:minutes:seconds) for when the op-
eration is scheduled.
• Start Time. Date (day/month/year) and time (hour:minutes:seconds) when the operation is
started.
• Status. Current status of NE. Possible values:
• Disconnected. Equipment is disconnected.
• Unreachable. Equipment is unreachable.
• Maintenance. Manual operations are active on the equipment.
• Lom Config. Local terminal is connected to the equipment in configuration modality.
• Warning, Minor, Major, Critical. Equipment is in alarm status and the most serious
alarm has severity Warning, Minor, Major or Critical.
• Duration. Duration (expressed in hour:minutes:seconds) of the operation.
• Release. Release of the controller bench currently active.
• F. The presence of the x points out that, during the download, all the software of the con-
troller of the equipment is updated.
• O. The presence of the x points out that, during the download the software of peripheral units
(FPGA file and/or operating code) is updated.
• B. The presence of the x points out one of the following conditions:
• If the x is present, even for the option F, this means that, at the end of download, a
switch of the memory bench is automatically executed or has been executed, in such
a way that the bench whose software has been updated will be used.
• If the x is not present even for the option F, this means that only the switch of the
memory bench will be executed or has been executed.
• P. Column not managed.
• NP. Field meaningful only for AGS10 equipment. This equipment is provided with two types
of controller (main controller and Network Processor). The operator can download even only
one of the two files: one for the software of the main controller and one for the Network Proc-
essor. According to the file selected for download, the system acknowledges the involved
controller and, at the end of the operation, in the field NP:
• displays x to signal that the operation of software download has been executed to
Network Processor.
• does not display x to signal that the operation of software download has been exe-
cuted to the main controller.
• Status. Status of the operation of download and/or switching of the memory bench:
• Downloading. The operation is in progress.
• Waiting. The operation has not been executed yet.
It is possible that, in the Time Scheduling field, a scheduling date/time previous to
the current one is displayed. This means that the NE, when the operation has been
scheduled, was not in the right condition for the execution of the operation. In this
case, the system attempts the operation at regular time interval.
• Completed. The updating of the software has been successfully executed.
• Interrupted. The updating of the software has been interrupted or the operation is
failed.
In this case, it is suggested to execute or re-schedule the updating of the software.
• Bench Swh OK. The bench switching has been successfully executed.
NMS5LX 6.4.8 - MN.00272.E - 001 401

• Bench Swh Err. The switching of the memory bench is failed.
• File. Name of the file (with extension .dwl) used for the download.
The presence of the symbol - points out that the information is not available as not meaningful for
the current status of the operation.
To delete one or more NEs from the list

The Scheduling Download window opens (Fig.78).
2. To delete:
• All the NEs present in the list, except for those whose software updating is in progress (Status
field - Downloading wording), select the File > Deleted All command.
• The NEs for which the download procedure has been already executed (Status field - Completed
wording), select the File > Deleted Completed command.
• The selected NEs except for those whose software updating is in progress (Status field - Down-
loading wording), select the equipment and then the File > Deleted Select command.
The equipment is removed from the list.
To stop the updating of the software

2. Select the equipment for which the updating of the software is in progress (Status field - Downloading
wording).
3. Select the File > Abort command.

The operation is stopped.
In the Status column, for the selected NE, the Interrupted wording is displayed.
To save the list of the scheduled equipment

2. Select the File > Export command.

The Export window opens.
3. Type, in the File box, the path and the name of the file where you wish to save the data.
When the window is opened, the default path (/opt/nms5ux/data/export/<application name>) and a
name with the following format are proposed:
ExpSwDwl_<day>-<month>-<year>_<hour>-<minutes>.csv
Where date and time refers to the moment when the Export window has been opened, for example
ExpSwDwl_22-4-2010_11-30.csv.
4. Press OK.
NMS5LX 6.4.8 - MN.00272.E - 001 402

To re-execute the software update

2. Select the equipment for which the operation of software update is failed (field Status - wording Inter-
rupted).
3. Select the Command > Retry interrupted command.

The WinRip window opens.
4. Set the date (day, month, year) and the time (hour, minute) when you wish to re-execute the software
update.
5. Press Ok.
In the Scheduling Download window, the selected records pass to status Waiting.
To switch the memory bench

2. Select the equipment for which you wish to execute the switching of the memory benches.
The operation will be successful only for the equipment for which the software updating has been cor-
rectly executed (field Status - wording Completed).
3. Select the Command > Bench Switch command.

The Bench Switch window is displayed which shows the list of the NEs for which the switching of the
memory bench must be executed (Fig.79).
4. If you wish that the switching is:

• Immediately executed, press Bench switch immediate.
The operation starts.
To stop the operation press Abort.
At the end, the column Result points out the result of the operation.
• Scheduled to be executed in a second moment, press Bench switch scheduling.
The WinRip window opens.
Set the date (day, month, year) and the time (hour, minute) for which you wish to execute the
operation.
Press OK.
In the Scheduling Download window, a record is added for each NE scheduled for the switching
of the memory benches.
Fig.79 Bench Switch window
NE for which the switching of the memory

benches must be executed (1)
NMS5LX 6.4.8 - MN.00272.E - 001 403

Fig.79 notes
(1) For each equipment, it is displayed in the column:

• Equipment. Logical address.
• Ip. IP address.
• Type. NE type.
• Bench.... Name of the file and version of the software present on the memory bench 1
(Bench 1) and 2 (Bench 2).
• State.... Operating status of the memory bench 1 (State 1) and 2 (State 2):
• running. The software of the considered memory bench is running.
• loaded. The sw is present in the bench but, at the moment, is not running (standby).
• notLoaded. The software of the memory bench is not present.
• downloading. The updating of the software of the memory bench is in progress.
• Result. Status of the operation of memory bench switching:
• Starting. The operation is in progress.
• Waiting. The operation has not been executed yet.
• Abort. The operation has been interrupted.
• Bench Swh OK. The operation has been successfully executed.
• Bench Swh Err. The operation is failed.
• Not Loaded. The operation is failed because one of the memory bench does not con-
tain the software.
To filter/sort the list of the scheduled equipment

2. To SORT the list, select the command:

• Order by > Address. It sorts the list according to the IP address of the.
• Order by > Status. It sorts the list according to the status of the connection between NE and
supervision system.
The sign next to the option points out the criterion currently in use.
When the Scheduling Download window is opened, independently from the previous setting, the equip-
ment is listed in alphabetical order according to the logical address of the NE.
3. To FILTER the list, select the Filter > Filter command

The available criteria are the following:
• Name. Logic address of the NE.
• Status. Status of the operation.
To set the criterion, select the option relevant to the wished status. With details:
• Download. Equipment for which the operation has not been executed yet.
• Downloading. Equipment for which the operation is in progress.
• Completed. Equipment for which the software update has been successfully executed.
• Interrupted. Equipment for which the software update has been interrupted or is failed.
• Bench Swh OK. Equipment for which the switching of the memory benches has been suc-
cessfully executed.
NMS5LX 6.4.8 - MN.00272.E - 001 404

• Bench Swh Err. Equipment for which the switching of the memory benches is failed.
Press Reset filter to cancel the activation of the filters.
4. Press OK.
The system displays in the Scheduling Download window only the records that satisfy the activated cri-
teria.
When the Scheduling Download window closes, the possible activation of filters is automatically delet-
ed.
NMS5LX 6.4.8 - MN.00272.E - 001 405

NE SW/FW RELEASE

The NE Sw/Fw Release command displays the software version of an equipment.

• To display the software version of an equipment (pag.406)
• To update the software of an equipment (pag.407)
• To switch the operation of the memory benches of an equipment controller (pag.408)
• To delete the software present in the memory bench in standby of a equipment (pag.408).
The command is available only if it has been selected an equipment in connected status, except for the
pag.49).
To display the software version of an equipment

2. Select the Options > NE Sw/Fw Release command.
The RelSw window opens, where the software version of an equipment is displayed (Fig.80).
Fig.80 RelSw window
Logic address,
IP address and
type of
selected NE
Name of the
file and version
of the software
of equipment
present
respectively on
the memory
benches 1 and 2
Operating status
of the memory
benches 1
and 2 (1)
List of the codes

and of the FPGA
files that form
the software of
equipment (2)
NMS5LX 6.4.8 - MN.00272.E - 001 406

Fig.80 notes
(1) Label:
• running. The software of the considered memory bench is running.
• loaded. The software is present in the bench but, at the moment, is not running (standby).
• not loaded. The software of the memory bench is not present.
• downloading. The updating of the software of the memory bench is in progress.
(2) The list of the parts that constitute the software changes depending of the type of selected equip-
ment. For each code or FPGA file, it is displayed in the column:
• Unit. Name of the card or of the part of NE where the controller (code) or the programmable
device (FPGA file) is present.
• Element. Name of the software. It generally points out the type of component:
• FW_boot. Boot code. This part of code cannot be updated, in fact it has not memory
benches.
• FW_appl. Application code.
• conf_... or fpga... Configuration file of the programmable devices.
• Actual release. Version of the code or FPGA file present in the controller (main or of periph-
eral unit)
• Release bench 1 and Release bench 2. Version of the software present respectively in the
memory bench 1 and 2 of the main controller.
To update the software of an equipment
The system automatically updates the software of the not running or not present memory bench (Status
box- loaded or not loaded wording).
The operation cannot be executed when the updating of the software is already in progress (Status box -
downloading wording).

The RelSw window opens (Fig.80).
3. Press Download.
The Software Download window opens.
It is possible to type the path and the filename or press Select (the Select file for download window
To display a brief description that illustrates the content of the selected file, press Read.
5. Set the type of download that you wish to execute. Select the option:
• Only different or not present, to update the software of peripheral units (FPGA file and/or appli-
cation code).
Only for equipment of type AGS10, if the download is executed to the Network Processor and not
to the main controller, this box has name N.P. Bench Switch?
for Download area.
NMS5LX 6.4.8 - MN.00272.E - 001 407

8. Press Start Dwl.
cific type of NE.
is closed.
To switch the operation of the memory benches of an equipment controller
It is not possible to switch the memory bench when the updating of the software is in progress and
when the software is not present in a bench.

3. Press Switch bench.

A window opens where the operations that the system executes during the benches switching are point-
ed out in form of message.
At the end of the operation, the bench in running status is forced to loaded status and vice versa. The
operation causes an automatic disconnection and re-connection of the NE. If the re-connection is not
successful, the NE assumes the unreachable status and, at regular intervals, the supervision system
will attempt the re-connection command.
To delete the software present in the memory bench in standby of an equip-

ment
It is not possible to delete the software present in the memory bench when the updating of the software
is in progress.

3. Press Clear bench.

A window is displayed where the operations, which the system executes during the deletion of the
bench in standby, are pointed out (as messages).
At the end of the operation, the bench which was in standby status (wording loaded) passes to the sta-
tus not loaded. The relevant Release box will be empty.
NMS5LX 6.4.8 - MN.00272.E - 001 408

FAMXC-NE SW/FW DOWNLOAD

The FAMxc-NE Sw/Fw Download command updates the software of one or more FAMxc.
The command is available only if it has been selected one or more FAMxc.
For more information about the update of the FAMxc equipment software go to pag.410.
To update the equipment software (FAMxc)
1. Select the FAMxc.
2. Select the Options > FAMxc-NE Sw/Fw Download command.

The Insert window opens (Fig.81).
3. In the File Selection box, set the file you wish to use for the updating.
It is possible to type the path and the name of the file or press Browse (the fileSelection... window
If the file you wish to use for the operation is not in the home/tftpdir directory, it is necessary to
copy it in this directory as the supervision system needs, in order to execute correctly the download
operation, to find the file for the updating in the home/tftpdir directory.
4. Set the date and time when you wish to schedule the operation in the Date/Time Scheduled for Down-
load box.
5. Activate the Switch Bench and Restart box if you wish that, at the end of download, the memory bench
is switched and the equipment is restarted automatically.
The setting applies to all the equipment present in the Equipment List area. If you wish to carry out
a different setting for an equipment in the list:

c. Activate/deactivate the Switch Bench and Restart box as you wish.
d. Press Ok
The wording Modified is pointed out in the record of the selected equipment (area Equipment
List).
During the execution of the operation for the considered equipment, the setting of the parameter
Switch Bench and Restart of the Insert will not be considered, but the setting of the same parameter
in the Equipment Bench Releases window will be considered.
6. If enabled, type the access code of the equipment in the Password box.
If the Superuser has set the access code of the equipment in the configuration file of the system, in
order to access the equipment it is not necessary to insert the code. It is sufficient to activate the Pass-
word Default box.
The set password applies for all the equipment present in the Equipment List area. If an equipment
has a different password, it is necessary to set it in the following way:

c. Type the access code of the equipment in the Password box.
d. Press Ok
The wording Modified is pointed out in the record of the selected equipment (area Equipment
List).
NMS5LX 6.4.8 - MN.00272.E - 001 409

During the execution of the operation for the considered equipment, the setting of the password in the
Insert will not be considered, but that set in the Equipment Bench Releases window will be considered.
7. Press OK.
The Software Download window is closed.
In the list of the scheduled equipment for the download, a record is added for each NE present in the
Equipment List.
Fig.81 Insert window (FAMxc)
Parameters
to set for the
updating of
the equipment
software
NEs selected
in the map
for which the
updating of
the equipment
software with
be executed
(1)
Fig.81 notes
(1) For each equipment, there are, in order:

• Logic address
• Type of NE
• IP address
Equipment software (FAMxc) (more info)
With equipment software we mean the set of all the software necessary for the management of the whole
NE.
The equipment software is present in the main controller that have two memory benches (bench), one
working and the other in stand-by.
Each bench can house a version (also different) of equipment software.
It is possible to update the equipment software of only one memory bench at a time. The NMS5LX auto-
matically updates the software of the memory bench not on progress or not present.
The update of the equipment software can be only scheduled and will be the system to carry out the update
on the date/time scheduled by the user.
The execution of the download for each selected NE is subjected to the following conditions:
• The NE must be in connected status.
• The local management program must not be connected to the NE.
• No other operation must be running.
If, in the moment (date/time) when the operation was schedule, the NE is not in one of the above men-
tioned conditions, the operation is not executed, but in this case the system, at regular intervals, will verify
the condition of the NE until:
• The NE is in the correct condition and then the download is executed.
• The NE is removed from the list of NEs scheduled for the download.
NMS5LX 6.4.8 - MN.00272.E - 001 410

FAMXC-SCHEDULED SW DWL STATUS

The FAMxc-Scheduled Sw Dwl Status command displays the list of the FAMxc scheduled for the soft-
ware updating.
• To display the list of the FAMxc scheduled for the software updating (pag.411)
• To delete one or more equipment from the list (pag.412)
To display the list of the FAMxc scheduled for the software updating
1. Select the Options > FAMxc-Scheduled Sw Dwl Status command.

The FAMxc Scheduled Software Download window opens, where the list of the FAMxc scheduled for the
software updating is displayed (Fig.82).
Fig.82 FAMxc Scheduled Software Download window (FAMxc)
Menu List of the NEs sheduled for the

bar (1) updating of the equipment software (2)
Fig.82 notes
(1) Menu:
• Command > Delete Completed. It deletes the NEs for which the download procedure has
been already executed.
• Command > Delete Selected. It deletes the selected NEs except for those for which the up-
dating of the software is in progress.
• Options > Refresh. It refreshes the information present into the window.
• Option > View Error. It displays the characteristics of the scheduled NE. In order:
• Logic address of the NE (Equipment).
• IP address of the server (Ip Server).
• Name of the file used for the download (File).
• Result of the operation (Error).
(2) For each NE, it is reported in the column:

• Equipment. Logic address of the NE.
NMS5LX 6.4.8 - MN.00272.E - 001 411

• Bench Switch. The wording:
• Yes, points out that, at the end of download, the switch of the memory bench and the
restart of the equipment are automatically executed.
• No, points out that, at the end of download, the switch of the memory bench and the
restart of the equipment are not executed.
• Time Scheduling. Date (day/month/year) and time (hour:minutes:seconds) for when the up-
dating of the software is scheduled.
• Time start. Date (day/month/year) and time (hour:minutes:seconds) when the updating of
the software is started.
• Duration. Duration (expressed in minutes,seconds) of the download operation.
• Status. Status of the download operation:
• Downloading. The updating of the software is in progress.
• Scheduled. The updating of the software has not been executed yet.
It is possible that, in the Time Scheduling field, a scheduling date/time previous to
the current one is displayed. This means that the NE, when the operation has been
scheduled, was not in the right condition for the execution of the download. In this
case, the system attempts the updating of the software at regular time interval.
• Completed. The updating of the software has been successfully executed.
• Incomplete. The updating of the software has been partially executed or the opera-
tion is failed.
In this case, it is suggested to reschedule the updating of the software.

• File. Name of the file used for the download.
To delete one or more equipment from the list (FAMxc)
1. Select the Options > FAMxc-Scheduled Sw Dwl Status command.

The FAMxc Scheduled Software Download window opens (Fig.82).
2. To delete:
• The NEs for which the download procedure has been already executed (Status field - Completed
wording), select the File > Deleted Completed command.
• The selected NEs except for those whose software updating is in progress (Status field - Down-
loading wording), select the equipment and then the File > Deleted Select command.
The equipment is removed from the list.
NMS5LX 6.4.8 - MN.00272.E - 001 412

FAMXC-NE SW/FW RELEASE

The FAMxc-NE Sw/Fw Release command displays the software version of a FAMxc.
• To display the software version of a FAMxc (pag.413)
• To switch the operation of the memory benches and to restart a FAMxc (pag.414)
The command is available only if it has been selected a FAMxc in connected status.
For more information about the update of the equipment software of the FAMxc go to pag.410.
To display the software version of a FAMxc equipment
2. Select the Options > FAMxc-NE Sw/Fw Release command.

The Equipment Bench Releases window opens.
3. Press Read Info.

The Equipment Bench Releases window points out the version of the equipment software, as displayed
in Fig.83.
Fig.83 Equipment Bench Releases window
Logic address
of the selected
equipment
Version of the
software present
respectively
on the memory
bench 1 and 2
Memory bench
currently in use
Memory bench
which will be
used at
next boot
NMS5LX 6.4.8 - MN.00272.E - 001 413

To switch the operation of the memory benches and to restart a FAMxc
2. Select the Options > FAMxc-NE Sw/Fw Release command.

3. Press Read Info to display the current settings.
4. Select the bench you wish to use at the restart of the equipment (option Bench1 or Bench2 - parameter
Restart Bench Selection).
At the end of the operation, the selected bench will be pointed out in the Netx Boot On Bench box.
5. Type in the Password box, if enabled, the access code of the equipment.
If the Superuser has se the access code of the equipment in the configuration file of the system, it is
not necessary to insert the code to access the equipment. It is sufficient to activate the Password De-
fault box.
6. Press Restart.
The equipment is restarted and the Equipment Bench Releases window is closed.
NMS5LX 6.4.8 - MN.00272.E - 001 414

MISC
The Misc menu contains the following commands:
• Alarm History Backup (pag.416). It saves to disk and/or tape the alarm history stored in the
Alarm History table.
• Alarm History Restore (pag.417). It restores the alarm history previously saved to disk/tape
and copies it into the Old History table.
• Alarm History Delete Backup (pag.418). It deletes the alarm history saved on disk.
• Performance Monitoring Backup (pag.419). It saves to disk and/or tape the results of the
PM measures stored in the Performance Monitoring table.
• Performance Monitoring Restore (pag.420). It restores the results of the PM measures pre-
viously saved to disk/tape and copies it into the Old Performance Monitoring table.
• Performance Monitoring Delete (pag.421). It deletes the results of the PM measures saved
to disk.
• NMS5LX Global Database Backup (pag.422). It saves to disk and/or tape the information
contained in the NMS5LX database.
• NMS5LX Global Database Restore (pag.423). It restores the information contained in the
system database and previously saved to disk/tape.
NMS5LX 6.4.8 - MN.00272.E - 001 415

ALARM HISTORY BACKUP

The Alarm History Backup command saves to disk and/or tape the history of the alarm/status/event sig-
nallings (alarms) stored in the Alarm History table relevant to the equipment present in all the maps.
To backup the alarm history
1. Select the Misc > Alarm History Backup command.

The Alarm History Backup window opens.
2 Activate the:
• Backup To Tape box, if the user wants to save the contents of the Alarm History table on tape
(DAT tape).
• Backup To Disk box, if the user wants to save the table on the machine disk (workstation or
server).
If the user activates both the boxes, the system saves the data as on disk as on tape.
3 If the user has activated the:

• Backup To Tape box, insert the tape into the DAT drive of the machine.
The wording [/dev/rmt/Om], placed on the side if the box, points out that the contents of
the table will be overwritten on the possible data already present on the DAT. This setting can
not be changed.
• Backup To Disk box, type, into the text field, the name of the file where the user wants to save
the contents of the table.
Press Browser to select the name of an already existing file (in this case, the content of the file
will be overwritten by the new data).
The File name field points out the predefined path where the file is saved. The setting cannot be
modified.
4. Press OK.
The content of the table is saved to a file on the disk and/or tape.
Then, to display the content of the file, it will be necessary to restore it (pag.417) and open the Old
History Browser window (pag.277).
To display the content of the Alarm History table open the Alarm History Browser window (pag.262).
NMS5LX 6.4.8 - MN.00272.E - 001 416

ALARM HISTORY RESTORE

The Alarm History Restore command restores the history of the alarm/status/event signallings (alarms)
previously saved to disk/tape and copies it into the Old History table.
To restore the alarm history from disk
1. Select the Misc > Alarm History Restore command.

The Alarm History Restore window opens.
2. Select, in the Files list, the name of the file you wish to restore.
The list shows the files present in the predefined directory (displayed in the Selection box). It is the
same used by the system to automatically save the files during the backup procedure.
3. Press OK.
If the operation is successful, a confirmation window opens.
The restored data will overwrite those present in the Old History table. Its contents can be displayed
into the Old History Browser window (pag.277).
To restore the alarm history from tape
1. Open a windows terminal.

At the command-line prompt of the windows terminal, type: cd/tar xv.
The backup file is copied on the machine disk. With details, it is copied into the pre-defined directory,
the same one where the system automatically saves the files during the backup procedure.
To display the contents of the file, the use has to copy it into the Old History and to open the Old History
Browser window (pag.277).
NMS5LX 6.4.8 - MN.00272.E - 001 417

ALARM HISTORY DELETE BACKUP

The Alarm History Delete Backup command deletes the backup files, relevant to the signallings of
alarm/status/event, saved by the Alarm History Backup command to the disk of the machine.
To delete the backup files of the alarm history
1. Select the Misc > Alarm History Delete Backup command.

The Alarm History Delete window opens.
2. Select, in the Files list, the name of the file you wish to delete.
same where the system automatically saves the files during the backup procedure.
Even if it is possible to set a different directory, the system allows deleting files only in the prede-
fined directory.
3. Press OK.
If the operation is successful, a confirmation message opens.
NMS5LX 6.4.8 - MN.00272.E - 001 418

PERFORMANCE MONITORING BACKUP

The Performance Monitoring Backup command saves to disk and/or tape the results of the PM meas-
ures stored in the Performance Monitoring table relevant to the equipment present in all maps.
The results are saved subdivided by month.
To save the PM measures (backup)
1. Select the Misc > Performance Monitoring Backup command.

The Pm Backup window opens.
2. In the Selected Month menu, select the month you wish to save.
The last 6 months mapped in the database are available in the list.
3 Activate the:
• Backup To Tape box, if the user wants to save the contents of the Performance Monitoring table
on tape (DAT tape).
• Backup To Disk box, if the user wants to save the table on the disk of the workstation or server.
4 If the user has activated the:

• Backup To Tape box, insert the tape into the DAT drive of the machine
the table will be overwritten on the possible data already present on the DAT. This setting can
not be changed.
• Backup To Disk box, type, into the text field, the name of the file where the user wants to save
the contents of the table.
Press Browser to select the name of an already existing file (in this case the contents of the file
will be overwritten with the new data).
Into the File name field, the system points out the pre-defined path where the system saves the
file. This setting can not be changed.
5. Activate the Delete Table box if you wish that the content of the Performance Monitoring table after the
saving to file is automatically deleted.
The operation is available only to the Superuser.
6. Press OK.
If the operation is successful, a confirmation window opens and the content of the table is saved to a
file of the disk and/or tape.
Then, in order to display the content of the file, it will be necessary to restore it (pag.420) and open
the Graphic Performance Monitoring - OLD window (pag.167).
To display the content of the Performance Monitoring table open the Graphic Performance Monitoring
window (pag.163).
NMS5LX 6.4.8 - MN.00272.E - 001 419

PERFORMANCE MONITORING RESTORE

The Performance Monitoring Restore command restores the results of the PM measures previously
saved to disk/tape and copies it into the Old Performance Monitoring table.
To restore the PM measures from disk
1. Select the Misc > Performance Monitoring Restore command.

The Pm Restore window opens.
2. Select, in the Files list, the name of the file you wish to restore.
3. Press OK.
If the operation is successful, a confirmation window opens.
The restored data will overwrite those present in the Old Performance Monitoring table. Its contents
can be displayed into the Graphical Performance Monitoring - OLD window (pag.167).
To restore the PM measures from tape
1. Open a windows terminal.

2. At the command-line prompt of the windows terminal, type: cd/tar xv.
The backup file is copied on the machine disk. With details, it is copied into the pre-defined directory,
the same one where the system automatically saves the files during the backup procedure.
To display the contents of the file, the use has to copy it into the Old Performance Monitoring and to
open the Graphic Performance Monitoring - OLD window (pag.167).
NMS5LX 6.4.8 - MN.00272.E - 001 420

PERFORMANCE MONITORING DELETE

The Performance Monitoring Delete command deletes the backup files, relevant to the PM measures,
saved by the Performance Monitoring Backup command on the disk of the machine.
To delete the backup files of the PM measures
1. Select the Misc > Performance Monitoring Delete command.

The Pm Delete window opens.
2. Select, in the Files list, the name of the file you wish to delete.
The list displays the file present in the predefined directory (displayed in the Selection box). It is the
Even if it is possible to set a different directory, the system allows deleting the files only in the pre-
defined directory.
3. Press OK.
If the operation is successful, a confirmation message opens.
NMS5LX 6.4.8 - MN.00272.E - 001 421

NMS5LX GLOBAL DATABASE BACKUP

The NMS5LX Global Database Backup command saves to disk and/or tape the information contained in
the NMS5LX database where the data relevant to all the maps and all the existing equipment are stored.
To save the database (backup)
1. Select the Misc > NMS5LX Global Database Backup command.

The Database Backup window opens.
2 Activate the:
• Backup To Disk box, if the user wants to save the database on the machine disk (workstation or
server).
On the side of the box, it is pointed out the pre-defined path where the system saves the file.
This setting can not be changed.
• Backup To Tape box, if the user wants to save the contents of the database on the DAT tape.
the database will be overwritten on the possible data already present on the DAT. This setting
can not be changed.
3 If the user has activated the Backup To Tape box, insert the tape into the DAT drive of the machine.
4. Press OK.
Then, it will be possible to restore the information saved executing the procedure of restore of the da-
tabase (pag.423).
NMS5LX 6.4.8 - MN.00272.E - 001 422

NMS5LX GLOBAL DATABASE RESTORE

The NMS5LX Global Database Restore command restores the information contained in the system da-
tabase and previously saved to disk/tape.
To restore the database
The restore of the data cannot be executed if the NMS5LX system is running.
Before closing the LX Map Manager window:
1. Select the NMS5LX Global Database Restore command.

A page of help illustrating the procedure to follow to restore the database opens.
NMS5LX 6.4.8 - MN.00272.E - 001 423

RING MANAGER
The Ring Manager menu is available only if the Ring Manager application have been installed. For the
use of the Ring Manager application refer to the specific documentation.
The RM-Add Ring, RM-Delete Ring and RM-Modify/View Ring commands are used to represent
graphically the Ring objects in the maps and to provide to NMS5LX system the parameters to manage and
control them.
The Ring objects are used to identify subnetworks of PDH and SDH equipment which implement Paths. For
an easy description, in this manual the wording Ring will be used to point out these subnetworks, while the
Ring objects will be simply defined Ring objects.
The Ring Manager menu contains the following commands:
• Edit > RM-Add Ring (pag.425). It creates Ring objects for the graphic representation of the
network in the map.
• Edit > RM-Delete Ring (pag.426). It deletes a Ring symbol from the map.
• Edit > RM-Modify/View Ring (pag.427). It displays/modifies the characteristics of a Ring ob-
ject.
• Fault > RM-Network Alarm History (pag.428). It displays/manages the alarm history of the
equipment present in the Rings managed by the supervision system.
• Fault > RM-Network Current Alarm (pag.436). It displays/manages the alarms active in the
equipment present in the Rings managed by the supervision system.
• Fault > RM-Network Alarm Summary (pag.443). It displays/manages the summary of the
alarm history of the equipment present in the Rings managed by the supervision system.
• Fault > RM-Element Alarm History (pag.448). It displays/manages the alarm history of the
equipment present in the specific Ring.
• Fault > RM-Element Current Alarm (pag.449). It displays/manages the alarms active in the
equipment present in the specific Ring.
• Fault > RM-Element Alarm Summary (pag.450). It displays/manages the summary of the
alarm history of the equipment present in the specific Ring.
• Locate > RM-Ring Browser (pag.451). It displays the list of the Rings managed by the super-
vision system.
• Locate > RM-Path Browser (pag.453). It displays the list of the Path present in the Rings of
the current map.
• Locate > RM-Equipment Browser (pag.466). It displays the list of the equipment present in
the Rings of the current map.
NMS5LX 6.4.8 - MN.00272.E - 001 424

EDIT > RM-ADD RING
System access Read–Write

The RM-Add Ring command creates Ring objects for the graphic representation of the network in the map.
To create Ring objects
It is possible to create all the wished Ring objects.
wish to create the Ring.
2. Select the Ring Manager > Edit > RM-Add Ring command.
The Add Ring window opens.
3. Type the name of the Ring (alphanumeric string of minimum 1 character and maximum 32 characters)
in the Label box.
The name will be displayed under the object symbol and will constitute the name of the window that is
opened at the double selection of the symbol.
The Ring is displayed in the New Object Area of the LX Map Manager window (Fig.1). Move the symbol
If the created Ring symbol is already present in a map, it automatically will acquire the status and the
characteristics of the existing object.
NMS5LX 6.4.8 - MN.00272.E - 001 425

EDIT > RM-DELETE RING

The RM-Delete Ring command deletes a Ring symbol from the map.
To delete a Ring object from the map
If a Ring object is present only in one map, can be deleted only if it does not contain objects (equipment,
Link, Path, etc.)
If the same Ring object is present in more maps, it is possible to delete the symbol even if it contains ob-
jects, except for the last copy for which the above mentioned rule is valid: it can be deleted only if empty.
1. Into the LX Map Manager window select the Ring object you wish to delete.
2. Select the Ring Manager > Edit > RM-Delete Ring command or press the right mouse button, select
Delete and confirm.
NMS5LX 6.4.8 - MN.00272.E - 001 426

EDIT > RM-MODIFY/VIEW RING

Reading/Writing Read–Write
The RM-Modify/View Ring command displays/modifies the characteristics of a Ring object.
To verify/modify the parameters of a Ring object
It is not possible to assign the same name to two different Ring objects.
If the same Ring object has been created into two different maps, at the changing of the parameter values
of such a Ring object into a map, the system automatically changes the values of the parameters relevant
to the same object into the other map.
1. Into the LX Map Manager window select the wished Ring object.
2. Select the Ring Manager > Edit > RM-Modify/View Ring command or press the right mouse button
and select Modify/View.
The Ring Properties window opens.
Box/area:
• Label. Ring name.
• Type. Ring symbol.
It is possible to change the Label and Comment parameters. The setting mode of the parameters is the
same one pointed out to pag.425.
In the LX Map Manager window, the Ring assumes the new characteristics.
NMS5LX 6.4.8 - MN.00272.E - 001 427

FAULT > RM-NETWORK ALARM HISTORY
System access Read Only, Read–Write

The RM-Network Alarm History command displays/manages the history of the alarm/status/event sig-
nallings (alarms) stored in the Ring Manager database, of the equipment present in the Rings managed by
the supervision system.
• To display the alarm history of the equipment present in the Rings managed by the supervision
system (pag.428)
• To save the alarms list (pag.430)
• To realign the alarm table of Ring Manager to that of NMS5LX (pag.431).

To display the alarm history of the equipment present in the Rings managed
by the supervision system
1. Select the Ring Manager > Fault > RM-Network Alarm History command.
The RM - Alarm History window opens, where the alarm history stored in the Ring Manager database,
of the equipment present in the Rings managed by the NMS5LX is displayed (Fig.84).
er than 5000.
oldest one, until 5000.
The 5000 limit is not a memory limit, but simply a limit in the displaying of the alarms.
In order to read the alarms successive to 5000, it is sufficient to delete some records or modify the
filters.
NMS5LX 6.4.8 - MN.00272.E - 001 428

Fig.84 RM - Alarm History window
Menu
bar (1)
Alarms
list (2)
Status
bar (3)
Fig.84 notes
(1) Menu:
• File > Save. It saves to text file the alarms list.
• Actions > Delete. It deletes one or more records from the list and database.
• Actions > Acknowledge. It marks one or more records, in such a way that the system mem-
• Actions > Refresh. It updates the data present in the window.
• Actions > Alarm Synchronization. It re-aligns the alarms table between NMS5LX and Ring
Manager.
• View > Filter. It filters the alarms list.
• View > Sort Criteria. It sorts the list of records.
• View > Acknowledge Information. It displays the acknowledge information of the alarms.
(2) For each alarm, it is displayed in the column:

• Ack. Marking status of the record. If the field is empty, the alarm has not been marked. If
the X character is present the record has been marked.
Each alarm can be acknowledged twice: the first time when the alarm is detected. When the
alarm clears, the character X is removed from the record and the user can acknowledge it
the second time.
NMS5LX 6.4.8 - MN.00272.E - 001 429

In any moment, it is possible to display the acknowledge information of an alarm moving to
the record and pressing the right mouse button. A pop-up window is displayed with the detail
of the acknowledge. The content of the window is the same described at pag.434.
• SET Date/Time. Date and time of the alarm detection.
• CLEAR Date/Time. Date and time of the alarm clearing.
• Address. Logic address of the alarmed Network Element or System indication.
In the column Address is displayed the System label when the signalling refers to an event
generated by the Ring Manager application. The events of this type are the loss of configu-
ration alignment between the databases of Ring Manager and NMS5LX, the start or the stop
of anyone of the platform processes of Ring Manager and the stop of all the platform.
For the NE objects of ALplus Node type, the detail of the equipment of the nodal system is pointed
out. This equipment is identified by the logic address <node name>.A, <node name>.B, <node
name>.C.
troller.
(3) The symbol:

Field:
To save the alarms list (RM-Network Alarm History)
The RM - Alarm History window opens (Fig.84).
2. To save to a file:
• A group of alarms, select the records and then the File > Save > Selected command.
• The displayed alarms, select the File > Save > Filtered command. If no filter is active, the
displayed records correspond to the records stored in the database.
The Save File window opens.
3. Type, in the Selection box, the path and the name of the file where the information must be saved.
4. Press Ok.
To delete the alarms (RM-Network Alarm History)
2. To delete from the list and from the database of supervision system:
• A group of alarms, select the records and then the Actions > Delete > Selected Alarms com-
mand.
• The displayed alarms, select the Actions > Delete > Filtered Alarms command. If the filters
NMS5LX 6.4.8 - MN.00272.E - 001 430

• All the alarms of the database, select the Actions > Delete > All Alarms command.
To mark the alarms (RM-Network Alarm History)
Each alarm can be acknowledged twice: the first time when the alarm is detected. When the alarm clears,
the character X is removed from the record and the user can acknowledge it the second time. In this second
case (if already set during the first acknowledge), the value of the Trouble Identification Code parameter
cannot be modified.
2. To mark:
• A group of alarms, select the records and then the Actions > Acknowledge > Selected
Alarms command.
• The displayed alarms, select the Actions > Acknowledge > Filtered Alarms command. If the
• All the alarms of the database, select the Actions > Acknowledge > All Alarms command.
The Acknowledge Alarm window opens.
5. Press Ok.
The record will be marked with the letter X.
If more records are selected for the operation, the setting of the Trouble Identification Code and Com-
ment parameters are for all the records.
If one or more detected and cleared alarms are selected, the setting of the Trouble Identification Code
and Comment parameters applies both for the set event (SET) and for the clear event (CLEAR).
To realign the alarm table of Ring Manager to that of NMS5LX (RM-Network

Alarm History)
2. Select the Actions > Alarm Synchronization command.

The information present in the database of Ring Manager and relevant to the alarms are re-aligned to
that present in the database of NMS5LX.
NMS5LX 6.4.8 - MN.00272.E - 001 431

To activate/deactivate the automatic updating of the data (RM-Network
Alarm History)
2. To activate the automatic updating of the data, select the symbol.

3. To deactivate again the automatic updating of the data, select the symbol.
To filter the alarms list (RM-Network Alarm History)

• Match Severity. Type of signalling (alarm/status/event), activation status of the signalling and,
for the alarms, their severity (the colour of the box, when it is active, reflects the colour asso-
ciated to the severity of the alarm or the type of signalling). Activating the box/option:
• ACTIVE, the detected signallings will be displayed.
• CLEARED, the detected and cleared signallings will be displayed.
• ALL, the detected signallings only and the detected and cleared signallings will be dis-
played.
• Occurred After and Occurred Before. Date/time of the alarm. Activating the box.
second.
• Match Path. Alarms of the equipment implementing specific Paths.
It is possible to set the Path by means of one of the following ways:
• In the RM - Path Browser window (Fig.90), select one or more Path and press Add Path
from Path Browser.
• Type the name of the Path in the text field and press Add.
The set values in this way will be inserted in the area next to the Match Path box.
move Selected push-button or all the items contemporarily pressing Remove All.
• Match Ring. Alarms of the equipment present in the specific Rings.
To set the criterion, in the Ring List area, select one or more Rings and press Add.
NMS5LX 6.4.8 - MN.00272.E - 001 432

The set values in this way will be inserted in the Match List area.
• Match Link. Alarms of the equipment connected from the specific Link.
It is possible to set the Link by means of one of the following ways:
• Select one or more Link, directly in the Ring Manager window and press Add Link from
Map.
• Type the name of the Link in the text field and press Add.
The set values in this way will be inserted in the area next to the Match Link box.
• Match Equipment. Logical address of the Network Element.
• Select the symbol or the symbols of the wished NEs, directly in the Ring Manager window
and press Add Equipment From Map.
• Type the logical address in the text field and press Add.
The set values in this way will be inserted in the area next to the Match Equipment box.
• Match Message. Description of the alarm (Message field).
It is possible to set the criterion by means of one of the following ways:
• Type the wished string in the text field
Activating the Case Sensitive box, distinction will be made between upper and lower
case; deactivating the box, no distinction will be made.
• Select a record in the RM - Alarm History window and press Get Message from selected
Alarm.
The system displays in the RM - Alarm History window only the record that satisfy specific criteria.
When the RM - Alarm History window is closed, the possible activation of the filters is automatically
cleared.

• Delete....It deletes the file where a previously saved specific setting of filters is contained.
• Clear. It clears the activation of all the filters.
NMS5LX 6.4.8 - MN.00272.E - 001 433

To sort the alarms list (RM-Network Alarm History)
2. Select the View > Sort Criteria command.

The Sort Criteria window opens.
• Registration, the alarms will be sorted according to the date/time of recording in the Ring Man-
ager database.
• SET Time, the alarms will be sorted according to the detection date/time.
• CLEAR Time, the alarms will be sorted according to the clearing date/time. The alarms not
4. Select in the Order area, the option:

• Last on TOP; the first record of the table will correspond to the newest alarm; the successive
ones will be listed in descending order.
• Last on BOTTOM; the first record of the table will correspond to the oldest alarm; the successive
ones will be listed in ascending order.
5. If you wish that the alarms are sorted also according to their address, activate the Group Equipment
box (second sorting criterion).
6. Press OK (it executes the sorting and closes the window) or Apply (it executes the sorting and does
The RM - Alarm History window will list the records in the set order.
To display the acknowledge information of an alarm (RM-Network Alarm

History)
• Press and keep pressed the right mouse button.
A pop-up window opens.
• Select the View > Acknowledge Information command.
The Acknowledge Information window opens.
The content of both the windows is the same and is depicted in Fig.85.
Fig.85 Acknowledge Information (RM - Alarm History) window
Identification
Code
(1)
Detailed
Detailed information
information of the
of the acknowledge
acknowledge when the signal
when the signal was in status:
was in status: detected and
detected cleared
(2) (3) (2) (3)
NMS5LX 6.4.8 - MN.00272.E - 001 434

Fig.85 notes
(2) Option:
• Time. Moment when the record has been acknowledged <day-month-year hour:minute:sec-
ond>.
present in the SET:... and CLEAR:... areas are the same.
Modality of the updating of data (RM-Network Alarm History)
The information present in the RM - Alarm History window are dynamically updated only if the procedure
for the automatic updating is active (pag.432).
At the opening of the RM - Alarm History window, the procedure of automatic updating of the informa-
tion is, by default inactive (the default setting can be modified by the Superuser).
The setting of the filters or the criteria used to sort the records in a RM - Alarm History window does not
influence the displaying of the information in the other open RM - Alarm History windows or in the RM -
Current Alarms window.
Modality of recording of the alarms (RM-Network Alarm History)
The alarms are stored in the database managed by Ring Manager application (database of Ring Manager).
The application stores to disk all the alarms up to a limit N (configurable by Superuser - default 50000).
When this limit is reached, the system automatically removes the oldest X alarms (X configurable by Su-
peruser - default 1000).
During this period, it is possible to manually delete the alarms (pag.430). It is suggested to periodically
delete and/or store to file the less meaningful records, so to avoid the saturation of the database.
NMS5LX 6.4.8 - MN.00272.E - 001 435

FAULT > RM-NETWORK CURRENT ALARM

The RM - Network Current Alarm command displays/manages the alarm/status/event signallings

(alarms) active in the equipment present in the Rings managed by the supervision system.
• To display the alarms active in the equipment present in the Rings managed by the supervision
system (pag.436)
• Realign the alarm table of Ring Manager to that of NMS5LX (pag.438)
• To display the acknowledge information of a alarm (pag.441)
As help to the description of the command, see par. Modality of the updating of data (pag.442)
To display the alarms active in the equipment present in the Rings managed
by the supervision system
1. Select the Ring Manager > Fault > RM-Network Current Alarm command.
The RM - Current Alarms window opens, where the list of the alarms active in the equipment present
in the Rings managed by the supervision system is displayed (Fig.86).
Fig.86 RM - Current Alarms window
Menu
bar (1)
Alarms
list (2)
Status
bar (3)
Fig.86 notes
(1) Menu:
NMS5LX 6.4.8 - MN.00272.E - 001 436

• Actions > Alarm Synchronization. It re-aligns the alarms table between NMS5LX and RM.

• Severity. Type of signalling: alarm, status and event; for the alarms also the severity is dis-
played. The parameter is represented by a coloured box and by a wording, in detail:
Green Normal Event signallings
If the field is empty, the alarm has not been marked; if the X character is present, the alarm
has been marked.
generated by the Ring Manager application. The events of this type are the loss of configu-
ration alignment between the databases of Ring Manager and NMS5LX, the start or the stop
of anyone of the platform processes of Ring Manager and the stop of all the platform.
For the NE objects of ALplus Node type, the detail of the equipment of the nodal system is pointed
out. This equipment is identified by the logic address <node name>.A, <node name>.B, <node
name>.C.
(3) The symbol:

Field:
To save the alarms list (RM-Network Current Alarm)
The RM - Current Alarms window opens (Fig.86).
2. To save to file:
• The displayed alarms, select the File > Save > Filtered command. If filters are not active, the
displayed records corresponds to the records stored in the database.
4. Press Ok.
NMS5LX 6.4.8 - MN.00272.E - 001 437

To mark the alarms (RM-Network Current Alarm)
2. To mark:
Alarms command.
• The displayed alarms, select the Actions > Acknowledge > Filtered Alarms command. If fil-
5. Press Ok.
If more records are selected for the operation, the settings of the Trouble Identification Code and Com-
ment parameters applies for all the records.
To realign the alarm table of Ring Manager to that of NMS5LX (RM-Network

Current Alarm)
The information present in the database of Ring Manager and relevant to the alarms are realigned to
To activate/deactivate the automatic updating of the data (RM-Network

Current Alarm)
NMS5LX 6.4.8 - MN.00272.E - 001 438

To filter the alarms list (RM-Network Current Alarm)

• Match Severity. Type of signalling (alarm/status/event) and for the alarms their severity (the
colour of the box, when it is active, reflects the colour associated to the severity of the alarm or
the type of signalling). Activating the box/option:
• Occurred After and Occurred Before. Date/time of the alarms. Activating the box:
second.
• Match Path. Alarms of the equipment that implement specific Paths.
from Path Browser.
Map.
NMS5LX 6.4.8 - MN.00272.E - 001 439

• Type the wished string in the text field
case; deactivating the box, no distinction will be made
• Select a record in the RM - Current Alarm window and press Get Message from select-
ed Alarm.
Activating the box:
• Match Acknowledged, the marked records will be displayed.
• Match Unacknowledged, the record not yet marked will be displayed.
The system displays in the RM - Current Alarms window only the record that satisfy specific criteria.
When the RM - Current Alarm window is closed, the possible activation of the filters is automatically
cleared.
To sort the alarms list (RM-Network Current Alarm)


• Registration, the alarms will be sorted according to the date/time of recording in the Ring Man-
ager database.

NMS5LX 6.4.8 - MN.00272.E - 001 440

The RM - Current Alarms window will list the records in the set order.
To display the acknowledge information of an alarm (RM-Network Current

Alarm)

Fig.87 Acknowledge Information (RM - Current Alarms) window
Identification
Code
(1)
Detailed Area not

information of meaningful
acknowledge in this
(2) context
Fig.87 notes
(2) Option:
• Time. Moment when the record has been acknowledged <day-month-year hour:minute:sec-
ond>.
NMS5LX 6.4.8 - MN.00272.E - 001 441

Modality of the updating of data (RM-Network Current Alarm)
The information present in the RM - Current Alarm window are dynamically updated only if the procedure
At the opening of the RM - Current Alarm window, the procedure of automatic updating of the informa-
NMS5LX 6.4.8 - MN.00272.E - 001 442

FAULT > RM-NETWORK ALARM SUMMARY

The RM-Network Alarm Summary display/manage the summary of the alarm history of the equipment
present in the Rings managed by the supervision system.
• To display the summary of the alarm history subdivided for the severity relevant to the equip-
ment present in the Rings (pag.443)
• To filter the alarm list (pag.444)
• To open the file, where a previously saved specific setting of filters is contained (pag.446)
• To save the set filters to a file (pag.446)
• To delete the file where a previously saved specific setting of filters is contained (pag.447)
• To display the alarms stored in the alarm history (pag.447)
• To reset the indication of status change (pag.447)
• To modify the title of the RM - Alarm Summary window (pag.447)
To display the summary of the alarm history subdivided for the severity rel-
evant to the equipment present in the Rings
1. Select the Ring Manager > Fault > RM-Network Alarm Summary command.
The RM - Alarm Summary window opens, where the summary of the alarm history subdivided for the
severity relevant to the equipment present in the Rings is displayed (Fig.88).
date is successive to the midnight of the current day, are displayed.
In the window the information updating is dynamic.
Fig.88 RM - Alarm Summary window
Title Number of
bar (1) alarms
Menu detected but
bar (2) not cleared
yet (6)
Indication
of "status Number of
change” (3) alarms
detected
and cleared
(7)
Number of
alarms
subdivided
according
type and
severity (4)
Criterion
used to
subdivide Status
the alarms bar (8)
(5)
NMS5LX 6.4.8 - MN.00272.E - 001 443

Fig.88 notes
(1) By default, the window title is RM - Alarm Summary. It can be changed as you wish (see pag.447).
(2) Menu:
• File > Load. It opens the file, where a previously saved specific setting of filters is contained.
• File > Save. It saves the set filters to a file.
• File > Delete. It deletes the file where a previously saved specific setting of filters is con-
tained
• Options > Window Title. It changes the title of the window.
• Options > Clear Flag. It resets the indication of status change.
(3) The presence of the flag next to the record points out that, from when the RM - Alarm Summary
window has been opened or from the last selection of the Options > Clear Flag command, a
change occurred: an alarm has been detected or cleared.
(4) It is possible that, in the RM - Alarm Summary window, there are not one or more records relevant
to the type of signallings/severity levels. Their presence is subjected to the activation of filters.
(5) Record:
• Critical. Alarms with Critical severity.
• Major. Alarms with Major severity.
• Minor. Alarms with Minor severity.
• Warning. Alarms with Warning severity.
• Status. Status signallings.
• Normal. Event signallings.
• Total. All the signallings (alarms, status, events).
(6) Option:
• Active (Critical record). Detected alarms with Critical severity.
• Active (Major record). Detected alarms with Major severity.
• Active (Minor record). Detected alarms with Minor severity.
• Active (Warning record). Detected alarms with Warning severity.
• Active (Status record). Detected status signallings.
• Active (Normal record). Detected event signallings.
• Active (Total record). Total number of detected signallings.
(7) Option:
• Cleared (Critical record). Detected/cleared alarms with Critical severity.
• Cleared (Major record). Detected/cleared alarms with Major severity.
• Cleared (Minor record). Detected/cleared alarms with Minor severity.
• Cleared (Warning record). Detected/cleared alarms with Warning severity.
• Cleared (Status record). Detected/cleared status signallings.
• Cleared (Normal record). Detected/cleared event signallings.
• Cleared (Total record). Total number of detected/cleared signallings.
(8) xx of yy filed. Number of displayed records (xx) and number of total record (yy). If no filter is active,
the number of displayed records corresponds to the number of total records.
To filter the alarm list (RM-Network Alarm Summary)
The RM - Alarm Summary window opens (Fig.88).
NMS5LX 6.4.8 - MN.00272.E - 001 444

played.
• Occurred After and Occurred Before. Date/time of the alarms. Activating the box.
second.
• Match Path. Alarms of the equipment that implement specific Paths.
from Path Browser.
Map.
NMS5LX 6.4.8 - MN.00272.E - 001 445

Activating the Case Sensitive box, distinction will be made between upper and lower case; de-
activating the box, no distinction will be made.
The system displays in the RM - Alarm Summary window only the record that satisfy specific criteria.
When the RM - Alarm Summary window is closed, the possible activation of the filters is automatically
cleared.
To open the file, where a previously saved specific setting of filters is con-
tained (RM-Network Alarm Summary)
2. Select the File > Load command.

The Load Filter window opens.
3. Select the wished file in the Files list.
4. Press OK.
The filter contained in the RM - Alarm Summary window is applied.
To save the set filters to a file (RM-Network Alarm Summary)
2. Select the File > Save command.

The Save Filter window opens.
NMS5LX 6.4.8 - MN.00272.E - 001 446

3. Type the name you wish to assign to the file in the Selection box.
4. Press OK.
The filter currently applied to the window and the window title are saved to the file.
To delete the file where a previously saved specific setting of filters is con-
tained (RM-Network Alarm Summary)
2. Select the File > Delete command.
The Delete Filter window opens.
3. Select the wished file in the Files list.
4. Press OK.
The file is removed from the disk.
To display the alarms stored in the alarm history (RM-Network Alarm Sum-
mary)
2. Select the option relevant to the type/severity of signalling, for which you wish to display the relevant
list stored in the alarm history.
The RM - Alarm History window opens (Fig.84), where only the alarms of the selected type and severity,
whose detection date is successive to the midnight of the current day, are displayed.
For example, if the Active option (Minor record) is selected, the RM - Alarm History window opens, with
displayed only the active alarms with Minor severity whose detection date is successive to the midnight
of the current day. To display the remaining of the alarms, it is sufficient to change the filter.
To reset the indication of status change (RM-Network Alarm Summary)
2. Select the Options > Clear Flag command.

The flags are removed.
To modify the title of the RM - Alarm Summary window (RM-Network Alarm

Summary)
2. Select the Options > Window Title command.

The Window Title window opens.
3. Type, in the text field, the new title for the RM - Alarm Summary window.
4. Press OK.
The window immediately gets the new title.
NMS5LX 6.4.8 - MN.00272.E - 001 447

FAULT > RM-ELEMENT ALARM HISTORY

The RM-Element Alarm History command displays/manages the history of the alarm/status/event sig-
nallings (alarms) stored in the Ring Manager database, relevant the equipment present ONLY to the se-
lected Ring.
The choice of the command opens the <Ring name> Alarm History window.
par. RM-Network Alarm History (pag.428).
The RM-Element Alarm History command is available only if it has been selected a single Ring in the LX
Map Manager window.
NMS5LX 6.4.8 - MN.00272.E - 001 448

FAULT > RM-ELEMENT CURRENT ALARM

The RM-Element Current Alarm command displays/manages the alarm/status/event signallings

(alarms) active in the equipment present ONLY to the selected Ring.
The choice of the command opens the <Ring name> Current Alarm window.
par. RM-Network Current Alarm (pag.436).
The RM-Element Current Alarm command is available only if it has been selected a single Ring in the LX
Map Manager window.
NMS5LX 6.4.8 - MN.00272.E - 001 449

FAULT > RM-ELEMENT ALARM SUMMARY

The RM-Element Alarm Summary displays/manages the summary of the alarm history of the equipment
present ONLY to the selected Ring.
The choice of the command opens the RM - Alarm Summary window.
par. RM-Network Alarm Summary (pag.443).
The RM-Element Alarm Summary command is available only if it has been selected a single Ring in the
NMS5LX 6.4.8 - MN.00272.E - 001 450

LOCATE > RM-RING BROWSER

The RM-Ring Browser displays the list of the Rings managed by the NMS5LX.

• To display the list of the Rings managed by the NMS5LX (pag.451)
• To open the Ring Manager window (pag.452)
• To search and highlight in the map the symbol of a Ring (pag.452)
To display the list of the Rings managed by the NMS5LX
1. Select the Ring Manager > Locate > RM-Ring Browser command.
The Ring Browser window opens, where the list of the Rings managed by the supervision system
NMS5LX is displayed (Fig.89).
Fig.89 Ring Browser window
Menu
bar (1)
Ring
list (2)
Status
bar (3)
Fig.89 notes
(1) Menu:
• File > Refresh. It updates the data present in the window.
• Options > Find ring. It searches and highlights in the map the symbol of a Ring
• Options > Open ring. It opens the Ring Manager window.
(2) For each Ring the name corresponding to the name of the relevant Ring symbol in the map is point-
ed out.
The list of the Rings is in alphabetical order.
(3) The Ring number option points out the total number of Rings.
NMS5LX 6.4.8 - MN.00272.E - 001 451

To open the Ring Manager window
The Ring Browser window opens (Fig.89).
2. Select the Ring.
3. Select the Options > Open ring command.

The Ring Manager window of the selected Ring, opens.
If the message Cannot open ring created in another map is displayed, it is not possible to open the Ring
Manager window as the selected Ring is not present in the current map.
The Ring Manager window can be opened also by a double click on the Ring record.
To search and highlight in the map the symbol of a Ring
The Ring Browser window opens (Fig.89).
2. Select the Ring you wish to highlight.

3. Select the Options > Find ring command.
In the LX Map Manager window, the symbol of the selected Ring is highlighted.
If the message Cannot highlight ring created in another map is displayed, it is not possible to highlight
the symbol as the selected Ring is not present in the current map.
NMS5LX 6.4.8 - MN.00272.E - 001 452

LOCATE > RM-PATH BROWSER

User profile Entry *, Normal *, Advanced, Privileged, Superuser
* The user with Entry profile cannot modify/save the information relevant to a Path and modify the Path
configuration (single or protected).
The user with Entry or Normal profile cannot delete the Paths, add the protection to a Path and activate/
deactivate the management of a Path.
The RM-Path Browser display the list of the Path present in the Rings of the current map.
• To display the list of the Path present in the Rings of the current map (pag.453)
• To save the list of the Path (pag.455)
• To delete one or more Paths (pag.456)
• To delete the protection of a Path (pag.456)
• To add the protection to a Path (pag.457)
• To activate the management of a Path (pag.457)
• To deactivate the management of a Path (pag.457)
• To switch the names of the Paths associated in a protection (pag.457)
• To display the alarms active in the equipment implementing a Path (pag.458)
• To display the history of the alarms relevant to the equipment implementing a Path (pag.458)
• To display/modify/save the information relevant to a Path (pag.458)
• To display/modify the configuration of a Path (pag.460)
• To display/modify the configuration of a Path protected (pag.462)
• To search and highlight a Path in the Ring Manager window in which it is contained (pag.464)
• To search and highlight in the map window, the Ring symbol in which it is present a Path
(pag.464)
• To filter/sort the list of the Path (pag.464)
The Path terms indicates a bidirectional route between a source node and a destination node and is
identified by an input channel on the source node and an output channel on the destination node. For more
information refer to the Ring Manager documentation.
To display the list of the Path present in the Rings of the current map
1. Select the Ring Manager > Locate > RM-Path Browser command.
The RM - Path Browser window opens, where the he list of the Path present in the Rings of the current
NMS5LX 6.4.8 - MN.00272.E - 001 453

Fig.90 RM - Path Browser window
Menu
bar (1)
Summarizing
bar of the
status (2)
Path list
(3)
Status
bar (4)
Fig.90 notes
(1) Menu:
• File > Save. It saves the list of the Path
• Edit > Select All. It selects all the displayed Paths.
• Edit > Delete Path. It deletes one or more Path from the list and database.
• Edit > Delete Path Protection. It delete from the list and database, the protection of one or
more Paths.
• Edit > Add Path Protection. It adds the protection to a Path.
• Edit > Path on line. It activates the management of a Path.
• Edit > Path off line. It deactivates the management of a Path.
• Edit > Naming Switch A/B -> B/A. It switches the names of the Paths associated in a pro-
tection.
• Fault > Current Alarm. It displays the alarms active in the equipment implementing a Path
and related to the Path.
• Fault > Alarm History. It displays the history of the alarms relevant to the equipment imple-
menting a Path and related to a Path.
• Options > Path: Information. It displays/modifies/saves the information relevant to a Path
• Options > Path: Configuration Parameters. It displays/modifies the configuration of a Path.
• Options > Path: Protection Parameters. It displays/modifies the configuration of a Path pro-
tected.
• Options > Path: Highlight. It searches and highlights a Path in the Ring Manager window in
which it is contained.
• Options > Ring: Highlight. It searches and highlights in the map window, the Ring symbol in
which it is present a Path.
• View > Filter. It filters/sorts the list of the Path
(2) The name of each status a Path can assume (except for the status Disabled which is grouped to-
gether with the status Warning) is next to a box pointing out the number of Paths present in the list
with the specific status.
For each box, if the displayed number is 0, the box is grey. When the number is different from 0,
the background of the box assumes the color associated to the status.
For the description of the different statuses and relevant colours, see note (3).
The selection of a box allows filtering the list of Path using, as criterion, the selected status. When
the filter activated, the bar displays the Clear Severity Filter push-button. Selecting it, you can
remove the filter and display all the Paths in the list.
NMS5LX 6.4.8 - MN.00272.E - 001 454

(3) For each Path, it is pointed out in the column:
• Path Status. Status of the Path. The parameter is represented by a coloured box and by a
wording, in detail:
Red Not Actuated Path for which the actuation is failed
Red Failure The traffic on the Path is blocked.
Orange Incomplete Paths for which the actuation of one of the two routes
(A or B) is failed.
Value is meaningful only for protected Paths.
Yellow Degraded The traffic on the main route of the Path transits regu-
larly.The stand-by is not available.
Value is meaningful only for protected Paths.
Light blue Warning The alarm information is not available for at least one
of the two NEs implementing the Path.
Light blue Disabled The input or output channel of the Path is disabled.
Green Running The traffic on the Path transits regularly.
Brown Off line The Path is not managed
• Path Name. Path name assigned by the user to the path during its creation or modification.
The user can assign to the Path the wished name or name the Path, according to Recc. ITU-
T M.1400, with the following format <logic address of source NE (max 12 characters)> -
<logic address of destination NE (max 12 characters) <connection type>s<connection pro-
gressive number (max 2 characters)>.
The figure reports some examples.
• Source. The node source of the Path (equipment logical address and relevant input channel).
• Destination. The node destination of the Path (equipment logical address and relevant output
channel).
• Protection. Protection status of the Path.
A double click on a Path displays the RM: Path Description window (Fig.91).
(4) Field:
• Filter. Activation of one or more filters.
To save the list of the Path
The RM - Path Browser window opens (Fig.90).
2. To save to file:
• A group of Paths, select the records and then the File > Save > Selected command.
• The displayed Paths, select the File > Save > Filtered command. If no filter is active, the dis-
played records correspond to the records stored in the database.
4. Press Ok.
NMS5LX 6.4.8 - MN.00272.E - 001 455

To delete one or more Paths
It is not possible to delete:

• A Path in Not Actuated status. Force the Path in Off line status or wait for the successful reali-
zation of the Path and then delete the Path.
• A managed Path (On line), if the system has detected a condition of Configuration Mismatch.
First remove the mismatch condition (refer to Ring Manager documentation) and then delete the
Path.
• A Path with at least one of the NEs implementing the Path in status disconnected, unreachable,
maintenance, connected with LCT present in Configuration modality or if a NMS5UX user has
opened the relevant equipment graphic interface (Equipment window). Force the Path in Off line
status or wait for all the equipment implementing the Path are in connected status and then de-
lete the Path.
The deletion of a unmanaged Path (Off line) involves the removal of the Path only from the database of
Ring Manager, while the deletion of a managed Path (On line) involves the removal of the Path from the
DB and the removal of the relevant cross-connections from the equipment implementing the considered
Path.
If a protected Path is selected, this operation deletes the whole Path (paths A and B).
2. Select the record you wish to delete.
3. Select the Edit > Delete Path command and confirm.

The records are deleted from the list, from the supervision system database and from the equipment
if in connected status.
To delete the protection of a Path
It is not possible to delete:

• A route (A/B) of a Path in Not Actuated status. Force the Path in Off line status or wait for the
successful realization of the Path and then delete the protection.
• A route (A/B) of a managed Path (On line) if the system has detected a condition of Configura-
tion Mismatch. First remove the mismatch condition (refer to Ring Manager documentation) and
then delete the protection.
• A route (A/B) of a Path, if at least one of the NEs implementing the connection A or B is in status
disconnected, unreachable, maintenance, connected with LCT present in Configuration modality
or if a NMS5UX user has opened the relevant equipment graphic interface (Equipment window).
Force the Path in Off line status or wait for all the equipment implementing the route (A/B) are
in connected status and then delete the protection.
The deletion of a protection of an unmanaged Path (Off line) involves the removal of the Path only from
the database of Ring Manager, while the deletion of the protection of a managed Path (On line) involves
the removal of the protection from the DB and the removal of the relevant cross-connections from the
equipment implementing the considered protection.
2. Select the wished protected Path (Protection option - Protected value).
3. Select the Edit > Delete Path Protection > PATH-A or PATH-B command (according to the route
you want to delete) and confirm.
NMS5LX 6.4.8 - MN.00272.E - 001 456

To add the protection to a Path
The operation executed on a managed Path (On line) involves the creation of the protection in the database
of Ring Manager and the creation of the relevant cross-connections for the equipment implementing the
considered protection.
2. Select the Path you wish to protect (Protection option - Not protected value).
3. Select the Edit > Add Path Protection command and confirm.
If the operation is successful, the value Protected is displayed in the record of the considered Path (op-
tion Protection). If the operation fails, an error message is displayed.
To activate the management of a Path
2. Select the Path not managed (Path Status option - Off line value).
3. Select the Edit > Path on line command and confirm.

The status assumed by the managed Path is pointed out in the record of the considered Path (option
Path Status - value Running, Warning, etc.).
An error message is displayed if troubles occur during the operation.
For instance, if an equipment implementing the Path is in disconnected status, at the end of the oper-
ation the Path will pass to Not Actuated status and a message will point out that it was not possible to
realize the Path because the equipment (logic address) is disconnected.
To deactivate the management of a Path
2. Select the Path managed (Path Status option - Not Actuated, Failure, Incomplete, Degraded, Warning,
Disabled or Running value).
3. Select the Edit > Path off line command and confirm.
At the end of the operation, the Path is not managed by the system anymore (option Path Status -
value Off line).
To switch the names of the Paths associated in a protection
2. Select the protected Path (Protection option - Protected value) whose names of the two paths (A/B)
you wish to switch.
3. Select the Edit > Naming Switch A/B -> B/A command.
The path named A is renamed as B and vice versa.
To display the new situation, it is necessary to open the Ring Manager window containing the consid-
ered Path.
NMS5LX 6.4.8 - MN.00272.E - 001 457

To display the active alarms in the equipment implementing a Path
2. Select the Path(s) for which you wish to display the current alarms in the relevant equipment.
3. Select the Fault > Current Alarm command.

The RM - Current Alarm window (Fig.86) opens with Match Path filter active.
The description of the window and the operations that can be executed are reported to pag.436.
To display the alarm history relevant to the equipment implementing a Path
2. Select the Path(s) for which you wish to display the alarm history in the relevant equipment.
3. Select the Fault > Alarm History command.

The RM - Alarm History window (Fig.84) opens with Match Path and After (alarms whose detection date
is successive to the midnight of the current day) filters active.
To display/modify/save the information relevant to a Path
Operation available only to the Superuser and to the users with privileged, advanced or normal profile.
• Double click on the wished Path.
• Select the wished Path and then the Options > Path: Information command.
The RM: Path Description window opens where the info relevant to the Path are displayed (Fig.91).
Here below are pointed out the operations which can be executed with the items present in the window.
To change the name of the Path

a. Into the Path Name text field, type the new value (alphanumeric string of minimum 1 maximum
100 characters).
b. Press Apply.
To save on file the characteristics of the Path

a. Select the File > Save Path Information command.
b. Type, in the Selection box, the path and the name of the file where the info must be saved.
c. Press Ok.
To display the alarms active in the equipment implementing a Path
a. Select the Fault > Current Alarm command.
The RM - Current Alarm window (Fig.86) opens with Match Path filter active.
To display the alarm history relevant to the equipment implementing the Path
a. Select the Fault > Alarm History command.
The RM - Alarm History window (Fig.84) opens with Match Path and After (alarms whose detec-
tion date is successive to the midnight of the current day) filters active.
NMS5LX 6.4.8 - MN.00272.E - 001 458

Fig.91 RM Path Description window
Menu
bar (1)
Name of
the Path (2)
Source and
destination
equipment
(3)
Type of
Path (4)
Description
of the Path
(5)
Fig.91 notes
(1) Menu:
• File > Save Path Information. It saves the characteristics of the Path.
• Fault > Current Alarm. It displays the alarms active in the equipment implementing the Path.
• Fault > Alarm History. It displays the history of the alarms relevant to the equipment imple-
menting the Path.
(2) Path name assigned by the user to the path during its creation or modification.
The user can assign the wished name to the Path or name the Path, according to the Recc. ITU-T
M.1400, using the following format <source NE logic address (max 12 characters)> - <destination
NE logic address (max 12 characters) <connection type>s<connection progressive number (max 2
characters)>.
(3) Option:
• Source. Logical address of the source equipment of the Path and relevant input channel.
• Destination. Logical address of the destination equipment of the Path and relevant output
channel.
The options are read only.
(4) The green box points out the Path type:

• Protected. Protected Path.
• Single. Unprotected Path.
• Loop. Presence of a cross-connection re-closed on itself (loop).
(5) Each record present in the list represents an equipment implementing the Path. For protected paths
in the list, the equipment implementing the PATH-A and the PATH-B are displayed.
NMS5LX 6.4.8 - MN.00272.E - 001 459

For each equipment, it is displayed in the column:
• Status. Status of creation of the cross-connection between input channel and output channel
on the equipment:
• Actuated. Connection actuated.
• Not Actuated. Connection not actuated yet.
• Off line. Connection not managed (Path in Off line status).
• Equipment. Logical address of the equipment.
• In Channel. Input channel of the Path on the equipment.
• Out Channel. Output channel of the Path on the equipment.
• Message. This field displays, for the not actuated connections (option Status - value Not Ac-
tuated) the cause of the missed actuation:
• Not Connected. Equipment in disconnected status.
• Maintenance Status. Equipment in maintenance status.
• Unreachable. Equipment in unreachable status
• LCT in Configuration Mode. Equipment in connected status which the LCT program in
Configuration modality is connected to.
• NMS5UX in Configuration Mode. Equipment for which the NMS5UX user has opened
the relevant equipment graphic interface (Equipment window).
To display/modify the configuration of a Path
2. Select the wished Path.
3. Select the Options > Path: Configuration Parameters command.

The Path: Configuration Parameters - <nome del Path> window opens where the configuration of the
Path is displayed (Fig.92).
Depending on the equipment type (source/destination), the window will display some configuration pa-
rameters relevant to the tributary channel of input to the source equipment of the Path (area Source
NE) and to the tributary of output from the destination equipment of the Path (area Destination NE).
Here below are displayed the operations which can be executed using the items present in the window.
To activate/deactivate the tributary

a. Into the Tributary Enable box, set the use of the tributary:
• Disable. The tributary is not active (tributary not used). In this case, the alarms are inhi-
bited and LOS alarm becomes active if, with tributary disabled, the signal is however con-
nected.
• Enable. The tributary is active (tributary used). In this case, the controller does not in-
hibit the alarms.
• Disable No Inv. The tributary is not active (tributary not used). In this case, the alarms
are inhibited and LOS alarm is NOT given if, with tributary disabled, the signal is however
connected.
b. Press Apply.
To activate/deactivate the tributary loops
Operation of maintenance (MAN. OP).

a. Select the loop to be activated (or deactivated).
The loop assumes the state complementary to the previous one (if activated, it becomes deac-
tivated and vice versa).
b. Press Apply.
The activation of, at least, one loop causes the activation of the MAN. OP alarm. If the equipment
is switched off and, then, switched on, independently from the previous setting, the loops are
deactivated.
NMS5LX 6.4.8 - MN.00272.E - 001 460

To modify the J2 Path Trace parameters
a. Into the Trace Type box, set the Path Trace status:
• Disable. The control of the Path Trace is disabled.
• Enable. The control of the Path Trace is enabled.
b. Into the Trace Sent box, type the new characters string in transmission.
c. Into the Trace Expected box, type the new characters string in reception.
d. Press Apply.
To modify the Signal Label parameters

a. Into the Trace Expected box, set the specification which the received Signal Label value is re-
ferred to.
b. Into the Trace Sent box, set the specification which the transmitted Signal Label value is referred
to.
c. Press Apply.
Fig.92 Path Configuration Parameters window
Menu
bar (1)
Characteristics Characteristics
of the Path of Path
source destination
equipment (2) equipment (2)
Configuration Configuration
parameters parameters of
of the tributary the tributary
channel of channel
input to of output
the Path from the Path
source destination
equipment (3) equipment (3)
Push-buttons
bar (4)
NMS5LX 6.4.8 - MN.00272.E - 001 461

Fig.92 notes
(1) Menu:
(2) Option:
• Source NE/Destination NE. Respectively source equipment/destination NE of the Path.
• Channel. Tributary channel used.
• NE Name. Logic address of the equipment.
• NE Type. Equipment type.
The Virtual... label points out the virtual NE objects (Ring Manager).
• IP Address. IP address.
The Virtual... label points out the virtual NE objects (NMS5LX).
• IDU Type. IDU type (for example 2RU, etc.)
• Configuration. Configuration type (for example Drop Insert, Terminal, etc.)
• Capacity. Equipment capacity.
• IDU Nb. Number of equipment constituting the node (only for NEs of ALplus Node type).
The list of displayed options depends on the equipment type.
(3) Option:
2Mbit/s Tributary
• Tributary Enable. Used status of the tributary:
• Disable. The tributary is not active (tributary not used). In this case, the alarms are
inhibited and LOS alarm becomes active if, with tributary disabled, the signal is howe-
ver connected.
• Enable. The tributary is active (tributary used). In this case, the controller does not
inhibit the alarms.
• Disable No Inv. The tributary is not active (tributary not used). In this case, the
alarms are inhibited and LOS alarm is NOT given if, with tributary disabled, the signal
is however connected.
• Tributary Loop. Activation status of the loop:
Loop Loop on Loop

on line internal is
side is side is inactive
active active
J2 Path Trace
• Trace Type. Path Trace status:
• Disable. The control of the Path Trace is disabled.
• Enable. The control of the Path Trace is enabled.
• Trace Sent. Transmitted string of control characters
• Trace Expected. The string of characters to be controlled in reception.
Signal Label
• Trace Expected. Specification, which the received Signal Label value is referred to.
• Trace Sent. Specification which the transmitted Signal Label value is referred to.
The list of displayed options depends on the equipment type.
(4) Push-button:
• Apply. It executes the changes made to the configuration parameters.
• Refresh. It updates the data present in the window.
To display/modify the configuration of a Path protected
NMS5LX 6.4.8 - MN.00272.E - 001 462

2. Select the Path protected (Protection option - Protected value).
3. Select the Options > Path: Protection Parameters command.

The Path: Protection Parameters window opens where the configuration of a Path protected is displayed
(Fig.93).
Here below are listed the operations which can be executed using the items present in the window.
To modify the management of the switching between the Path A and Path B
Operation of maintenance (MAN. OP).
a. In the Forced Switch box relevant to the wished equipment (source/destination), set:
• Auto. The switching is automatically managed according to the presence of the alarms.
• Force PATH-A. The equipment is forced to use the Path A for the service.
• Force PATH-B. The equipment is forced to use the Path B for the service.
b. Press Apply.
Forcing the switching activates the MAN. OP alarm. If the equipment is turned off and then
turned on again, the functioning of the switch is an automatic one without taking into account
the preceding setting.
To modify the management of the preferential Path

a. In the Preferential box relevant to the wished equipment (source/destination), set:
• Not Revertive, without the presence of alarms (that cause the switching), the equipment
does not use a Path in a preferential manner with respect to the other one.
• Revertive PATH-A, without the presence of alarms (that cause the switching), the equip-
ment use the Path A.
• Revertive PATH-B, without the presence of alarms (that cause the switching), the equip-
ment use the Path-B.
b. Press Apply.
Fig.93 Path Protection Parameters window
Output channels of Paths A Current status of the Input channels of Paths A

and B from the source NE (2) Path A and Path B (3) and B in the destination E (2)
Menu
bar (1)
Logic Logic
address address
of the of the
source destination
NE NE
Input Output
channel channel
of Path of the Path
in NE in the
source destination
2) NE (2)
Push-
buttons
bar (4)
Modality used to Modality used to Modality used to Modality used to manage

manage the function manage the switch manage the function the switch between the
of Preferential Path between Path A and B of preferential Path for Paths A and B for the
for the source NE (5) for the source NE (6) the destination NE (5) destination NE (6)
NMS5LX 6.4.8 - MN.00272.E - 001 463

Fig.93 notes
(1) Menu:
(2) Remember that the Path is a BIDIRECTIONAL route. In figure, for explanation clearness, we con-
sider an hypothetical route entering in the input channel of the source equipment and exiting from
the output channel of the destination equipment.
(3) The status of the switch is pointed out when the NE is connected to the management system.
(4) Push-button:
• Apply. It applies the changes made to the configuration parameters.
• Refresh. It updates the data present in the window.
(5) Value:
• Not Revertive, without the presence of alarms (that cause the switching), the equipment
does not use a Path in a preferential manner with respect to the other one.
• Revertive PATH-A, without the presence of alarms (that cause the switching), the equipment
use the Path A.
• Revertive PATH-B, without the presence of alarms (that cause the switching), the equipment
use the Path-B.
(6) Value:
• Auto. The switching is automatically managed according to the presence of the alarms.
• Force PATH-A. The equipment is forced to use the Path A for the service.
• Force PATH-B. The equipment is forced to use the Path B for the service.
To search and highlight a Path in the Ring Manager window in which it is con-
tained
2. Select the Path you wish to search and highlight.

• Select the Options > Path: Highlight command.
• Press the right mouse button and select Highlight Selected Path,
If not already open, the Ring Manager window is displayed containing the selected Path. The Path is
highlighted in the window.
To search and highlight in the map window, the Ring symbol in which it is
present a Path
2. Select the Path.
3. Select the Options > Ring: Highlight command.

In the map window the Ring symbol, in which it is present a Path, is highlighted.
To filter/sort the list of the Path
NMS5LX 6.4.8 - MN.00272.E - 001 464

The Path Browser: Filter window opens.
• Match Path Status. Status of the Path (the color of the box, when active, reflects the color as-
sociated to the status). Activating the box:
• Not Actuated (red), the Paths, which the realization is failed for, will be displayed.
• Failure (red), the Paths with locked traffic will be displayed.
• Incomplete (orange), the Paths, which the realization of one of the two routes (A or B)
is failed for, will be displayed. Value meaningful only for protected Paths.
• Degraded (yellow), the Paths, whose traffic on the mail route regularly transits while the
stand-by route is not available, will be displayed. Value meaningful only for protected
Paths.
• Warning (light blue), will the displayed the Paths for which:
• No alarm information is available for, at least, one of the equipment implementing
the Path (status Warning).
• The input or output channel of the Path itself is disabled (status Disabled).
• Running (green), the Paths, whose traffic regularly transits, will be displayed.
• Off Line (brown), the not managed Paths will be displayed.
• Match Path on Ring. Paths present in the specific Rings.
To set the criterion, select one or more Rings in the area on the right and press Add.
The values set in this way are inserted in the area on the left.
• Match Path Through Equipment. Path implemented by specific equipment.
It is possible to set the equipment by means of one of the following ways:
and press Add From Map.
The set values in this way will be inserted in the area next to the Match Path Through Equipment
box.
It is possible to delete a single item from the list pressing, after having highlighted it, the Delete
push-button or all the items contemporarily pressing Delete All.
• Match Path Through Link. Paths passing through specific Links.
• Select one or more Link, directly in the Ring Manager window and press Add from Map.
The set values in this way will be inserted in the area next to the Match Path Thought Link box.
It is possible to delete a single item from the list pressing, after having highlighted it, the Delete
push-button or all the items contemporarily pressing Delete All.
• Sort by. Criterion used to sort the list in increasing alphabetic order: numbers from 0 to 9, letters
from A to Z).
To set the criterion, activate the option:
• Path Name. The Paths will be sorted with respect to the Path name.
• Path Source. The Paths will be sorted with respect to the logic address of the source NE.
• Path Destination. The Paths will be sorted with respect to the logic address of the desti-
nation NE.
• Path Protection. The Paths will be sorted with respect to the protection.
The system displays in the RM - Path Browser window only the record that satisfy specific criteria.
When the RM - Path Browser window is closed, the possible activation of the filters is automatically
cleared.
NMS5LX 6.4.8 - MN.00272.E - 001 465

LOCATE > RM-EQUIPMENT BROWSER

The RM-Equipment Browser command displays the list of the equipment present in the Rings of the cur-
rent map.
• To display the list of the equipment present in the Rings of the current map (pag.466)
• To filter the equipment list (pag.467)
• To search and highlight the equipment symbol in the relevant Ring Manager window (pag.468)
To display the list of the equipment present in the Rings of the current map
1. Select the Ring Manager > Locate > RM-Equipment Browser command.
The RM - Equipment Browser window opens where the list of the equipment present in the Rings of the
current map is displayed (Fig.94).
Fig.94 RM - Equipment Browser window
Menu
bar (1)
Equipment
list (2)
Status
bar (3)
Fig.94 notes
(1) Menu:
• Options > Find equipment. It search and highlight the equipment symbol in the relevant Ring
Manager window.
• View > Filter. It updates the information contained in the window.

• Name. Logical address of the equipment.
The wording Virtual points out that the record refers to a virtual NE (Ring Manager).
• Ring. Ring name in which the equipment is present.
NMS5LX 6.4.8 - MN.00272.E - 001 466

• Physical Address. Physical address of the equipment.
The wording VIRTUAL EQ. Points out that the record refers to a virtual NE (NMS5LX or Ring
Manager).
The information corresponds to the characteristics/operating status of the equipment when the RM
- Equipment Browser window has been opened or updated.
A double click on an equipment record opens the Ring Manager window containing the equipment.
The equipment is highlighted in the Ring Manager window.
(3) Field:
To filter the equipment list (RM-Equipment Browser)
The RM - Equipment Browser window opens(Fig.94).
The Eq. Browser: Filter window opens.
• Match Name. Logic address of the NE.
To set the criteria, type the logical address of the NE in the text field.
The text field for the typing of the equipment name is case sensitive. Then pay attention to the
typing of the upper-case letters and of the lower-case letters.
• Match Type. Equipment type.
• Match Ring. Equipment present in the specific Rings of the current map.
To set the criterion, in the right area, select one or more Rings and press Add.
The set values in this way will be inserted in the left area.
• Match Physical Address. Type (real or virtual) and physical address of equipment.
• Real, activate the IP Equipment option and type the IP address of the wished NE in the
text fields.
The system displays in the RM - Equipment Browser window only the records that satisfy the activated
criteria.
When the RM - Equipment Browser window closes, the possible activation of filters is automatically de-
leted.
NMS5LX 6.4.8 - MN.00272.E - 001 467

To search and highlight the equipment symbol in the relevant Ring Manager
window
The RM - Equipment Browser window opens (Fig.94).
2. Select the equipment you wish to highlight.
3. Select the Options > Find equipment command.

If not already open, the Ring Manager window is displayed containing the selected equipment. The
equipment is highlighted in the window.
The operation can be executed even by a double click on the equipment record in the RM - Equipment
Browser window.
NMS5LX 6.4.8 - MN.00272.E - 001 468

VLAN MANAGER
The VLAN Manager menu is available only if the VLAN Map Manager application have been installed.
For the use of the VLAN Map Manager application refer to the specific documentation.
The VM-Add VLAN Map, VM-Delete VLAN Map and VM-Modify/View VLAN Map commands are used
to represent graphically the VLAN Map objects in the maps and to provide to NMS5LX system the param-
eters to manage and control them.
The VLAN Map objects are used to identify subnetworks of radio equipment with Lan Ethernet tributaries
which implement virtual LAN paths (VLAN path).
The VLAN Map Manager menu contains the following commands:
• Edit > VM-Add VLAN Map (pag.470). It creates VLAN Map objects for the graphic represen-
tation of the network in the map.
• Edit > VM-Delete VLAN Map (pag.471). It deletes a VLAN Map symbol from the map.
• Edit > VM-Modify/View VLAN Map (pag.472). It displays/modifies the characteristics of a
VLAN Map object.
• Fault > VM-Network Alarm History (pag.473). It displays/manages the alarm history of the
equipment present in the VLAN Maps managed by the supervision system.
• Fault > VM-Network Current Alarm (pag.481). It displays/manages the alarms active in the
equipment present in the VLAN Maps managed by the supervision system.
• Fault > VM-Element Alarm History (pag.487). It displays/manages the alarm history of the
equipment present in the specific VLAN Map.
• Fault > VM-Element Current Alarm (pag.488). It displays/manages the alarms active in the
equipment present in the specific VLAN Map.
• Locate > VM-VLAN Map Browser (pag.489). It displays the list of the VLAN Maps managed
by the supervision system.
• Locate > VM-Equipment Browser (pag.491). It displays the list of the equipment present in
the VLAN Maps of the current map.
NMS5LX 6.4.8 - MN.00272.E - 001 469

EDIT > VM-ADD VLAN MAP

The VM-Add VLAN Map command creates VLAN Map objects for the graphic representation of the network
in the map.
To create VLAN Map objects
It is possible to create all the wished VLAN Map objects.
wish to create the VLAN Map.
2. Select the VLAN Manager > Edit > VM-Add VLAN Map command.
The Add VLAN Manager Map window opens.
3. Type the name of the VLAN Map (alphanumeric string of minimum 1 character and maximum 32 char-
acters) in the Label box.
The name will be displayed under the object symbol and will constitute the name of the window that is
opened at the double selection of the symbol.
The VLAN Map is displayed in the New Object Area of the LX Map Manager window (Fig.1). Move the
If the created VLAN Map symbol is already present in a map, it automatically will acquire the status and
the characteristics of the existing object.
NMS5LX 6.4.8 - MN.00272.E - 001 470

EDIT > VM-DELETE VLAN MAP

The VM-Delete VLAN Map command deletes a VLAN Map symbol from the map.
To delete a VLAN Map object from the map
If a VLAN Map object is present only in one map, can be deleted only if it does not contain objects
(equipment, Link, VLAN path, etc.)
If the same VLAN Map object is present in more maps, it is possible to delete the symbol even if it contains
objects, except for the last copy for which the above mentioned rule is valid: it can be deleted only if empty.
1. Into the LX Map Manager window select the VLAN Map object you wish to delete.
2. Select the VLAN Manager > Edit > VM-Delete VLAN Map command or press the right mouse button,
select Delete and confirm.
NMS5LX 6.4.8 - MN.00272.E - 001 471

EDIT > VM-MODIFY/VIEW VLAN MAP

Reading/Writing Read–Write
The VM-Modify/View VLAN Map command displays/modifies the characteristics of a VLAN Map object.
To verify/modify the parameters of a VLAN Map object
It is not possible to assign the same name to two different VLAN Map objects.
If the same VLAN Map object has been created into two different maps, at the changing of the parameter
values of such a VLAN Map object into a map, the system automatically changes the values of the param-
eters relevant to the same object into the other map.
1. Into the LX Map Manager window select the wished VLAN Map object.
2. Select the VLAN Manager > Edit > VM-Modify/View VLAN Map command or press the right mouse
button and select Modify/View.
The VLAN Manager Properties window opens.
Box/area:
• Label. VLAN Map name.
• Type. VLAN Map symbol.
It is possible to change the Label and Comment parameters. The setting mode of the parameters is the
same one pointed out to pag.470.
In the LX Map Manager window, the VLAN Map assumes the new characteristics.
NMS5LX 6.4.8 - MN.00272.E - 001 472

FAULT > VM-NETWORK ALARM HISTORY

The VM-Network Alarm History command displays/manages the history of the alarm/status/event sig-
nallings (alarms) stored in the VLAN Manager database, of the equipment present in the VLAN Maps man-
aged by the supervision system.
• To display the alarm history of the equipment present in the VLAN Maps managed by the super-
vision system (pag.473)
• To realign the alarm table of VLAN Manager to that of NMS5LX (pag.476).

To display the alarm history of the equipment present in the VLAN Maps
managed by the supervision system
1. Select the VLAN Manager > Fault > VM-Network Alarm History command.
The VM - Alarm History window opens, where the alarm history stored in the VLAN Manager database,
of the equipment present in the VLAN Maps managed by the NMS5LX is displayed (Fig.95).
er than 5000.
oldest one, until 5000.
The 5000 limit is not a memory limit, but simply a limit in the displaying of the alarms.
In order to read the alarms successive to 5000, it is sufficient to delete some records or modify the
filters.
NMS5LX 6.4.8 - MN.00272.E - 001 473

Fig.95 VM - Alarm History window
Menu
bar (1)
Alarms
list (2)
Status
bar (3)
Fig.95 notes
(1) Menu:
• Actions > Delete. It deletes one or more records from the list and database.
• Actions > Alarm Synchronization. It re-aligns the alarms table between NMS5LX and VLAN
Manager.

• Ack. Marking status of the record. If the field is empty, the alarm has not been marked. If
the X character is present the record has been marked.
Each alarm can be acknowledged twice: the first time when the alarm is detected. When the
alarm clears, the character X is removed from the record and the user can acknowledge it
the second time.
NMS5LX 6.4.8 - MN.00272.E - 001 474

In any moment, it is possible to display the acknowledge information of an alarm moving to
the record and pressing the right mouse button. A pop-up window is displayed with the detail
of the acknowledge. The content of the window is the same described at pag.479.
• SET Date/Time. Date and time of the alarm detection.
• CLEAR Date/Time. Date and time of the alarm clearing.
generated by the VLAN Manager application. The events of this type are the loss of configu-
ration alignment between the databases of VLAN Manager and NMS5LX, the start or the stop
of anyone of the platform processes of VLAN Manager and the stop of all the platform.
troller.
(3) The symbol:

Field:
To save the alarms list (VM-Network Alarm History)
The VM - Alarm History window opens (Fig.95).
2. To save to a file:
• The displayed alarms, select the File > Save > Filtered command. If no filter is active, the
displayed records correspond to the records stored in the database.
4. Press Ok.
To delete the alarms (VM-Network Alarm History)
2. To delete from the list and from the database of supervision system:
• A group of alarms, select the records and then the Actions > Delete > Selected Alarms com-
mand.
• The displayed alarms, select the Actions > Delete > Filtered Alarms command. If the filters
• All the alarms of the database, select the Actions > Delete > All Alarms command.
NMS5LX 6.4.8 - MN.00272.E - 001 475

To mark the alarms (VM-Network Alarm History)
Each alarm can be acknowledged twice: the first time when the alarm is detected. When the alarm clears,
the character X is removed from the record and the user can acknowledge it the second time. In this second
case (if already set during the first acknowledge), the value of the Trouble Identification Code parameter
cannot be modified.
2. To mark:
Alarms command.
• The displayed alarms, select the Actions > Acknowledge > Filtered Alarms command. If the
5. Press Ok.
If more records are selected for the operation, the setting of the Trouble Identification Code and Com-
ment parameters are for all the records.
If one or more detected and cleared alarms are selected, the setting of the Trouble Identification Code
and Comment parameters applies both for the set event (SET) and for the clear event (CLEAR).
To realign the alarm table of VLAN Manager to that of NMS5LX (VM-Network

Alarm History)

The information present in the database of VLAN Manager and relevant to the alarms are re-aligned to
To activate/deactivate the automatic updating of the data (VM-Network

Alarm History)
NMS5LX 6.4.8 - MN.00272.E - 001 476

To filter the alarms list (VM-Network Alarm History)

played.
• Occurred After and Occurred Before. Date/time of the alarm. Activating the box.
second.
• Match VLAN. Criterion not available in this context.
• Match VLAN Map. Alarms of the equipment present in the specific VLAN Maps.
To set the criterion, in the VLAN Map List area, select one or more VLAN Maps and press Add.
To set the criterion, select one or more Link, directly in the VLAN Manager Map window and press
Add Link from Map.
It is possible to delete all the items contemporarily pressing Remove All.
To set the criterion, select the symbol or the symbols of the wished NEs, directly in the VLAN
Manager Map window and press Add Equipment From Map.
• Type the wished string in the text field.
NMS5LX 6.4.8 - MN.00272.E - 001 477

• Select a record in the VM - Alarm History window and press Get Message from selected
Alarm.
The system displays in the VM - Alarm History window only the record that satisfy specific criteria.
When the VM - Alarm History window is closed, the possible activation of the filters is automatically
cleared.
To sort the alarms list (VM-Network Alarm History)


• Registration, the alarms will be sorted according to the date/time of recording in the VLAN Man-
ager database.

6. Press OK (it executes the sorting and closes the window) or Apply (it executes the sorting and does
The VM - Alarm History window will list the records in the set order.
NMS5LX 6.4.8 - MN.00272.E - 001 478

To display the acknowledge information of an alarm (VM-Network Alarm
History)

Fig.96 Acknowledge Information (VM - Alarm History) window
Identification
Code
(1)
Detailed
Detailed information
information of the
of the acknowledge
acknowledge when the signal
when the signal was in status:
was in status: detected and
detected cleared
(2) (3) (2) (3)
Fig.96 notes
(2) Option:
• Time. Moment when the record has been acknowledged <day-month-year hour:min-
utes:seconds>.
present in the SET:... and CLEAR:... areas are the same.
Modality of the updating of data (VM-Network Alarm History)
The information present in the VM - Alarm History window are dynamically updated only if the procedure
At the opening of the VM - Alarm History window, the procedure of automatic updating of the informa-
The setting of the filters or the criteria used to sort the records in a VM - Alarm History window does not
influence the displaying of the information in the other open VM - Alarm History windows or in the VM -
Current Alarms window.
NMS5LX 6.4.8 - MN.00272.E - 001 479

Modality of recording of the alarms (VM-Network Alarm History)
The alarms are stored in the database managed by VLAN Manager application (database of VLAN Manager).
The application stores to disk all the alarms up to a limit N (configurable by Superuser - default 50000).
When this limit is reached, the system automatically removes the oldest X alarms (X configurable by Su-
peruser - default 1000).
During this period, it is possible to manually delete the alarms (pag.475). It is suggested to periodically
delete and/or store to file the less meaningful records, so to avoid the saturation of the database.
NMS5LX 6.4.8 - MN.00272.E - 001 480

FAULT > VM-NETWORK CURRENT ALARM

The VM - Network Current Alarm command displays/manages the alarm/status/event signallings

(alarms) active in the equipment present in the VLAN Maps managed by the supervision system.
• To display the alarms active in the equipment present in the VLAN Maps managed by the super-
vision system (pag.481)
• To realign the alarm table of VLAN Manager to that of NMS5LX (pag.483)
• To display the acknowledge information of a alarm (pag.485)
As help to the description of the command, see par. Modality of the updating of data (pag.486).
To display the alarms active in the equipment present in the VLAN Maps
managed by the supervision system
1. Select the VLAN Manager > Fault > VM-Network Current Alarm command.
The VM - Current Alarms window opens, where the list of the alarms active in the equipment present
in the VLAN Maps managed by the supervision system is displayed (Fig.97).
Fig.97 VM - Current Alarms window
Menu
bar (1)
Alarms
list (2)
Status
bar (3)
NMS5LX 6.4.8 - MN.00272.E - 001 481

Fig.97 notes
(1) Menu:
• Actions > Alarm Synchronization. It re-aligns the alarms table between NMS5LX and VLAN
Manager.

• Severity. Type of signalling: alarm, status and event; for the alarms also the severity is dis-
played. The parameter is represented by a coloured box and by a wording, in detail:
Green Normal Event signallings
If the field is empty, the alarm has not been marked; if the X character is present, the alarm
has been marked.
generated by the VLAN Manager application. The events of this type are the loss of configu-
ration alignment between the databases of VLAN Manager and NMS5LX, the start or the stop
of anyone of the platform processes of VLAN Manager and the stop of all the platform.
(3) The symbol:

Field:
To save the alarms list (VM-Network Current Alarm)
The VM - Current Alarms window opens (Fig.97).
2. To save to file:
• The displayed alarms, select the File > Save > Filtered command. If filters are not active, the
displayed records corresponds to the records stored in the database.
NMS5LX 6.4.8 - MN.00272.E - 001 482

4. Press Ok.
To mark the alarms (VM-Network Current Alarm)
2. To mark:
Alarms command.
• The displayed alarms, select the Actions > Acknowledge > Filtered Alarms command. If fil-
5. Press Ok.
If more records are selected for the operation, the settings of the Trouble Identification Code and Com-
ment parameters applies for all the records.
To realign the alarm table of VLAN Manager to that of NMS5LX (VM-Network

Current Alarm)

The information present in the database of VLAN Manager and relevant to the alarms are realigned to
To activate/deactivate the automatic updating of the data (VM-Network

Current Alarm)
NMS5LX 6.4.8 - MN.00272.E - 001 483

To filter the alarms list (VM-Network Current Alarm)

• Match Severity. Type of signalling (alarm/status/event) and for the alarms their severity (the
colour of the box, when it is active, reflects the colour associated to the severity of the alarm or
the type of signalling). Activating the box/option:
• Occurred After and Occurred Before. Date/time of the alarms. Activating the box:
second.
• Match VLAN. Criterion not available in this context.
• Match VLAN Map. Alarms of the equipment present in the specific VLAN Maps.
To set the criterion, in the VLAN Map List area, select one or more VLAN Maps and press Add.
To set the criterion select one or more Link, directly in the VLAN Manager Map window and press
Add Link from Map.
To set the criterion select the symbol or the symbols of the wished NEs, directly in the VLAN
Manager Map window and press Add Equipment From Map.
• Type the wished string in the text field.
• Select a record in the VM - Current Alarm window and press Get Message from select-
ed Alarm.
Activating the box:
• Match Acknowledged, the marked records will be displayed.
NMS5LX 6.4.8 - MN.00272.E - 001 484

• Match Unacknowledged, the record not yet marked will be displayed.
The system displays in the VM - Current Alarms window only the record that satisfy specific criteria.
When the VM - Current Alarm window is closed, the possible activation of the filters is automatically
cleared.
To sort the alarms list (VM-Network Current Alarm)


• Registration, the alarms will be sorted according to the date/time of recording in the VLAN Man-
ager database.

The VM - Current Alarms window will list the records in the set order.
To display the acknowledge information of an alarm (VM-Network Current

Alarm)
NMS5LX 6.4.8 - MN.00272.E - 001 485


Fig.98 Acknowledge Information (VM - Current Alarms) window
Identification
Code
(1)
Detailed Area not

information of meaningful
acknowledge in this
(2) context
Fig.98 notes
(2) Option:
• Time. Moment when the record has been acknowledged <day-month-year hour:min-
utes:seconds>.
Modality of the updating of data (VM-Network Current Alarm)
The information present in the VM - Current Alarm window are dynamically updated only if the procedure
At the opening of the VM - Current Alarm window, the procedure of automatic updating of the informa-
NMS5LX 6.4.8 - MN.00272.E - 001 486

FAULT > VM-ELEMENT ALARM HISTORY

The VM-Element Alarm History command displays/manages the history of the alarm/status/event sig-
nallings (alarms) stored in the VLAN Manager database, relevant the equipment present ONLY to the se-
lected VLAN Map.
The choice of the command opens the <VLAN Map name> Alarm History window.
par. VM-Network Alarm History (pag.473).
The VM-Element Alarm History command is available only if it has been selected a single VLAN Map in
the LX Map Manager window.
NMS5LX 6.4.8 - MN.00272.E - 001 487

FAULT > VM-ELEMENT CURRENT ALARM

The VM-Element Current Alarm command displays/manages the alarm/status/event signallings

(alarms) active in the equipment present ONLY to the selected VLAN Map.
The choice of the command opens the <VLAN Map name> Current Alarm window.
par. VM-Network Current Alarm (pag.481).
The VM-Element Current Alarm command is available only if it has been selected a single VLAN Map in
the LX Map Manager window.
NMS5LX 6.4.8 - MN.00272.E - 001 488

LOCATE > VM-VLAN MAP BROWSER

The VM-VLAN Map Browser displays the list of the VLAN Maps managed by the NMS5LX.

• To display the list of the VLAN Maps managed by the NMS5LX (pag.489)
• To open the VLAN Manager Map window (pag.490)
• To search and highlight in the map the symbol of a VLAN Map (pag.490)
• To filter the list of the VLAN Map (pag.490)
To display the list of the VLAN Maps managed by the NMS5LX
1. Select the VLAN Manager > Locate > VM-VLAN Map Browser command.
The VLAN Map Browser window opens, where the list of the VLAN Maps managed by the supervision
system NMS5LX is displayed (Fig.99).
Fig.99 VLAN Map Browser window
Menu
bar (1)
VLAN Map
list (2)
Status
bar (3)
Fig.99 notes
(1) Menu:
• Options > Find VLAN Map. It searches and highlights in the map the symbol of a VLAN Map
• Options > Open VLAN Map. It opens the VLAN Manager Map window.
(2) For each VLAN Map the name corresponding to the name of the relevant VLAN Map symbol in the
map is pointed out.
Criterion not available in this context.
(3) Field:
• VLAN Map Nb: xx of yy. Number of displayed records (xx) and number of total records (yy).
If no filter is active, the number of displayed records corresponds to the number of total
records.
• Filter. Box for the activation of the filter (see pag.490).
NMS5LX 6.4.8 - MN.00272.E - 001 489

To open the VLAN Manager Map window
The VLAN Map Browser window opens (Fig.99).
2. Select the VLAN Map.
3. Select the Options > Open VLAN Map command.

The VLAN Manager Map window of the selected VLAN Map, opens.
If the message Cannot open VLAN Map created in another map is displayed, it is not possible to open
the VLAN Manager Map window as the selected VLAN Map is not present in the current map.
The VLAN Manager Map window can be opened also by a double click on the VLAN Map record.
To search and highlight in the map the symbol of a VLAN Map
2. Select the VLAN Map you wish to highlight.

3. Select the Options > Find VLAN Map command.
In the LX Map Manager window, the symbol of the selected VLAN Map is highlighted.
If the message Cannot highlight VLAN Map created in another map is displayed, it is not possible to
highlight the symbol as the selected VLAN Map is not present in the current map.
To filter the list of the VLAN Map
2. Type the letters/numbers present in the name of the wished VLAN Map objects in the text box (status
bar).
3. Press Filter.
The VLAN Map Browser window displayed only the VLAN Map whose name contains the set letters/num-
bers.
NMS5LX 6.4.8 - MN.00272.E - 001 490

LOCATE > VM-EQUIPMENT BROWSER

The VM-Equipment Browser command displays the list of the equipment present in the VLAN Maps of
the current map.
• To display the list of the equipment present in the VLAN Maps of the current map (pag.491)
• To filter the equipment list (pag.492)
• To search and highlight the equipment symbol in the relevant VLAN Manager Map window
(pag.493)
To display the list of the equipment present in the VLAN Maps of the current
map
1. Select the VLAN Manager > Locate > VM-Equipment Browser command.
The VM - Equipment Browser window opens where the list of the equipment present in the VLAN Maps
of the current map is displayed (Fig.100).
Fig.100 VM - Equipment Browser window
Menu
bar (1)
Equipment
list (2)
Status
bar (3)
Fig.100 notes
(1) Menu:
• Options > Find equipment. It search and highlight the equipment symbol in the relevant
VLAN Manager Map window.
• View > Filter. It updates the information contained in the window.

• Name. Logical address of the equipment.
The wording Virtual Switch points out that the record refers to a virtual NE (VLAN Manager).
• VLAN Map. VLAN Map name in which the equipment is present.
NMS5LX 6.4.8 - MN.00272.E - 001 491

• Physical Address. Physical address of the equipment.
The wording VIRTUAL EQ. Points out that the record refers to a virtual NE (NMS5LX).
The information corresponds to the characteristics/operating status of the equipment when the VM
- Equipment Browser window has been opened or updated.
A double click on an equipment record opens the VLAN Manager Map window containing the equip-
ment.
(3) Field:
To filter the equipment list (VM-Equipment Browser)
The VM - Equipment Browser window opens (Fig.100).

The Eq. Browser: Filter window opens.
• Match Name. Logic address of the NE.
To set the criteria, type the logical address of the NE in the text field.
The text field for the typing of the equipment name is case sensitive. Then pay attention to the
typing of the upper-case letters and of the lower-case letters.
• Match Type. Equipment type.
• Match VLAN Manager Map. Equipment present in the specific VLAN Maps of the current map.
To set the criterion, in the right area, select one or more VLAN Maps and press Add.
The set values in this way will be inserted in the left area.
• Match Physical Address. Type (real or virtual) and physical address of equipment.
• Real, activate the IP Equipment option and type the IP address of the wished NE in the
text fields.
The system displays in the VM - Equipment Browser window only the records that satisfy the activated
criteria.
When the VM - Equipment Browser window closes, the possible activation of filters is automatically de-
leted.
NMS5LX 6.4.8 - MN.00272.E - 001 492

To search and highlight the equipment symbol in the relevant VLAN Manager
Map window
The VM - Equipment Browser window opens (Fig.100).
2. Select the equipment you wish to highlight.
3. Select the Options > Find equipment command.

If not already open, the VLAN Manager Map window is displayed containing the selected equipment.
The operation can be executed even by a double click on the equipment record in the VM - Equipment
Browser window.
NMS5LX 6.4.8 - MN.00272.E - 001 493

HELP
The Help menu contains the following commands:
• About NMS5LX (pag.495). It displays the version of the NMS5LX system present on one's ma-
chine.
• License Information (pag.496). It displays the details of the codewords relevant to its own
supervisory system.
• Display Legend (pag.497). It displays the legend of the colours which the objects present in
the LX Map Manager window can assume.
• NMS5LX Software Module (pag.498). It displays the list of the programs that constitute the
NMS5LX software package.
• System Administrator (pag.500). It opens the NMS5LX system administrator manual.
• Overview (pag.501). It opens the NMS5LX user manual.
• … Manager (pag.502). It opens the equipment user manual.
NMS5LX 6.4.8 - MN.00272.E - 001 494

ABOUT NMS5LX

The About NMS5LX command displays the version of the NMS5LX system present on one's machine.
NMS5LX 6.4.8 - MN.00272.E - 001 495

LICENSE INFORMATION

The License Information command displays the details of the codewords relevant to its own supervisory
system.
To display the detail of the codewords relevant to its own supervisory sys-
tem
1. Select the Help > License Information command.

The License Information window opens. Into the following fields, it points out:
• Codeword. Version of the codewords present on its own NMS5LX system.

• Max User. Maximum number of NMS5UX users that can open the NMS5LX graphical interface
(using the same map or different maps).
• Max Network Element. Maximum number of equipment that can be managed at the same time
by NMS5LX system.
• Expiration Time. Possible expiring date of the codewords.
The wording “-” points out that the codewords do not have an expiring date.
• Network Element Type. Types of the equipment managed by its own NMS5LX system.
NMS5LX 6.4.8 - MN.00272.E - 001 496

DISPLAY LEGEND

The Display Legend command displays the legend of the colours which the objects present in the LX Map
Manager window can assume.
To display the legend of the colours which the objects can assume
1. Select the Help > Display Legend command.

The Display Legend window is displayed where are pointed out the colours which the objects of the LX
Map Manager window can assume.
Each colour represents a status or alarm condition which, colours being equal, can vary depending on
the type of object which is referred to.
Tab.4, for each object, points out the colours which the relevant icon can assume and the description
of the condition they represent.
NMS5LX 6.4.8 - MN.00272.E - 001 497

NMS5LX SOFTWARE MODULE

The NMS5LX Software Module command displays the list of the programs that constitute the NMS5LX
software package.
• To verify the list of the programs that constitute the NMS5LX software package (pag.498)
• To print the programs list (pag.499).
To verify the list of the programs that constitute the NMS5LX software pack-
age
1. Select the Help > NMS5LX Software Module command.

The NMS5UX Version window opens, where the list of the programs that constitute the NMS5LX soft-
ware package is displayed (Fig.101).
Fig.101 NMS5UX Version window
Menu
bar (1)
Programs
list (2)
Fig.101 notes
(1) Menu:
• File > Print. It prints the content of the widow on the default printer.
(2) Column:
• Program. Program name.
• Version. Program version.
• Dimension. Program dimensions expressed through byte.
• Date. Issuing date of the program.
• Path. Program path on the server/workstation.
NMS5LX 6.4.8 - MN.00272.E - 001 498

To print the list of programs
1. Select the Help > NMS5LX Software Module command.

The NMS5UX Version window opens (Fig.101).
2. Select the File > Print command.

The content of the window printed on the default printer.
NMS5LX 6.4.8 - MN.00272.E - 001 499

SYSTEM ADMINISTRATOR

The System Administrator command opens the NMS5LX system administrator manual.
NMS5LX 6.4.8 - MN.00272.E - 001 500

OVERVIEW

The Overview command opens the NMS5LX user manual.
NMS5LX 6.4.8 - MN.00272.E - 001 501

… MANAGER

The <equipment type> Manager command opens the user manual relevant to the specific equipment
type.
In the Help menu, only the manuals of the equipment managed by one's NMS5LX will be available.
NMS5LX 6.4.8 - MN.00272.E - 001 502

APPENDICES
MENUS AND COMMANDS
Tab.13 points out the menus and the commands present in the LX Map Manager window (Fig.1).
For each command, the access to the map and the user profile necessary for the availability of the com-
mand in the window, are reported. In detail
• Map access column. Wording:

• RO/RW. Command available both in the map with Read Only access and in the map with
Read-Write access.
• RW. Command available only in the map with Read-Write access.
• User profile column. Wording:
• S. Command available to the Superuser.
• P. Command available to the user with privileged profile.
• A. Command available to the user with advanced profile.
• N. Command available to the user with normal profile.
• E. Command available to the user with entry profile.
The list of the menus/commands in table is the DEFAULT one present at the installation of the NMS5LX
system. The list can be configured by the Superuser. For more information refer to NMS5LX Administrator
Manual.
Some commands are optional ones. Then, such commands can be absent into the specific menu of its own
NMS5LX system.
NMS5LX 6.4.8 - MN.00272.E - 001 503

Fig. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17
Tab.13 Menus/commands (LX Map Manager window)
Menus Commands Map access User profile
Refresh RO/RW SPANE
Map Properties RW SPA
Submap Properties RW SPA

Map
Import/Export RO/RW SPA
Change Map RO/RW SP 1
Exit RO/RW SPANE
1 The Privileged user cannot delete the map.

2 For the subject profile/map access it is possible only to verify the parameters.
3 For the subject profile/map access it is possible both to verify and to modify the parameters.
4 Optional command.
5 The Action > Bench Switch command is not available to the entry user.
6 The entry user can only verify the data.
7 The Actions > Map Structure Rebuild command is available only to Superuser.
The Commands > Command Executor command is available only to the Superuser and to the users with
privileged or advanced profile.
For the Superuser, the list refers to all the NEs of all the maps managed by NMS5LX. For the privileged,
advanced, normal, entry profile, the list refers only to the NEs of one’s map.
8 The Action > Delete and Action > Acknowledge commands are not available to normal and entry
users.
9 The Action > Delete Records command is not available to the normal and entry user.
For the Superuser, the operations refer to all the users of all the maps managed by NMS5LX. For the pri-
vileged and advanced profile, the operations refer only to the users of one's map
10 The privileged, advanced, normal and entry users can only acknowledge an operator and re-enable
him to receive e-mails.
11 The privileged, advanced, normal and entry users can only modify one's password.
12 The Action > Force Logout and Action > Forced Exit commands are available only to Superuser.
13 The Action > Force Logout command is not available to the normal and entry user.
NMS5LX 6.4.8 - MN.00272.E - 001 504

Container RW SPA
Network Element RW SPA
Virtual Network Element RW SPA
Add Generic Symbol RW SPA
Link RW SPA
Label RW SPA
Network From File RW SPA
Delete RW SPA
2 3 2 3
Network Element RO RW NE SPA
2 3 2 3
Container RO RW NE SPA
Edit Modify/ 2 3 2 3
Generic Symbol RO RW NE SPA
View
2 3 2 3
Link RO RW NE SPA
2 3 2 3
Label RO RW NE SPA
Information RO/RW SPANE
Graphical Symbol Properties RO/RW SPANE

Find RO/RW SPANE
Arrange Vertical RW SPA

Symbols Horizontal RW SPA
Generate Info for WEB RW SPANE
Set Current Window Geometry For All Contai-

RW SPANE
ners
Show/Hide Map Tree RO/RW SPANE
Show/Hide Platform Status RO/RW SPANE

View
Show/Hide Link Label RO/RW SPANE
Pan and Zoom RO/RW SPANE
Performance Monitoring Read RO/RW SPANE
Performance Monitoring RO/RW SPANE

Performance
Old Performance Monitoring RO/RW SPANE
View/Modify P.M. Status RO/RW SPAN
14 The activation of the Delete Table box is available only to Superuser.

15 Menu present only if installed the modules for the management of the Ring Manager application.
16 Menu present only if installed the modules for the management of the VLAN Manager application.
17 The Path: Information, Path: Configuration Parameters and Path: Protection Parameters
commands are not available to entry users.
The Delete Path, Delete Path Protection, Add Path Protection, Path on line and Path off line are
not available to normal and entry users.
NMS5LX 6.4.8 - MN.00272.E - 001 505

Equipment Info RO/RW SPANE

5
Software Inventory RO/RW SPANE
OAM Status RO/RW SPANE
E1 Browser RO/RW SPANE

6
Configuration Equipment Port Configuration RO/RW SPANE
NE PPP Interfaces RO/RW SPANE
NE Routing Table RO/RW SPANE 6
4
Hw Inventory RO/RW SPANE
NE Backup/Restore RO/RW SPAN
Equipment List Locate RO/RW SPANE 7

Locate
Proxy Equipment List 4 RO/RW SPANE
Network Element RO/RW SPANE

Line Test
Container RO/RW SPANE

Connect
Disconnect
Force NE Disconnect RO/RW SPAN
Command Ping RO/RW SPANE

Alarm Re-alignment

Configuration Upload
Configuration Download RO/RW SPAN

Reset Equipment Controller RO/RW SPAN
PMP Clear Alarm Table RO/RW S

8
Network Alarm History RO/RW SPANE
Network Current alarms RO/RW SPANE
Old alarm history RO/RW SPANE

8
NE Alarm history RO/RW SPANE
NE Current alarms RO/RW SPANE

Fault
NE History Log RO/RW SPANE 6
NE Command Log RO/RW SPANE

Alarm Summary RO/RW SPANE
Event Statistics RO/RW SPANE

9
Transaction Log RO/RW SPANE
NMS5LX 6.4.8 - MN.00272.E - 001 506

10
Alarm Notification via e-mail RO/RW SPANE
Command Executor RO/RW SPA
NE Monitoring RO/RW SPANE
Auto Discovery RO/RW SP

Tools
6
NMS5UX History View RO/RW SPANE
Rmon
NMS5UX Statistics RO/RW SPANE 6
XML XML Export Mgmt RO/RW SPA

4
Export XML File Mgmt RO/RW SPA
Network Severity Code RO/RW S

Equipment Severity Code RO/RW SPAN
NMS5LX System Users RO/RW SPANE 11
12
NMS5LX Logged Users RO/RW SPANE
LCT Equipment Users RO/RW SP
LCT Logged Users RO/RW SPANE 13
6
Options Remote Element Table RO/RW SPANE
NE Sw/Fw Download RO/RW SPAN
Scheduled Sw Dwl Status RO/RW SPAN
NE Sw/Fw Release RO/RW SPAN
FAMxc-NE Sw/Fw Download RO/RW SPAN
FAMxc-Scheduled Sw Dwl Status RO/RW SPAN
FAMxc-NE Sw/Fw Release RO/RW SPAN
Alarm History Backup RO/RW SPA
Alarm History Restore RO/RW SP
Alarm History Delete Backup RO/RW SP
Performance Monitoring Backup RO/RW SPA 14

Misc
Performance Monitoring Restore RO/RW SP
Performance Monitoring Delete RO/RW SP

NMS5LX Global Database Backup RO/RW S
NMS5LX Global Database Restore RO/RW S
RM-Add Ring RW SPA

Edit RM-Delete Ring RW SPA
RM-Modify/View Ring RO 2 RW 3 NE 2 SPA 3
8
RM-Network Alarm History RO/RW SPANE
RM-Network Current Alarm RO/RW SPANE
Ring RM-Network Alarm Summary RO/RW SPANE

15 Fault
Manager RM-Element Alarm History RO/RW SPANE 8
RM-Element Current Alarm RO/RW SPANE
RM-Element Alarm Summary RO/RW SPANE
RM-Ring Browser RO/RW SPANE
Locate RM-Path Browser RO/RW SPANE 17
RM-Equipment Browser RO/RW SPANE
NMS5LX 6.4.8 - MN.00272.E - 001 507

VM-Add VLAN Map RW SPA
Edit VM-Delete VLAN Map RW SPA
VM-Modify/View VLAN Map RO 2 RW 3 NE 2 SPA 3
8
VM-Network Alarm History RO/RW SPANE
VLAN
16 VM-Network Current Alarm RO/RW SPANE
Manager Fault
VM-Element Alarm History RO/RW SPANE 8
VM-Element Current Alarm RO/RW SPANE
VM-VLAN Map Browser RO/RW SPANE

Locate
VM-Equipment Browser RO/RW SPANE
About NMS5LX RO/RW SPANE
License Information RO/RW S
Display Legend RO/RW SPANE
Help NMS5LX Software Module RO/RW S
System Administrator RO/RW S
Overview RO/RW SPANE

… Manager RO/RW SPANE
NMS5LX 6.4.8 - MN.00272.E - 001 508

OPERATIONS INDEX
Numbers
2Mbit/s tributary
activate/deactivate the loops ..............................................................................................199
activate/deactivate the use .................................................................................................198
verify the status ................................................................................................................196
verify/modify the label .......................................................................................................198
A
Acknowledge an operator and re-enable him to receive e-mail (entry, normal, advanced, privileged
user) (Alarm Notification via e-mail) .........................................................................................315
Acknowledge an operator and re-enable him to receive e-mail (Superuser) (Alarm Notification via
e-mail) .................................................................................................................................313
ACL
Add a rule to the IP Access Control List ................................................................................203
Enable/disable the use of the IP Access Control List ...............................................................204
Remove a rule from the IP Access Control List .......................................................................204
Acquire the configuration of one or more equipment ........................................................... 239, 254
Acquire the configuration of the equipment of one or more containers ...........................................254
Activate a measure (NE Monitoring) ..........................................................................................321
Activate an Ethernet port for the count of the history of the RMON statistics ...................................344
Activate an Ethernet port for the count of the RMON statistics ......................................................338
Activate at the same time one or more PM measures for one or more equipment of the same type ....171
Activate the management of a Path ..........................................................................................457
Activate/deactivate a PM measure point for a specific equipment ..................................................172
Activate/deactivate an operator (Alarm Notification via e-mail) .....................................................313
Activate/deactivate one or more PM measures at the same time ...................................................233
Activate/deactivate the automatic updating of the data (Network Alarm History) .............................267
Activate/deactivate the automatic updating of the data (Network Current Alarms) ..........................273
Activate/deactivate the automatic updating of the data (RM-Network Alarm History) .......................432
Activate/deactivate the automatic updating of the data (RM-Network Current Alarm) ......................438
Activate/deactivate the automatic updating of the data (VM-Network Alarm History) .......................476
Activate/deactivate the automatic updating of the data (VM-Network Current Alarm) ......................483
Activate/deactivate the tributary (Path Browser) .........................................................................460
Activate/deactivate the tributary loops (Path Browser) ................................................................460
Add a new LCT user ................................................................................................................383
Add a NMS5UX user ................................................................................................................371
Add a NMS5UX user (manual login to the LX Map Manager window - active) ...................................373
Add a station to the remote equipment list ................................................................................388
Add an equipment to the remote equipment list .........................................................................389
Add an operator (Alarm Notification via e-mail) ..........................................................................311
Add more equipment at the same time to the remote equipment list .............................................390
Add the protection to a Path ....................................................................................................457
Add/modify/delete the informative notes of a NE symbol .............................................................150
Add/remove a prefix to the logical address of an equipment .........................................................232
Alarms relevant to PM for a specific equipment, verify/modify the activation thresholds ...................174
Align the symbols ...................................................................................................................153
Assign the parameters to monitor to an equipment (create a measure) (NE Monitoring) ...................320
Associate/remove the background to a container ........................................................................131
NMS5LX 6.4.8 - MN.00272.E - 001 509

B
Backup the alarm history .........................................................................................................416
C
Capture the RMON statistics of an Ethernet port in a specific instant ..............................................339
Change the name of the Path (Path Browser) .............................................................................458
Check the database information necessary to the RAN .................................................................154
Close the LX Map Manager window ...........................................................................................139
Close the open map and opening another one ............................................................................137
Compare the objects of a map/container with the objects of a different map/container ....................135
Compare the objects, previously saved to file, with the objects of a map/container .........................136
Connect one or more equipment ....................................................................................... 238, 246
Connect the equipment of one or more containers ......................................................................246
Copy the alarms list into a text editor (Old Alarm History) ............................................................279
Copy the alarms list to a text editor (Network Alarm History) .......................................................265
Copy the objects of a map/container to a different map/container .................................................132
Copy the objects, previously saved to file, into a map/container ...................................................134
Create a Command Log ...........................................................................................................290
Create a filter relevant to the type of alarms whose detection must be notified to the operator via
e-mail (Alarm Notification via e-mail) ........................................................................................313
Create a NE Log .....................................................................................................................286
Create a new map ..................................................................................................................371
Create an object ..................................................................................................................... 36
Create Container objects .........................................................................................................141
Create Container, NE, Link and Label objects described in a file ....................................................144
Create Generic Symbols (graphic symbols) ................................................................................143
Create Label objects (wordings) ...............................................................................................144
Create Link objects (connection) ..............................................................................................143
Create manually the object of an equipment present in the Auto Discovery table ............................335
Create more Command Logs at the same time ...........................................................................291
Create more NE Logs at the same time .....................................................................................286
Create Network Element object ................................................................................................142
Create Ring objects ................................................................................................................425
Create virtual Network Element object ......................................................................................142
Create VLAN Map objects ........................................................................................................470
D
Deactivate a measure (NE Monitoring) ......................................................................................321
Deactivate an Ethernet port from the count of the history of the RMON statistics ............................344
Deactivate an Ethernet port from the count of the RMON statistics ................................................339
Deactivate at the same time one or more PM measures for one or more equipment of the same type 171
Deactivate the management of a Path .......................................................................................457
Deactivate the NE Wake Up modality ........................................................................................332
Deactivate the Network Scan modality ......................................................................................331
Deactivate the periodic saving of the data to file (HW Inventory) ..................................................218
Default Gateway (NE)
Delete ..............................................................................................................................213
Display .................................................................................................................... 202, 211
Set, modify ......................................................................................................................213
Delete a Command Log ...........................................................................................................292
Delete a file (NE Monitoring) ....................................................................................................324
Delete a LCT user ...................................................................................................................384
Delete a map .........................................................................................................................138
Delete a measure (NE Monitoring) ............................................................................................321
Delete a NE Log .....................................................................................................................287
NMS5LX 6.4.8 - MN.00272.E - 001 510

Delete a NMS5UX user ............................................................................................................372
Delete a Ring object from the map ...........................................................................................426
Delete a station from the remote equipment list .........................................................................389
Delete a VLAN Map object from the map ....................................................................................471
Delete all the Command Logs of an equipment ...........................................................................292
Delete all the NE Logs of an equipment .....................................................................................287
Delete an equipment from the remote equipment list ..................................................................392
Delete an object ...................................................................................................................... 36
Delete an object from the map .................................................................................................145
Delete an operator (Alarm Notification via e-mail) .......................................................................313
Delete and rewrite the equipment table .....................................................................................232
Delete one or more equipment from the Auto Discovery table ......................................................334
Delete one or more equipment from the list (FAMxc-Scheduled Sw Dwl Status) ..............................412
Delete one or more equipment from the list (Scheduled Sw Dwl Status) ........................................402
Delete one or more Paths ........................................................................................................456
Delete the alarms (Event Statistics) ..........................................................................................300
Delete the alarms (Network Alarm History) ................................................................................265
Delete the alarms (RM-Network Alarm History) ..........................................................................430
Delete the alarms (VM-Network Alarm History) ..........................................................................475
Delete the alarms stored in the controller of an equipment ...........................................................288
Delete the backup files of the alarm history ...............................................................................418
Delete the backup files of the PM measures ...............................................................................421
Delete the file where a previously saved specific setting of filters is contained (RM-Network Alarm
Summary) .............................................................................................................................447
Delete the list of operations stored in the controller of an equipment .............................................292
Delete the operation (Transaction Log) ......................................................................................305
Delete the protection of a Path .................................................................................................456
Delete the software present in the memory bench in standby of an equipment ...............................408
Disable an alarm relevant to a counter (RMON statistics) .............................................................346
Disconnect one or more equipment ................................................................................... 238, 248
Disconnect the equipment of one or more containers ..................................................................248
Display the acknowledge information of an alarm (Network Alarm History) .....................................266
Display the acknowledge information of an alarm (Old Alarm History) ...........................................282
Display the acknowledge information of an alarm (RM-Network Alarm History) ...............................434
Display the acknowledge information of an alarm (RM-Network Current Alarm) ..............................441
Display the acknowledge information of an alarm (VM-Network Alarm History) ...............................479
Display the acknowledge information of an alarm (VM-Network Current Alarm) ..............................485
Display the active alarms in the equipment implementing a Path ..................................................458
Display the alarm history of the equipment present in the map .....................................................262
Display the alarm history of the equipment present in the Rings managed by the supervision system 428
Display the alarm history of the equipment present in the VLAN Map managed by the supervision
system .................................................................................................................................473
Display the alarm history present in the Old History table ............................................................277
Display the alarm history relevant to the equipment implementing a Path ......................................458
Display the alarm history relevant to the equipment implementing the Path (Path Browser) .............458
Display the alarms active in the equipment implementing a Path (Path Browser) .............................458
Display the alarms active in the equipment of the map ................................................................271
Display the alarms active in the equipment present in the Rings managed by the supervision system 436
Display the alarms active in the equipment present in the VLAN Maps managed by the supervision
system .................................................................................................................................481
Display the alarms stored in the alarm history ............................................................................296
Display the alarms stored in the alarm history (RM-Network Alarm Summary) ................................447
Display the backup files of the equipment present in the open map ...............................................219
Display the characteristics of a measure (NE Monitoring) .............................................................321
Display the characteristics of the user who opened the map .........................................................374
Display the content of a Command Log .....................................................................................291
Display the content of a file of SNMP commands .........................................................................317
NMS5LX 6.4.8 - MN.00272.E - 001 511

Display the content of a NE Log ................................................................................................287
Display the detail of the codewords relevant to its own supervisory system ....................................496
Display the equipment with different Logical Address and Station Id ..............................................207
Display the files of scheduled SNMP commands ..........................................................................318
Display the hardware of the equipment present in the open map ..................................................215
Display the history of the RMON statistics of an Ethernet port .......................................................341
Display the LCT users list of an equipment .................................................................................382
Display the legend of the colours which the objects present in the LX Map Manager window can
assume .................................................................................................................................497
Display the list of all the operators enabled to the reception of the alarm notification via e-mail ........310
Display the list of the active NMS5LX applications .......................................................................379
Display the list of the Command Log of an equipment .................................................................289
Display the list of the equipment ..............................................................................................227
Display the list of the equipment detected by Auto Discovery (Auto Discovery table) .......................332
Display the list of the equipment managed by the Proxy Agent .....................................................241
Display the list of the equipment present in the Rings of the current map ......................................466
Display the list of the equipment present in the VLAN Maps of the current map ...............................491
Display the list of the equipment scheduled for the software updating ...........................................400
Display the list of the FAMxc scheduled for the software updating .................................................411
Display the list of the measures (NE Monitoring) .........................................................................319
Display the list of the NE Log of an equipment ............................................................................285
Display the list of the NMS5UX users present in all the existing maps ............................................370
Display the list of the NMS5UX users who have a map open .........................................................376
Display the list of the operations executed by the NMS5UX users ..................................................303
Display the list of the Path present in the Rings of the current map ...............................................453
Display the list of the Rings managed by the NMS5LX .................................................................451
Display the list of the users (LCT and NMS5UX) connected to an equipment ...................................385
Display the list of the VLAN Maps managed by the NMS5LX ..........................................................489
Display the remote equipment list of an equipment .....................................................................387
Display the results of a measure (NE Monitoring) ........................................................................322
Display the results of a measure stored into a file (NE Monitoring) ................................................323
Display the software version of a FAMxc equipment ....................................................................413
Display the software version of an equipment ............................................................................406
Display the statistics of the alarms subdivided by alarm ..............................................................300
Display the statistics of the alarms subdivided by equipment ........................................................299
Display the statistics of the alarms subdivided by time interval .....................................................298
Display the summary of the alarm history subdivided for the severity relevant to the equipment
present in the map .................................................................................................................293
Display the summary of the alarm history subdivided for the severity relevant to the equipment
present in the Rings ................................................................................................................443
Display/hide the Map area ................................................................................................. 33, 157
Display/hide the platform status bar ................................................................................... 46, 158
Display/modify the configuration of a Path .................................................................................460
Display/modify the configuration of a Path protected ...................................................................462
Display/modify/save the information relevant to a Path ...............................................................458
E
Enable and define the criteria for the activation/deactivation of an alarm relevant to a counter
(RMON statistics) ...................................................................................................................345
Enable/disable the alarms and to send of the traps and/or to modify the local severity of the alarms
of an equipment .....................................................................................................................368
Execute series of SNMP commands stored on file ........................................................................316
Execute the Line Test for one or more equipment .......................................................................244
Execute the Line Test for the equipment of one or more containers ...............................................244
Execute the Ping of an equipment ..................................................................................... 206, 251
Execute the software reset of an equipment ...............................................................................259
NMS5LX 6.4.8 - MN.00272.E - 001 512

F
Filter the alarms (Event Statistics) ............................................................................................301
Filter the alarms list (Alarm Summary) ......................................................................................295
Filter the alarms list (Equipment Severity Code) .........................................................................369
Filter the alarms list (Network Alarm History) .............................................................................267
Filter the alarms list (Network Current Alarms) ...........................................................................274
Filter the alarms list (Old Alarm History) ....................................................................................279
Filter the alarms list (RM-Network Alarm History) .......................................................................432
Filter the alarms list (RM-Network Alarm Summary) ....................................................................444
Filter the alarms list (RM-Network Current Alarm) .......................................................................439
Filter the alarms list (VM-Network Alarm History) .......................................................................477
Filter the alarms list (VM-Network Current Alarm) .......................................................................484
Filter the equipment list (RM-Equipment Browser) ......................................................................467
Filter the equipment list (VM-Equipment Browser) ......................................................................492
Filter the list of operation (Transaction Log) ...............................................................................305
Filter the list of the VLAN Map ..................................................................................................490
Filter the NMS5LX applications list (NMS5LX Logged Users) ..........................................................381
Filter the NMS5UX users list (NMS5LX Logged Users) ..................................................................378
Filter/order the list of the equipment/units (Equipment Port Configuration) ....................................207
Filter/order the list of the equipment/units (Software Inventory) ..................................................182
Filter/sort the list of equipment (Equipment List Locate) ..............................................................230
Filter/sort the list of the Path ...................................................................................................464
Filter/sort the list of the scheduled equipment (Scheduled Sw Dwl Status) .....................................404
Force the closure of an NMS5LX application ...............................................................................380
Force the disconnection (logout) of a LCT user ...........................................................................386
Force the disconnection (logout) of a NMS5UX user .....................................................................378
Force the software disconnection of one or more equipment .........................................................250
H
Highlight in the map the symbol of an equipment (Network Alarm History) ....................................268
Highlight in the map the symbol of an equipment (Network Current Alarms) ..................................275
Highlight in the map the symbol of an equipment (Old Alarm History) ...........................................281
L
Lock/unlock a backup file ........................................................................................................222
M
Management LAN port
enable/disable ..................................................................................................................205
Mark the alarms (Network Alarm History) ..................................................................................265
Mark the alarms (Network Current Alarms) ................................................................................273
Mark the alarms (RM-Network Alarm History) .............................................................................431
Mark the alarms (RM-Network Current Alarm) ............................................................................438
Mark the alarms (VM-Network Alarm History) .............................................................................476
Mark the alarms (VM-Network Current Alarm) ............................................................................483
Modality of recording of the alarms ...........................................................................................270
Modality of recording of the alarms (RM-Alarm History window) ....................................................435
Modality of recording of the alarms (VM-Alarm History window) ....................................................480
Modality of the updating of data (RM-Alarm History window) ........................................................435
Modality of the updating of data (RM-Current Alarms window) ......................................................442
Modality of the updating of data (VM-Alarm History window) ........................................................479
Modality of the updating of data (VM-Current Alarms window) ......................................................486
Modify an object ..................................................................................................................... 36
Modify the characteristics of an equipment of the remote equipment list ........................................391
NMS5LX 6.4.8 - MN.00272.E - 001 513

Modify the characteristics of the LCT users .................................................................................384
Modify the characteristics of the NMS5UX users ..........................................................................372
Modify the characteristics of the operators (Alarm Notification via e-mail) ......................................312
Modify the J2 Path Trace parameters (Path Browser) ...................................................................461
Modify the Logical Address of an equipment to its Station Id or vice versa ......................................207
Modify the management of the preferential Path (Path Browser) ...................................................463
Modify the management of the switching between the Path A and Path B .......................................463
Modify the password associated to one’s NMS5UX user ................................................................375
Modify the Signal Label parameters (Path Browser) .....................................................................461
Modify the size of the symbols .................................................................................................130
Modify the title of the RM - Alarm Summary window (RM-Network Alarm Summary) .......................447
Move an equipment within the remote equipment list ..................................................................392
Move an object ....................................................................................................................... 36
N
Network severity of the alarms relevant to a specific equipment type
Modify .............................................................................................................................366
Verify ..............................................................................................................................365
O
OAM
OAM-FM Domain (define) ...................................................................................................186
OAM-FM Domain (remove) .................................................................................................187
OAM-FM Domain (verify the characteristics) ..........................................................................184
Open a Telnet session towards equipment .................................................................................207
Open the equipment window ............................................................................................ 180, 231
Open the file, where a previously saved specific setting of filters is contained (RM-Network Alarm
Summary) .............................................................................................................................446
Open the Ring Manager window ...............................................................................................452
Open the VLAN Manager Map window ........................................................................................490
P
PPP communication ports (NE)
Display .................................................................................................................... 202, 209
Print the list of programs (NMS5LX Software module) .................................................................499
R
Realign the alarm table of Ring Manager to that of NMS5LX (RM-Network Alarm History) .................431
Realign the alarm table of Ring Manager to that of NMS5LX (RM-Network Current Alarm) ................438
Realign the alarm table of VLAN Manager to that of NMS5LX (VM-Network Alarm History) ................476
Realign the alarm table of VLAN Manager to that of NMS5LX (VM-Network Current Alarm) ...............483
Re-align the alarms of one or more equipment ................................................................... 239, 252
Re-align the alarms of the equipment of one or more containers ...................................................252
Re-execute the software update (Scheduled Sw Dwl Status) ........................................................403
Rename a station of the remote equipment list ...........................................................................389
Request Read-Write access to a map ......................................................................................... 44
Require the closure of an NMS5LX application ............................................................................380
Require the disconnection (logout) of a NMS5UX user .................................................................377
Require the updating of the data to the controller of an equipment ...............................................182
Reset the indication of status change (Alarm Summary) ..............................................................297
Reset the indication of status change (RM-Network Alarm Summary) ............................................447
Restore from file the remote equipment list ...............................................................................393
Restore the alarm history from disk ..........................................................................................417
Restore the alarm history from tape ..........................................................................................417
Restore the database ..............................................................................................................423
NMS5LX 6.4.8 - MN.00272.E - 001 514

Restore the PM measures from disk ..........................................................................................420
Restore the PM measures from tape ..........................................................................................420
Retrieve a given Auto Discovery configuration from file ...............................................................332
Routing Table (NE)
Add an element .................................................................................................................212
Delete an element .............................................................................................................213
Display .................................................................................................................... 202, 211
S
Save a given Auto Discovery configuration to file ........................................................................332
Save on file the characteristics of the Path (Path Browser) ...........................................................458
Save periodically the data to file (HW Inventory) ........................................................................218
Save the alarms list (RM-Network Alarm History) ........................................................................430
Save the alarms list (RM-Network Current Alarm) .......................................................................437
Save the alarms list (VM-Network Alarm History) ........................................................................475
Save the alarms list (VM-Network Current Alarm) .......................................................................482
Save the data to file (HW Inventory) .........................................................................................217
Save the database (backup) ....................................................................................................422
Save the equipment configuration to a file (configuration backup) .................................................222
Save the history of the RMON statistics of an Ethernet port ..........................................................345
Save the list of the Path ..........................................................................................................455
Save the list of the scheduled equipment (Scheduled Sw Dwl Status) ............................................402
Save the objects of a map/container to a file .............................................................................134
Save the PM measures (backup) ..............................................................................................419
Save the results of a measure (NE Monitoring) ...........................................................................322
Save the results of a measure stored into a file (NE Monitoring) ...................................................323
Save the RMON statistics of an Ethernet port captured in a specific instant to file ............................340
Save the set filters to a file (RM-Network Alarm Summary) ..........................................................446
Save to a file the remote equipment list ....................................................................................393
Save/print the alarms list (Network Alarm History) .....................................................................264
Save/print the alarms list (Network Current Alarms) ...................................................................273
Save/print the alarms list (Old Alarm History) ............................................................................279
Save/print the list of equipment (Equipment List Locate) .............................................................229
Save/print the list of operations (Transaction Log) ......................................................................304
Save/print the list of the equipment/units (Software Inventory) ....................................................180
Search a symbol in the map ....................................................................................................152
Search an equipment in the Auto Discovery table .......................................................................334
Search and highlight a Path in the Ring Manager window in which it is contained ............................464
Search and highlight in the map the symbol of a Ring .................................................................452
Search and highlight in the map the symbol of a VLAN Map .........................................................490
Search and highlight the equipment symbol in the relevant Ring Manager window ..........................468
Search and highlight the equipment symbol in the relevant VLAN Manager Map window ...................493
Send a message to one or all the NMS5UX users ........................................................................378
Set the automatic updating of the data (Alarm Summary) ...........................................................297
Set the execution parameters and activate the NE Wake Up modality ............................................331
Set the execution parameters and activate the Network Scan modality ..........................................329
Set the size of the containers windows ......................................................................................155
Show/hide the names of the Link objects ...................................................................................159
Sort the alarms list (Network Alarm History) ..............................................................................269
Sort the alarms list (Old Alarm History) .....................................................................................282
Sort the alarms list (RM-Network Alarm History) .........................................................................434
Sort the alarms list (RM-Network Current Alarm) ........................................................................440
Sort the alarms list (VM-Network Alarm History) .........................................................................478
Sort the alarms list (VM-Network Current Alarm) ........................................................................485
Start the Command Executor application ...................................................................................240
Stop the updating of the software (Scheduled Sw Dwl Status) ......................................................402
NMS5LX 6.4.8 - MN.00272.E - 001 515

Switch the memory bench (Scheduled Sw Dwl Status) ................................................................403
Switch the names of the Paths associated in a protection .............................................................457
Switch the operation of the memory benches and to restart a FAMxc .............................................414
Switch the operation of the memory benches of an equipment controller ............................... 181, 408
T
Transfer the configuration of an equipment (virtual or real) to one or more real equipment ..............256
Transfer the configuration of an equipment (virtual or real) to one or more virtual equipment ..........258
Transfer the configuration of an equipment to another equipment of the same type ........................240
Transfer the configuration present into a backup file to an equipment (configuration restore) ...........222
Transfer to the PMP the default table of the alarms .....................................................................260
U
Update the equipment software .......................................................................... 181, 234, 396, 407
Update the equipment software (FAMxc) ........................................................................... 235, 409
Update the LX Map Manager window .........................................................................................129
Update the results of the PM measures of an equipment ..............................................................162
Update the WEB LCT application ...............................................................................................398
V
Verify in which map the symbol of an equipment is present ..........................................................231
Verify the alarms characteristics (status, sending status of the trap, local severity) of an equipment .367
Verify the characteristics and the functional status of an equipment ..............................................176
Verify the configuration/functional status of an equipment ............................................ 181, 269, 276
Verify the configuration/operating status of an equipment ...........................................................231
Verify the enabling and the criteria for the activation/deactivation of alarms relevant to a counter
(RMON statistics) ...................................................................................................................345
Verify the graphic parameters assigned by the system to the symbol ............................................151
Verify the information (marking status of the alarms, of the signalling of LCT presence, Incorrect
Upload and the notes) of a symbol ...........................................................................................149
Verify the LCT/NMS5UX users connected to an equipment ...........................................................237
Verify the list of the programs that constitute the NMS5LX software package ..................................498
Verify the marking status of the alarms, of the signalling of LCT presence and Incorrect Upload of an
equipment .............................................................................................................................231
Verify the operating status of the PM measure points of one or more NEs of the same type ..............169
Verify the reach ability of the equipment (Line Test) ...................................................................237
Verify the results of the PM measures of an equipment ................................................................232
Verify the results of the PM measures of an equipment, subdivided in daily records (24 hours) and,
for each record, verifying the values of the control parameters .....................................................163
Verify the results of the PM measures of an equipment, subdivided in daily records (24 hours)
present in the Old Performance Monitoring table .........................................................................167
Verify the results of the PM measures of an equipment, subdivided in primary records (15 minutes)
and, for each record, verifying the values of the control parameters ..............................................166
Verify the results of the PM measures of an equipment, subdivided in primary records (15 minutes)
present in the Old Performance Monitoring table .........................................................................168
Verify the settings of the communication ports of the equipment present into the open map .............200
Verify the software version of the equipment present into the open map ........................................178
Verify the statistics of an Ethernet port of an equipment (RMON statistics) .....................................336
Verify the status and the configuration of Auto Discovery (Network Scan and/or NE Wake Up
modality) ..............................................................................................................................327
Verify the time interval between two different alarms (Network Alarm History) ...............................269
Verify the time interval between two different alarms (Network Current Alarms) .............................275
Verify the time interval between two different alarms (Old Alarm History) ......................................281
Verify the units list (where a controller or a FPGA is present) of the equipment present into the open
map .....................................................................................................................................180
Verify/modify the LCT users list of an equipment ........................................................................237
NMS5LX 6.4.8 - MN.00272.E - 001 516

Verify/modify the parameters of a Container object ....................................................................146
Verify/modify the parameters of a Generic Symbol object ............................................................147
Verify/modify the parameters of a Label object ...........................................................................148
Verify/modify the parameters of a Link object ............................................................................147
Verify/modify the parameters of a Network Element object ..........................................................146
Verify/modify the parameters of a Ring object ............................................................................427
Verify/modify the parameters of a VLAN Map object ....................................................................472
Verify/modify the Proxy configuration parameters of an equipment ...............................................242
Verify/modify the status/severity of the alarms and the status of the trap sending of an equipment ..236
X
XML
Convert a XML file into a HTML file .......................................................................................357
Create a cronjob ...............................................................................................................355
Delete one or more cronjob ................................................................................................355
Delete one or more XML, Log or HTML files ...........................................................................360
Display the active cronjobs .................................................................................................354
Display the content of a XML, Log or HTML file ......................................................................358
Display the list of HTML files obtained from the conversion of XML files .....................................357
Display the list of the Log files relevant to the creation of XML files ..........................................357
Display the list of the XML files present in a given directory .....................................................356
Save the complete equipment configuration into a file ............................................................352
To send email with one or more XML, Log or HTML files in attachment ......................................360
NMS5LX 6.4.8 - MN.00272.E - 001 517

ASSISTANCE SERVICE
For more information, refer to the section relevant to the technical support on the Internet site of the com-
pany manufacturing the product.
NMS5LX 6.4.8 - MN.00272.E - 001 518

Manual de Usuario Nms5lx

Uploaded by

Document Information

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Manual de Usuario Nms5lx

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

NMS5LX

NMS5LX SYSTEM .................................................................................................................... 17

LX MAP MANAGER WINDOW .................................................................................................. 27

NMS5LX 6.4.8 - MN.00272.E - 001 1

ALPLUS NODAL WINDOW....................................................................................................... 48

ALCPLUS2 NODAL WINDOW................................................................................................... 49

RING MANAGER WINDOW...................................................................................................... 50

VLAN MANAGER MAP WINDOW.............................................................................................. 51

ACCESS TO THE MAP (READ-WRITE/READ ONLY) .................................................................. 63

START-UP/CLOSING OF NMS5LX GRAPHICAL INTERFACE (LOGIN/LOGOUT)......................... 71

NMS5LX 6.4.8 - MN.00272.E - 001 2

EQUIPMENT CONNECTION ................................................................................................... 101

ALARM MANAGEMENT .......................................................................................................... 110

NMS5LX 6.4.8 - MN.00272.E - 001 3

PERFORMANCE MONITORING MANAGEMENT ....................................................................... 122

MENU AND COMMANDS 127

MAP ..................................................................................................................................... 128

EDIT .................................................................................................................................... 140

NMS5LX 6.4.8 - MN.00272.E - 001 4

VIEW ................................................................................................................................... 156

CONFIGURATION ................................................................................................................. 174

NMS5LX 6.4.8 - MN.00272.E - 001 5

NMS5LX 6.4.8 - MN.00272.E - 001 6

LOCATE ................................................................................................................................ 224

NMS5LX 6.4.8 - MN.00272.E - 001 7

FAULT .................................................................................................................................. 260

NMS5LX 6.4.8 - MN.00272.E - 001 8

NMS5LX 6.4.8 - MN.00272.E - 001 9

NMS5LX 6.4.8 - MN.00272.E - 001 10

NMS5LX 6.4.8 - MN.00272.E - 001 11

MISC .................................................................................................................................... 414

RING MANAGER ................................................................................................................... 423

NMS5LX 6.4.8 - MN.00272.E - 001 12

NMS5LX 6.4.8 - MN.00272.E - 001 13

VLAN MANAGER ................................................................................................................... 467

NMS5LX 6.4.8 - MN.00272.E - 001 14

MENUS AND COMMANDS ...................................................................................................... 501

OPERATIONS INDEX ............................................................................................................ 507

ASSISTANCE SERVICE.......................................................................................................... 516

NMS5LX 6.4.8 - MN.00272.E - 001 15

NMS5LX 6.4.8 - MN.00272.E - 001 17

• Graphic or table representation of the network.

• Management of the virtual equipment.

NMS5LX 6.4.8 - MN.00272.E - 001 18

The NMS5LX supervision system is a modular system.

NMS5LX 6.4.8 - MN.00272.E - 001 19

For the description and use of the additional application:

NMS5LX 6.4.8 - MN.00272.E - 001 20

NMS5LX 6.4.8 - MN.00272.E - 001 21

• ALS series radio with ALS IDU (ALS)

• PMP system - Point to MultiPoint

NMS5LX 6.4.8 - MN.00272.E - 001 22

NMS5LX 6.4.8 - MN.00272.E - 001 23

NMS5LX 6.4.8 - MN.00272.E - 001 24

NMS5LX 6.4.8 - MN.00272.E - 001 25

NMS5LX 6.4.8 - MN.00272.E - 001 26

Fig.1 LX Map Manager window

MENU bar TITLE bar TOOL bar

NMS5LX 6.4.8 - MN.00272.E - 001 27

NMS5LX 6.4.8 - MN.00272.E - 001 28

NMS5LX 6.4.8 - MN.00272.E - 001 29

Tab.1 shows the description of the push-buttons.

Tab.1 Push-buttons (LX Map Manager window)

Buttons Description Equivalent command